Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

It was a gloomy afternoon in the Land of Fire. The world was at war, the Third Shinobi World War. In a war room in the Hokage Mansion of Konohagakure no Sato, the Village Hidden in the Leaves, one of the five most powerful shinobi warriors on the planet at the time was conversing with his advisors. This shinobi was the Sandaime Hokage, the Third Fire Shadow of the Leaf Village, a man named Sarutobi Hiruzen.

Looking at him, one could question how this man could be called such a title as a God of Shinobi. Short enough to be a housewife, and a wiry, almost spindly frame for a man of middle age. His head was clad in a stripped down kabuto helmet with a forehead protector with the Leaf’s symbol proudly displayed, held together by two death traps of long straps. Across his chest he wore a standard Konoha green flak jacket, with two older pauldrons of the First Shinobi World War affixed to the shoulders. Covering his black pants and mesh covered legs was a long fur and leather kama, split in the middle to provide better movement, yet keep the shrapnel protection of the piece. He stood as a man of contrasts, yet undeniably a leader of a shinobi village.

Hiruzen sighed as he looked over the map on the table in the war room, examining the fronts that the Land of Fire’s shinobi were fighting on. Borders across the two great blocs were a chaotic mess of skirmishes with both the smaller and greater nations. The great Lands of Fire and Wind, as well as the Land of Whirlpools, in defiance of the brief peace after the Second Shinobi World War, struck out to avenge the horrors of the previous conflict caused chiefly by the Hidden Stone. Though initially caught off guard, the Lands of Earth, Lightning, and Water put up stiff knots of resistance, forcing this early stage of the war into a bloody stalemate. No side had the upper hand to press on and take a village out of the fight. Desperation on both sides began to mount, and something had to be done to break this deadlock, and fast.

“Hiruzen…” A voice familiar to the Sandaime Hokage called his name from his left.

“Yes, Danzō. Come out from those damn shadows and speak.” Hiruzen sternly answered.

It was then that Hiruzen’s rival and old friend, Shimura Danzō, stepped out from the shadows. With an x cross scarred jaw, and a fairly handsome face, his head was crowned with a mane of dull black spiky hair. Despite towering over him and in similar garb to Hiruzen, his posture was submissive to the great leader, both out of respect, but also from kinship.

“We must do something soon, old friend. We are in the beginning of the second year of this war. We must break the back of the enemy alliance before they do something reckless and desperate.” Danzō advised his rival and friend.

“You seem to misunderstand what I am trying to do, Danzō. That is exactly what I want them to do.” Hiruzen dryly answered, looking over the most recent map.

The middle aged Shimura clan member raised an eyebrow in interest, a sign for his leader to explain.

“With the probing attacks we have done in the center lines, we are making it look like we might try a concentrated offensive there. This would get their political leadership panicking, wanting them to do something to prevent that. Once they perform that maneuver, we move our massed tactical group in the western reaches and smash it like a hammer. At which point, we then give the signal to both Wind and Whirlpool to begin offensives on their fronts.” Hiruzen explained, pointing to the map as he went.

Danzō’s one visible eye widened at that before he smirked. “A risky move, Hiruzen. One that could work in our favor, but only if we choose our actions carefully.” The Darkness of the Shinobi chuckled, praising his rival and friend on his strategy.

“It’s too risky, if you ask me.” A female voice replied.

Hiruzen and Danzō looked to the source of the voice as out and forward stepped a middle aged, but still quite beautiful kunoichi with dark eyes. Her dark hair was pulled back in a twin bun by a traditional hair pin with two pearls dangling off the side. She wore a similar garb to Hiruzen, though hers sported fishnet tights with a skirt over it and a pouch strapped to her back with bandages.

“Koharu, you’re going to have to give more of an explanation than that to get me to stop a strategy already in motion. And a damn good one.” Hiruzen answered simply.

Utatane Koharu sighed and began to explain her stance on the strategy. “Say they do take this bait and panic into a foolhardy assault. What if it happens too far from the force to respond in time? The front line covers the entirety of the region. No shinobi force, no matter how fast, could respond to an attack on the flanks even if they were perfectly in the middle. And we have zero idea or intel of where their proposed attack could come from.” The middle aged kunoichi advisor explained.

“Koharu is right, Hiruzen. This strategy carries too much risk. We need a new plan.” A third male voice said, siding with his female colleague.

As the other three looked in the direction of the voice, a middle aged man in glasses with a strong jaw-line structure came into view. He had on a garb similar to the other three, though he had a poncho-like top over his for a bit more of a personalized look to it.

“You too, Homura?” Hiruzen asked.

“It’s nothing personal, Hiruzen. I just don’t see the point in committing ourselves to such a risky strategy. We need to come up with a new plan.” Mitokado Homura replied.

“And what is this new plan you wish to suggest? I am all ears.” Hiruzen answered.

Unfortunately, neither Koharu nor Homura had an alternative strategy in mind. They racked their brains, trying to come up with a better plan, but nothing popped into their heads. They were both drawing a blank.

Seeing the lack of response from his former teammates, Hiruzen saw that he had made his point. “Wars are not won by inaction. Wars are won by attempting, and if fate allows, by succeeding. Even if the attempts are failures, they create initiative. Drive. A sense of motion and momentum that can break through the enemy like a river through a dam. Everything in war risks lives and damage, but if we were afraid of these things, then we would not have fought the first two. And I will not allow the Stone to get away with their crimes. They will face the flaming sword of justice! And those monsters will hang in their streets for everyone to see!”

Danzō had a smirk on his face at the Hokage’s words. “Well said, Hiruzen. The Stone’s actions from the last war cannot go unpunished.” He replied, reassuring his old rival that he was doing the right thing.

“Now keep up those probing attacks on Stone’s border. We need to have them try something soon.” Hiruzen ordered.

It was at that moment that a messenger shinobi barged into the war room, almost breaking down the door. “HOKAGE-SAMA!” The messenger called out frantically, catching the attention of everyone in the room.

The four older shinobi took in the sight of the messenger. Dressed in a traditional shinobi garb of Uzushiogakure no Sato, the Village Hidden by Whirling Tides, with the Uzumaki clan’s symbol on his back, the young man was huffing and puffing like a madman. He was clearly out of breath, having run full tilt all the way from the mainland as soon as he made landfall from the Land of Whirlpools.

“Calm down, soldier. Catch your breath and explain it properly.” Hiruzen said, putting his hands on his shoulders like a father getting through to his son.

Panting heavily, the shinobi from the Whirling Tides fought to get his message out as he tried to catch his breath. “Stone… Cloud… Mist… attacking my village…!” The young man panted out before collapsing to the floor.

Everyone looked at Hiruzen, and what they saw shocked them to their core. Even Danzō could not believe his eyes. There the Hokage stood looking where the shinobi’s eyes would be if he were still standing, staring off into the void. Cold sweat formed beads like bullets and ran down his face and neck like rivers.

His normally tanned face went pale as a sheet. Hands normally used to gripping a pen or a kunai were curled into shaking claws. Lips quivering in pure panic and fright. The three, even years later, would swear he aged ten years in moments. The only thing that could not only derail his plan, but destroy it utterly, had happened. And there was nothing he could do to stop it.

It was then that another messenger shinobi, this one from Konoha, stepped into the room and cleared his throat. “H-Hokage-sama… another messenger wishes to meet with you. This one says he is from a clan known as the… ‘Kamishini’, I believe he said…” The messenger nervously told his leader.

“Send them in.” Hiruzen said hastily, breathing heavily and trying his hardest to gain some level of composure.

The messenger in question bowed to his leader, then went out of the room. He came back with the other messenger in question before bowing and turning to leave. It was at that moment that the four older Konoha nin took in the sight of the messenger. Dressed in fairly simple shinobi garbs and armor clearly not belonging to any Hidden Village, he looked very nondescript. However, the four sensed something odd about him. Even those without chakra sensory abilities could feel his chakra, and it felt… strange. It felt dense, powerful, almost otherworldly. As though it could almost barely be called chakra.

The messenger knelt before the leader of the Hidden Leaf Village and his three advisors. “Hokage-sama, esteemed Konoha Council.” The messenger addressed them with respect.

“Speak your message quickly. There’s a war going on.” Danzō said with a scoff.

“Danzō.” Hiruzen said disapprovingly, forcing Danzō to bow his head in a visual apology.

“I will cut right to the point, then. The leaders of my clan have heard rumors about the possibility of the situation you find yourselves in. I was sent to offer my clan’s aid to your bloc of this conflict however we can. It appears that, unfortunately, our worst suspicions have come to pass and we should have acted more quickly.” The messenger somberly told the four council members.

“What aid can you provide? And how quickly?” Hiruzen asked, his mind running a mile a minute to both process this and how it could affect the current unfolding disaster.

“Including both sides of our clan, we can offer eight thousand shinobi. Each of them trained in our clan’s Hiden jutsu and secret arts. They are at the coast now, waiting for word to come back to head to the Land of Whirlpools and aid your allies.” The messenger explained.

“You cannot be seriously considering this hoax Hiruzen, surely?” Danzō said in both confusion and amazement.

Hiruzen stood there for what, to him, was forever, for others a few seconds. He had heard the legends, they all had. The tales of great ancient warriors of incredible power, using strange jutsu capable of slaying demons, yōkai, and even gods. It was a lot to trust in a legend to save their allies.

Yet he also was the one to get his allies into this situation. This force would be the only one able to get there in time and save the Uzumaki. No Konoha force could make it there in time in any kind of numbers to stop such a force. He already made a massive gamble, and now was time for another.

“Tell your master to send your clan at them like the hounds from hell, and make them pay for their choice. Do not wait for Konoha forces or any other allied shinobi. Stop the attack by any means necessary, and get the survivors deep into Land of Fire territory.” Hiruzen sternly, and decisively, ordered.

The messenger nodded and stood. “At once, Hokage-sama. After this is over, the head of my clan wishes to meet with you all and discuss something.”

“If you are able to save the Uzumaki clan from destruction, then I agree to it. Should you fail, you will not get that meeting.” Hiruzen clarified.

The messenger smiled at that. “We Kamishini refuse to fail. Should you want your allies saved, then we shall save as many of them as we possibly can.” He reassured the Hokage.

“Then also tell your leader that I thank them for saving them from my failure.” Hiruzen said solemnly.

The messenger bowed before leaving in a burst of speed. To the shock of the four shinobi present, they felt no burst of chakra that would indicate the use of the Body Flicker or any other kind of high speed movement technique. This man just moved that fast purely on his own physical power.

To Be Continued...

Chapter Text

Land of Whirlpools

The Land of Whirlpools, a fertile land of kind people, mysticism, and the fabled Uzumaki Clan. Stalwart and loyal allies to the Village Hidden in the Leaves, they have stood the test of time as a great wall against disorder. That wall, however, stood on the brink of collapse. While they had begun to work their economy for war, the triple coalition’s sudden attack caught them off guard. Now every single shinobi that could be mustered was sent to hold back the endless tide, and try, even if hopelessly, to save even some of the civilians.

Uzushiogakure no Sato, the Village Hidden by Whirling Tides, was a very advanced Hidden Village. The village itself was in the center of a valley with colossal mountains surrounding it. Towering skyscrapers and large stone pillars decorated with the Uzumaki clan’s spiral symbol dotted the land of the village. A concave bay surrounded the center of the village with a bridge connecting it to the rest of the city-like Hidden Village. However, currently, the entire village was surrounded by a massive barrier with a small entrance at the front as elemental attacks pelted the massive chakra construct.

Standing at the gates was an old man, easily older than the Sandaime Hokage, with standard Uzumaki features, though faded through many years and short, spiky hair. Despite this, he held himself with the energy of a man many times younger than his age. Through the din of battle, his mighty voice, the voice of a king of men, resounded and rapidly the Uzumaki responded to the threats.

“Keep those wards up as long as possible! Batten down the walls! Arm the traps! We have to hold out for as long as possible!” The old man roared, swatting away a jutsu with his bare arm.

“It’s no use, Oda-sama! We’re surrounded and outnumbered!” One of his younger subordinates called out, trying to put up a wall of rock via an Earth Release jutsu.

“You don’t think I know that!? We have to hold long enough for the civilians to escape, and make these bastards pay! Keep the reserves in the back till we see concentrated assaults! Pick any of them off you can before they reach the wards!!” Oda barked out more.

“Yes, Oda-sama!” Another redheaded subordinate called out, unleashing a Lightning Release jutsu to unleash a lightning blast into the overwhelming ranks of the enemy.

“Where are our lines the weakest right now!?” Oda roared.

“The southeastern-most part of the outer village, sir!” A faded haired, red headed Uzumaki around Oda’s physical age replied before unleashing a Fire Release jutsu down into the opposing army.

“You’re in charge of this sector. I’ve been spoiling for a fight for decades. Or death. Honestly, I can’t tell anymore.” Oda mused as he, in a sudden burst of speed, disappeared.

Nodding, the aged redhead turned to address the other troops. “Alright, maggots! You heard Oda-sama! Hop to it!” He barked, going through hand seals to unleash another Fire Release jutsu as the other Whirling Tides shinobi prepared to follow their commander’s orders.

Soon the old man arrived at the beleaguered sector, and it was worse than he thought. The wards were on the verge of being broken, many Uzumaki were killed or wounded, and the enemy was preparing for a mass surge. Oda reached the wall, and the shinobi were in awe that such a great member of their clan had arrived on their front.

“Looks like everything has gone completely tits up over here! Mist, Cloud or Stone?” Oda asked simply.

“Mist, Oda-sama! We’re being pelted by high pressure Water Release, wearing down the wards!” One of his subordinates replied.

“Alright, I’ll give you cover to extract the wounded and repair the wards. You’ll know the signal when you see it.” Oda answered with a smirk.

“Alone!? But that’s suicide!” A younger Uzumaki replied in concern.

“Oh it most certainly is. For them.” Oda answered, before effortlessly letting himself dive face first towards the ground.

Landing in proper superhero style, and likely slowly killing his knees later, Oda touched down with force that could best be described as like a meteor. The impact kicked up a cloud of dust, stopping the planned assault, and the shockwave sending the closest rank of enemy shinobi flying towards the nearby forest.

“What the fuck!? It’s Uzumaki Oda! Take him down!” The nearest Mist commander called out as the rank and file soldiers began firing off Water Release jutsu in an attempt to take the ancient Uzumaki down.

“Ninja Art: Still the Elements!” Oda yelled, as a bizarre field began to buzz around him, and he soon was effortlessly parrying the initial barrage of Water Release jutsu.

“What are you doing!? Hit him, hit him, hit him! Take him down!” The Mist commander barked out in frustration.

The nearby Mist shinobi all went through a series of hand seals for the same jutsu. “Water Release: Great Waterfall Jutsu!” They all called out as a series of massive swirling waterfalls came rushing out towards Oda, the barrage of A-Rank Water Release jutsu pouring down towards the aged Uzumaki.

“Thank you, my good sir, for being so accommodating!” Oda yelled at the commander as the jutsu bore down on him.

This confused the Mist ninja as the ancient redhead made his move. “Combination Ninjutsu: Way of the Edgeless Typhoon!”

Soon his hands in a karate chop pose crackled with vibrating Lightning Release chakra, taking the form of vague swords. Then with a sudden flurry of spins, and what only could be described by survivors as master chakra control, took control of the jutsu mid-flight. Then, swirling around and electrifying them as they passed his hands, he sent the now typhoon-like Water Release jutsu back at the Mist lines. The Mist shinobi screamed as the electrified tidal wave crashed down on them.

“UZUMAKIIIIII…!!!” The Mist commander roared out as he was electrocuted and swept away with the rest of his troops.

“Aw, and I was hoping they’d finally put me in the ground. They really don’t make shinobi like they used to.” Oda said with a sigh and a smirk, shaking his head.

The other Uzushio troops could only stare in shock at what their commander just did. Such fine chakra control and ingenuity seemed almost inhuman. However, soon the silence was overcome with a roar of approval from the Whirling Tides ninja.

“Don’t just stand there! Get the wards repaired and get the wounded back behind the lines!” Oda roared as a messenger ran up to him.

“YES, SIR!” All of the Uzushio shinobi present called out, standing at attention before scrambling to follow his orders.

The messenger soon arrived in front of him. “Oda-sama!” The messenger called out, saluting him.

“What do you have to report?” Oda asked, lighting a cigar with a whiff of Fire Release chakra.

“Half of the village has been evacuated and the shinobi guarding them are escorting them to the port as we speak!” The messenger replied to the aged commander.

“Alright, where’s the next trouble spot? Looks like they didn’t put much on this part.” Oda mused.

“The northwestern most part of the outer village, sir! That sector is about to be breached!” The messenger told him.

“Send some of the reserves in. They're trying to run us ragged. Where is the biggest concentration of troops?” Oda asked.

“The northernmost part of the village, at the main gate! The barrier is about to fall!” The soldier replied.

“Clever girls.” Oda said and disappeared again in a shocking burst of speed.

Meanwhile, at the northernmost part of the village, a group of Iwagakure shinobi were battering the barrier-covered gate with a barrage of Earth Release jutsu. The barrier was beginning to crack and break apart, not being able to hold out much longer. This brought a smirk to the faces of the generals of the coalition’s army as the barrier broke. Suddenly, a single figure appeared in front of the gate.

“Uzumaki Oda, the Grand Dragon of the Uzumaki Clan! Isn’t it time for your nap, old man? Here, let us put you down! FOR GOOD!” The Hidden Cloud general sneered.

“I do appreciate the concern over my desires, my good sir! However, I would like to place a complaint with the Raikage over the poor quality of your troops on this day! I recommend you give them more fiber rations!” Oda yelled back.

The Kumogakure general growled in rage as the Hidden Mist general glared at him. “You can’t win, old man! It’s ten thousand against one!” The Kiri general called out.

“Are you sure you counted right!? I’m pretty sure you’re three off!” Oda shot back.

With that, the Hidden Stone general lost his patience. “Put this old fool where he belongs! IN THE GROUND!” The Iwagakure general roared.

“Have you ever heard the tale of the divine dragon Zhurong the Wise!?” Oda asked.

“We don’t care about your old wives’ tales, you damn old fossil! JUST DIE ALREADY!” The Kumogakure general shouted in rage.

“You know, it's funny! Last time I used this technique was against Kumogakure shinobi! However, calling you shinobi in comparison to your ancestors is frankly insulting to them! Pretty sure you’ve lost a head of height since those days!” Oda shot back.

“KILL HIM!” The three generals roared in fury as the army of enemy shinobi began going through hand seals only to stop as something odd started happening to the aged Uzumaki.

The air began to warp and swirl around him from a sudden and massive spike in Fire Release chakra. Yet, as some of the ones closest to him sensed further, there was something off. Something far more potent, as if otherworldly, where it burned the air around him. Slowly from the base of his spine, the scaled beginnings of a great dragon tattoo glowed white hot. More and more rapidly it tipped in a fearsome mosaic of whites, oranges, ruby reds, and other fiery colors in a tattoo of a tusked dragon head over his face. His eyes turned most horribly into orbs of ruby red chakra and white hot flames.

“God Fire Release: Channel the Fire Dragon!!” Oda roared before his throat turned into the core of a volcano, and sent forth a torrent of unholy searing flame that bore straight through the core of the shinobi before him, leaving only ash and molten ground in its wake.

“It’s MASSIVE…! Water Release, to the front!” The Mist general called out in panic as a battalion of Mist ninja ran to the front.

“Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Jutsu!” They all called out as a mass of water dragons formed and combined, forming a massive water dragon that seemingly roared as it rushed at the wave of ruby red and white flames.

The two techniques collided in a massive, steaming explosion. Both sides refused to give an inch as the water dragon fought back against the mass of volcanic hot fire. However, its efforts seemed all for naught as the wave of otherworldly flames eventually overwhelmed the water dragon, reducing it to burning hot steam as the massed ranks felt the fury of the inferno unleashed upon them. The shinobi at the front screamed in terror before the fires washed over them, reducing them and many of those behind them to ash.

“I hate getting old! It’s not even half as big as what it used to be!” Oda panted.

“WHAT THE HELL KIND OF JUTSU WAS THAT!? FALL BACK!” The Mist general cried out in sheer terror.

“Belay that order! The old man can’t fire a jutsu like that again! Press the attack and bring him down!” The Cloud general called out in response.

“Aww! You really do care about me!” Oda yelled out between pants.

“FINISH HIM!” The Stone general called out now as the army of shinobi began to charge.

“Note to self. Don’t fuck enemy nations’ women to the point their grandchildren want eternal revenge.” Oda muttered as he got into a defensive stance, standing before the great gate as a symbol to all shinobi of the Uzumaki Clan. This day you hold the line, or die trying.

Unleashing a tide of Lightning, Water and Earth Releases like which the world had never seen, the initial carnage and devastation was the coming of the apocalypse. The battlements atop the walls were swept clean of shinobi helpless to stop it. The great gate burst off its hinges as easily as an overzealous swat team kicked down an unbolted door. Soon all that remained was the reserves that were held back, and the beleaguered survivors that somehow survived the wall assault. This, however, did not last.

Soon the areas behind the walls began to feel the bombardment, forcing the red headed shinobi back as the coalition forces followed behind the bombardment dangerously close. The lines quickly concave towards the central throughway of the village, boxing the clan forces in as the bombardment died down only due to the extreme expenditure of chakra. As the Uzumaki stood against their doom, only one part of the line stayed. Oda stood with a broken arm, blood gushing from great gashes, but standing firm like a great banner.

“WHY WON’T YOU JUST DIE ALREADY, YOU FEEBLE, OLD RELIC OF THE PAST!?” The Hidden Mist general roared out in fury.

“Boy, as a man who likely fucked your grandmother and great grandmother at the same time back in the day, I’ll tell you why! They simply don’t train you shinobi like they used to! Back when I was your age, I was being trained on the battlefields of the Warring Clans!” Oda yelled back defiantly.

“YOUR ERA IS LONG PAST! JUST GIVE UP AND DIE ALREADY, YOU OLD FART!” The Hidden Cloud general howled in rage.

“Tell you what! You put up a better showing than that fireworks display you put up, and I might consider your offer!” Oda yelled at the dark skinned general.

“FINISH THEM!” The Hidden Stone general shouted out, pointing for their troops to advance, spelling the Uzumaki’s doom.

However, before the enemy army’s advance could continue, a mysterious sound cut through the din of the battlefield and silenced all present. A mysterious noise that sounded out like the moan of a massive, ancient beast. A war horn, signifying the charge of a force from a bygone era. Turning to look in the direction of the horn’s sounds, what the two forces saw over the horizon confused.

Dark clouds and lightning swept across the sky, blocking out the sun. A vicious downpour of rain came down as hurricane winds whipped across the battlefield. It was as if the wrath of Susanoo himself had been unleashed upon the land. The march of sixteen thousand feet could be heard like a rumbling earthquake from across the battlefield. Soon, a great force of eight thousand shinobi, clad in clothes and armors of black, ruby red, golden yellow, and various other colors could be seen coming out over the horizon, a man at the front bearing an ancient banner with a clan emblem of a five pentagram star with the five elements’ kanji at each of the tips and the kanji for Void in the center.

Marching at the front of the small army stood a towering, red haired man. Standing at six and a half feet tall with a lithe, but powerful frame. A massive ruby red and golden yellow steel bō staff held in his hand. Tapping the bow staff against the ground, the leader signaled his troops. Stomping their feet and readying their weapons, the sounds of the army preparing to charge resounded over the storm like thunder. The leader stood out and turned to address his shinobi warriors.

“My brothers and sisters in arms! The gods’ horrible, terrible little children! The avatars of celestial heaven’s will! We stand now after too long divided, standing together as one! This day will stand to change not just history, but the fate of all of mankind! NO cost is too great! NO amount of our bodies and blood is too high of a butcher's bill! We are the true protectors of humanity! AND WE SHALL KNOW NO FEAR!!!” The leader roared like a rolling thunderhead.

The troop of shinobi warriors roared and howled their approval as they stomped their feet in approval. The thunderous roar drowned out the storm as the mysterious shinobi prepared to charge. Swords, kunai, Fūma Shuriken, and weapons of all kinds drawn, trailed on the enemy. A glint in their eyes that spelled the doom of their foes.

“Before us are not just a great player in events to come! Not just some of the greatest warriors of all shinobi kind! To many of us they are blood, no matter how distant, and kin with whom we have shared our sacred cups! They have fought like devils on this day! They have stood their ground and spilt their blood for those who cannot defend themselves! Against criminals who would sully this world with the most unholy act of vengeful, hateful genocide! This day, my kin, today they will receive a taste of that most vile medicine! Show them as much mercy as they wished to give upon the Uzumaki Clan!!” The man roared, as if proclaiming it to the heavens themselves, and sending cold shivers down the collective coalition's spines.

Another cacophonous roar was heard from the army of strange shinobi warriors. The clanging of armor and the stomping of feet grew louder. The ground seemed to shake even from this distance for the coalition, as if the very earth and heavens raged in agreement with these newcomers.

Putting a hand on the shoulder of the man next to him and handing him the great war horn, the red headed leader then roared, “Take this honor, my son! Claim your birthright, and send our clan to war!”

The young man smirked and nodded in response. “Gladly, father!” The young man then put his lips to the horn and blew it, the great war horn moaning and roaring like the wrath of an angry god that echoed across the field.

To Be Continued...

Chapter Text

Outwardly the shinobi of Mist, Cloud, and Stone braced and readied jutsus, but nothing could mentally brace them. Digging heels deep into the soft mist cloaked earth, the great senior warleader of these strange forces raised but a single hand. Then, like the flag on the start of a horse race, he lowered it, and his voice rang out like the start pistol.

“CHARGE!!!!” He roared, as if proclaiming the order to the heavens.

Muscles released the energy tightly coiled in them, and with the force of a raging storm the front ranks surged forward. With a roar that sounded through the battlefield like thunder, the strange shinobi surged forward in a charge. Blades and weapons of all kinds at the ready, more than willing to tear into the enemy’s forces. It was at this moment that the coalition of Cloud, Stone, and Mist collected themselves.

“Don’t just stand there, you maggots! Rain hell down on these bastards!” The Kumo general roared out.

The ranks of Cloud shinobi moved forward, going through hand seals for elemental Ninjutsu of some kind. However, before they could go through more than a few, some of the mysterious shinobi held their hands up to the sky as they charged. As they did, the heavens seemed to open up as the rain began to pour down especially hard on the Kumo ranks, the sound of ozone crackling was heard as the clouds lit up. As the coalition’s forces looked up in confusion, the mysterious ninja brought down their hands as a massive bolt of lightning screamed down from the sky like a bright, white hot demon out of hell, crashing down into the Cloud ranks of the coalition and breaking up their formations.

“What the hell!?” The Kumo general called out in disbelief over the screams of his subordinates and the roar of the storm, unable to believe that such an unnaturally powerful bolt of lightning would come down upon their forces at such a time.

More screams could be heard as the surrounding coalition forces were blown back by the thunderclap of another lightning bolt hitting the ground. As the coalition tried to rally, more of the mysterious shinobi made motions with their hands as water began gathering together from the rain. Soon, a tsunami wave of water swept across the landscape, crashing into the coalition and sweeping some of them away with the mysterious tide.

“What’s going on!? How are they doing this without hand seals!?” The Kiri general yelled in a panic.

As the veritable tidal wave subsided, the wind began to pick up. The wind whipped across the battlefield with the force of a hurricane as more members of the mysterious reinforcements backing up the Uzumaki spread their arms wide. They raised their arms, bending them at the elbows as they twisted their hands up into claw formations. Once they did this, the hurricane winds mysteriously shaped themselves into massive tornadoes, the great cyclones roaring across the coalition’s army and causing absolute bedlam for the combined force.

“What are they!? It’s as though the very spirits and forces of nature themselves serve their every whims!” The Iwa general screamed out in fear.

It was at this moment that the mysterious force of shinobi crashed into the coalition’s army like the very tidal wave they had summoned against them. Fists burning with great flames or crackling with powerful lightning punched forward, launching waves of super-heated death into the ranks of the coalition. The ground shook and cracked beneath their feet as great spires of rock shot out of the ground, impaling coalition shinobi away and launching them away. Great waves of water crashed down into the forces of Cloud, Stone, and Mist as bolts of lightning struck the ground and cyclones of wind swept across the battlefield.

The forces of the coalition were in a fearful disbelief at what was happening. They had no idea who or what these people were. No… not people. No humans could do something like this. These people were monsters, through and through.

“Hold the line! Keep them back!” The Stone General roared, relaying the orders to the troops.

“The flanks are failing! We don’t have the reserves to hold them back!” One of his officers yelled back.

“If we retreat to the other coast, we’d have a better position.” The Lightning General posed.

“We can’t retreat now! We will lose our position and never be able to attack these islands again! It will give the Uzumaki time to recover and dig in!” The Mist General yelled angrily.

“We have no choice. We have to preserve our forces at all costs now. I will not risk all our men's lives just to kill some random army!” The Lightning General roared, making the general direction of the forces clear.

“Engage a fighting retreat! Begin to disengage! Get the men in the rear back to the beachheads and use the front lines to hold them off!” The Stone general roared to his officers.

The order however, in spite of its good intentions, had the opposite of the intended effect. The sheer force and awe struck power of the attacks being slung at the forces was overwhelming. Nothing in their wildest nightmares could compare. It was as if the gods themselves had come to punish them. Hearing a retreat was ordered… the will to fight was sucked away like the battlefield blood in the coming rain.

In the rear the specialist shinobi, the medics and other logistical personnel moved as fast as possible. In some cases too fast, leaving supplies and equipment behind. There simply were not enough officers to maintain discipline back there or time to properly organize it. Like a virus, however, this disorder and chaos spread. Through the channels of communication, it made its way closer and closer to the front line. Teams, units, regiments one by one began to disengage in a similarly chaotic and disorderly fashion. Till finally it reached the front line.

What was once a solid, if bending, front line turned as porous as a sponge. Even the bonds of teams broke down as it was every man and woman for themselves. The ghosts of the Warring Clans Era seemed to have risen from the dead, and said dead instincts took hold. After a certain point the mysterious shinobi stopped fighting and let them disengage, seeing the state of them. This was a rout, yet they did not chase. This confused Oda and the Uzumaki, but they were not gonna punch their savior horse army in the mouth.

“Fucking finally, someone got off their asses to save us for once! I thought that was the end for a second!” Oda yelled gratefully.

“Did you really think that, sir?” One of the few Uzumaki officers asked.

“No, that was probably wishful thinking on my part.” Oda let out a sigh.

It was at that moment that the Uzumaki defenders began to realize what had happened. The battle was over. They had survived. They were saved! It was then that the surviving Uzumaki shinobi began roaring with cheers at the sight of their mysterious saviors.

As the strange, mysterious shinobi began to calm down, they smiled as they marched to greet the Uzumaki. The towering red haired man who had led this strange force was marching at the head, his staff in hand with the biggest smirk on his face. Catching sight of him from a distance, Oda pulled out a spyglass and tried to get a closer look. As soon as he saw who was at the head of the army, a smile crossed his face.

“Seishin, you little youthful shit! I knew you didn’t hate me after I drank your clan’s sake reserves dry! Come here, you big bastard!” Oda yelled in joy as the spry old man hugged him and gave him a noogie.

“Hey, hey, easy there, you old fossil!” Seishin replied with a smile as he gently pushed the elderly Uzumaki off of him.

“Fossil? At the rate shinobi are going these days, no one’s gonna put me out of my misery. I’d pray to the shinigami, but at this point I think they’re just out to lunch on that front.” Oda said in full rebuke.

“Well, at least you’re still full of energy, old friend.” A shorter, elderly man who looked like a smaller and older version of Seishin said with a mirthful smile as he walked up to Oda with a walking stick in hand, stroking his long white beard.

“Oh great, the fun police have arrived.” Oda groaned, “Can’t you let us have some enjoyment of survival once, Kodai?”

The elderly man, now identified as Kodai, chuckled at that. “As tempting as that would be, we still have much to do. We need to gather up the dead and do a headcount of the survivors.” He replied to his old friend. 

“Why are you always so god damn right and logical every time…?” Oda sighed.

“Because one of us has to be, you wild, old codger.” Kodai replied playfully, a smirk on his face.

 “You heard the man, hop to it men! We got shit to do!” Oda roared, and shinobi on both sides got to work.

With that, both the mysterious shinobi army and the Uzumaki began traveling across the battered and ruined village. They searched high and low for casualties of the battle, still living wounded to treat and dead to be given proper burials. Any bodies not bearing the spiral crest of the Uzumaki clan and Uzushio were chucked over the walls into piles to be studied or burned later. Meanwhile, the three great elders of the combined force began looking for a still intact place to speak in private.

“So what is it that you need to speak with me about, you two? Aside from the obvious.” Oda asked simply.

“We sought permission from Konoha to come to your aid in exchange for an audience with young Hiruzen. We would have come anyway, but we also saw this as a good opportunity to get favors from one of the Five Great Nations for it.” Kodai replied to Oda as they sat down in a barely standing bar and rifled around for some surviving sake.

“Well good for you guys. What does that have to do with us? We kinda have our hands full as you can see.” Oda said, motioning to the destruction all around.

“Old man, look at your village. It’s barely standing after this battle and will take generations to repair and get back up to what it once was. You Uzumaki may have survived, but Uzushio has fallen.” Seishin pointed out, motioning down at the barely recognizable ruins of what had once been the Whirling Tides Village.

“This will have to be something that will have to be discussed with the council, but I see your point. Though my personal opinion has always been this. I care more about my clan, the people I worked so hard to unite and make whole, than any group of buildings calling itself a village.” Oda answered solemnly.

“Worry not, old friend. Hiruzen-chan gave us the order to make sure that as many of you make it into Land of Fire territory as possible so that the Leaf can help you.” Kodai told his old friend.

“I always knew that boy would grow up to be a great man. Gods, I remember when he was in diapers. Feels just like yesterday. That could just be the age in me talking though. Hard to tell anymore really.” Oda said with a chuckle.

“So what do you say, old man? Are you up for sailing to the Land of Fire once the storm Susanoo-sama sent to aid us in this battle starts to die down?” Seishin asked the ancient Uzumaki.

“I think I can make that case to the council. You don’t live as long as I have, and not stack the deck near completely in your favor.” Oda answered with a smile.

“We’re glad to hear it, Oda. Now then, I propose a toast.” Kodai said, pouring them some sake in cups, “To a hard fought, but well won battle and many years to come.”

“Can’t we for once just toast to someone finally killing me? This is getting really annoying.” Oda asked, taking the cup.

“Then how about a toast to a hard fought, but well won battle and a glorious future for both our clans?” Seishin asked the ancient fellow redhead.

“Eh, I can accept that.” Oda said, and raised his cup.

The three older men then drank and began to enjoy the night relaxing after the battle. They knew that the next day would be long and hard, but it was necessary. They had a future to prepare for and people to sail to the Land of Fire. They would need to unwind while they could.

By the time the three old men had woken up the next morning, the storm had subsided over the course of the night. The ground was still wet and muddy, but the sun was quickly drying things up. Other than the damage to the fields and village and spots of blood still in a few places, ine wouldn’t think a massive battle had been waged there just the day before. The three elderly shinobi had already looked over the head count information of the dead, injured, and survivors before beginning preparations to evacuate the Land of Whirlpools.

Several Days Later - Konoha

It was a surprisingly bright and sunny day in Konoha. Word had spread like wildfire about the attack on the land of Whirlpools, as well as the mysterious clan that had routed the enemy and saved the Uzumaki. Rumors were flying around like bees in a beehive about this mysterious clan, some of them good and some of them… not so good. Despite Hiruzen and the council’s best efforts to keep the information private, rumors had still spread.

Speaking of the middle aged Hokage, he was currently in his office. He was going over potential plans and strategies to implement for the future. This mistake had nearly cost them their greatest ally. He would do his damnedest to not make a mistake like that again.

It was at that moment that a knock was heard at the door. “Enter.” Hiruzen told the person at the door, revealing his chief aid.

“Hokage-sama, an Uzumaki Oda is here to meet with you. He’s come with some rather… ‘interesting’ friends.” The aid told him, leaving Hiruzen surprised.

“They’re here already? Then let them in. Send a message to the rest of the council.” Hiruzen told his chief aid.

The aid bowed at this. “Of course, Hokage-sama.” They replied before leaving.

Hiruzen sighed, feeling his age beginning to catch up to him. He had never thought of himself as old before now, but he was beginning to feel his years now more than ever. He only hoped this meeting went well. Once the council was gathered in a meeting room, it was in that moment that the door opened and in walked Oda, Seishin, and Kodai.

“Hiruzen-chan! I have some wonderful new guests to introduce you and these three worthless heaps to!” Oda yelled, arms widened out in a hugging fashion.

“Must you treat us so disrespectfully, Oda-sama? After all, we are the Konoha Council.” Danzō grumbled a bit.

“How a worthless grub like you got anywhere other than you kissed this innocent little monkey’s ass is beyond me. You wouldn’t even be worth using as throw away chaff back in my day, boy. The other two of your flunkies might as well be civilians for all I care masquerading with stolen valor.” Oda shot back, not even bothering to look at the other three.

“Your hurtful words cut deep, Oda-sama…” Koharu sadly replied.

“If that's all it takes to disarm you people, then this whole village system is going to crumble to dust. Now then, Hiruzen. Allow me to introduce Kamishini Kodai and Seishin.” Oda said, stepping aside to reveal them.

What the four noted about the man they assumed to be Seishin was tall, easily standing at six feet tall. He had a mane of straight, wild red hair, stress lines showing his age, and a strong build with obvious muscle underneath his clothes. His garb of choice were ancient shinobi garb and armor dating back to the Warring Clan’s Era. A black bodysuit with crimson red armor on the shoulders, waist, and backs of the hands with standard issue shinobi sandals.

The other man, Kodai they assumed, was a stark contrast. He was a bit on the short side, only around Hiruzen’s height. He was nearly bald on the top of his head with tufts of hair above his ears and a long white beard, both as white as snow from age. He walked with a sturdy wooden walking stick, but was surprisingly spry for his age. He had a kind, grandfatherly smile that showed surprising wisdom. He wore black and crimson red robes, hiding what his physique was like underneath.

“Hello, Sarutobi-chan, Konoha Council members. Oda has told us so much about you four. His review of you was glowing, Sarutobi-chan, but he had… less than pleasant things to say about the others.” The old man they assumed to be Kodai greeted them cordially.

Danzō’s one visible eye twitched at that. “I do wish you would show us some respect, Kodai-san.” He told the ancient Kamishini only to find himself bonked on the head with a hard wooden walking stick faster than he could react.

“Mind your tongue, you one -eyed brat! As the former head of the Kamishini, I was facing nightmarish things that would make you piss your bed just like you did when you were a toddler!” Kodai chided Danzō.

Danzō rubbed his sore head and looked at the former head of the Kamishini clan. “Forgive my disrespect, Kodai-sama.” He grumbled out, earning him another swift, but less painful bonk to the head.

“Good. Better.” Kodai responded before walking over to sit down.

Seishin sat down next to the older Kamishini and looked at Hiruzen and the council. “Now then, since we’ve brought as many of the surviving Uzumaki as we could like we promised, we would like to begin talking to you about our terms.” He told them.

“Forgive me for any disrespect, Seishin-sama, but I believe that we will require more information about you before that can begin.” Homura replied, trying to be respectful to avoid being bonked by Kodai like Danzō had been.

“I’m sorry, but is our damn near the entire civilian Uzumaki population not enough for you brat?” Oda asked indignantly.

“What we are trying to say, Oda-sama, is that we would like to know more about them before we begin talking terms. We need to know what we’re getting into if we enter an alliance with them or anything of that nature.” Koharu said, trying to placate the ancient Uzumaki.

“You little bitch, I ought to flip up your skirt and-” Oda began in a fit of rage, only to be stopped by Kodai.

“Peace, Oda. She has a point. It would be best for them to know more about us if we want any negotiations to go well. Get yourselves comfortable children, because this is going to be quite the long tale.” Kodai said, getting comfortable himself…

To Be Continued...

Chapter Text

“Please dear sir, do have a seat then, if this tale is the journey you say it is.” Hiruzen said, offering Kodai a seat.

“Thank you, kind lord.” Kodai said with a polite bow, before taking his seat, and his son Seishin standing nearby.

“Be careful, father.” Seishin whispered.

“Relax, dear boy. You act like I don’t know what I’m doing.” Kodai whispered back.

“If we reveal too much…” Seishin tried to whisper, but was cut off.

“If the truth is so powerful that it renders a shinobi’s lies so utterly futile, then why should it be kept holstered and hidden?” Kodai whispered sternly.

Sighing, Seishin nodded in response. “Yes, father…” He whispered back.

Clearing his throat, the elderly Kamishini looked over the middle aged council before him. Having been alive long before they were even in diapers, the elderly shinobi knew better than anyone how to read people. From what he could tell, they were more than interested to hear this tale. Smiling, he began.

“Our tale begins in a time long before even the fabled Sage of the Six Paths was born. In a time when chaos and war ruled these lands even more than they did during the Warring Clans Era, in a land whose name has long been lost to even our history. A land only known as The Land Closest To The Gods.” Kodai began, setting the scene.

“There is no such place.” Danzō retorted briskly, his face contorted in a less than flattering look of scorn.

“Danzō, behave yourself. For someone who desires information like yourself, I would have thought you’d enjoy hearing about history?” Hiruzen asked.

“I don’t believe in fairy tales, only cold hard facts. There is nothing in any record, even from the Warring Clans Era, of such a place.” Danzō scoffed.

“This is from long before that era, Danzō. I suggest you learn to listen before you speak. Prevents you from having to look for a crow to consume.” Oda playfully said to the Root Lord.

“Do please continue, Kodai-san.” Hiruzen said, trying to get things back on track.

“This ancient nation was the most prosperous of its time. Its people had powers and ancient technology that the world in this day and age could not possibly imagine. Unfortunately however, no nation is without its enemies.” Kodai continued as the younger shinobi’s interests grew.

“What kind of enemies do you speak of?” Danzō asked, Hiruzen noticing that the crippled shinobi elder was tensing up at the mention of enemies.

“Enemies of humanity itself. Evil yōkai, Devils, Oni, rogue or foreign gods, and all manner of things thought to be nothing but myth and legend in this day and age. The People Closest To The Gods, gifted with great power from the gods themselves, fought back against these forces to protect the rest of humanity from their vile destruction and corrupting influence.” Kodai explained to the shinobi present.

“Considering their conspicuous absence in modern life, you have done a good job dealing with them.” Danzō feigned praise, leading Kodai to wonder his true intentions.

“Unfortunately, such forces are much easier to seal away than they are to permanently destroy. When the Land Closest To The Gods was eventually overrun and taken over by all of their enemies forming a temporary alliance against them, our ancestors were scattered to the winds and had to escape. It was only when we all reunited under the banners of our clan and the Kingdom of Seaheart, the ancestors of the ruling clan of the Land Closest To The Gods, that we managed to seal away the realms of these creatures to cut of as much of their influence on the mortal plane as we could. With no small thanks to the Sage of Six Paths himself aiding in the sealings and creating nine great creatures to help act as the guardians of humanity should these seals ever be broken.” Kodai explained.

“Your people were involved with the Tailed Beasts?” Hiruzen asked in shock, gripping his desk a bit to steady himself.

“Indeed we were. In their younger, more innocent years, we taught them much that the great Sage asked us to teach them. Language, literature, and so much more. Including how to control their great power. However, with the state they are in now, it appears many of our lessons have been forgotten by The Nine.” Kodai mused sadly.

“Props for trying. Got more balls than me for that.” Oda said, leaning his head back against the wall.

“If this is what you are capable of, then why do you wish to join the village? For that matter, how did your ancestors fall to the state you are now?” Danzō asked, doubts clearly showing in his voice.

“Quiet. Let the man explain, Danzō.” Koharu snapped, clearly wanting to hear more of this tale.

“Unfortunately, great power, while requiring great responsibility to properly use, also breeds great conflict. For every great light, there is always a great shadow lurking nearby. As our enemies, the enemies of humanity, grew in number, we eventually found ourselves unable to contend with them all at once, hence our homeland’s fall. After the great Sage sealed the Ten Tails, a conglomerate of all nine Tailed Beasts which had been acting as a deterrent from these forces before it went on a rampage, these enemies prepared to attack again in full force. Knowing that humanity and the world would not survive such an onslaught a second time with only us to protect them, sealing them away was our only option.” Kodai explained.

“And now comes the fall part of your people’s history I presume.” Hiruzen asked, leaning back in his chair, trying to contain himself from asking his own questions for the moment.

“That, unfortunately, can be blamed on numbers. You see, the powers our people were gifted with may run deep in our blood, but generations of reproducing with those without similar power in them has weakened us overall. We are still a force to be reckoned with, but we are unfortunately not as we were in ancient times. It’s as the saying goes: ‘Hard times make strong men, strong men make weak times, weak times make weak men, and weak men make hard times.’” Kodai explained.

“Wiser words couldn’t have been said.” Hiruzen muttered.

“Do please continue, Kodai-san.” Homura said eagerly.

“Yes indeed.” Danzō said, his interest finally beginning to be piqued.

“Time for the blood, guts and dying. My favorite part of any tale.” Oda said, causing Seishin to give him a glare.

“Our people have been in the shadows of history ever since the sealings, dealing with any threats that have managed to slip out of the seals as time has gone on. On the front lines of battles with threats that would make any Kage pale in fear. In the modern era, the only clans who know of our existence with absolute certainty are the Senju, Uchiha, Uzumaki, and Hyūga, all of whom have been sworn to secrecy.” Kodai told them.

“Now I will need you to answer Danzō’s question. Why, with all of this in mind, do you desire to join the village?” Hiruzen asked.

“Our seers have seen the foretellings of a great shadow in the world’s future. A coming threat the likes of which our world has not seen since the fall of the Land Closest To The Gods. All we know for certain is the prophecy that was given to them by the one god who can see the future long ago that we’ve been preparing for.” Kodai explained.

“Didn’t know you’ve gotten into that kind of thing Kodai.” Oda said with a raise of a eyebrow.

“What does this prophecy entail, and the threat that is so great?” Danzō asked, tensing up as if to pounce like a wildcat. However an outstretched hand from Hiruzen prevented anything further.

“Easy, my old friend. We must hear them out before any action should be taken. This war has seen enough bloodshed. I don’t desire more unnecessary bloodshed on this day.” Hiruzen calmly, yet sternly said to his black ops master.

“Very well.” Danzō scowled, backing up two steps away to show his new intentions.

“Parts of the prophecy have been lost to time, but here is what we and the four clans who know of our existence have been able to save from it and decipher: ‘A boy who worships storm and sea shall free the glowing white shadow. They shall meet a warrior of golden light and a lad with the eye of a god. The return of the Demon of Darkness and the Dragon of Light shall signal the days of doom. Together, the Four Warriors shall decide the fate of the world.’” Kodai told them.

“I will have to have a talk with the Hyūga clan heads after this.” Hiruzen muttered to himself.

“So what's the part you don’t know?” Oda asked, raising an eyebrow at this turn of events.

“Unfortunately, that part has been left illegible. We have been searching ruins for it along with the location of one of the Four Warriors. The one we believe to be The White Shadow.” Kodai told his old friend and the Konoha council.

“We believe that the Four Warriors are meant to lead humanity against whatever this great coming threat is. Hence why we have been putting so much effort into finding them all this time. From what our seers have been able to see of the future, the Five Kage of that time will be the ones at the head of humanity’s army alongside the remnants of the People Closest To The Gods as the Four Warriors lead us into battle.” Seishin added, finally speaking up for the first time throughout this tale.

“Well regardless of my feelings on this, I can understand why you have concern, and your desire to join the village. However, before I bring this to the greater council, I believe we all desire a small demonstration of your unique abilities.” Hiruzen said, slowly rising.

“This should be amusing.” Danzō muttered, heading to Hiruzen’s side.

“Surely you can muster more enthusiasm than that, Danzō.” Koharu asked.

“It's his job to be so dour. After all, it is his job to assess threats to the village.” Homura answered his companion.

“With a face like that, who needs enemies?” Oda muttered.

“It is no trouble at all. If it would suffice, Seishin can show you a demonstration of one of our techniques. If you would be so kind, son.” Kodai said in agreement, to which Seishin nodded.

“Of course, Father. Though it would be preferable to have a large open area for this demonstration. One where we won’t have to risk collateral damage.” Seishin responded.

“Follow me.” Hiruzen said, and with that the strange, enlarged retinue followed the Hokage out of his office.

On their merry jaunt, the strange retinue passed through the streets of the village. Seeing their leader and great officials drew heads, but the sight of the strange new folk in Oda and the Kamishini. Soon whispered and hushed tones began to ring through the streets as the rumor mill began to churn. Seishin scoffed at this behavior, but Kodai poked him to make him cut it out. Leaving the streets behind, they made their way deep into the forest to an old, disused training site.

“This should be a good place for you. Begin when ready.” Hiruzen said as the group stood at the far edge of the grounds.

Nodding, Seishin dropped into a stance with his hand outstretched and his fist pulled back. Closing his eyes, he began to concentrate. As he did, the air around him began to heat up more and more. The very air around them began to dry up as a wide area of flames began to appear around the Kamishini clan head. Glowing, white hot flames that burned the very grass beneath his feet.

As Seishin opened his eyes, his eyes seemed to glow with white hot power as his fist became coated with all of the flames he had conjured. With the power sufficiently built up for a full strength attack, he tensed his muscles and punched forward with a flame-coated fist.

“God Fire Release: Fist of the Fire God!” Seishin called out, unleashing all of the power he’d built up with one attack.

Before the flames even left his fist, the sudden introduction of this sheer heat sent a shockwave of heated air in front of him. Anything that didn’t get the picture of what was to happen next didn’t have the chance to escape. Following in the displaced air’s wake came a torrential cone of blazing fire. Even the great boles of the ancient trees in front of the flames, as thick and mighty as they were, did little to stop the searing heat. Soon the area in front of them was engulfed in a blaze raging like a snow storm. Smoke, char and soot billowed out in a thick, horrible black smoke as the blaze spread gluttonously, seeking ever more fuel at a rate it could not sustain.

Stepping forward as his son stepped back, Kodai dropped into his own stance as he pulled an open hand back. As the now dry air around him began to rapidly moisten, the shinobi present could almost feel a storm coming. In his hand, Kodai conjured a great sphere of water swirling like a small typhoon. Thrusting his hand forward and downward with the other hand gripping his wrist, Kodai unleashed the technique.

“God Water Release: Sea God’s Tearing Torrent!” The ancient Kamishini called out, unleashing the water jutsu.

As if drawn from the lifeblood of the earth, a great wave surged in front of Kodai. The great, deep watered wave slammed into the roaring blaze. The two vastly different temperatures colliding caused a great explosion, sending a shockwave that rattled the surrounding forest. However, when the Hokage entourage’s retinue opened their eyes, all that was left was smoldering embers, and a deeply fire scarred scene in front of them.

Panting, Kodai leaned on his walking stick as he tried to catch his breath. Sweat dripped from his brow as he took in small gulps of air, the effort clearly having taken a bit out of him. Quickly, Seishin rushed to his father’s side.

“Father, are you alright?” Seishin asked in concern.

“I am fine, Seishin. Just dealing with getting old.” Kodai said with a bit of a throaty pant.

“Amen to that. Still, quite the lightshow you two put on there.” Oda said with a sympathetic nod.

Meanwhile, the Konoha council could not believe their eyes. Such displays of power could only be matched by someone on the level of a Kage if not a bit higher. If this was what Seishin and Kodai were both capable of despite their clearly advanced age, then what could a powerful Kamishini leader in their prime be capable of?

“Did… did we just see… what I think we saw…?” Homura asked in sheer disbelief.

“Incredible…” Koharu said in amazement.

“Do you require more today Danzō?” Hiruzen asked.

“This will do for now.” Danzō admitted with a sigh.

“That was more than satisfactory for a demonstration. Thank you, Seishin-san and Kodai-san.” Hiruzen said respectfully.

“No, Hokage-sama. Thank you for hearing us out and giving us a chance.” Kodai replied, bowing his head along with Seishin.

A Week Later - Southern Land of Lightning Coast

As the great transport was docked on its moorings, Seishin jumped off onto the makeshift piers for the harbor. Leaving the dockworkers to handle the ship, he made his way up to the bluffs that were so common on the coast. Though the Kamishini had taken the front from the Uzumaki, it immediately had not gone as planned. Potent as they were, the sheer size of the coast and the multiple beachheads they had to manage, combined with trying to make breakthroughs, made it a hard fight. It was soon apparent to Seishin that he was put into a fight that his people weren’t made for. They didn’t have the numbers the Uzumaki did.

The wafting scent of death, blood and char made that bitter fact all the more real. Makeshift tents for the wounded sprung up in great numbers. Body bags, blood and amputated body parts were in frightening amounts. Off in the craggy bluffs further field, the sound of battle raged. Something needed to change. At this rate, they couldn’t mobilize enough to make it through the way. Walking to the beachhead commander's tent, him and his subordinates stood at attention as the titanic man strode in.

“Seishin-sama! It is an honor, sir!” The commander yelled.

“At ease, Commander. Now update me on the status of the battle at hand.” Seishin ordered the commanding officer.

“We have stabilized the frontline sir, and we hold this beachhead. That's really about it. The Land of Lightning forces have us bottled up here. The terrain makes it so there's plenty of choke points for them to set up defenses, and we don’t have the Earth specialists here to crack through these bluffs yet.” The commander mournfully explained, demonstrating these things on the map in front of them on an oaken table.

Seishin smirked at that as he had an idea. “Then it seems like I should take to the battlefield personally and stir up trouble for the Raikage.” He replied.

“About that, sir. Whenever we might have had a breakthrough, we believe it has been the Raikage personally that has broken our assaults. If he could be drawn out and eliminated, we might be able to perform some maneuvers without the specialists. At a cost, but all we need is one breakthrough to start causing trouble for them, sir.” The commander explained.

“I’ll be the one to handle that, Commander. Besides, A the Third could be my chance at the first real fight I’ve had in almost a decade.” Seishin replied with a smirk, cracking his neck.

“May the gods of war be ever in your favor, sir.” The commander said, bowing his head dutifully.

“And you as well, Commander. Have your men ready to cause a breakthrough when my platoon gives the signal.” Seishin replied as he turned to exit the tent.

“Of course. It shall be done.” The commander answered dutifully.

With that Seishin left the tent. Very quickly almost twenty shinobi gathered around him and once formed up, headed towards the nearest chokepoint. Stealthily moving along twisting, winding mountainous trails, they soon found the crag born location. Nestled between an imposing wall of harsh, weather-worn bluffs was a small river valley, with two trails on each of its elevated banks. Above it was clearly what was giving his kin trouble. Above them towered two sheer pillars of rock, curving inward as if they were great bull horns. With the mobility and speed Seishin knew the lightning nin had, such a place was a perfect ambush spot.

“What are your orders, Seishin-sama?” The platoon lead whispered.

Seishin gave a bit of a grin at his platoon leader. “When I fire the opening shot, follow me. Hit ‘em hard, hit ‘em fast, give ‘em hell, and don’t die, boys.” He replied as he stepped forward.

“Of course, sir.” He mournfully said, fully knowing what was about to happen.

Stepping forward, Seishin dropped into a stance and pulled back both of his fists at his side. Concentrating, he began channeling power as the air around him began heating up dramatically. The ground beneath his feet smoked and caught fire as white hot flames began to dance and twist around him, flowing up into the sky. Opening his eyes with a smirk, he focused all of the flames into his two fists before punching forward in a double fisted punch, one hand above the other.

“God Fire Release: Twin Fists of the Fire God!” Seishin called out, unleashing the technique in all its blazing glory.

Like with the jutsu he had shown to the Hokage’s entourage, a shockwave of heated air was unleashed before the flames even left his two fists. One more than twice as powerful as the single fisted version. What happened next would haunt the dreams of every surviving Cloud ninja at that choke point for years to come and leave them waking up in cold sweats. Like a scene out of hell itself, a massive torrential blast of white hot fire exploded out from the Kamishini leader’s two fists, burning away everything in its path. Leaves, brush, trees, even the very stone itself were burned away by the incredible heat of the divine flames. The great heat and smoke of the flames forced the Kumo shinobi out of hiding, lest they be fried to death by the heat or choked to death by the thick black smog from the flames.

“NOW!” Seishin called out to his platoon.

Only the great speed and reflexes that the Lightning nin are known for prevented a complete disaster. Roaring in like a vengeful tempest, the Kamishini shinobi slammed into the vertical defensive positions. The bluffs, peaks and crags crackled and roared with the clash of jutsu, fists and steel. Due to the close in fighting, both side’s casualties began to mount. Even for shinobi, the river valley and its embankments left little places to dodge and move to. As Seishin barely missed a Cloud jōnin, sending a baneful crack into a cliff face, the distinctive crack of a rolling thunderclap was heard. All there knew only one man could produce such an effect.

A great, hulking blur coated in yellow lightning hit the ground in an explosion of a dust cloud. As the dust slowly cleared, there stood the current Raikage, A the Third. He was a towering, muscular, and well-built man with the dark skin tone many Kumo nin were known for. His hair was a long mane of spiky white with a long beard that crackled with electricity. His unusual eyes, composed of green irides, dark sclerae, and no pupils, stared at Seishin, sizing him up. From the look on his face, the normally calm and level-headed Raikage was ready for battle.

“I give you all one chance this day to leave and never return!” The Raikage roared down at them from his vantage point.

“As tempting as that offer is, I’m afraid I must decline Raikage-sama! We need to get through here one way, or the other! Rather than shed unnecessary blood any further, I have a proposition for you if you are willing to hear me out!” Seishin bellowed back in response.

“Then speak.” A the Third answered simply.

“A duel of honor between shinobi leaders. You, the Third Raikage, touted as being Kumo’s undisputed invincible shinobi, against I, Kamishini Seishin, the leader of the legendary Kamishini clan. If I win, your forces retreat and let us pass. If you win, we shall leave and never return.” Seishin proposed to the Invincible Raikage.

“A man of honor and who respects the lives of his men. A language I can get behind. Very well Seishin of the Kamishini, I accept your challenge of honor!” A the Third roared back, and dropped down, landing on the elevated right bank of the river, awaiting Seishin to get in front of him for the duel to begin.

Meeting A the Third, Seishin leaped up to the elevated left bank of the river. The two men dropped into their respective stances as a massive amount of chakra flared from both of them, yellow lightning crackling and roaring off of A the Third like a thunderstorm while a storm of wind and fire raged around Seishin. Sensing a great battle about to come, the subordinates of both leaders put as much distance between the two men as they could.

As the ground cracked and broke from the pressure of their chakras, the two men watched for any openings in their opponent’s defense. Seeing something, the two men took off, the ground beneath their feet all but exploding from the force. Rushing at each other at speeds their subordinates could not track, the two men met in the middle, their fists colliding with forces great enough to unleash a massive shockwave. Separating, the two took off at each other again, Seishin charging his fists with white hot flames supercharged by wind while A the Third’s fists crackled and roared with lightning. As their blows collided and they moved too fast to track, each clash was a thunderclap. Their each swing was a hurricane and their each downard blow was a waterfall, cracking and breaking the stone of the surrounding area.

“What kind of power is that?” A Kumo Chūnin  asked his superior.

“It is some kind of jutsu, that much is clear. From the reports of the Land of Whirlpools campaign and the several other fronts these guys are fighting on, they use chakra.” The Jōnin leader answered.

“That's not any kind of chakra I’ve ever seen. Where the hell did Konoha dig these guys up?” Another Jōnin said.

“Wherever they're from, I have no doubt A-sama is gonna send them packing!” A Genin chipperly said.

“By the gods in the heavens I hope you're right, kid.” The Jōnin leader muttered.

The Kumo were quickly caught out of their musings as Seishin dodged a punch from A only to be met with a knee to the gut. Barely stopping the knee by catching it with his hand, Seishin countered with a flaming right cross punch to A’s left cheek that exploded on contact with incredible power, forcing him back. To the shock and fear of the Kumo nin, as A righted himself and landed, a small burn was left on their leader’s face from the flames. Their invincible leader had not only been touched, but actually hurt.

“That’s it, Seishin-sama! Send the old fossil packing!” A Kamishini Genin roared.

“Does he not realize the boss is way older than the Raikage is?” A Kamishini Chūnin asked.

“Let young Kuri the optimist here learn the hard way on that front. Builds character.” The Jōnin leader said with a sigh.

Wiping his cheek a bit, A gave a small smile at his opponent’s power before powering up further, the lighting around him intensifying. Meeting his opponent’s boost in kind, Seishin unleashed more intense wind and flames. The two then charged in, meeting and matching hit for hit as shockwaves were unleashed by their clashing fists. The collision of their mighty blows shook the water and stone around them, causing splashes and breaking rocks as the two zipped around the battlefield at high speeds. Finally, A saw his opening and landed a roundhouse kick to Seishin’s stomach that knocked him back, sending him skidding along the water as the heat coming off of him brought any water around him to boil and steam.

“Your fire is impressive. It’s been years since I’ve seen fire this hot.” A said to his opponent.

 “Your lightning is no less impressive, A-sama. I haven’t been hit that hard in years. Truly, you have earned your title as the strongest Raikage.” Seishin replied with a smile.

“Then it is time we see which of our elemental strengths is truly superior then. I think we both have had a satisfactory warm up.” A the Third answered, giving his own smirk.

“Agreed, A-sama. Let’s show these brats how we of the previous generations do things.” Seishin responded, dropping back into his stance as he powered up even more.

“Nothing would please me more, Seishin-san.” A the Third answered, before charging up even further.

The entire small valley around the two combatants felt like it was shaking from the power coming off of them. Taking off at high speed, the two clashed in midair, their forearms meeting in a clash. Pushing off from each other, the two landed against the cliffs and pushed off at high speed. In a barrage of clashes as they ricocheted and bounced off of the surfaces around them at speeds that would make high pressure rubber balls look like snails, the clashes of their blows shook and cratered the ground and walls. Entire cliffs began to crack from the force of their mighty blows as neither combatant seemed to be giving an inch.

“How is he keeping up with the Raikage!?” A Cloud Genin asked in amazement.

“Personally, I think we’ve got bigger concerns. Like if these peaks are gonna hold with this kind of clash.” A Chūnin behind them answered.

“Move back and keep the perimeter! Keep away from unstable surfaces and areas with potential falling objects! And keep an eye on those across from us! We can’t let them slip through!” Their Jōnin leader barked.

As the Kumo nin moved back, their Kamishini counterparts did the same. Both sides' sub commanders mutually understood the gravity of the situation. Both sides have matched each other the whole way through, and to break this stalemate would require potentially desperate, even reckless measures.

Seishin caught a blow from A the Third, holding back his fist. Trying to land a blow of his own, Seishin launched a punch with his other hand that was caught by the Raikage. Even as Seishin’s flames burned him, A the Third refused to back down. Opening their fists, the two clasped hands and grappled in a test of strength. Pushing against each other with as much strength as they could, the cliff they were on began to crack and break from the pressure of their combined chakras and the forces they exerted on each other. Finally, Seishin reeled his head back and delivered a flaming headbutt that knocked the Third Raikage back before launching him down with a harsh kick. Flipping and landing as he skidded along the water, A the Third looked up at his foe with a smirk, one that Seishin met with a grin of his own.

“So the legends of your people are true. If we kept this up, I have no doubt we could go for days.” A said with a smirk.

“And your own legend is far from exaggerated as well, A-sama. Since we’re both very busy men, what say we end this with our most powerful attacks and see who is still left standing?” Seishin offered with his own grin.

“You presume quite a lot to assume a single attack will take me out.” A said, raising an eyebrow at the seeming ego of the man.

“Not at all, A-sama. I only use this technique against those who leave me with no other surefire path to victory.” Seishin replied.

“Then, as Raikage, it is my duty to make your greatest technique fails you this day.” A answered with a smirk.

“And, as leader of the Kamishini and an ally of Konoha and the Uzumaki, my duty is to use this technique to break through your lines A-sama.” Seishin replied with a grin of his own.

The two men then powered up with everything they had, A the Third putting most of his Lightning Release Chakra Mode’s power into one finger while Seishin manifested an inferno of white hot flames around himself. As the flames began to pool around him like water being collected in a typhoon, Seishin raised his open palmed hand to the sky. The flames began to collect in his palm, forming a fireball that was getting bigger and bigger as more flames collected in it. When the fireball was done forming, it was the size of a full size Tailed Beast Bomb and looked like a small sun as the heat coming off of it began cooking and melting everything in the surrounding area that wasn’t the two combatants.

“God Fire Release: Prominence of the Sun God!” Seishin called out as the attack was fully formed and their subordinates began to run.

“Huh. Thought it’d be bigger, honestly.” A mused.

“I hate getting old, but you know what they say, A-sama. Big things come in small packages.” Seishin responded with a smile.

“Well that or disappointment. Go ahead. Flip that coin.” A answered Seishin with a smirk.

With that, Seishin launched the small sun with a roar as A the Third leaped up to meet it. As the small sun approached the Third Raikage, he roared and thrust forward with his one fingered strongest spear. The two combatants intended to settle this win in one move.

“HELL STAB!” A the Third roared as he began to cut through the sun thrown at him.

As A cut through the massive ball of white hot flames, it began to destabilize. However, before he could even reach the center, the sun detonated with both combatants at the epicenter of the blast. The resulting explosion looked like a volcano had suddenly erupted in the center of the valley out of nowhere as flaming boulders began to rain down on the surrounding area like meteors, breaking the ground and lightning it ablaze on impact. As the two sides tried desperately to put out the flames, they tried to make their way back to where the valley once was.

Both sets of shinobi trudged slowly through the glassed and slimed remains of the peaks. Smoldering rock and lit fires dotted the landscape. What few water users were busy cooling and putting out fires. As they got closer, both sides began to realize that the two leaders carved out a new, much larger valley. As water from the river slowly trickled through, cooling and settling into its new bed, they finally found their leaders. Both laid on the bed of the river, water flowing over them and blood leaking from both badly burned combatants.

“It appears… we have reached… a conundrum upon… the terms… of this contest.” A panted heavily out.

“I… Indeed we have… A-sama… Sh… Shall we… call this… a draw…?” Seishin panted out heavily in return.

“I see… no alternative…” A answered with a nod.

With that, the two shinobi leaders passed out from their injuries as both sides rushed to grab their respective bosses. Hesitation and tension reigned as the two sides grabbed hold of their leaders. The tension was finally broken as a Kamishini genin stepped forward, and bowed in respect to the other side. Confused, the subcommander, and platoon soon followed, bowing as well. Surprised by this gesture, the shinobi of Kumo bowed in kind. The two sides then turned and left towards their respective camps. Neither side, on their leaders wishes, would continue to crave bloodshed this day. Tomorrow however, is a different day. Isn’t it?

To Be Continued...

Chapter Text

Since the Kamishini’s entry into the war, its course had changed. Using the ruined islands of the Land of Whirlpools as staging and logistics centers, they pushed up into the Land of Water and Lightning. These beachheads quickly, as we have seen, became bloody meat grinders. Neither side had the numbers or power needed to push through the horrid terrains infamous of the two nations.

On the western flank, the Village Hidden in the Sand conducted lightning raids and border skirmishes with the Hidden Stone Village. While their lack of numbers and lack of knowledge of the mountainous terrain hindered their offensives, it forced the Stone ninja to commit to a coordinated defense to prevent further incursions.

What looked like a stalemate on the flanks, however, was exactly what Hirzuen wanted. Using his allies' unique abilities and geographical locations to his advantage, he forced his enemies to tie down troops away from the central front with Konoha. Like horns of two great oxen, the flanks pushed and battled each other. All to leave the center open for a thrust towards the Village Hidden in the Stone.

Speed and force concentration would be key for its success, and indeed it was a great risk. Should the flanks learn too quickly, they would be cut off and crushed by the two flanks slamming into the main force. Further still, the Earth Release specialists of the village were renowned for their stonework and defensive fortifications. Mountains, even for shinobi, are a rough area to fight and maneuver in. Entire fortifications carved into mountain battlegrounds of the defenders choosing, and storming the defenses of the village on top of that would demand a butcher's bill few would be able to stomach. However, battles like these are only won by the side willing to sacrifice the most to win. Hiruzen had started this war, and he was going to finish it.

No shinobi force of the size Hiruzen had gathered could be stealthy enough to avoid skirmishing. Though the defenders’ manpower was siphoned to other fronts, they were still enough to demand respect. This was their village, and no shinobi with any mind for their oaths will give up without an unholy and zealous fight. Only by using their superior size and power of their formations did they quickly force their way past the skirmish lines. Both sides knew the longer Konoha’s force took to capture the village, the less chance of victory they had. However, as they neared the first minor fortifications with their platoon, Team Minato learned like everyone else that day, it was to be one of the bloodiest days in the Leaf’s history.

“‘Lead the charge’, sensei said. ‘It will be a great experience’, he said. ‘It's only a few trench lines and hard points’, he said. He didn’t say anything about minor summons and bombardment jutsu galore!!!!” Obito roared and complained as he was wrestling a large and imposing ninja hound, trying to crush his skull.

“Quit complaining, Obito! We’re still not high enough in the chain of command to be calling any shots! Just follow your orders and complete the mission!” Kakashi called back to his young Uchiha teammate, using his father’s signature White Light Chakra Sabre to cut his way through summoned enemy ninja hounds.

“I have every right to complain, Stupid Kakashi! This is absolutely and completely above our pay grade! I bet we aren’t even getting hazard pay right now because we aren’t handling any of the real hard points! I’m gonna get stiffed by Old Man Baboon again and it ain’t fair!” Obito yelled, barely holding back the hounds crushing jaws with a kunai.

“First of all, you two are only Genin and I’m a Chūnin! Second, there’s no hazard pay in war! Third of all, show the Hokage some respect, you reject!” Kakashi snapped back, coming over and stabbing the massive canine in the back to open it up for a stab through the skull from Obito.

“That’s enough, you hard headed, knuckle dragging bozos! We are in war right now and could die at any second! We are a team! Those guys are the enemy! Can’t you two get along for one battle for once in your…” Rin yelled, taking the two aback at the outburst, and what happened to cut her off.

A loud whistling sound cut the young Nohara girl off as they saw shadows on the ground. Round shadows. Small at first, but steadily growing larger and larger. Looking up, they were all caught off guard at the sight of flaming boulders, clearly launched via enemy bombardment jutsu, coming straight towards their position.

“TAKE COVER!” Kakashi called out.

As the rain of flaming stone came crashing down, the two Genin and one Chūnin ran for cover. However, as the blazing boulder bombardment came crashing down and exploded, one of their number was unlucky enough to not be far enough away. As the barrage of fiery rock mayhem went off, Nohara Rin was caught in the shoulder by some of the burning hot shrapnel. The blazing stone spikes pierced her shoulder, digging in deep.

“AAAAAAGGHHH!!!” Rin wailed in blood curdling pain, gripping her shoulder as she felt a loss of feeling in her arm.

“RIN! I’m coming, Rin!” Obito yelled and breakneck blitzed over to his comrade.

“Obito, you idiot! Don’t be a hero by going off by yourself!” Kakashi called to his Uchiha teammate, taking off after him on sheer instinct.

Soon, the two boys reached Rin and got a good look at her injuries. What they saw made their young stomachs turn. The shards of stone had pierced deep, the fire on them slightly burning the wounds. Rin was losing a lot of blood and fading fast.

“I’ll get her to the rear! Cover me, Silver Mane!” Obito yelled as he picked her up in a fireman’s carry.

“Don’t get yourself killed, Ebony Idiot! Just get her to the Medical Unit and get back here safely! Now run, Obito, run!” Kakashi called back to his teammate, White Light Chakra Sabre in hand as he cut his way through ninja hounds and used Lightning Release jutsu to try to destroy stray bits of stone blown their way to cover for his teammates.

“Alright, legs! Don’t fail me now! Time to show my clan me winning the junior footrace was no fluke!” Obito muttered, before taking off for the rear lines.

With his barely conscious and bleeding kunoichi teammate carried on his shoulders, the young Uchiha rushed through the tree and stone covered terrain. Dodging and weaving through bombardments of elemental Ninjutsu, he kept running. Never stopping, never tiring. Desperate to save his teammate and the girl he’d had feelings for all this time.

As Obito ran for the rear lines, he came across allied shinobi covering their six who were also engaged in combat. Some of them were fine, some of them were wounded. Knowing that he couldn’t stop and would have to come back for them, he kept running as the others covered him. He couldn’t afford to stop now.

Finally, Obito reached the rear lines, the Medical Unit within sight. Breaking into as much of a sprint as he could while keeping the young Nohara stable on his back, the young fledgling Uchiha charged forward. As he did, he looked back at Rin for a moment to see how she was doing.

To his concern, she didn’t look good. She was getting a bit pale and was sweating. He needed to hurry. If he didn’t… no! He would make it! He had to!

Going into a full tilt run, Obito finally made it to the main tent of the Medical Unit and burst in through the opening. Panting, he tried to catch his breath.

“Hang… in there… Rin…! We… made it…!” Obito said with quick pants.

“T-Thank… y-y-you…” she answered quietly, barely having the energy to speak through her quivering lips.

“I need a medic here quick! I’ve got an injured!” Obito yelled, panicked, trying to stand up with her.

Rushing up in a nurse’s outfit was a girl a bit taller than Rin’s height. Looking down at them with dark eyes, equally dark cropped hair blowing in the breeze, and a concerned look across her rounded face. Slowly the girl helped Obito get Rin onto a free bed and began to look over the injury. As she slowly works and gets supplies, Obito notices a name tag emblazoned with Shizune on it.

“I can slow the bleeding, but I’ll have to get my master to handle this. This is out of my league.” Shizune said.

“Alright, where are they!? We need to be quick!” Obito yelled, starting to have a hint of a panic attack over the stress.

“Quit yelling, brat! This is a field hospital, not a damn music concert!” A voice yelled back at him from behind as Obito and Shizune turned to look at the source.

Walking out in a green robe over a flak jacket, the long, pig tailed blonde hair of Shizune’s master caught Obito’s attention. Even despite the flak jacket's best attempt, it didn’t conceal her titanic mounds either. Avoiding looking at them as best as he could, he knew immediately who she was, and his fears for Rin’s life were quashed.

“T-Tsunade-sama…?” Obito asked nervously in confusion, before she sharply cut him off.

“Is it really so surprising that I’m the one heading up this shoddy excuse for a Medical Unit after those Kamishini saved the Uzumaki and allied themselves with us! Now out of my way so that I can see the damage done, kid!” Tsunade snapped at the young Uchiha, clearly irritated about the whole situation.

“Of course!” Obito said, practically flinging himself out of the way.

With that, Tsunade took a deep breath as she marched forward to assess the situation. Upon seeing the blood pouring from her wounds, the Slug Princess almost froze up in fear. To this day, she still couldn’t stand the sight of blood. However, for now, she had to do her best to push down her fear and obey the Four Rules of the Medical Ninja. This girl needed saving and she was the only one capable of doing so right now.

Making her way closer to better assess the damage done, Tsunade almost flinched. Just at a glance, she could tell that those Earth Release spikes had probably pierced almost to the bone. The girl was bleeding out, even with Shizune slowing down the bleeding. They needed to act fast.

The Slug Princess of the Leaf turned to address the young Uchiha. “We can save her, kid. I give you my word now that we won’t let her die. Now get back to the battle and leave her in our hands!” Tsunade told him, giving him an order.

“I saw other injured on the way here. I can go get them for you if you can handle them…” Obito asked before being cut off.

“Then hop to it, kid! Get as many of those injured here as you can and then return to the battle! Shizune, go get more Medical Ninja while I take over taking care of this girl! And make sure we have enough beds!” The last Senju barked in response, giving out orders to the two shinobi minors.

“On it, Tsunade-sama!” Shizune yelled as she rushed off.

“You got it, boss!” Obito yelled and rushed off to get more wounded.

Tsunade gave a small smile as she watched Obito retreat back into the battlefield to bring in more injured allies. “That kid’s got a big heart. We need more shinobi like him in this world…” She muttered before turning her attention to the injured Nohara Rin, taking a deep breath, and getting to work.

One by one, at a rate that surprised even Tsunade, Obito rushed in with shinobi after shinobi. If it wasn’t for her and her team’s skill and diligence, the Uchiha threatened to overflow the place. To this day no one knows how many Obito saved, but each shinobi, regardless of rank, was still thankful for his actions for the rest of their days. Though some he saved died on their medical beds, too far gone, Obito pressed on as everyone knew they at least got a chance they normally wouldn’t. It warmed Tsunade’s heart to see the cruel butchery of war be slightly curtailed that day, even if it dug up a bitter well to drink from.

Meanwhile, the son of the disgraced White Fang of the Hidden Leaf was fighting to hold his own against a swath of enemies. With Obito and Rin back at the rear lines and unable to aid him, he had to hold the line here on his own. A gifted young shinobi Kakashi may have been, but he was currently still just a boy. Even he could only do so much at his current level of abilities.

Slashing a ninja hound’s head off with his father’s blade, Kakashi cut his way through the enemy hounds. As he did, his father’s blade glowed with streaks of white chakra as he carved a bloody path through the enemy’s lines, even taking out some Genin that tried to challenge him. He was making progress, but not enough. Not quickly enough. They needed more.

“Come on, Kakashi…! You can do this…! Complete your mission…!” The young scarecrow muttered to himself as he kept cutting his way through the enemy to try to clear a path for some of the platoon.

Making his way to a hard point, a small rock outcropping the enemy had turned into a bunker, Kakashi saw his chance. If he could take that out, they could break through. They could finally start making some progress. Smiling under his mask, Kakashi saw this as a perfect opportunity to try out a new jutsu he’d been working on.

Going through a few hand seals, Kakashi put his left hand down in a claw while grasping his wrist with the other. Mentally hoping and praying that this worked, he began to form the jutsu. Lightning chakra formed in the palm of his hand, crackling and chirping like a thousand birds.

“Chidori…!” Kakashi called out, moving his lightning covered hand aside as he took off running at high speed.

Running through at high speed, Kakashi stabbed and cut his way through enemies in an attempt to take and destroy the bunker. Carving a path through the enemy while using his father’s White Light Chakra Sabre to cut down anyone who dodged his jutsu. Bit by bit, Kakashi made progress. His new, first ever original jutsu was working. He could do this. He could do this!

However, Kakashi inevitably made a mistake. When he went to run an enemy through with his Chidori, the enemy dodged to the side. Trying to swipe at his opponent with his Chakra Sabre, the tunnel vision caused by the speed of his new jutsu finally caught up to him, causing him to not see that his opponent had drawn two kunai as he dodged the young Chūnin’s attack. Blocking the blade with one kunai, the enemy shinobi slashed at Kakashi’s face with the other, slashing Kakashi’s left eye.

“AAAAGH!” Kakashi cried out in pain as his jutsu ended, the Lightning Release chakra fading away as he fell back and clutched his now useless left eye.

Panting a bit, the enemy Stone ninja glared down at the kid t before him. He recognized the weapon he was holding and the silver hair, both trademarks of the White Fang of the Hidden Leaf Village. However, this brat was clearly too young to be the White Fang.

“I’d heard the White Fang was dead. So why do you have his blade, brat?” The enemy shinobi sneered.

Panting, Kakashi glared up definitely at the older ninja. “It’s… a memento… from my father…” He replied back, trying to show no fear.

“Well, then you can join him in hell!” The shinobi spat as they raised a kunai to end their younger foe.

“FIRE RELEASE: GREAT FIREBALL JUTSU!” A voice familiar to Kakashi roared out as a fireball was launched at the enemy shinobi, forcing them to jump away from the now cycloptic Chūnin.

Kakashi was confused as he saw someone land in front of him. Looking up, he saw the familiar Uchiha crest on the back of the boy’s shirt and. Giving a brief smile, Kakashi quickly schooled his expression.

“You’re… late again… as usual… Obito.” He panted to his teammate, internally thanking him for showing up when he did.

“If you just want me to fuck off and let you die, I can do that…” Obito panted in pain.

Kakashi shook his head in response. “That won’t be necessary. I guess the saying ‘better late than never’ rings true here. Thanks…” Kakshi panted back.

The Stone ninja smirked at that. “The White Fang’s brat and an Uchiha? Is it my birthday already?” He sneered at them.

“If you think you’re getting some free scratch off tickets today, bub, you're dead wrong! No one is killing my team today! Especially when I’m getting jipped on pay!” Obito yelled back.

The Iwagakure shinobi chuckled darkly at that. “You got guts brat; I’ll give you that. It’s a pity I’ve gotta rip them out of you…!” He sneered, drawing a sword from his back.

Kakashi stepped forward at that, his Chakra Sabre at the ready. “Oh no, you’re not. Sensei left me in charge of our team as the next highest in rank. He ordered me to do my best to make sure we make it back alive, and I intend to follow his order.” Kakashi replied with a glare.

The Stone nin smirked arrogantly at that. “That’s an order you’re going to fail to carry out, White Fang Junior!” He bit back, charging in.

“I’ll take point, Obito! Cover my blind spot!” Kakashi called out, rushing in at their opponent.

“If you were as good as you say you are, then you wouldn’t have a blind spot!” Obito yelled back, getting into position.

“Just lay down cover fire!” Kakashi called back in annoyance, blade at the ready.

“Finally, I get a good job around here!” Obito yelled with a grin on his face. Covering fire was always a fun job because it involved explosions.

“DIE, YOU BRATS!” The Stone nin roared as he rushed in at Kakashi, ready to swing down his blade.

Unfortunately, he failed to keep his eyes on Obito as the young Uchiha went through hand seals for a Fire Release Jutsu. One of his personal favorites.

“FIRE RELEASE: PHOENIX SAGE FIRE JUTSU!” Obito roared out before inhaling air and unleashing a barrage of fireballs at the enemy ninja, taking care not to hit Kakashi.

The Iwa shinobi had to dodge and weave through the fireballs while blocking slashes from Kakashi, cutting and stabbing at him only to have to dodge more fireballs and dodge the Chūnin’s counters. He gritted his teeth in anger at the situation. Despite how much they bickered, these two kids fought well together. He needed to make a move fast.

Throwing a kunai, he forced Obito to stop his barrage of fireballs as he went in to try to cut Kakashi in two. Smirking, he swung with all his might.

“ONE DOWN!” He roared out as he swung from Kakashi’s blind spot.

“Kakashi, duck!” Obito yelled, grabbing a kunai.

As Kakashi listened to his teammate for once and ducked down, Obito swore he saw everything begin moving in slow motion. It was like he could see what was going to happen before it happened. He saw Kakashi managing to duck as the sword came towards him. He could even see Kakashi and the enemy’s chakra. Acting quickly, he threw his kunai at the Stone nin’s chest. Soaring, the kunai struck true and stabbed into his torso, throwing off his swing and just barely missing Kakashi.

Shocked, Kakashi turned to look at his Uchiha teammate. When he did, what he saw surprised him.

“O… Obito… your eyes…!” He called out.

“The… Sharingan…” Obito muttered in shock, seeing the change in the brief reflection from a second kunai he drew.

Gritting his teeth, the enemy pulled the kunai out of his chest. “ARRGH! YOU BRATS! I’LL KILL YOU FOR THIS!” He roared in pain and rage, glaring at the two boys.

“Not if I kill you first…!” A voice whispered harshly in his ear.

Turning in shock, the Iwa nin found his throat slit by a triple bladed kunai knife. Gasping for breath, he fell to the ground as he looked up at the man before him. Standing several inches taller than average, the man looked down at him with crystal blue eyes, and spiky blonde hair immediately catching his eyes. There was only one man that could be before him.

“Th… The Yellow… Flash…!” Was all the shinobi could utter.

“Minato sensei!” The two boys called out in relief.

“It appears my assignment didn’t go as planned for you three. Rest easy, boys. I’ll handle this part of the front from here. Kakashi, get yourself and Obito back to the rear and rest. That's an order.” Minato said, a mix of seriousness and warmth coming from his voice as he spoke.

“Yes sir, sensei.” Kakashi replied with a nod.

“I’ll make sure we get back alive, sensei…” Obito said.

“Just rest, Obito. You’ve earned it.” Minato said, before spinning one of his signature kunai and catching it.

“Yes, sir.” Obito sighed.

“See you later, boys. Got some strong points to clear out. Be back in a flash.” Minato said with a smirk and in the blink of the boys’ eyes he was gone.

The boys both groaned as they realized that their sensei had left on a pun. “Really, sensei…?” Kakashi groaned out.

“He can’t keep getting away with that…” Obito groaned.

Sighing, the boys chuckled a bit as they got up. “Come on, Obito. Let’s get back to the rear lines so that we can rest and check up on Rin.” Kakashi told his teammate.

“Look at that. The walking icebox Kakashi caring about a teammate. Looks like you're getting soft, old man.” Obito chuckled.

Kakashi allowed himself a small chuckle in response. “Your soft heartedness must be rubbing off on me. I’ll have to check if the Medical Unit can fix that.” The one-eyed scarecrow replied back as the boys began their trek back.

“That's against Tsunade-sama’s oath, Kakashi. Do please suggest that to her. I’d love to see how she punts you to the moon.” Obito smirked out.

As they walked back, Kakashi looked at Obito out of the corner of his one working eye. “Obito…?” He asked.

“Yeah?” Obito asked.

“Thank you for saving me. And congratulations on awakening your Sharingan…” The cycloptic scarecrow told his teammate honestly with a rare smile under his mask, surprising the young Uchiha.

“Thanks… Kakashi…” Obito said, not entirely sure how to take the compliment from his teammate and rival.

With that, the two made their way back as stealthily and silently as they could, trying to evade any enemy traps. Thankfully, with Obito’s Sharingan, it was easier to catch the traps now that one of them could see chakra and the other could detect scents. However, their luck eventually ran out. Due to the pain he was in, Kakashi failed to pick up on the scent of one enemy trap and right stepped into it. Seeing chakra at four points around Kakashi, Obito saw it flare up and realized what was about to happen.

“Kakashi, get down!” Obito yelled, tackling his teammate out of the way.

Before they could react much further, four exploding tags exploded right where Kakashi had just been. Thankfully, due to Obito tackling him out of the way and covering him, the one-eyed young scarecrow was saved from most of the damage. Obito, however, wasn’t as lucky. Opening his one remaining eye, Kakashi looked up at his teammate as his expression quickly changed to one of horror.

“OBITO!” Kakashi called out in concern, seeing the condition his teammate was in.

Kakashi never imagined there could be so much blood. Pooling and flowing from him like a stuck pig, even the silver haired boy’s keen eye couldn’t count how many lacerations his teammate had. Worse still were the scorched parts of his body, mostly in his back. Kakashi would’ve laughed about how the back half of his head didn’t have any hair if he didn’t witness this in horror. By some miracle, likely Obito’s devil’s luck, his front half was largely unscathed. Only a couple scratches around his eyes being the most of the damage there.

“J-Just a flesh wound…” Obito weakly said, his vision going already.

‘Don’t try to talk, Obito! I’ll get you to the Medical Unit!” Kakashi told his teammate, trying to hold back a panic attack.

“I can get there…” Obito answered.

“No, you can’t! Not like this! Now shut up and save your strength!” Kakashi replied, getting up and moving to grab Obito.

Throwing him over his shoulders in a fireman’s carry, he rushed across the pox marked battlefield. The roar of explosions and the cries of dead and dying filled the air. All of that he had to forcibly ignore, even as it echoed in his mind. Finally rushing into the tent, Kakashi barely was able to stand due to exhaustion and his own blood loss. The blood-soaked sight of the young man shocked Tsunade, who was finishing up sowing together the wounds on an Anbu.

Digging deep into her willpower, she began to work on Obito. Despite him squirming due to the pain, she made good progress befitting a queen of medicine she was. Shizune ran about like a honeybee, fetching whatever Tsunade needed on the fly. Kakashi stood in visible amazement at just how efficient she was. However, all of this came to a stop when Tsunade noticed Kakashi’s eye.

“You can’t go back out onto the battle with a wound to your eye like that, young man.” Tsunade sternly said as she finished up with Obito, putting an arm of his into a splint.

Kakashi looked disappointed at that until he heard someone weakly speak up. “Maybe… he can…” Obito’s voice replied to Tsunade’s words.

“Can what?” she asked curiously, humoring him, as she was amazed he even had the energy to speak.

Obito slowly tried to sit up, which was quickly stopped by Tsunade. Kakashi, however, beat her to the punch by verbally reprimanding him for it. “Obito, save your strength! You’re still badly hurt!” The silver haired dog summoner told his teammate.

“Is that… any way… to talk to someone… who’s about to… do you a favor…? Stupid Kakashi…” Obito weakly slurred out, trying his hardest to stay conscious.

“What are you…? No. NO. I can’t accept that, Obito.” Kakashi adamantly spouted.

“What are you two brats blithering on about?” Tsunade asked, quite annoyed.

“Ts… Tsunade-sama… c… can you… transfer one of… my Sharingan… to Kakashi…” Obito told her as best he could.

“I can. However, only with your partner’s consent to receive it.” Tsunade said bluntly, looking now at Kakashi.

“I cannot accept that, Obito. You looked forward to getting your Sharingan so much. For me to take it from you like that… after all you did to get it… after you saved my life…. I can’t take that. I’m not worthy of such an honor, not with the taint that covers my honor and standing as a shinobi.” Kakashi said, the first time Obito ever heard so much sorrow, indeed tragedy, in his teammate’s normally monotone voice.

“St… Stupid Kakashi…! You… you are worthy…! You’re a… a great ninja…one of the best… I’ve ever met…! It’s why I’ve… I’ve always… considered you my… my rival… and my friend…!” Obito fired back as fiercely and passionately as he could in his state.

“... On the condition that you don’t fight anymore this day and live, damn it.” Kakashi sternly growled, some part of that getting to him, though Obito had no clue on what part did it.

Obito nodded. “O… Only as long… as you kick… enough rock-brained ass… for me and Rin too… and come back alive…” The young Uchiha told his friend with a small smile.

“If it means your stubborn ass will do what the doctor orders, then fine. Let's get this over with.” Kakashi said as he walked over.

“I don’t have the resources to put you under for this, so fair warning to both of you, this is going to be the worst pain of your lives.” Tsunade said as she put on a new pair of gloves.

“If it means repaying the kindness and trust of a friend, I’ll endure any pain I have to.” Kakashi said defiantly.

‘Famous last words, kid.’ Tsunade thought to herself as she got some less than wholesome looking tools from a toolkit Shizune brought.

If one were to ask Kakashi and Obito after that day, would they have in hindsight done that operation and why, the pain would make them reconsider. Kakashi, after hours on the table, staggered to his feet as the left half of his head throbbed in unholy pain. Taking off the bandages only made the pain worse. His now scarred left eye has streams of tears coming down it. Whether from the pain or his responsibility to Obito he did not know.

He turned to address his friend, but Obito, likely due to the pain of the operation and his lack of energy, was barely conscious. He slightly turned his head and barely uttered a brief phrase to him.

“K… Kick some ass… Kakashi…” Obito weakly told the son of the White Fang.

“On it, Obito.” he muttered, turning to head out as Obito finally passed out with a smile on his face.

“Be careful, kid.” Tsunade said to him.

“Of course, Tsunade-sama. I have a promise to keep to a friend. Thank you for your diligence and for saving my teammates.” Kakashi said, bowing his head.

“I’ve lost too many people I cared about in my life. If it means I can prevent that pain for others… then that's enough to drag me back to the frontline…” Tsuande said, having a hard time saying that, before having to rush off to other patients.

Kakashi briefly looked at his teammates and friends. “I’m heading out, you two. Be here when I get back.” Kakashi whispered to a sleeping Rin and Obito, before finally heading out of the tent slowly.

Coming out into the dim light of the day, Kakashi looked up at the sky. It was black with smoke, and it was difficult to see the sunlight, but the sky was still visible. This wasn’t Hell or anything like it. And Kakashi had no intention of going there without keeping his promise.

Opening his left eye, Kakashi’s vision became sharper than ever as everything came into clearer view than he’d ever had for him on his left side. Tears still streaming down the left side of his face, Kakashi’s new Sharingan… a gift from his friend Uchiha Obito… a symbol of the promise he’d made to him… came into view and glanced out over the encampment before him. Drawing his father’s White Light Chakra Sabre again, Hatake Kakashi headed back out into the fray as fast as he could.

Charging back into the enemy lines with his new Sharingan ablaze, Kakashi made one handed hand seals to activate his Chidori again. Closing his right eye, Kakashi took off in a flash as he zipped around the battlefield. Running through and cutting down enemies one by one, the young Chūnin sped through the battlefield like a bolt of lightning. Slash, stab, pierce, rinse and repeat.

Kakashi continued this as he cut down enemy after enemy, determined to pull enough weight to make up for his friends not being out there with him because of their injuries. To make sure that Obito’s faith in him wasn’t misplaced. Trying to keep track of the number of enemies he cut down was a lost cause in his condition.

Coming upon an enemy Chūnin, Kakashi glared at the older shinobi with his Sharingan eye full of determination. Rushing at his foe, the young scarecrow ninja was determined to cut him down quickly. Faster than the Stone Chūnin could react, Kakashi leaped into him and ran his heart through with a handful of lightning while his guard was down, killing him instantly. Rounding on an enemy jōnin, Kakashi took off running. The Jōnin was obviously the field commander here. If he could take him out, he could demoralize the enemy and make things easier for the others while still keeping his promise.

However, Kakashi misjudged his opponent this time. With speed surpassing his own, the Iwagakure Jōnin turned to face him. Drawing two kunai, the Jōnin blocked Kakashi’s blade before attempting to stab him faster than he could run him through with his Chidori. As the two got in close, Kakashi found himself pulled back as a tri-bladed kunai knife was thrown into the eye of the enemy Jōnin, piercing straight through to his brain and killing him instantly.

“M-Minato sensei, I was…” Kakashi tried to say, but words escaped him.

“You don’t have to say anything, Kakashi. From seeing one of Obito’s Sharingan replacing your injured eye, I can guess what happened. He asked you to accept it and get back out here for them, didn’t he?” Minato replied solemnly, knowing his Uchiha student quite well despite their limited amount of time together.

“Y-Yes…” Kakashi said, shame in his voice for his failings.

However, Kakashi was shocked to feel a gentle hand on his shoulder. Looking up, he looked into his sensei’s eyes to see a kind, gentle, and caring look in them. A look of understanding on the blonde Jōnin’s face.

“You’ve more than done your part, Kakashi. Obito and Rin will be proud.” The Yellow Flash told his student.

“I can still fight…” Kakashi tried to insist.

“Will you be able to keep your promise to Obito if you exhaust yourself out here and die?” Minato asked the silver haired boy sternly, causing the young Hatake to flinch.

“Can you at least tell them later I didn’t fail?” Kakashi asked.

Minato gave his young scarecrow student a smile. “Of course I will, Kakashi. Now fall back and protect the medical unit for now while I trim the enemy’s numbers.” He ordered.

“Yes, sir!” Kakashi yelled with a salute, before rushing for the rear.

The Yellow Flash gave a proud smile at his silver haired disciple as he retreated. “Looks like you got through to him, Obito…” He muttered before beginning to draw as many of his tri-bladed kunai as he could hold.

Glancing coldly at the enemy, Minato steeled himself for what he had to do. He couldn’t falter here, not when his students had been out here giving their all. As their sensei, they had inherited this from him.

Throwing his kunai, Minato began teleporting around the battlefield in flashes of golden yellow. Catching kunai, he teleported to and cut down enemies before teleporting to the next enemy and cutting them down as well. He continued this for longer than he could count, carving a path through the enemy to open up a way forward for his allies. He had to clear the way for them.

Creating a spiraling sphere of chakra that looked like a small, basketball sized typhoon, Minato hit an enemy with the attack. Unleashing the jutsu, the resulting explosion sent the opposing Jōnin flying into a group of his kin before the jutsu detonated like a bomb. Teleporting away, Minato slashed open the neck of another enemy before stabbing one through the eye, piercing his brain. Teleporting around the battlefield like a flash of lightning, Namikaze Minato continued his advance.

Stabbing and slashing his way through foe after foe, the Yellow Flash of the Hidden Leaf Village carved a bloody path through the enemy. Finally, after much longer than he’d care to think about, he hit an obstacle he couldn’t bring down alone. That obstacle being a fortress carved into a mountain. Preparing to create the biggest Rasengan he could, Minato was interrupted by a voice ringing out from behind him as an enemy Jōnin attempted to attack him from behind.

“DYNAMIC ENTRY!!!!” Came a mighty, passionate call from the rear as the enemy Jōnin was sent flying by a green colored blur.

Turning to look at his mysterious savior, Minato was surprised by who he saw. “D… Duy-san!? You’re a Genin! What are you doing here?” The Yellow Flash asked the Eternal Genin standing before him.

“You allow your team onto the frontline as mostly Genin, and that fact is somehow being used to preclude my involvement in the greatest battle of our lifetime!? I think not, Minato-san! Rest assured, for these fortresses may stand and endure through the sturdiness of unyielding stone! Yet they shall crumble to dust under the unyielding power of my UNENDING YOUTH!!!!” Might Duy, the Eternal Genin of the Hidden Leaf Village, overzealously called out before giving a thumbs up and a smile to the Jōnin.

“Um… right, Duy-san. I’ll support you while you clear a path. Just don’t overdo it and hurt yourself to the point where you can’t come home to your son.” Minato responded, unsure of how to deal with the… enthusiastically youthful man.

“Gai? That is a fantastic idea, Minato-san! I think that keystone over there will be an excellent souvenir to send home to him! Which would be faster, land or air?” Duy asked.

“Um… please don’t destroy part of the village. Send it by land.” Minato replied with a sweat drop.

“Fair enough, Minato-san! I shall forgo my training weights to replace it with that fine piece of masonry for the return journey! Seventh Gate of Wonder! OPEN!” Duy roared as a rush of energy flowed out of him as a blue aura replaced his green one.

“Hiruzen-sama is gonna kill me for this, isn’t he…?” Minato muttered.

“Cover my youthful flanks and rear, Minato-san! We must clear this rocky virgin ground for our comrades to surge forth and breathe life into this harsh land!!” Duy roared and surged forward towards the pass.

Minato sighed with a smile. “I still don’t know how to talk to that man…” He replied before teleporting off after Dai.

As a blue and green blur, Might Duy rushed his way through the enemy’s ranks like a bull in a China shop. His every blow caved in an enemy’s chest or head, some even reducing his unfaithful foes to paste. However, he did not stop. He continued moving forward, leaving a trail of youthful carnage in his wake as Minato covered him from any enemies who tried to surprise attack the Eternal Genin. Pressing on, they continued to go on the attack.

Eventually, they managed to reach the gate before them. It was a massive, towering structure, easily many times the size of either of them. Just from looking at it, the imposing structure would not be easy to break through.

“Any ideas on how to get through this gate, Duy-san?” Minato calmly asked his temporary subordinate.

“I have one, Minato-san! However, my entire body shall be drained to the point of complete paralyzation! Stand back for fear of falling youthful rubble!” Duy yelled to his Jōnin superior.

Nodding, Minato teleported back a good distance. Knowing Duy from his brief interactions with him and his son, this would not be a subtle jutsu. And it would likely have a lot of collateral damage.

Placing a palm facing forward in front of his face with one hand and tapping it with the other hand, Duy formed a fist, which created a massive amount of air pressure. Forming a unique hand seal resembling a tiger, Duy prepared to unleash his jutsu.

“ROAR, MY YOUTH!! DAYTIME TIGER!!!!” Duy roared out as he launched the air pressure at the gate, the blast of air taking the shape of the impression of a roaring tiger head.

The tiger-shaped blast of air shot forward at the gate, shrinking in size as it got closer at the speed of a supersonic cannonball. Finally, the jutsu connected with the gate and all hell broke loose. With a massive explosion of air pressure and an incredible, roaring shock, the ball of air exploded. The destruction it unleashed destroyed not just the gate, but the entire mountain and part of the next mountain behind it as Minato looked on in shock.

“He’s been sitting on that for how long? Who the hell is evaluating the Chūnin Exams? They are clearly blind as a shrine bat, and likely just as deaf. This man should be competing for Anbu captain by this point…” Minato said in amazement, before snapping himself into reality, and teleporting over to pick him up.

“Gate… breached… Minato-san…!” Duy weakly, yet still overzealously cheered, giving his signature “nice guy” thumbs up from flat on his back on the ground as he panted heavily.

Far from the point of contact with the enemy, Konoha had set up their forward command post. Even as pebbles landed amongst the high-ranking shinobi’s feet, one looked over the scene with a cool stoicness matched only by the stone around him. From his tent came the Hokage Sarutobi Hiruzen, the God of Shinobi now making his presence known on this field of battle.

“It appears Duy has finally unleashed his new technique he came up with alongside his son. What do you think of it, Jiraya?” Hiruzen asked.

“Well, it’s definitely flashy. And it got the job done.” Jiraiya replied with an amused grin.

“Thank you again for joining me. I hope you don’t mind being pulled off your spymaster duties.” Hiruzen said, still looking across the battlefield, not turning to look at Jiraiya.

“I’m more than happy to help, Sarutobi sensei. From the looks of things, we need all hands-on deck for this one. Right, Orochimaru?” Jiraiya replied, looking at his friend.

“Indeed. These fortresses have proven nigh unbreakable. Both toad and snake summons have proven ineffective on the other two passes. However, my sentry snakes noticed forces mustering for a counterattack on our flanks, and the defenders reorganizing deeper in the pass. We have to exploit this breakthrough now, Sarutobi sensei.” Orochimaru explained.

“Orochimaru, organize the flanks and hold those flanking forces down. Make sure they don’t make any progress. You have my permission to cut loose.” Hiruzen grimly ordered.

“At once, sensei.” Orochimaru said with delight, using his snake-like tongue to lick his lips in anticipation before disappearing to perform the ghoulish task.

“Well, Orochimaru has his job. What’s my role, sensei?” Jiraiya asked his teacher.

“We need an exploitation force. Clear that pass, Jiraiya. Don’t hold back.” Hiruzen grimly ordered.

Jiraiya smirked at that. “It seems as though the mighty Toad Sage, the one and only Jiraiya-sama, must finally enter the fray.” He mirthfully replied.

“Don’t bring a mountain down on yourself this time. I’m too old to be digging you out anymore.” Hiruzen warned.

The white-haired Toad Sage waved off his sensei’s warning. “I got it, Sarutobi sensei. Don’t worry so much or you’ll get wrinkles.” Jiraiya replied before taking off to head into the fray.

Charging headfirst into the mountain pass, Jiraiya drew a kunai as he began cutting down Chūnin and Jōnin alike. Dodging a slash from a blade, the Toad Sage lashed out with his wooden geta covered foot, kicking the enemy Chūnin in the chest hard enough to cave their chest in and send them flying back into a group of other Chūnin. Using a kunai to block a slash with a sword from a Jōnin, the perverted hermit kicked the Jōnin in the groin hard enough to shatter his pelvis and send him flying through the air. Slashing a Chūnin’s throat, the mighty Toad Sage saw a group of Jōnin coming with blades and kunai as he began to make a set of hand seals.

“Needle Jizō!” Jiraiya called out as he activated his jutsu.

Using chakra to harden his hair and shape it into spikes as it wrapped around him like armor, Jiraiya used his hardened hair to block the attacks from the weapons. Following this, he impaled his foes with spikes of sharpened hair. Channeling his chakra more, Jiraiya smirked as he activated another jutsu.

“Needle Hell!” Jiraiya called out as he began launching a barrage of hardened hair needles in all directions at his foes.

The force of the fired hair needles pierced deep into nearby stone and impaled enemy shinobi in all directions while launching the already impaled enemy ninja into walls. Deactivating his Needle Jizō, Jiraiya’s hair returned to its normal length and strength as he looked around at the crowd of enemies. Confident he’d left no survivors; he nodded in approval.

“Not the flashiest finish, but it’ll do nicely.” The Toad Sage commented with a grin as he continued on his way.

Heading deeper into the mountain pass, Jiraiya used his kunai and Taijutsu to carve a path through the enemy. Deflecting and countering blows, slitting throats, breaking bones, cracking skulls as he went, Jiraiya continued his path through the enemy in an attempt to clear the way for the rest of the Hidden Leaf’s army. Coming across another group of Chūnin and Jōnin, the perverted hermit made a single hand seal.

“Wild Lion’s Mane Jutsu!” Jiraiya called out as he activated his next jutsu.

Temporarily enhancing his head’s metabolism via chakra, Jiraiya used his chakra to manipulate, harden, and lengthen his hair. Wrapping it around the group of approaching enemies like steel wire, Jiraiya saw the fear in their eyes. Knowing what he had to do, Jiraiya closed his eyes as he manipulated his now steel wire hard hair and tore it into the group of enemies, slicing them all into pieces. Retracting his hair, Jiraiya looked at it, now covered in enemy blood that would take a lot of time and effort to wash out. Sighing at what he had to do, not just to himself, but to the enemy for the sake of his village winning this war, the mighty Toad Sage continued his advance.

As Jiraiya continued his advance, he found his path ahead stopped by a thick wall of stone, obviously artificial in nature from an enemy jutsu. Putting his hand out, Jiraiya began manipulating his chakra to form a truly large, rotating orb of chakra above his hand.

“Big Ball Rasengan!” Jiraiya called out as he rushed forward, ramming the sphere of pure, condensed chakra into the wall of chakra-hardened rock.

As soon as it made contact, the large chakra sphere ground its way into the wall before exploding, blocking it to pieces and causing anything behind it to be crushed or impaled by flying bits of stone debris. Looking up, Jiraiya was only mildly surprised to see what greeted him. A large group of animal masked, armored shinobi with blades on their backs had surrounded him on all sides.

“Anbu, huh? Looks like Old Man Ōnoki’s finally taking us seriously.” Jiraiya commented with amusement.

“You shall go no further, Toad Sage! Not while the blood of stone runs through our veins!” The Anbu captain roared in defiance.

Jiraiya raised a single eyebrow at that. “You do remember that I was trained by the Sandaime Hokage Sarutobi Hiruzen, right? That my teammates and I faced the Hidden Rain’s great Hanzō of the Salamander in combat and lived to tell the tale? What hope could a group of Anbu have against me?” The perverted hermit asked, hoping that these fine young shinobi would surrender peacefully so that things wouldn’t have to get any bloodier than they already had.

“We fight for our homes, our village, and those that live in it. That is the sole hope we need.” He answered simply, despite knowing the odds against them.

They swore to protect their village and its inhabitants. They were to pay with their lives dearly in the name of that goal.

“So, this is the Will of Stone in action, huh? Very well, I accept your challenge, kids. But I won’t go easy on you.” Jiraiya warned them.

“Challenge us as you wish. But it will not avail you.” The Anbu captain answered grimly, drawing their sword from its scabbard.

Kunai in hand, Jiraiya rushed in as the Anbu charged at him. Blocking and dodging slashes from blades, Jiraiya began what could best be described as a one-sided massacre. His every blow, every slash brought down his foes. However, no matter how many he cut down, more took their places. Seeing that he wasn’t getting anywhere, the mighty Toad Sage decided to try a new tactic. Converting his chakra into an extremely thick oil in his mouth, Jiraiya unleashed another jutsu.

‘Toad Oil Bullet!’ Jiraiya thought as he spat out a barrage of bullets made of oil while spinning around him.

The perverted hermit’s technique covered the enemy Anbu in the thick oil and stopped them in place. Making hand seals, Jiraiya gathered oil in his mouth created by chakra as he prepared his next jutsu.

‘Fire Release: Flame Bullet!’ Jiraiya thought out as he spit out and ignited the oil in one moment.

The oil created flames washed over the group of Anbu as they were covered in flames that soon exploded, screaming in agony as they were roasted alive. Closing his eyes, Jiraiya sighed and did a small mental prayer for his enemies. However, as soon as he opened his eyes, he saw himself surrounded once again by more Anbu, this time with multiple Anbu captains present.

‘This isn’t gonna be as easy as I thought…’ The Toad Sage thought as he saw the Anbu captains all going through hand seals.

“SUMMONING JUTSU!” They all called out as they slammed their palms on the ground, massive, billowing puffs of smoke being unleashed as they brought forth massive summoning creatures.

From great pillars of smoke came forth three equally, or greater, creatures of titanic size. One was a great red monitor lizard, which proceeded to flick its tongue into the air. Another was a massive bear with bluish black fur and a scar over one eye. Finally standing firm in the middle was a titanic white wolf, which proceeded to snarl at Jiraya. Seeing their plan, the perverted hermit decided to proverbially fight fire with fire as he went through hand seals of his own.

“SUMMONING JUTSU!” The mighty Toad Sage called out as he slammed both of his hands on the ground, causing three great pillars of smoke of his own to explode beneath him.

From behind him came a more uniform cadre of summons. That of the more amphibian kind. Three titanic toads, two in a red, one in rusty red while the other more magenta, and one in a mix of light and darker blues. The middle one, the shortest, yet widest and with great scars finally spoke up as he gripped his sword at one side.

“Why have you summoned us Jiraya? You interrupted my nap.” Gamabunta grumbled, puffing on his pipe.

“Bunta, Gamaken-san, Gamahiro. I’ll be needing your help here. Can I count on you three?” Jiraiya asked.

“I’m pretty ungraceful and weak, but I will do my best.” Gamaken modestly replied, drawing his sakazuki cup-shaped shield and his sasumata.

“For the glory of the great toad ancestors, we shall drive these mongrel carnivores to their bloodlines’ doom!” Gamahiro boomed in a deep, guttural tone as he gripped his pillar-like swords.

“Save your breath, Hiro. Don’t waste so much energy for the henchmen.” Gamabunta sighed, “And quit with the pessimism, Ken. Don’t make me get the stick.”

Jiraiya smiled at this. “Thanks, you three. I’m glad I can count on you. Can you keep them busy while I get ready to summon the boss and his wife?” The perverted hermit requested.

“I shall do my best, as ungraceful as I am.” Gamaken replied as he readied his weapons.

“Cease Mongrels, or your deaths will be legendary!!!” Gamahiro roared, pointing his swords at them.

“I really need to adjust the contract one of these days…” Gamabunta grumbled as he gripped his massive tanto, preparing for battle.

With that, Jiraiya began to prepare his summoning. Reaching into his robes, he applies red face paint from the corner of his inner eye down in a half circle to his face markings, creating almost a second set of eyes. After a quick set of hand signs, he clasped his hands together in a bowing posture before assuming a wide squat. Closing his eyes, his hands slowly glowed with white energy.

As Jiraiya was preparing his summoning, the two mammalian predators roared, and the monitor lizard hissed as the three charged in. At the same time, the three massive toads roared as they charged in themselves in an attempt to protect their summoner. The ground trembled as the two sides’ thunderous steps and leaps made their way through the mountain pass towards each other, rocks and boulders being shaken loose and sending avalanches crashing down the mountains.

Gamaken, being the fastest of the three toads, met his foe first, the enemy’s massive wolf summon. As it attempted to bite down on him, he rammed into it with his sakazuki cup shaped shield, attempting to push it back. As it tried to push against him and lash out at him with its claws, Gamaken swung his sasumata to knock it back. Striking his foe with thrusts and swings from his sasumata, the “ungraceful” toad summon leaped over a bite from his foe before coming crashing down on them, making the wolf yelp in pain. Spinning his sasumata in hand to grip it with the forked end facing downward, he thrust it down towards his opponent in an attempt to pin the wolf in place by its neck.

Growling in rage, the wolf tried to roll over to throw Gamaken off, kicking and trying to scratch at him with its claws. In response, Gamaken used his shield to block the claw swipes while using his sasumata to keep his enemy pinned down, pushing it further down into his foe’s neck in an attempt to suffocate them. Try as it might, the wolf could not easily escape such a position.

Meanwhile, Gamahiro slashed and thrust with his blades as he tried to hit the monitor lizard hissed in a challenge to the massive toad. Lashing out with its tail, the monitor lizard’s blow was blocked by the flat of one of Gamahiro’s blades. Slashing with the other, the warrior yakuza toad tried to slice off the predatory reptile’s tail only for it to pull it back and leap at him in an attempt to bite him. Stabbing his blades into the ground, Gamahiro unleashed a series of hand chop attacks into the reptilian predator to stagger it before kicking it back. Pulling his blades back free, he slashed it in the chest to force it further back, drawing blood from his foe. Leaping up and forward, Gamahiro pinned the massive lizard down beneath his weight before putting his blades at its neck, as if threatening it to move so that he had an excuse to cut its head off.

Meanwhile, Gamabunta came flying in from his leap while drawing his sword back for a slash. The bear, surprised by the amphibian’s speed, barely had time to react as Gamabunta slashed upwards while putting the force of his leap into his swing.

“TOAD SWORD BEHEADING!” Gamabunta called out, swinging upwards to slash the bear as it tried to swipe down at him with its claws.

The slash attack from the massive Toad Boss summon cut into the bear’s torso as the bear roared in pain while reeling back, the claws of its paw just barely missing Gamabunta’s face. Bringing his sword back down, Gamabunta tried to bring down the bear summon quickly with one blow. However, the bear rolled aside and slashed at Gamabunta with its claws, forcing him to block with the flat of his sword. Making a one-handed hand seal, Gamabunta molded chakra in his mouth as he prepared to unleash another jutsu.

“Water Release: Gunshot!” Gamabunta thought before spitting out a barrage of three orbs of water.

The three orbs collided with the bear’s torso, making it roar in pain as it was pushed back. Stunned, the bear barely had time to block a slash from Gamabunta with its arms, pinning it in place. With their enemies pinned in place, Gamabunta turned to look at his summoner and old friend.

“Now’s your chance, Jiraiya! Hurry it up!” The Toad Boss called out.

“Almost there, Bunta…!” Jiraiya called out as he began glowing with a white light.

However, as Jiraiya was preparing his summoning, the monitor lizard cracked its tail like a whip as thick as a building to knock Gamahiro off of it. Hissing in rage, it took off at Jiraiya as the white light grew in size and brightness. Noticing this, Gamahiro tried to warn his summoner.

“HARK, YOUNG TADPOLE!! BEHIND YOU!!” Gamahiro croaked out in an ever so hint of panic.

“JIRAIYA! LOOK OUT, YOU BUFFOON!” Gamabunta called out to his friend.

The monitor lizard soon made it to Jiraiya and tried to swing its tail at him to crush him. However, before its tail could make contact, something stopped it. Something small, but unbelievably strong. Soon, a massive Flame Bomb jutsu collided with the chest of the reptilian predator before exploding. The blast knocked it back as smoke and dust obscured the Toad Sage.

“Honestly, lad! What do you think yer doin’ summonin’ us in a place like this?” An old female voice croaked out from the dust and smoke.

“Easy, Ma. I’m sure he has his reasons. Though ye do tend to summon us into quite sticky situations, Jiraiya-chan.” A male elderly voice replied back.

“I do apologize, but I am going to need honored Sage Mode to breach this pass for the rest of Konoha’s army to get through. Sensei has tasked me with a very important role in this battle, and you know how the old man is about people letting him down.” Jiraiya explained apologetically.

As the dust and smoke slowly cleared, three pairs of glowing eyes began to come into view as the male voice sighed. “Fair enough, Jiraiya-chan. I had a feelin’ ye wouldn’t summon us for that if it wasn’t important.” The elderly male voice croaked in reply.

“Ye owe us fer this one, lad. I expect ye to come over to our place tonight after the battle fer dinner and a visit. It’s been far too long since we all spent time together without it bein’ for a battle.” The female elderly voice replied.

“Thank you two so much. I owe you one. Now then, how about we clean up the place?” Jiraiya asked.

Fused to his shoulders were two short elderly toads, each going only up to the man’s ears. One was to the human eye clearly more masculine, with pea soup green skin, a white tuft of hair on both his head and chin, and dark black eyeshadows around his large orange eyes. The other was clearly more feminine, with purple poofy hair, large purple-colored lips, and a far lighter shade of green with her skin.

Jiraiya himself, on the other hand, looked quite different. His appearance had taken on much more toad-like features. His nose had grown bigger and warted, his teeth had grown sharp, he had grown a goatee, and he had acquired toad-like eyes. His hands had also become more toad-like and webbed in appearance along with his feet and his posture was more slumped like a toad’s as well. His markings had also seemingly spread across his face.

“How do I keep getting into situations where I have to use this? I swear, this is gonna kill me one of these days…” Jiraiya muttered to himself.

“Ye really need to make time to come back to Mount Myōboku and train to perfect yer Sage Mode, Jiraiya-chan. Maybe then ye won’t need to be so reluctant to use it.” The green male toad, the head of the toads Fukasaku, told his student.

“Pa has a point, lad. Ye really should make time fer it one a’ these days.” The female toad, the Mother of the Toad Way Shima, replied while agreeing with her husband.

“Can we save the ‘Kick the Toad Sage’s Balls’ contest until after certain death has been avoided, please?” Jiraiya pleaded exasperated at the two near mummified elders.

“Fair enough, lad. Are ye ready, Pa?” Shima asked her husband.

“Always ready, Ma!” Fukasaku replied back as the three Sages prepared for battle.

“Why does he look different now?” One Anbu asked.

“I don’t know, those fire shinobi love their costume changes. How they fight wars, I’ll never…” Another Anbu said before being cut off by a massive gout of burning oil.

“SAGE ART: GOEMON!” Jiraiya called out as he unleashed a volume wave of boiling oil, propelled by a Wind Release jutsu from Fukasaku and heated by a Fire Release jutsu from Shima.

As the massive wave of oil washed over them, the Anbu had to leap to avoid being boiled alive. Some of them managed to evade it and clung to the sides of the mountain pass via chakra control on their feet. Others were… not so lucky. The screams of those boiled alive by the makeshift bath of boiling oil would haunt any who survived the battle for years to come.

Looking at the transformed Toad Sage, the Anbu drew their blades and prepared for battle. Signaling, the Anbu Captain who summoned it motioned towards his monitor lizard summon. Hissing in fury as it recovered, the reptilian predator charged in at the Toad Sage, wading through the boiling oil bath even as it hissed in pain. In an instant, the mighty Sage created a spiraling sphere of chakra that quickly grew to gigantic proportions.

“Sage Art: Ultra-Big Ball Rasengan!” Jiraiya called out as he unleashed the jutsu, slamming it right into the reptilian summon.

Hissing in agony, the monitor lizard could only take the attack head on. Soon, the jutsu launched the reptile backwards as it propelled it. Nearby Anbu had to leap out of the way to avoid being swept up by the wind currents of the massive jutsu of pure chakra. Some were not so lucky and were sent flying by the force of it. Soon, the reptilian summon slammed into a mountain as the massive ball of spiraling chakra exploded on impact, carving away and destroying the mountain on impact. Chunks of rock and stone shrapnel were sent flying in all directions from the explosion as the shockwave forced some of the surviving Anbu to take cover as they looked on in disbelief.

“Point Iron to command, line two has been breached! Repeat, Line two has been breached! Sannin sighting confirmed!” One Anbu yelled into his comms as his teammates fell back to further positions.

“Don’t leave yet kiddies! I went to the trouble of going into Sage Mode for you! The least you could do is stick around to see what it can do!” Jiraiya called out before dropping to all fours and leaping forward at high speed.

Faster than any of the Anbu yelling into the comms could react, the mighty Toad Sage was right in front of him. Grabbing him by the face, Jiraiya quickly slammed him into the ground, killing him instantly.

“Least you people can do is get my good side.” Jiraiya said as he noticed a cascade effect across the mountain line as the enemy shinobi fell back.

Charging in after them, Jiraiya began to cut his way through his enemies. Throwing punches and kicks, Jiraiya’s blows instantly killed any enemy shinobi they hit. Some were punched clean through by his blows, some were turned into a fine red mist. Seeing that he wasn’t getting anywhere fast, Jiraiya filled his mouth cavity with oil created with Senjutsu chakra and expelled it while also igniting it.

‘Fire Release: Big Flame Bullet!’ Jiraiya mentally called out as he unleashed a massive ball of fire that went after his foes.

The bullet of fire cut a path through his enemies as it traveled quite a distance. Soon, it collided with something and exploded on contact. Making his way deeper into the mountain pass, Jiraiya continued his path of destruction through the enemy. Finally, he reached a spot that made him look out at what was before him.

Looking out onto the plateau below was the target they had fought so long and hard to reach, the Village Hidden in the Stone. Seeing it before him, Jiraiya would have personally named it the Village Built into the Stone. Its towering walls, somehow taller, thicker, and immensely well-crafted even dwarfed that of Konoha’s. They made him even as he and his toad companions looked upon it feel… so small.

Before that, however, it was a whole new problem. The Stone shinobi had used the time up to this point in the war well and had turned the remaining ground on the plateau into several rings of fortifications from which the defenders could blunt their attacks. Trenches, traps, strongpoint towers, even pre-prepared sites for summon rituals. Around him he saw the shinobi from the various other parts of the battle swarm into these defenses. The village of the stone was about to squeeze every drop of blood they could from Konoha and sell their lives dearly for their homes. It forced a knot in his stomach to form, as he wasn’t so heartless to see the tragedy that had unfolded to reach this point.

“Great. Now how do we get through this one?” Jiraiya asked no one in particular.

“It's quite unbecoming of you to be so uncreative, Jiraiya.” An eerily familiar elderly voice said from behind him.

Jiraiya looked behind him and smiled to see his sensei coming up behind him on the path he opened up. “Hello, Sarutobi sensei. Glad you made it. How are Bunta and the others holding up back there?” The Toad Sage asked, a bit worried about his summoned partners.

“They’re managing, though with the Stone falling back to this new line, no doubt new summons will be sicked on them now that they're isolated. Our own forces have been quite battered. If we can’t use what little momentum we have left, this battle will be over, and I fear the war.” Hiruzen said, stepping out in front of Jiraiya onto a ledge.

“You got a plan, sensei?” Jiraiya asked, already having an idea of what the old man was thinking.

“Cover the rear, Jiraiya. I’ll take point. I started this damn war, and I’m going to end it.” Hiruzen ominously said, as he prepared to jump off the ledge.

Nodding, Jiraiya prepared for battle. “Got it, sensei. Boss, Ma. You ready?” The Toad Sage replied.

“As we’ll ever be, lad.” Shima replied.

“We’ll need to try to be more careful with this one.” Fukasaku commented as the three Sages prepared to follow Hiruzen into the fray as Hiruzen bit his thumb and prepared to summon.

“Summoning Jutsu! Monkey King: Enma!” The Sandaime Hokage called out as he slammed his palm on the ground, a billowing cloud of smoke erupting from the spot.

Erupting from the smoke stood a tall humanoid that from a distance could be mistaken for a shinobi with a tiger fur shirt over his uniform. It didn’t take much of a closer look to reveal it was instead a towering monkey in that uniform, with short brown fur, long white hair like Jiraiya’s, long nails, and a squat flattened face with large white sideburns and a goatee. It then turned to look at Hiruzen.

“It’s been a while, Sarutobi. I take it you summoned me so that we can finally put an end to this war?” Enma, the Monkey King, asked his old friend.

“I wish it didn’t come to this old friend, but it has. We need to break through that gate and clear a path for our forces when they move closer to the front. If I can have the honor of having you by my side.” Hiruzen explained solemnly, the weight of this eternal tragedy born laid bare onto his aging frame.

“Always, Sarutobi. Though we may not agree with anything, I’m glad to fight by your side.” Enma replied respectfully as he began molding chakra.

“Transformation: Adamantine Staff!” Enma called out as, in a puff of smoke, he turned into his staff form and flew into Hiruzen’s extended hand.

“As the gods in the heavens as my witness, give me the strength to purge my greatest sin from this earth.” Hiruzen said to himself, closing his eyes and taking a deep breath, before jumping into the heart of battle with Jiraiya right behind him.

As the two Kage level shinobi crashed down into the fray, the ground cracked and broke beneath them. Immediately, like bullets shot from a gun, the two charged headfirst into the fray with Hirzuen taking the lead.

To Be Continued...

Chapter Text

Gripping the staff firmly, Hirzuen dug deep into his mind and soul, and shifting his feet slightly, he surged forward. Immediately, all others save for Jiraya lost track of him as he smashed through a stone strongpoint with a single swing. Several teams converged around him, all attacking in unison to try and overwhelm them. Unfortunately, they didn’t see the very bone shattering blows coming, as in the blink of an eye, over a dozen shinobi were dead at the Hokage’s feet from a single swift and fluid motion.

For a moment, some of the Stone ninja stepped back in fear. In an instant, a dozen men were taken down. They couldn’t believe it. Was this the power of the God of Shinobi…?

However, one brave Iwa nin was the first to lead the charge. “He’s just one old man! Take him down!” The Hidden Stone shinobi roared out, charging into the fray as the others roared and followed.

“Very true.” Hirzuen mused as he let the shinobi charge at him.

Following the lone shinobi was a tidal wave of Iwa nin, all roaring towards Hiruzen and Jiraiya. Looking at each other, the student and teacher pair nodded to each other as they both went through hand seals. Hiruzen made four Shadow Clones of himself, each one of them making a different set of hand seals. Meanwhile, Jiraiya made a set of hand seals as fast as he could. Once they were done, the five Hiruzens inhaled while the Toad Sage prepared his jutsu.

‘Five Release Great Combo Jutsu!’ The five Third Hokage all thought as each one unleashed a different elemental jutsu blast of one of the five elements.

‘Fire Release: Big Flame Bullet!’ Jiraiya thought, using Senjutsu to fill his mouth cavity with oil made from his chakra, then expelling and igniting it at the same time.

The massive wave of elemental Ninjutsu approached the charging shinobi, who all went through hand seals of their own. Many were nervous but knew they couldn’t back down. They needed to win.

“Earth Release: Earth-Style Wall!” The Stone nin at the front of the line all called out as they made a massive wall of stone appear between them and the blast, hoping that this would be enough to save them.

However, they quickly discovered how wrong they were. The massive elemental blast hit the wall hard, the Lightning Release part of the combination attack going straight through the wall like it was made of paper. The structural integrity of the wall being compromised by the hole in it allowed for the other parts of the blast to begin punching their way through as the Lightning Release blast tore through the Iwa lines like a hot knife through butter. The wall then gave way as the rest of the blast tore through the Stone shinobi. When the blast dissipated, the Stone shinobi looked on in disbelief.

As if heaven itself had voiced their displeasure at them, no human defense could have stayed or even slowed this show of power. The shinobi were torn asunder in too many ways to describe. What was left in the elemental onslaughts path was a scoured and torn asunder gorge in the battlefield. It had been twisted, torn, and left to a jagged crag in the once carefully cared for earth. After surveying this for but a moment, the Hokage turned towards the walls before him.

Taking up his staff again as his Shadow Clones dispelled, Hiruzen charged into the fray with Jiraiya right behind him. One Iwa nin gulped as the two Kage Level shinobi charged right at them. One began to pray on a rosary as another opened up his weapons pouch. Then, with a roar, the first of the Iwa shinobi charged in as his compatriots roared and followed behind him in a tidal wave of bodies.

With stoic expressions, the Hokage and Toad Sage charged together towards the small army of enemy nin. When they made contact, the two plowed straight through the front line of foes. Spinning his staff, Hiruzen smashed and jabbed his way through enemy after enemy while Jiraiya, using pure hand-to-hand combat, punched and kicked his way through their foes. The two each dodged under an attack from a foe before kicking them away hard enough to send them crashing and digging into the earth.

Kicking a foe in the face, Hiruzen used his enemy as a springboard to leap into the air as he made one-handed hand seals while kneading chakra. ‘Fire Release: Fire Dragon Flame Bullet!’ Hiruzen thought, breathing out a blast of fire that quickly took the shape of a dragon and divided to attack multiple targets.

The blasts erupted in fiery explosions as Hiruzen landed on the ground and rushed forward. Spinning his staff, he smashed and jabbed his way through multiple foes. Spinning his staff overhead to gain some distance, Hiruzen then extended it forward to smash through a line of Iwa nin before sweeping it aside to smash into more of them. Quickly retracting the staff, Hiruzen Hiruzen threw a handful of shuriken before making one handed hand seals.

“Shuriken Shadow Clone Jutsu!” Hiruzen called out as the handful of shuriken quickly multiplied into a storm of razor-sharp steel.

The massive barrage of iron hell carved a path through the Hokage’s enemies as Hiruzen made three one-handed hand seals. He then turned towards another line of Iwa nin as a mud source appeared and took the form of a massive dragon head.

“Earth Release: Earth Dragon Bullet!” Hiruzen called out as the dragon shot out massive, high-speed balls of mud.

Hiruzen then made more one-handed hand seals. ‘Fire Release: Fire Dragon Bullet!” Hiruzen called out, exhaling a massive gout of flames from his mouth that lit the mud balls on fire.

The flaming mud balls collided with the line of foes and exploded on contact, causing a series of explosions. Charging back into the fray, Hiruzen spun his staff as he swiped, smashed, and thrusted it against his foes. His every blow shook the earth, his every strike a localized earthquake for the spot he struck. No foe who was in his way survived first contact with him. Soon, the first line of foes was wiped out by Hiruzen and Jiraiya as the two took a deep breath. Turning towards the enemy lines, they surveyed the situation.

Behind them lay a hole in the lines, one cut open as if by the hand of a deity. Walls crushed into rubble, trenches flattened open, traps torn to kindling, and other defenses ripped open as if by a giant. Even Jiraya was a bit stunned at how much devastation they were bringing. Hirzuen, however, remained focused. Too many had suffered for his mistake. These poor souls would hopefully be the last to have to pay for it, to save the rest of the shinobi world.

Taking off at high speed, Hiruzen and his Shadow Clones went through hand seals. ‘Fire Release: Great Flame Flower Jutsu!’ They thought, leaping high into the air before breathing out a multitude of large fireballs.

The barrage of fireballs rained down on the enemies' defensive lines like a meteor storm, blowing apart barricades and hitting enemies on impact. With each collision, the fireballs erupted into geysers of flames as they exploded on impact. Stone ninja left and right were either incinerated on impact, blown to pieces from being near the points of impact, or light ablaze by the flames of the explosions and burned to death. No man or woman was spared from the devastation of the bombardment.

Landing on the ground, the Hokage and his doppelgangers went through more hand seals. ‘Fire Release: Phoenix Sage Fire Jutsu!’ They thought, unleashing barrages of smaller fireballs into the enemy lines.

With each fireball that hit, the enemies were either lit ablaze on impact or shredded into mincemeat by shuriken hidden within the fireballs. The enemy were forced to slowly begin to retreat from the relentless assault. The older shinobi before them was no man. He was more like a monster or a vengeful god who had come to claim their lives.

When they looked, the Hokage and his clones were all gone. The Iwa nin were puzzled at first before ten of them each found themselves grabbed by the ankles. Too little too late, they realized what had happened.

“Th-They’re underground!” One of the enemy nin shouted out in fear before the ten were all pulled into the ground until only their heads were sticking out.

The Hokage and his clones then popped up out of the ground and kicked the exposed heads of five nin, knocking their heads off and sending them flying like rugby balls across the battlefield. Doing the same to the other five, the five Hiruzen’s turned to stare down at the enemy before them. As if feeling them out, assessing their numbers.

Drawing some kunai, the Hiruzen’s threw all of them at the enemy. Though the enemies seemed to dodge them, one nin looked at a passing kunai and noticed a strange marking on it. A technique formula. Realizing too late what this meant, the nin didn’t have time to scream before one of the Hokage appeared behind him with staff in hand and smashed his head in. The five Hiruzen’s each jumped from kunai to kunai, smashing down or cutting the throats of enemies before throwing the kunai again and repeating the process.

Going through hand seals, one of the Hokage duplicates activated another jutsu. “Bringer of Darkness Jutsu!” He called out as the entire area seemed to turn black for the enemy ninja.

It felt as if a dark, empty void was swallowing them up as they tried to look around for their targets. Thinking quickly, one of the commanders came up with an idea.

“Back-to-back, men! Hurry!” The commander barked out as the enemy nin grouped together into formations to try to watch each other’s blind spots.

However, the strategy availed them nothing. The Hokage and his clones continued to zip around the battlefield, smashing and slashing into enemies to cut them down. The enemies’ numbers began to dwindle. One by one, they were going down. Slaughtered like animals at an altar to a wrathful deity.

Kneading chakra in their bodies, the five Hiruzen’s transformed it into water before shaping it into senbon needles. Spitting them out, the five Hokage duplicates unleashed a barrage of water needles that tore through some of the still blinded enemies like machine gun fire. The enemies screamed in pain as they were gunned down by the hail of sharpened water needles. Seeing the losses they were taking, they continued trying to fall back.

Seeing the damage they were doing, the Hiruzen’s tried to concentrate on their part of the battlefield, leaving Jiraiya’s part in his capable hands. Going through hand seals, they prepared to unleash another jutsu. ‘Water Release: Water Bullet Jutsu!’ They called out mentally, kneading chakra in their stomachs.

Soon, the five Hokage duplicates unleashed large quantities of water from their mouths. The streams of water smashed through earthen defenses, the water crushing and annihilating any enemy shinobi in their paths. Going through more hand seals, the middle aged Hokage doppelgangers prepared their next assault. ‘Water Release: Water Colliding Wave!’ They mentally called out, expelling massive amounts of water from their mouths.

The water blasts turned into massive vortexes that rose up and came crashing down onto their foes, smashing them into the ground before washing them away. The water pooled deeply on the ground of the battlefield, forcing all of the shinobi present to use chakra to stand on the water beneath them. Going through a multitude of hand seals at a seemingly impossible speed, the Hiruzen’s began their next offensive. “Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet!” They called out, molding the water beneath them with chakra.

The water took the shape of five water dragons that crashed down onto their targets, doing a massive amount of damage as explosions of water went off in the area. Going through more hand seals, the Hiruzen’s pressed their attack. “Water Release: Water Fang Bullet!” They called out, beginning their next attack.

The water began to swirl in pools on the surface before taking shape into highly compacted projectiles. The high-pressure water projectiles were shot from the water at high speed in spinning forms, shredding through every enemy they hit. One officer however, by some miracle, stopped several of the stone shinobi from fleeing.

“Are you all just going to let this old bastard walk all over this village!?” The officer roared.

“Sir. He already is.” A Genin replied, referring to the carnage unfolding behind him.

“No excuses, Genin! Engage attack formation fire!” The officer ordered.

At that the shinobi formed up, and all began to perform synchronized hand symbols. Hiruzen turned his head to see just as they finished.

“Combination Fire Release: Fire Dragon Flame Bullet!” They yelled.

Molding chakra in their bellies, they unleashed massive torrents of fire at the five Hokage doppelgangers. Unperturbed, the five Hiruzen’s quickly went through hand seals for a group Water Release jutsu to block it. “Water Release: Water Formation Wall!” The five Hokage doppelgangers called out.

Five spiraling walls of water shot up from the water beneath their feet, blocking the combination Fire Release jutsu as the heat turned the water to steam. Unable to see their enemy, the Iwa nin could only prepare for whatever he would do next. Before they could react, a barrage of kunai came out from the steam that, despite being dodged, allowed the Hiruzen’s to appear within their ranks in flashes of yellow light, having just gone through hand seals. The Stone nin could only look on in horror at what came next, too slow to counter it. ‘Water Release: Water Severing Wave!’ The five Hokage doppelgangers mentally called out.

Shooting out highly condensed, pressurized water waves, the five Hiruzen’s swept their attacks across the battlefield. The pressurized streams cut clean through their enemies like sweeping blades, slicing them in half, cutting off limbs, or decapitating some of the luckier ones. Before they could be attacked, the five middle-aged Hokage threw more kunai and jumped to the blades again. Going through hand seals, the five Hokage doppelgangers prepared their next attack.

The five Hokage duplicates pooled together large amounts of water beneath groups of their foes. Soon, the pools of water fired their enemies into the air and shot numerous water bullets at them. The water bullets then formed into massive water dragons. Motioning with their hands, the five Hiruzen’s brought the water dragons down on their foes.

“Water Release: Water Dragon Biting Explosion!” The five middle-aged Hokage called out as the water dragons bit down onto their foes and sent them crashing to the ground in explosions of water.

Seeing only a single group left, the Hiruzen’s went through more hand seals and pooled some more water beneath their foes that exploded, shooting them into the air. The five middle-aged Hokage launched themselves into the air above their foes, creating large whirlpools around their arms. “Water Release: Hard Whirlpool Water Blade!” The five called out, striking their opponents with the attacks and bringing them down in large watery explosions, killing the last of the enemies between them and the gates. Finally, out of chakra, the four Shadow Clones disappeared in puffs of smoke as Hiruzen panted from exerting himself so much.

“I’m getting too old for this crap anymore.” Hiruzen said as he soon walked through the wreckage to the main village gate.

“Getting soft, sensei?” A familiar voice called out as Hirzuen turned to look at the source, seeing Jiraiya and the great sage toads covered in blood.

“I don’t think the path of corpses would agree with you.” Hiruzen answered his pupil.

“Fair enough. So, how’re we gonna smash open this gate? I could probably handle it myself.” Jiraiya offered to his old teacher.

“No.” Hiruzen sternly said as he walked to the center of the gate.

Jiraiya raised an eyebrow at that as Fukasaku spoke up. “No? Ya’ have a plan of yer own in mind, Hiruzen-chan?” he asked curiously.

“This war started from my short-sighted mistakes. So many lives on both sides, entire clans, whole countrysides of innocent lives… All their blood is on my hands. This is between me and Ōnoki. If that short, lazy bastard doesn’t have the balls left to come out and face me, then I’m going to bust down his precious gate, tear the stone from his village’s foundation, and MAKE him face me!!!” Hiruzen roared as got into an eerily familiar stance.

Jiraya and the two toads looked on in shock as chakra began leaking out of Hiruzen and his skin began turning red. “The Eight Gates!? Lad, be careful! Yer not as young as ya’ used to be!” Shima called out in concern.

“I KKKNNNNOOOOOOOOWWWWWWWW!!!!!!!” Hiruzen roared, cutting above the din of the battle.

The middle aged Hokage’s hands glowed white with air pressure as he prepared to punch. “OOOOOXEN STAMPEEEEEDE!” He roared out before punching forward with all of his might, unleashing a barrage of punches like an air cannon.

The massive shots of air took the shape of a herd of charging oxen as the blasts of air smashed into the gate with the force of magnitude eight earthquakes. Each time one of the oxen made of compressed air collided with the gate, an explosion went off as the ground shook like a god stomping the earth. Soon, the gate began to bend as the stone around it began to crack apart. It wouldn’t hold out much longer.

Finally, Hiruzen panted heavily as he prepared one last attack. “CRANE WING ATTACK!” He roared out as he leaped into the air, a blue aura surrounding him taking the shape of a crane’s wings.

As he shot forward, the attack sliced like a blade into what was left of the gate. The impact blew it into pieces and smashed it in as the walls surrounding the gate gave way and crumbled like rice crackers under the sheer force. The gate was breached at last.

The dust cloud slowly began to settle as the bulk of defenders congregated to make their stand at the breach. Grimly they stared into the murky cloud as a figure slowly walked out. To the defenders’ horror, it was not a man, but their god. Dusting himself off, Hiruzen, caked in sweat, gore and masonry powder, stood in defiance of the shinobi’s efforts to save their village.

“Who’s next?” Hiruzen asked, doing his best to hide the panting and escalating exhaustion.

In a single wave of motion, weapons and tools were dropped as the shinobi threw their hands up where they could clearly be seen. Nothing known to man could stop the clear final motion of the war. It was over, and the Village Hidden in the Stone had surrendered to Hiruzen, God of Shinobi.

Tsuchikage’s Office, Several Hours Later

Hiruzen was ushered into the Tsuchikage’s office, to be met by the stern glare of Ōnoki. Motioning to take a seat, Hiruzen sat down on a chair provided for him before the door was closed behind him. An awkward silence soon fell upon the Kages.

“You're starting to bald.” Hiruzen said, trying to break the ice.

Ōnoki seemingly grew offended at that but tried to contain his anger due to knowing that he had lost. “And I see you beginning to develop liver spots, Sarutobi. Perhaps you should consider choosing a successor. The stresses of being a Kage tend to wear on a person and you’re not a spring chicken anymore.” The older, significantly shorter Kage replied with the best smile he could.

“If that's your definition of retirement, then why are you still in that chair? Or did you run out of successors to your glorious hairline?” Hiruzen answered, raising his eyebrow.

Ōnoki’s eye twitched in irritation at that. “I simply haven’t yet found a shinobi in my village worthy of being made my successor yet. You, on the other hand, have many fine young shinobi in your village capable of taking the mantle of Hokage off of your hands so that you can enjoy retirement, Sarutobi. Need I remind you of your precious students the Sannin or those striplings Uchiha Fugaku and Namikaze Minato?” Ōnoki replied with a snide edge.

“Indeed, they are quite the candidates, if you wish your future peer to be green around the gills. Of course you would, but I will not accuse you of something so clever. I would remind you of your successors, but it appears they all have contracted a terrible case of ‘I killed them all’.” Hiruzen calmly replied.

Barely containing his anger, Ōnoki smirked. “It appears you’re going soft in your old age, Sarutobi. You would’ve been capable of a much more stinging comeback than that if you were ten years younger.” The Tsuchikage replied.

“I would if I had better material to comeback from.” Hiruzen simply answered with a sly smirk.

Sighing, Ōnoki of Both Scales gave a smirk. “Touché, Sarutobi. But enough of the pleasantries. We have negotiations to get through.”

“Indeed. For this war has gone on for far too long. Far longer than it should.” Hiruzen mournfully said in agreement.

“On that, we agree. Regardless of which of us started this war, it has gone on for far too long. Even if the Hidden Stone did suffer unjust accusations of provoking it.” Ōnoki admitted equally as mournfully.

“You started this war. We have the evidence. Several Iwa shinobi in clearly your uniforms and kit attacked our embassy in the Land of Grass, a civilian target.” Hiruzen sternly answered, pulling out a scroll for the fellow kage to see.

“What!? I ordered no such attack! Let me see this so-called ‘evidence’ right now!” Ōnoki demanded, incredulous at the idea that any of his men would have committed such an unjustified attack without his authorization.

Hiruzen raised his eyebrow at that reaction but unfolded the scroll for him to see. The old Fence Sitter looked over the pictures and descriptions with a fine-tooth comb. All the while his stony visage was cracked by the brutality of the massacre of the event. Yet through it all, he sat back, not with anger, but as if he had learned a horrible truth.

“Hiruzen… I think we’ve both been had.” Ōnoki admitted in frustration.

“What…?” Hiruzen asked, his breath leaving his lungs in shock.

“Look at the markings in these pictures from the attack. There are clear indications of Earth Release jutsu having been used, but the damage is too minimal to have been done by any Iwa nin who attacked with intent to kill or cause intensive damage. Not to mention that the scorch marks from Fire Release jutsu are too dark and intense. We Hidden Stone shinobi are mainly Earth Style natured when it comes to our Chakra Natures, which means that the scorch marks should be less intense and the damage from the Earth Release jutsu more intensive.” The old Fence Sitter pointed out, which encouraged the aged Fire Shadow to look more closely at the damage his older peer pointed out.

“Their kit doesn’t even appear to be genuine articles, but finely made reproductions. They even attacked from the top of the building like how our forces would, not from the ground level like yours. This whole war… gods, what have I done…?” Hiruzen said, his voice being lost near the end.

“You mean, ‘What have we done’, Hiruzen. We were both played by whoever started this.” Ōnoki corrected his slightly younger fellow Kage, clear anger at the fact that they had been set up against each other in his voice.

“For now, until we can set up a session to properly negotiate, we both should investigate on our own ends to get to the bottom of this. And if finding it, deal with it so the others don’t find out.” Hiruzen said simply, closing up the scroll.

“Agreed. If word got out that someone from your village staged an attack on your own embassy and pinned it on mine, this could prolong the war out of outrage and turn all five Great Nations against each other in a five-way war that would destroy us all.” Ōnoki admitted with a nod.

“Rest assured; it will be resolved tonight.” Hiruzen answered ominously.

Ōnoki raised an eyebrow at that. “You have an idea of who might be behind this?” He asked the Fire Shadow.

“I do. My only regret is that I wish it didn’t have to come to this.” Hiruzen said before walking out, leaving the old stone kage confused at just what was about to happen next.

Back in the Hidden Leaf Village, One Week Later

Hiruzen led Orochimaru and Jiraya through a winding, old path of the forest. While the two Sannin were confused at their master's lack of words, they followed him regardless. Soon they arrived at what was clearly the entrance of Root, forcing the two Sannin to speak up.

“Sensei, why are we visiting that old war hawk Danzō? I thought you said you had to do something that was vital for the negotiations.” Jiraiya asked, clearly confused.

“I am. To ensure peace, the hawks of the village need to have their wings clipped.” Hiruzen ominously answered.

“You suspect that he may have had something to do with the start of this war and wish to deal with this as quietly as possible. Don’t you, Sarutobi sensei?” Orochimaru said, taking a guess at what his old teacher was thinking.

“I wish it was only that.” Hiruzen responded, not making the two men feel any better.

“Then why are we here? You should be able to handle this yourself.” Jiraiya pointed out.

“If I don’t return in half an hour, your S-Rank mission is to wipe Root off the face of the planet.” Hiruzen ordered sternly, shocking Jiraiya and even surprising Orochimaru.

“How deep does this go, sensei?” Jiraiya asked worriedly.

“For once, I agree with Jiraiya. This must be much worse than it seems if you are assigning us a mission like that, sensei.” Orochimaru added.

“I’m doing this to protect you and everyone else in the village, regardless of what happens to me. I swore at the start I’d finish this war.” Hiruzen answered grimly, before walking towards the entrance, hidden to most lesser eyes.

The door to a small, squat compound was flung open for him by two masked Root shinobi, who then afterwards immediately bowed as Hiruzen passed. The aging Hokage, however, didn’t say a word as he passed Root shinobi on both sides of him bowing. They didn’t matter. He kept his eyes literally on his prize down the long, narrow hallway. He even passed through the open center of the compound, through the bulk of stationed troops there, parting for him wordlessly. When he finally reached the office of the head of root, the door was opened for him, to reveal a very surprised Danzō.

“Hiruzen? Is something wrong?” The old war hawk asked his leader and old friend, surprised by the suddenness of this visit.

“You tell me, old friend.” Hiruzen dryly answered, lowering his head so the Root leader could see the look in his eyes.

The look in the aged Hokage’s eyes scared Danzō a bit, even if he didn’t show it. He had only ever seen that look in Hiruzen’s eyes when they were on the battlefield together, facing down enemies. What could his old friend have discovered among his secrets that would make him look at him with those eyes. Then, even though he didn’t show it, the old war hawk felt a chill go up his spine as he got an idea of what it could be.

“Hiruzen, whatever I have done to anger you, I am sure we can work things out.” The one-eyed council member told his leader, trying to cover his own ass in as subtle a way he could in this situation.

“Good. Then you can start by giving me all your files on the Land of Grass Embassy attack.” Hiruzen answered.

Danzō’s one eye widened a bit, realizing that the Hokage knew. “I’d be happy to, but why would you need those files? It’s clear cut what happened. The Hidden Stone attacked the embassy, which is what sparked this conflict in the first place.” he replied, trying to contain his fear.

“I wish to cross reference your findings with this copy of the Stone’s findings. Ōnoki-dono personally gave a copy of them to me from his own personal vault.” Hiruzen said, revealing the travel sized scroll hanging from his belt.

If Danzō were anyone else, he would be visibly shitting bricks at this moment. Instead, he was merely very concerned, which was about as close to shitting bricks as he could get. “He did, did he? Then it would be best to go over both versions of the incident to make sure that everything lines up, would it not?” The old war hawk asked, trying to hide his fear.

“Agreed, old friend. Perhaps you can provide me with that copy. If you could be so kind.” Hiruzen said, putting his hands on his friend's desk, leaning forward to look him in the eyes.

The one-eyed council member nodded in response, trying to keep from shitting himself. “Of course, Hiruzen.” He replied, reaching into his personal vault to pull out the documents.

“I want the Root copy. Not the version you gave me.” Hiruzen politely asked, sending a chill up Danzō’s spine.

“O-Of course, Hiruzen. I am more than happy to help.” The old war hawk stuttered for a moment, cursing his own slip up.

Outwardly, Danzō looked relatively calm considering the situation. On the inside, however, he was panicking. If he gave Hiruzen the same file from before and he noticed it, he would be dead. If he gave him the Root version, thereby outing himself, there was no telling what the aged Hokage would do to him. In their younger years, Danzō would have been confident he could take Hiruzen in a fight if necessary. Now, however, it was a very different story…

Weighing his options and deciding that, for once, genuine honesty would be best to keep him from getting himself into even more trouble, the Darkness of Shinobi opted to give Hiruzen the real file as he reached into his vault and pulled out the scroll with the file. “Here you are, old friend. I hope we can resolve this matter as quickly and efficiently as possible.” He said, handing the aged Hokage the file.

Hiruzen politely took it, and unfurled it, slowly reading it. To his old friend’s horror, he truly couldn’t tell at that moment how he was taking what he was reading. For the first time in their lives, Hiruzen was as completely unreadable as stone to Danzō. Once he had finished, he gently added the scroll to his bed. Then in an instant, Hiruzen practically teleported to Danzo, and slammed him into the wall by his neck hard enough to rattle the compound.

“H-Hiruzen, what are you-” Danzō choked out, only for the aged Hokage to cut him off.

“You lied to me.” Was what came from the Hokage’s voice, now showing the true depth of betrayal and rage boiling inside him as the one-eyed council member began to panic.

“I-I only did what was necessary to ensure a potential threat to the village was eliminated before it could become a problem!” Danzō choked out in a panicked voice, trying to reason with his old friend.

A single vein on the old Hokage’s head popped upon hearing that as he replied, “You lied to me, the village, the very people you swore an oath to the heavens to protect, and you have the gall to say that! IF you wanted that, you would have prevented a war!! AND YOU HAVE THE GALL TO LIE TO MY FACE NOW!!?”

“H-Hiruzen, calm down! Please be reasonable!” The old war hawk choked out in fear, trying to regain control of the situation. If he’d even had it in the first place.

A second vein popped in Hiruzen’s forehead as he pulled the man back off the wall, only to slam him back into it harder and make him release a choked cry of pain.

“You started this war! You killed citizens of the Land of Fire! You brought our allies to the brink of destruction! ALL ON A NEVER-ENDING LIE YOU WISH TO KEEP ALIVE NOW!!??” Hiruzen roared in volcanic rage.

“H-Hiruzen, please! L-Let me explain…!” Danzō begged in a choked panic, trying to calm his old rival and friend down.

“Explain?! EXPLAIN!!? How about you explain to the families of the diplomats you murdered! The clans and families of the shinobi of all the nations you condemned to a pointless death!! The thousands more you have scarred for the rest of their days! The countless civilians killed and displaced in this war! That will be the only explaining you will do if I have my way with you! YOU’RE lucky I’m not dragging you to the center of the village, proclaiming you and your TREASONOUS organization’s crimes to the village, and beheading you and your minions PERSONALLY!!!” Hiruzen roared, his voice threatening to crack the walls of the room from its sheer force.

Danzō remained silent at that, realizing that there was no way out of this for him. If he said anything further, it would only make his inevitable punishment even worse. Seeing that now, he decided it was best not to say anything more and listen. Hiruzen then let go of him, letting him drop to the floor and gasp and cough for breath like a caught fish.

“And yet fortune still smiles upon you, for I have more important matters than dealing with you right now. Like fixing your mess.” Hiruzen said, before slowly walking towards the doorway.

Danzō continued to cough and gasp for air like a man who had nearly drowned, his throat burning from the pain of the tight grip Hiruzen had held him in just moments before. Looking up at his old rival’s retreating back in fear, the old war hawk tried to collect himself. To his horror, however, Hiruzen stopped.

“Your orders are to recall all your agents from the field, regardless of the importance of their mission. You and Root will be put under house arrest here by the Anbu under my command until I decide what to do with you. Do you understand?” Hiruzen sternly ordered, without looking at him.

Finally, having recovered enough to speak, Danzō opted to obey. ‘Yes… Hokage-sama…” He replied in a defeated tone of voice.

With that Hirzuen slowly and assuredly left. Not a single soul daring to resist, or even look up at him from their bows. The path to peace could now finally begin.

The Land of Iron, Two Months Later

The grand summit hall of the Land of Iron stood defiantly against the harsh, cold elements of the mountainous nation. Its gray plate clad samurai standing equally defiantly in defense of their nation, guarding the hall as they always had in an ever-changing world. From the great hall stepped a man with a long face and a sharp chin, with a samurai’s topknot for his dark gray hair. The various kage of both sides one by one made their way through. Ōnoki led the way, followed by his two compatriots, the stoic Mizukage and the hulking A the Fourth.

“It is an honor to have you all here, Ōnoki-dono.” The samurai said courteously, bowing his head in respect for the aged lord of shinobi.

“Thank you for hosting this summit, Mifune-dono. I just wish it were under better circumstances.” Ōnoki replied, taking his seat and setting his hat down in front of him.

“I merely am grateful that the war didn’t drag further into a spiral of endless destruction. The fact that no nations were completely exterminated this time is a step in the right direction.” Mifune said with a sigh.

Soon the other side of the negotiations arrived, though admittedly in grander style. While the first three kage had very simple escorts and maybe an advisor standing near them, Hiruzen certainly didn’t skimp. Rasa and his delegates arrived first, his stern, appraising glare set the tone for his allies. Behind him was Oda, shocking the other side’s Kage as he was no longer the leader, decked out in his old robes as leader.

Clad in metallic sheened robes of the deepest black, purest gold, and sharpest silvers, it was embroidered in the flowing, twisting curves reminiscent of a dragon emerging from a whirlpool. A great hood obscured the old man's face as his great cane firmly tapped on the hard stone. No symbol or marking, not even of clan besmirched this fine ornament except one thing. Both the front and back were emblazoned with the kanji for one in the finest and deepest of blood red silks.

Thundering up the steps behind him were twelve great figures in similar attire marching in lock step in two lines of six. The minor difference for each was the numbers two through thirteen in a z pattern descending order down the lines. Each one carried an ancient, masterfully crafted spear of smooth lacquered wood, and some of the finest blades those who saw them had ever seen. Yet most striking of all was their robes eschewed the hood of their old, wizened peer. Instead, the rest of the room was faced with great war masks made in the image of the faces of snarling, pine green and gold dragons. When Oda sat down and flipped back his hood, the twelve in a concave formation took their vigil, standing behind the other shinobi escorts.

A the Fourth raised an eyebrow at the display. “The Thirteen Shadow Dragons of the Whirlpool, huh? You sure didn’t hold anything back when it comes to bringing the muscle, old man Oda.” The muscle bound Raikage said, addressing the ancient Uzumaki.

“Those who are strong draw attention to their strength. Those who are weak draw attention to their weakness.” Oda answered simply.

A nodded in response as the Hokage’s entourage arrived on the scene. Hiruzen walked up being accompanied by only four people. Jiraiya, Orochimaru, Minato, and Uchiha Fugaku, the head of the Uchiha Clan. Hiruzen calmly walked up to his seat, bowed his head in respect to their host Mifune, and took off his own hat as he finally sat down.

“I thank you all for agreeing to this. After the true origins of this war had come to light, this is a war that must end and be put behind us.” Hiruzen said, putting his hat down on the table.

“You’ve yet to tell us what you mean by that, Hokage.” A pointed out, getting right to the point.

“We will not seek a grand unifying treaty for peace. We all know how the process to come up with those would end up. I propose instead that each village individually seeks peace with each on their own terms in relation to this war.” Hiruzen explains simply, catching the opposing three leaders off guard.

“Your wisdom shows, Hokage-dono. The idea has merit, since it will speed up the proceedings and allow each village to negotiate things on their own terms.” Rasa said, seeing the value in such a proposal.

“As the representative of Konoha, I wish to tell you personally Ōnoki that I will not pursue reparations from you for this war.” Hiruzen said, stunning not just the room to silence, but to shock and horror from his own retinue.

“Orochimaru, did you know he was gonna do that?” Jiraiya whispered.

“I did not, Jiraiya. What could sensei be thinking…?” Orochimaru replied quietly.

“This is pure madness. The village will be in an uproar.” Fugaku sternly whispered.

“I’m sure he has his reasons, Fugaku. After all, he knows what the consequences will be for something like that.” Minato whispered back, knowing that the Third Hokage wouldn't do this without good reason.

“What is your game, Hiruzen? You know that the rest of your village won’t take that lying down. You may even be forced to step down and choose a successor.” Ōnoki replied, his eyes narrowed as he tried to figure out what was going through his peer’s head.

“To be a true heir to Hashirama’s legacy is to ultimately view the hat, the robes, and the title as simply those things. To be a true Hokage is to do what is right for the village. I came to that conclusion as soon as this war started that my time was up. If I have to give it up to bring peace, true peace for both our nations Onoki, then I will happily throw the title in the trash if need be.” Hiruzen explained calmly, looking the old man directly in the eyes so he could see his intentions.

The younger leaders were surprised by Hiruzen’s words while Oda and Ōnoki simply smiled, impressed by their junior’s wisdom. “Well said, Hokage-dono. You should contemplate staying on as an advisor for your eventual successor.” The diminutive Tsuchikage replied.

“Whether they are my successor or not, my retinue will be my legacy. They will continue on in my stead. I will advise however I can, if they will have me.” Hiruzen answered.

“I look forward to meeting you later to finalize a proper end to the war between our nations, Hiruzen.” Ōnoki replied with a smile.

“As do I, Tsuchikage-dono.” Hiruzen answered, bowing his head in respect to his senior.

“If anyone else wishes to address something, the floor is yours.” Mifune said, looking about the room.

No one else raised their voice and, at that, the meeting was over. Hiruzen smiled, before leaning back in his chair with a deep, exhausted sigh. It was as if the exhaustion he felt through the entire war hit him at once. It was so bad that Orochimaru and Jiraiya had to help their master out of his seat. As he slowly exited the hall with his allies, among the crowd of the rest of the delegations he found Seishin. The towering lord of the Kamishini smiled and bowed respectfully to the Hokage.

“Well done, Hokage-sama. I couldn’t have done better myself.” The heroically proportioned lord told the diminutive God of Shinobi.

“If you did it, that old stone goat would have been chewing on the carpet by now.” Oda said, rolling his eyes at his younger counterpart.

“I appreciate the compliment. However, before we leave, I wish to propose something to you two.” Hiruzen said, his voice carrying a mysterious whimsy quite unexpected for the man at this stage.

The two older leaders each raised an eyebrow at that. “And what might that be, Hokage-sama?” Seishin asked curiously.

“An offer to settle both of your clans in Konoha, in honor of your service as allies in this war, and to write the wrongs committed to your peoples.” Hiruzen said, leaving everyone around him speechless. Unlike before, however, it took Hiruzen an infuriatingly long time for everyone to find their voice again.

Oda smiled at the much younger leader. “Where do we sign, kid?” he asked, obviously pleased with the offer.

“On the dotted line after I get the council to vote on it. My time may be at an end, but I think your clans’ reputations will see me through my final days as Hokage.” Hiruzen said, his voice mixed with sorrow at a regretful end and joy for being able to get a retirement he didn’t think he’d get.

To Be Continued...

Chapter Text

The war had drained the village of so much, but a new Hokage had brought much needed vitality and energy to the rebuilding process. Many shinobi had died, but the village itself was untouched. This was fortunate as it now needed to absorb the Uzumaki and Kamishini. The new Hokage, Namikaze Minato, warned that things would be difficult at first, and things would need to change, but, if they tightened their belts they would get through it.

The two new peoples, however, were quick to make their presence known. Immediately, the two old, intertwined clans began, as soon as the sites were worked out, constructing their own compounds. Their civilians quickly got to work finding jobs, opening businesses, and selling goods they had on hand to pay for the bills. Though the wild Uzumaki and the strange Kamishini were off putting to many, their hard work, determination, and warmth wore people down. Though the Kamishini that remembered those days would tell you it was really the Uzumaki who did the people pleasing part. Unlike them, they had work to do.

That year, however, also changed Minato. His quick turning of fortunes for the village, and even teaching the Hokage guard platoon the Flying Thunder God technique earned him much favor. However, over that time, he seemed to get more… distracted. Hardly anyone, save a closely guarded few, knew why. Indeed, this process of integrating the clans into the village and revitalizing a starved war economy meant he had to step on a lot of toes in the village. To the point where he may have had as many enemies inside the village as outside it. One night, after leaving unusually early from the office, he walked the streets he helped rebuild.

‘Is this what Hiruzen-sama felt? This sense of pride in your good work? Things really have changed.’ Minato mused to himself as he walked the new paved streets.

As he arrived home, he opened the door to the smell of food and a cheerful humming. He smiled at that. His dutiful wife likely didn’t expect him to be home so early. Using his shinobi training, he snuck up behind his long haired, fiery redhead, and gently hugged her, making her jolt and nearly send the chicken she was cooking into the ceiling.

“Who the hell’re you and how’d you get in my home, ya’ know!?” The redhead snapped out, her hair standing up and split into nine, tail-like segments as she jumped back and grabbed a frying pan to use as a weapon.

“Kushina, is that any way to speak to your husband?” Minato said with a nervous chuckle.

Immediately calming down, Kushina lowered her cast iron blunt force weapon as her hair went back to normal, leaving her looking sheepish. “M-Minato! You shouldn’t sneak up on me like that, ya’ know! I could’ve caved your head in…!” She worriedly told her husband.

“A simple Restaining-Type jutsu would have made sure that wouldn’t happen. Besides, we can’t have you getting this excitable. It's the big night, after all.” Minato said with a smile.

Kushina sighed and smiled, rubbing her pregnant belly. “You’re right. Sorry, Minato. You too, Naruto…” The redheaded Uzumaki replied, looking down at her big belly.

“If only Jiraya sensei was here to see his godchild. Oh well, he is busy. Guess we will have to settle for Oda-sama…” Minato said as he sat down, arms crossed.

“Knowing the old perv, he’ll be as excited as Gramps to have a little one around to spoil and corrupt.” Kushina said in a playfully cross tone with a smile on her face.

“I’m more worried about Oda… The fact he can’t answer how many kids he’s had concerns me more than Jiraiya sensei. Then again, Oda-sama did live in the days of the warring clans…” Minato sighed as Kushina plated up their food.

“Those were vastly different times, Minato. Much more chaotic and dangerous times.” Kushina quickly pointed out as she served her husband up his food.

“So, what you’re saying is Kakashi can age gracefully then, Kushina-sama?” A familiar, very spunky voice said, followed by a smack to the back of the head. “DAMN IT, RIN! THAT HURTS!!”

“Be nice, Obito. You and Kakashi are finally getting along.” Another familiar, but distinctly more feminine voice chided.

“Making a lot of assumptions there, Rin.” A dry, but playful voice answered.

“Aw come on, Stupid Kakashi. You know you love me. Besides, I did give you one of my Sharingan after you lost your eye saving my life.” Obito said with a smile as the three members of Team Minato came into view.

“And let's hope you don’t infect our sensei's child with your reckless stubbornness.” Kakashi said as he walked around the corner of the hall with Rin following.

“I prefer to think of it as ‘valiant courage’.” Obito said with pride as Kakashi rolled his one visible eye while Rin giggled.

“With uncles like you two around, that baby is going to be a handful.” The Nohara girl commented playfully.

“I’ll have you know I will be a much better uncle than that loser/idiot!!” Kakashi and Obito snapped in unison, pointing at the other, only for Kushina to crack both over the head with a fist each, “Sorry, Uzumaki-sama…”

“Good. I didn’t invite you all over so that you boys could bicker. I invited you three over so that we could eat together before the baby is born.” Kushina said with a smile.

“Don’t worry, Kushina-sama. We’ll all take great care of little Naruto. Oh, maybe I can teach him some Fire Release jutsu when he gets old enough!” Obito replied excitedly.

“You do realize that Fire Release aptitude in the Uzumaki is extremely rare. To the point where it's been classified as a clan wide deficiency?” Kakashi said, putting in his own two sen to bring his argument crashing down.

Obito waved off his friend’s concerns. “Details, details, Stupid Kakashi. If he ends up being anywhere near as hard a worker as I think he’ll be, he’ll get it down eventually.” He replied confidently.

“Why do I even try to explain things to you?” Kakashi sighed.

Rin couldn’t help but smile. “Oh relax, Kakashi. Obito’s just excited. I know you are too.” she said playfully.

“If anyone harms a hair on sensei's child, they will die slowly in their sleep…” Kakashi muttered, proving her point.

“I’ll help you get rid of the evidence…” Obito muttered as the two boys fist bumped.

“While I appreciate you two now bonding properly, I would prefer it would not be over the topic of casual murder.” Minato said, tugging his collar a bit nervously.

Kushina cracked up laughing, having to brace against the table to keep from falling over. “HAHAHAHAHAHAH! Oh, by the gods, I love you boys!” She cackled with joy, pulling the two boys into a tight hug.

The boys gulped as Kushina, forgetting the size of her chest at that moment, smashed the two boys faces with her larger than normal mounds. Respectfully they turned away, but the blushes on their faces told everyone what they needed to know.

When she released them, Obito smiled and put his ear to Kushina’s pregnant belly. “Don’t worry, Naruto. I promise you’ll be safe with us around.” At that, Obito felt a bit of movement. “I think I felt him kick!”

“If you three wish, I can plate you up with some food. I made plenty.” Kushina said, giving them a kingly offer, as the entire team did adore her cooking.

“If you wouldn’t mind, Kushina-sama.” Rin replied with a smile as she watched Obito be overjoyed at feeling the baby kick.

“Oh darling, I never mind if it's for my man’s students. You three are going to make fine shinobi one day.” She said with a smile, and eternal warmth in her voice.

“We already are Kushina-sama. Now move over, Obito! I want to feel him kick too!” Kakashi replied as Obito moved aside so Kakashi could take his place.

“Boys, you're gonna smother my child…” Minato groaned, pinching the bridge of his nose as he ate with the other hand.

Kushina and Rin giggled as they watched this. “Oh relax, Minato. I’m sure that the worst that’ll happen is Naruto being shyer due to too much attention and having to find a couple of pretty, bold, and brave Hyūga girls to bring him out of his shell.” The Uzumaki woman replied in amusement.

“Why does it always have to be those Clear-Eyed Prissies…?” Obito muttered.

Later

“Minato, I can walk on my own you know…” Kushina said as Minato carried her bridal style.

“I’m not taking any chances, Kushina. Boys, any signs of trouble down the street yet!?” Minato replied, calling out to Obito and Kakashi from the treetops.

“Negative, sensei! All clear!” Kakashi called out.

“Nothing on my end either, sensei!” Obito called down as well.

“Keep me posted!” Minato yelled back.

“You know, yelling out your orders like that is a surefire way of getting yourself killed, Minato. I would have thought that the war would have taught you that.” A familiar, though more tired, elderly voice rang out as they neared the hidden compound.

“Hiruzen-sama. My apologies. The boys, Rin, and I were just making sure that Kushina and the baby got here safely.” The blonde Hokage replied with a smile as he placed his wife back on her feet.

“That's what the comms are for. We don’t spend enormous sums of ryō for nothing on those.” Hiruzen said with a sigh.

“Fair enough.” Minato said sheepishly as Kakashi and Obito dropped down from the rooftops.

“I understand what you’re going through, Minato. But, if you want to keep your baby and your wife safe, you need to think like a shinobi right now, not like a father.” Hiruzen said, trying his best to give his successor advice.

“Don’t worry, Old Man Third. Kakashi and I made sure from the rooftops that we weren’t followed.” Obito replied with a smile.

“He’s right. I even had my ninja hounds scattered out to keep their eyes open too.” Kakashi added with pride.

“Kiss up…” Obito muttered.

“That means nothing.” Hiruzen said, leading them inside the compound.

The small group went down a ramp, eventually reaching a larger chamber with a hospital bed and a medical table on it. Hiruzen’s personal medical staff, a delegation of the Uzumaki led by Oda, and a delegation of Kamishini led by Seishin and Kodai. Many would balk at the need for such a concentration of expertise and force. However, the baby wasn’t their concern. It was a far more dangerous cargo that Kushina was carrying alongside the baby that they were concerned about.

“Kodai, has your clan prepared the outer perimeter?” Hiruzen asked the elderly shinobi sage.

“The barrier is ready and guarded by members of my clan, Hiruzen-chan. No one is getting in or out without someone knowing.” The elderly Kamishina replied.

“Anbu Daimyo, this is Fallen Lord. Is the middle ring prepared?” Hiruzen asked into a comm in his ear.

“Middle ring is ready, Fallen Lord. No signs of movement yet.” A voice said back through the comms.

“Oda, has your Shadow Dragon set up your guard over the inner ring?” Hiruzen asked the old Uzumaki.

“Inner ring is secured, Saru-chan. My Shadow Dragon has a group of elite Uzumaki shinobi monitoring the inner area with a secondary barrier set up around the compound.” Oda’s voice replied with a smirk.

“Isn’t this all… a little excessive?” Obito asked, surprised.

“You haven’t told him, have you Minato?” Hiruzen said, looking at the Hokage as he laid Kushina down on the bed, and allowing the doctors to do their part.

“When a female jinchūriki is pregnant, chakra that the seal uses to sustain itself is diverted to the growing baby. And when the baby is to be born, the stress upon the body is put upon the seal because of how everything is interconnected. If there was a time for the fox to attempt a breakout, now is the time.” Minato grimly explained, stunning the three young shinobi.

“Are you sure you don’t need any extra security inside the room? We can stay if need be…” Rin offered in concern.

“No, you three would be a liability.” Minato swiftly and sternly answered.

“But sensei…!” Obito started to say only for Kakashi to put a hand on his shoulder.

“Obito… he’s right. We may be good for our age, but we’d only get in the way if the most powerful of the Nine escaped Kushina-sama’s seal. Let’s leave it to people capable of handling it.” Kakashi reluctantly told his friend.

“Can we at least hold the baby later?” Obito asked.

“Yes, you can, Obito.” Minato answered with a small smile.

The three nodded and were escorted out by Uzumaki shinobi. Kushina now was hooked up to the equipment the doctors needed to monitor and could begin. Tsunade sighed deeply. She had brought many babies into this world. None with the string attached of a destructive monster sealed in with it. Catching a small tremble in her hand she walked over to Kushina.

“I’m honored you wanted me personally for this, Kushina.” Tsunade said simply, getting gloves on and a mask up.

Kushina smiled at the older woman, still a bit nervous but trying to not show it. “Of course, Tsunade. There’s no one I’d trust more to deliver Naruto.”

“Right. Deep breaths people and at your stations. It's time to induce labor.” Tsunade called out, and immediately everyone snapped to their stations, the vigil now online.

“Before we start… is this really gonna hurt as much as people say it does…?” Kushina asked fearfully.

“No, Kushina. It's going to be a lot worse.” Tsunade dryly said as she prepared herself. “Just use the stress ball liberally and just keep breathing.”

Kushina nodded. “Right. Use the stress ball a lot…” She replied, holding the stress ball in her hand.

The process mercifully for all, except Kushina, was going smoothly. Naruto was a small baby, making it easy for him to come out. As that happened, all eyes lay on the seal and around the compound. Minato, however, had all the veins popped in his forehead, as the real battle was just beginning. 

The seal was warping and twisting, repairing itself as Minato tried to hold it together. Trying to hold the seal together against the Tailed Beast’s onslaught while his wife did his best to push their baby out. With sweat running down his brow, Minato did his best to maintain the seal until the birth was complete.

“How are you holding up, Kushina? Are you doing okay…?” Minato asked his wife in concern as he struggled to keep the seal intact.

“MINATO, YOU BASTARD! YOU DID THIS TO ME!” Kushina roared out in pained fury as she popped another stress ball and took hold of a new one that was handed to her, squeezing it like a woman possessed.

“Holding up well. Got it.” Minato answered, not able to say much more as a hammer blow from the fox slammed against the seal.

“Just hold it together, Kushina! I can see the head! Push!” Tsunade told the redhead from between the Uzumaki woman’s legs.

With one final, almighty effort, for as long as her consciousness could hold, little Naruto was finally born. With that, Kushina’s vision blacked out for a moment, and she slumped onto the bed, dropping her stress ball. She breathed heavily, fighting a horrible headache as she heard crying. Tsunade pulled the baby boy free and picked him up, holding him gingerly. She saw short, spiky fuzzy blonde hair, a set of little whisker marks on his face, and a chubby, crying face.

“It's alright, little Naruto. Welcome to the world.” Tsunade said with a smile, both of happiness and pride.

“L… Let me see him…” Kushina panted out, having managed to fight her way back to consciousness.

“Alright. Just remember what I taught you about holding a baby.” Tsunade answered, wiping down the baby thoroughly after cutting the cord and swaddling him in fresh cloth, before gently handing him to his mother. Still crying his head off at sensations he’s never felt before.

Kushina smiled in exhaustion as Naruto was handed to her. “Naruto… my baby boy…” She tiredly said as she snuggled him gently while Minato began to try to reinforce the seal.

“Get in position! We have to reinforce the seal!” Minato yelled at the Uzumaki seal artisans.

“Yes sir, Hokage-sama!” The seal artisans replied as they began working on the seal with him while Tsunade took Naruto and handed him to Biwako and a nurse.

However, suddenly, they heard a loud crash coming from the doorway, with the bloody screams from the guards posted. Soon a shadowy man, covered in dark tattered robes, and a cracked, grimy mask of a snarling Tanuki. He then stood up straight, his eyes poking through the darkness of the mask in a blood red color, staring squarely and unerringly at Kushina with his two Sharingan active.

“I’m sorry milady, but your son is going up for adoption.” The man said in a strange, malaise tone.

“You won’t touch that boy!” Tsunade replied in anger, throwing off her doctor’s scrubs and preparing for a fight while Biwako and the nurse got behind her.

“And what is an old hag out of her prime going to do to me?” he asked, bemused, before rushing in with shocking speed.

A vein popped up on Tsunade’s forehead. “I’ll show you what this ‘old hag’ can do if you take so much as one step closer!” She snapped out, dropping into her stance with her fists at the ready.

The masked shinobi was fast, moving at a speed that was only exceeded by the likes of Minato. However, the assailant had made a critical mistake only a younger man ever would. Tsunade, a shinobi veteran who remembered her granduncle’s own impressive speed, knew how to manage speedsters. In a matter of moments, she delivered a punch so hard one could swear it rattled the very sky itself directly into his jaw. The blow sent him back and bored a monstrous hole into the thick, seal enhanced walls. To everyone's complete and absolute horror, he staggered to his feet, his jaw comically jutting to the side away from the curve of Tsunade’s punch. Taking his hand, he forced it back into its socket with a sickening noise that froze their blood.

“That hurt.” The man answered in his dry, malaise tone.

“What the hell are you…?” Tsunade asked in sheer disbelief.

“Just a man who needs a paycheck. Bills are tough.” The masked man answered with a shrug.

It was at that moment that Kushina screamed in pain and writhed in agony. Everyone looked at her in shock as the Kyūbi’s chakra began pouring out of her, originating from the seal. Immediately knowing what was happening, Minato called out in concern for all his allies present.

“The seal’s breaking! Everybody down!” He called out in concern.

With a shockwave, red chakra exploded outward from the seal as everyone took cover. Soon, the dust cleared as the chakra took the form of a massive, red-orange nine tailed fox demon. Throwing its head back, the fox let out a roar at the full moon as it tasted freedom for the first time in decades. Massive wounds on its limbs and tails healed in mere moments as it rotated its arm about, almost as if it was getting the rust off. Underneath him, looking down, he saw the masked man. A quick sniff made him growl in disgust. He knew the scent.

“Little late, big guy. Thought you’d come out faster, considering I gave you the opening.” The masked man said to the titanic kitsune.

“UCHIHAAAAAAA!” The massive fox roared out in fury.

“Sure. Yell it out so the cheap seats can hear you.” He said in a bemused tone, and from his eyes came the Mangekyō Sharingan as his Sharingan changed into the form of a curved cross.

The massive orange beast faltered, gritting its teeth as it tried to resist. This invisible duel lasted for some minutes, enough for the rings of shinobi to regroup and respond. When they arrived, they found the fox standing stock still in front of the man. It then lowered its head, in an almost zombie-like manner in front of him. He then walked up and petted its face almost like one would a dog.

“That's better. Now then, Big Nine, why don’t you be a good boy and take some vengeance on the village that so unfairly imprisoned you.” The man said, eliciting a growl from the fox, as if agreeing with it.

“Restrain him!” One of the Anbu yelled out.

The fox, however, cut them off with a thunderous roar, rattling the heavens with its might. The shinobi present launched elemental blasts of fire, wind, water, and lightning at the beast only to find their attacks swatted away by a swipe of a claw. The resulting wind pressure from the swipe unleashed a blast of air that hit them with the force of a hurricane. Blasting away the shinobi as well as the area in front of them with the force, all that was left was a wide and deep trench dug into the ground without any trace of man, beast, or foliage.

“Now then… to let the Kyūbi do the hard work for me.” The man said, before melting away into shadow while the fox poofed away in a cloud of smoke.

Slowly, the survivors from the Kyūbi’s escape raised their heads from the rubble. Coughing, Minato waved the dust out of his face as he called out.

“KUSHINA! TSUNADE-SAMA! NARUTO! BIWAKO-SAMA!” He called out in concern only to hear the cries of a baby to signify someone was alive.

As the survivors went to where the baby cries were, they found Naruto sheltered in the arms of a battered and bleeding Biwako. Tsunade moved her over, to reveal she had been killed by the blast, body torn and slashed by the shrapnel as she used herself as a human shield to protect the blonde baby. Holding back tears, she closed her body’s eyes and picked up the crying Naruto to comfort him.

“It's okay now, little one. You're safe.” Tsunade whispered to him as Naruto continued to cry.

“M-Minato…!” Kushina’s voice weakly called out from nearby as the sound of large chains moving was heard.

“Okay, anyone else wondering who the hell was that?” Oda asked the group, rubbing his back.

“I wish I knew, old friend. But I do know that we only know of one man with the Sharingan who was ever capable of controlling the Kyūbi…” Kodai replied, getting up with his cane and dusting himself off.

“It is not Madara. He is dead. I saw his body myself after that fight. He is dead, a skeleton turning to dust in an unmarked grave by now.” Oda snapped out.

“The Sharingan and its evolutions are known for having powers many would consider… unnatural…” Kodai pointed out to his old friend.

“It doesn’t raise the dead, Kodai. For as long as you’ve been fighting spooks, demons, and other unholy crap, I’m surprised you're entertaining this nonsense.” Oda said.

“I am simply saying that we cannot rule out the possibility. He could have used a delayed Izanagi for all we know.” Kodai countered.

“Can we all focus on the problem at hand here!? There’s a Tailed Beast on the loose near the village!” Hiruzen yelled, picking up frantic comms chatter.

“How did it get there so fast? It isn’t capable of that kind of speed.” Seishin said in shock.

“This masked man, whether he’s Madara or not, must have some kind of Space-Time Ninjutsu at his disposal.” Minato theorized.

“We must move quickly to rally the village against this threat. Tsunade, can I trust you to keep Kushina and Naruto safe?” Hiruzen asked, turning to his student.

“Of course, sensei! I’ll protect them with my life and keep Kushina alive whatever it takes!” Tsunade replied.

“I’ll get the others back to the village while a Shadow Clone of mine gets you three to a safehouse.” Minato replied, making a single Shadow Clone.

“Be careful, honey…” Kushina said weakly.

Minato nodded as his clone went to the two women and the baby while the others grouped up around him. In twin flashes of yellow light, everyone disappeared from the scene of destruction. Tsunade and Kushina had to regain their footing after the clone dropped them off. Before poofing away, it made sure to lock down the compound and secure the locks. It was spare, but mercifully it had a bed and a basic first aid kit.

“Kushina, get on the bed and rest. Here’s Naruto.” Tsunade said, forcing her onto the bed to give her the baby.

Kushina tried to hold back tears as she exhaustedly held her baby boy. “Naruto…” she uttered tearfully.

“Just breathe. I’m going to give you an antibiotic shot to be safe. After that, eat a ration bar. You need energy.” Tsunade ordered in concern, preparing her arm.

Kushina nodded, letting Tsunade do her job. However, they both knew that it was likely futile. Uzumaki or not, a jinchūriki who lost their Tailed Beast would die. Her chances of survival were slim. All Tsunade could do was do everything she could to keep her going. She failed Nawaki, she failed Dan, she wasn’t going to fail Kushina now. Not without a fight.

Meanwhile, in Konoha

“Come on, you lot! Keep firing! Suppress its movement!” A Lightning Release squad Kamishini barked at his squad for another group jutsu.

Together, the squad unleashed a group Lightning Release jutsu at the Kyūbi as it rampaged through the village, attacking anyone who got too close. The jutsu electrocuted the giant fox, stopping its movements for just a moment to allow the injured to fall back as it roared in fury. Lashing out with one of its tails, it slammed it down in a thunderous attack that shook the very foundations of the village and released a shockwave around it. The blast killed multiple shinobi while injuring more as Konoha ninja of all stripes began throwing down suppressing fire to try to slow it down.

A flash of light appeared near the Hokage office with the survivors of the fox’s escape. Minato, using his comms, figured out where the most amount of control was coming from and made his way to it. In an unhit shinobi barracks, the Anbu commander had made a makeshift command station, slowly but surely getting control of the scattered forces and focusing them. One could tell even through his mask that he was relieved to see Minato come in the door.

“Hokage-sama.” He said, snapping to attention with a salute.

“At ease, commander. What is our situation?” Minato asked the Anbu leader.

“The fox has destroyed ten percent of the village infrastructure and damaged another thirty percent. Casualties are climbing, but, due to the Uzumaki and Kamishini squads’ aid and sacrifices, its progress has slowed and minimized them. It's currently sealed in an Uzumaki sealing barrier and the Kamishini are engaging it. How long that will last is unknown. Currently most shinobi are being called up and organized as the Anbu are evacuating civilians.” The commander explained.

Minato nodded. “I understand, commander. Lord Third will be taking command of the situation while I go to cut the head off the snake.” He told the Anbu leader.

“Someone is controlling the Kyūbi, sir?” he asked, stunned as Hiruzen walked in.

“Indeed. Minato, go catch them. I can manage it here.” Hiruzen simply stated, regaining control of the mood in the room.

Minato nodded. “Yes, Lord Third. Good luck.” He told his predecessor before disappearing in a flash of light.

“Status on civilian evacuations?” Hiruzen asked the commander.

“We believe twenty percent have been aided by shinobi, while another forty percent have made it to the safe houses under their own means. However, the fox’s rampage is threatening to cut the rest off from safety.” The commander explained.

“What forces have you been able to organize?” The former Hokage asked.

“The Uchiha clan were the first to be mustered, my lord. Their Fire Release Jutsu are laying down cover fire with the Kamishini.” He explained.

“Then tell them to form up and hit that damn thing as hard as they can. Knock it on its ass while we get the rest of the defenders ready.” Hiruzen ordered.

“For what, my lord?” The commander asked.

“Shift all available Anbu to speed up the mustering process. Once everyone has formed up, we are going to hit it with the largest Combination Ninjutsu this village can muster. I will lead the attack.” Hiruzen ordered.

The Anbu commander nodded in acknowledgement of the order. “Yes, Lord Third.” He replied before leaving to organize his men.

Meanwhile, with Minato

Minato rushed through the forest, hot on the trail of the masked ninja. He found him on the wall of the village, overlooking the carnage. Fire erupted in great pillars as he saw utter ruin of ash and blood in the ruins. The masked shinobi didn’t even turn to look at him. 

“For being the fastest shinobi in history, you’re quite slow on the uptake.” The man said in his malaise tone.

“Who are you? Could you possibly be Uchiha Madara?” Minato asked, glaring at his opponent.

He stopped leaning and gave him a slow clap before a flourish. “Congratulations, Hokage-sama, you have caught me. It is I, Uchiha Madara! The Ghost of the Uchiha and the Destroyer of Konoha twice over! Tamer of the mightiest of Tailed Beasts! And devilishly handsome if I say so myself.” The man said in a more enthusiastic if sarcastic tone.

“How can you possibly be alive? Even if you survived your battle against Shodai-sama, you should be over a hundred years old!” Minato challenged.

“To answer you in order. One, he’s a bitch. Two, I have an exceptionally good spa routine.” He answered in a deadpan tone.

Minato glared as he drew multiple of his three-pointed kunai. “Regardless of whoever you are, you are threatening my village. As Hokage, I will stop you. No matter what it takes.” He told him, throwing his kunai so that they planted themselves in the surrounding area.

“Spare me the heroics, Minato. You are nothing compared to your predecessors. They had a chance of beating me. You? You're a speedy gnat by comparison. All flash with no bang.” He said dryly, turning away from the Hokage.

Teleporting before the masked man with a Rasengan in hand, Minato thrust it forward and attacked, barely missing the masked man as he disappeared into a shadow in the ground. The resulting impact of the Rasengan on the wall created an explosion that blew up dust and rubble everywhere. Looking around, Minato tried to sense his foe’s chakra.

“Amusing. Perhaps the gnat has a hint of bite after all.” He mused as Minato turned to face him while he rose out of a shadow in the ground, “Very well, Minato. If it is a battle you wish for, then you’ve got one.”

Minato, meanwhile, tried to break down and analyze his opponent’s jutsu. ‘He seems to be using some kind of shadow-based Time-Space Ninjutsu to disappear into the shadows to teleport. I’ll need to catch him off guard if I’m going to hit him.’ He thought, drawing another kunai.

“Show me, Namikaze Minato of the Hidden Leaf, why you are the fastest shinobi in the world!” The masked shinobi yelled with an embellished flourish.

Rushing right in, Minato created another large Rasengan as Madara rushed in at him as well. Drawing a tanto from his hip, the masked Uchiha coated it in solidified shadows to extend its reach to the length of a katana. Throwing his three-pronged kunai, Minato prepared for Madara to make his move. Drawing another kunai and running Lightning Release chakra into it to extend its reach, Minato swung his trident blade of lightning at the masked Uchiha only for him to disappear into a shadow again.

Appearing out from Minato’s shadow, Madara prepared to slash the blonde Hokage with his blade of shadows. Minato could feel the victorious smirk behind the tanuki mask as he swung his blade. Quickly, Madara tilted his head to evade the kunai coming at him from behind, the one Minato had thrown before. Minato felt the smirk of his opponent behind the mask grow further.

‘Victory is mine!’ Madara thought, continuing the arc of his blade only for Minato to disappear in a flash of yellow just before his shadow blade could make contact. “WHAT!?”

Appearing right above Madara in that same instant, Minato thrust his swirling ball of chakra down on his opponent. “RASENGAN!” He called out, aiming to blow his opponent’s entire side apart with his jutsu.

As the swirling ball of chakra infused death was plunged towards the masked attacker, it couldn’t make proper contact. Erupting from his shoulder came a burst of foul, sickly greenish black energy, the likes of which Minato had never felt before. It felt similar to the power of the Kamishini… but also different. Condensing into the shape of a gecko-like lizard, the form caught the swirling Rasengan’s energy in its hands.

“Hi. How's it going?” An equally dispassionate voice came from the “lizard.”

“WHAT THE-” Minato called out before the Rasengan exploded.

Without warning, faster than even the Fourth Hokage expected, the Rasengan’s unbound energies sent both combatants flying as Madara cried out in pain. Due to their advanced Shinobi skills, both effortlessly controlled their descents and landed near harmlessly on opposing roof tops. As Minato stared Madara down, with this bizarre lizard construct perched on his shoulder like a parrot as the ancient Uchiha panted and gripped his shoulder in pain.

“You’re wasting our time playing with your food. We are on a timetable.” The Lizard said, turning to his humanoid partner with annoyance.

“Give me a break. I haven’t had this much fun in a long time. I think that last attack broke my arm and dislocated my shoulder.” Madara replied, popping his shoulder back into place with a grunt as the bones in his arm slowly began to heal with sickening cracks and pops.

“You would have lost it if it wasn’t for me. Focus on the mission. He doesn’t have anything of value worth stealing.” The Lizard hissed with increased annoyance.

“You’re not Madara. Whatever that thing is, its power is clearly not yours. From what I know of him, Uchiha Madara would never want to borrow power that he didn’t earn himself.” Minato said, narrowing his eyes.

“Well, well. Give the Hokage a mochi cake.” The lizard sneered back at the Leaf’s leader.

“Who I am is irrelevant, Minato. But what I want is relevant. And you are in the way of it.” ‘Madara’ told him as the bones in his arm finished healing.

“Make this quick you fool, before more distractions come our way.” The Lizard hissed before disappearing into his heavy clothing.

“Hm. A shame. I would have loved to get to play with you more, Namikaze. But alas… I must hurry this along.” ‘Madara’ replied as bladed tendrils of darkness sprung up from his shadow and lashed out at the blonde Hokage. 

Throwing handfuls of his kunai, the blades impacted with the bladed tendrils and bounced off them. Teleporting to a kunai, Minato caught it and threw it again before teleporting to the next one. Minato did this multiple times, each blade being blocked by a tendril before Minato teleported out of the way of being stabbed to another kunai, only to then throw that one as well. Finally getting in front of ‘Madara,’ Minato went for a point-blank range Rasengan in an attempt to cave in his skull. Swiftly, the Lizard moved from the masked man’s shoulder to the face of his mask to block the attack once again.

The resulting explosion cracked and broke off part of the mask as ‘Madara’ shook his head out of his daze to try to recover. However, this allowed Minato to teleport right above his opponent and finally connect with a pointblank Rasengan that the Lizard failed to block. The masked man cried out in pain as Minato’s attack dug into his back and exploded. Placing a seal on the man’s back as his Rasengan ended, Minato gave a small smile.

“Heal from that.” The blonde Hokage said before quickly teleporting away from his opponent as shadow tendrils attempted to stab him.

“What did I tell you?” The Lizard annoyedly quipped to the masked shinobi.

“GAGH! FUCK! Do you know how long it’s going to take for my spine to regenerate, you blonde bastard!?” The masked man yelled in a combination of anger and, for some reason, excited glee.

“Oh, take as long as you like! Why don’t I help you by sending you off for recovery!?” Minato playfully called out to him.

Slowly, then man forced himself to his knee as the vertebrae and bones in his back began slowly cracking and popping back into place in a sickening symphony of regeneration. It was then that the seal Minato placed on his back after the point of impact activated and glowed. Looking at the glow on his back, ‘Madara’ saw his Sharingan eyes widen in shock at the realization.

“That’s…!” The masked man began to say.

“A Contract Seal! He’s separated you from your control of the Nine Tails!” The Lizard hissed in fury.

“Signed, sealed, and delivered! Now get out of my village!” Minato yelled as he readied a Rasengan in one hand and a lightning extended kunai in the other.

The masked man chuckled. “Perhaps I was wrong about you, Namikaze. Perhaps you truly are worthy of your titles. However, the Nine Tails will be mine one day. It… and so much more…” ‘Madara’ replied as he faded into his shadow and disappeared, his chakra signature completely disappearing from Minato’s chakra sensing.

Minato sighed as he dissipated his attacks. “One problem down, and now for a giant orange one. Looks like I have no other choice. Gamabunta isn't going to like this…” Minato muttered as he readied his signature summoning jutsu.

Meanwhile, With Hiruzen

“Seishin! What’s the status of holding the Nine Tails back!!?” Hiruzen yelled as a massive explosion rocked the area around him.

“The barrier won’t hold out much longer! It’s about to be breached!” Seishin called out.

“Commander! What is the status on evacuating the civilians!?” Hiruzen yelled to the Anbu Commander.

“All civilians in the surrounding area evacuated! We can proceed with the plan to drive it out of the village!” The Anbu commander told the previous Hokage.

“Excellent! Proceed with the next phase! Have the Yamanaka link up all available shinobi’s minds!” Hiruzen said with a smirk.

“Sir, you can’t be serious!? We don’t have the power to perform that technique!” The Anbu Commander yelled, a tint of dread leaking through his normally stoic voice.

“I am as serious as a shark attack right now, Commander! If we don’t have the power, then make it!” Hiruzen called out.

“Yamanaka! Send the signal for Operation Firestorm! That's an order from Hiruzen-sama himself! Execute with haste!” The Anbu Commander barked out over the din of devastation.

Soon, the minds of every shinobi remaining on the battlefield were all linked up. Going through hand seals, they began gathering and molding Fire Release chakra. The Kamishini even used their strange powers to build up chakra for a more powerful version that didn’t require hand seals. Calling out, Hiruzen roared to his forces a single command.

“NOW!” Hiruzen howled to his troops.

“COLLABORATION JUTSU: STORM OF THE FIRE GOD!!!” The shinobi force roared out as they all unleashed their strongest Fire Release jutsu simultaneously.

The storm of the flames unleashed combined into one massive fireball, the flames burning white hot. The massive fireball crashed into the Nine Tails, forcing it up and into the air before finally exploding above the village, sending it flying out into the outskirts just past the walls. Crashing down, its chest badly singed and burned, the mightiest of the Tailed Beasts growled before roaring in fury at the insignificant gnats that had dared to harm it.

“Um, sir… all we did was piss it off…” A shinobi in the command post said.

“I can see that, soldier, quite clearly.” Hiruzen answered indignantly.

However, before anyone could utter another word, nearly the entire village was rattled by an almighty quake. Soon, engulfed in a sudden dust cloud, forcing everyone to cover their faces. As the dust settled however, the moonlight was snuffed out, cloaking them all in darkness. Looking to its source, was a familiar giant, red toad with a black jacket.

“Perhaps I could be of some assistance!?” Called the voice of Minato from atop the great amphibian.

“Minato! It’s about time, my boy!” Hiruzen called out with a smile.

“Apologizes for my rude lateness, but that bastard didn’t know when to stay down!” Minato called back.

“Here I thought Jiraya was the craziest summoner I’ve ever had. But you, boy, take the grubs.” Gamabunta grumbled like the old goat he was.

“My apologies, Gamabunta-san! Can you hold him down for me for a little while?” Minato called out to the Toad Boss.

“This just isn’t my day… Alright, hold on, Minato! You’re about to witness the ancient secret Toad Taijutsu technique!” Gamabunta yelled, leaping higher than anyone had ever seen him do before.

“Minato must have really fired him up. I didn’t think his old hips could get him that high anymore.” Hiruzen muttered as he watched the now airborne toad boss.

To this day, many wonder what the Nine Tails saw. However, the village got a noticeably clear picture. Now high above the great fox, Gamabunta then began to perform a flying 360 backflip. A shocking display of agility and athleticism for something of his advanced age.

“Secret Great Toad Taijutsu: Thunderous Thunderdrum Drop!!” Gamabunta bellowed out of his immense lungs.

Tucking his arms and legs in, he then immediately made a drop rear first towards the fox. The fox’s eyes widened in sheer shock, but it was too late to move out of the way. As Gamabunta made contact, there was for a split second an eerie silence. Before a shockwave so fierce ripped through the forest, tearing trees out of the ground like blades of grass. Great furrows were bored into the ground as if it were tearing bubblegum apart. And the Kyūbi howled in agony, crying in vain to an uncaring heavens. It was then and only then that the Fourth Hokage finally made his move.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

“Now would be a great time, Minato!” Gamabunta yelled as he felt the fox trying to escape the grip of its titanic amphibian rump.

“Almost ready, Gamabuna-san!” Minato called out, drawing one of his kunai.

“I will turn you into Toad Sashimi, you overgrown wart patch!!” The Nine Tails roared as it attempted to wrestle itself from under the toad, and slowly began succeeding.

“Hurry, Minato!” The massive toad shouted as the massive fox began charging a ball of black colored chakra in front of its mouth.

Grabbing hold of the kunai, he focused his chakra. Then, as soon as the ball of chakra began to fire, the Hokage and the Tailed Beast disappeared, Gamabunta falling onto the ground with an almighty thud. However, he did not have time to ponder where Minato went with the fox as, off in the distance, came the telltale sign of its explosion, a massive mushroom cloud warping and twisting the air as it forced it aside.

All those near the compound soon were in for an unholy fright as a cacophonous crash came cratering in from outside. Tsunade had to hold Kushina down to keep her from rushing out.

“Kushina. You're too weak. You’ll die if you get up.” Tsunade sternly said.

“M-Minato… needs my help…” Kushina said, spitting up a bit of blood.

“The boy can handle himself, Kushina.” Tsunade said before the compound was rattled by a titanic roar, causing Naruto to start crying. “Lord help me he didn’t…”

“Shhhh… Shhhh… i… it’s okay, Naruto… Mommy’s here…” Kushina told him, rocking him gently while trying to calm him down.

“That dumbass you called a husband brought it here. Why did he think that was a good idea?” Tsunade sternly asked.

“I… I think I know…” Kushina told her, standing up and stumbling outside, her son in her arms.

“What the hell are you doing!?” Tsunade yelled as she rushed after her.

“Saving our village…” Kushina told her as Tsunade helped her stay standing.

“And leaving your boy without a mother!?” Tsunade yelled at her as they walked outside.

“What else can I do? At least, if I take it down with me, Naruto will still have Minato, you, and so many others…” Kushina told her.

“If you're going to help, then I’ll keep Naruto safe for you.” Tsunade answered with a sigh, knowing what she had planned as she took Naruto from her.

“I wouldn’t trust him with anyone else. I just hope he doesn’t take your chest for mommy milkers.” Kushina said with a smile and chuckle, before coughing horribly and regretting her choice of a joke.

Meanwhile: Back in the Village

“Hey, Kakashi… was there a giant dust cloud over there before?” Obito asked, looking over at the horizon from their secret training spot deep in the forest.

“That’s got to be sensei and the Nine Tails!” Kakashi told his teammate and friend.

“Well let's get over there and help him!” Obito yelled and got ready to rush off.

“We’re just a Chūnin and a Jōnin, Obito! What can we do against a Tailed Beast!?” Kakashi demanded of his friend.

“And what was that about breaking anyone that threatened little Naruto?” Obito asked, turning to look at him sternly.

“Kakashi is right, Obito!” Rin told her friend and teammate.

“So, both of you are willing to let our master die by sitting on our hands and doing nothing!?” Obito snapped at them, glaring daggers at his teammates for such talk.

Kakashi grit his teeth behind his mask before sighing. “No, Rin. Obito’s right. Maybe, with our Sharingan, Obito and I can use Genjutsu to pacify the Nine Tails long enough for sensei to do something.

“Then let's do it, my brother from a white-haired mother!” Obito yelled, throwing his hands in the air before fist bumping with Kakashi.

“That still doesn’t explain how we’re going to get out of here!” Rin told her friends.

“Don’t worry, I got that covered.” Obito said before activating his comms. “Hana, you remember that favor you owe me?”

“I remember, Obito! Why?” The voice of a six-year-old girl came in over the comms.

“The good news is you don’t have to marry me. The bad news is you got to get us out of a barrier Kurenai’s dad made for us.” Obito explained, trying to play off the obscurity of it as a feature.

“... How am I supposed to do that? I may have the most basic of my clan’s jutsu down, but I can’t burrow through a barrier!” The six-year-old girl’s voice demanded.

“True. But, knowing the old man, he forgot to make it go under the ground. So, you can try going under the barrier.” Obito explained, trying to sound smooth as fuck as he did it.

“... I’ll be right there. Me and the Three Haimaru Brothers need to get out of our own barrier first without being noticed.” The six-year-old told him.

“You're a smart cookie, I’m sure you’ll manage.” Obito answered her.

The three older shinobi waited patiently. Soon, a digging sound was heard, like a set of four drills going through dirt. Then, before the three could react, the ground burst open a bit as four tiny drills popped up from the hole. The girl was barely half as tall as Rin, with long brown hair, black eyes, and surprisingly clean features from a clan known for their bestial nature. The most distinctive feature being two red spike marks on her cheeks shaped like fangs. Behind her were three shinobi hound puppies, waddling around on stubby legs and covered in light black fluff. One was even attempting to sniff its own butt. Not the most glorious of saviors… but it did the job.

“Come on, you three! This tunnel goes outside the barrier! Just follow us!” The little girl told her seniors before diving back into the hole.

“Can I at least pet the pups once?” Rin asked as the pups dove in after Hana.

“No time, Rin! Sensei and Kushina-san need us!” Obito said, diving after her.

“You forgot Naruto.” Kakashi sternly said to his teammate.

“I thought that went without saying!” Obito called out to him from within the hole.

“I can only imagine what that poor baby is going through…” Kakashi muttered as he jumped into the hole.

“Wait for me, guys!” Rin called out, jumping into the hole after them.

Back with Minato

The Nine Tails roared as Minato panted, trying to catch his breath. It had taken a lot of chakra to get it here, but he managed it. Now came the hard part of sealing it. But, as he was coming up with a plan, massive golden glowing chains burst from the ground, wrapping the fox up and binding it as it roared and struggled. He looked back to see his wife, panting and straining as the Fox thrashed against its restraints with fierce defiance.

“YOU WILL NOT RETURN ME TO THAT PRISON, KUSHINA!!” The fox howled in fierce, unyielding rage.

“Too bad, Fox…! You’re going back, whether you want to or not…!” Kushina panted as Tsunade desperately tried to heal her.

“She’s fading fast, Minato! Whatever we’re going to do, we need to do it now!” Tsunade told him.

“For the record! You're not going to like it!” Minato yelled as he began to prepare the seal.

“IT DOESN’T TAKE MUCH WITH YOU, YOU GOLDEN HAIRED BRAT!!” Tsunade roared, before tending to the crying baby in her other arm. “It's okay, sweetie. Everything is okay… just ignore the giant orange fox monster…”

“Kushina, Tsunade! I’m ready! We’re putting half of it inside Kushina and the other half inside Naruto!” Minato called out.

“What!? Minato, that wasn’t…” Kushina told him.

“I know it wasn’t the plan! But the seal I’m using, I’m not living through it, Kushina! I’m sorry, but Naruto needs one of us with him! He needs his mother!!” Minato yelled, remorse and guilt clear in his voice.

Kushina grit her teeth with blood leaking from her mouth. “Whatever you’re going to do, do it now!” Kushina snapped, coughing up a bit of blood.

“Sealing Jutsu: Dead Demon Consuming Seal!” Minato called out as, to only Minato’s eyes, something began to appear.

Looking back, he saw an ethereal specter appear. A long, flowing ashen gray robe concealed the body of this… thing. Its face was long, thin, and twisted into a permanent, fanged-filled grin with a kodachi held in its teeth. Its skin was deathly white, with tall horns poking from its forehead through long white, silken hair. Appearing from its robes were long crone-like hands, bony with long fingernails. This was no mere summon… it was something above even the mighty Nine Tails.

‘Good… the Shinigami is here. Now to start the seal…!’ Minato thought, gritting his teeth in preparation for pain.

Telepathically sending what he wished it to do, the Shinigami gave a simple nod. The ethereal being reached forward into Minato’s back, entering him as if he were not even there. Minato lurched his head back in pain as he felt an unearthly power course through his veins. From there, a hand like that of the Shinigami burst from Minato’s stomach and flew out, grabbing and gripping the flank of the great beast. The fox howled as it soon felt its energy be torn and rended in ways it did not think possible. Searing pain like that of a hot iron shot through its body as its energy began to be pulled into Minato before the Shinigami took its blade from its fanged mouth, raised it high, and severed off half of the mightiest of the Nine’s chakra as the severed half made the rest of its way into Minato.

The fox turned to look at Kushina and Tsunade, its face gripped in pain and rage. It then looked at Tsunade’s arm to see baby Naruto. It then got a wicked grin. It was then that Kushina coughed up blood, causing her chains to loosen as the Nine Tails saw its opening.

“If you don’t have two vessels, then you can’t seal me again!” The beast roared as it swung its vast claws down towards the little baby.

“No!” Minato called out as he tried to rush, barely able to move from the dense and heavy chakra that was just sealed into him.

However, in a flash, the claw stopped. Tsunade had moved in front of Kushina and Naruto with her back to the claw, intending to use herself as a shield. Looking up, to their surprise, they saw that the fox’s pupils were each shaped like a pair of two Tomoe Sharingan. In disbelief, they looked and saw Obito, Kakashi, and Rin with the two boys having their Sharingan out and active.

“Alright! Told you it’d work, Kakashi!” Obito called out with a cheering grunt.

“Shut up and focus! We can’t hold it long!” Kakashi yelled, the strain setting in fast as the Fox began to resist.

“K… Kakashi… Obito…” Kushina said with a smile as she tightened the grip of her chains.

“Sensei! Seal it now! Everyone can’t hold out much longer!” Rin called out desperately. 

With that, Minato summoned the altar and took Naruto from Kushina. Placing their son on it gently, Minato smiled tiredly.

“I’m sorry, Naruto. I hope that one day you can forgive me for placing such a heavy burden on you. We’re counting on you to stop that man, son…  Eight Trigrams Sealing Style!” Minato called out, beginning the seal.

As he finished the hand signs, two seals appeared. One on Naruto and another on Kushina. As the fox was fully drawn into both Uzumaki, the Shinigami took its other hand and gripped the energies, now two orbs of swirling orange. It reached over and touched the seal on Naruto, as it lit up bright orange as it was implanted into him. The baby boy suddenly stopped crying, whimpering as the Shinigami patted the baby's head. A surprising act of tenderness from such a dread bound entity. Minato, panting and straining under the immensity of what his body was undergoing, slowly walked to Kushina. He nearly collapsed onto her, falling into her arms as he felt his strength failing him.

“M… Minato…” Kushina uttered worriedly.

“It's fine… we were taught that… a shinobi should die for what they believe in most…” Minato answered her, pulling her into a weak hug.

“W… we have a little more time before you have to say goodbye… we should make it count…” Kushina told him, tearing up as she hugged him back.

Tsunade took Naruto off the altar, avoiding looking at the floating embodiment of death, and carried him over to the two. As the baby was held in his parents’ arms, Minato could only smile.

“Naruto… I’m sorry I will not ever see you again. But I need you to be strong for me. And… I hope… that you get to live in a better world than I got to…” Minato said, before he was cut off as his legs gave out, forcing him to his knees.

“I’ll… take good care of him, Minato… and I won’t be alone…” Kushina pantingly told her husband, looking at the others with a smile.

“Thank… you…” Minato said, before he was cut off by coughing up a hideous amount of blood, forced now onto his hands and knees.

“M-Minato…!” Kushina called in concern.

“I don’t have long… Please look after the village.” Minato said as he coughed up more blood.

“Of course I will, Minato…” Kushina told her husband.

“As… the next Hokage…” He said after a horrible blood-filled cough.

Kushina was shocked at this declaration from her husband. “A… as Hokage…? Are you sure…?” she asked him nervously.

Minato put his hand on her shoulder, his grip very weak as his body barely stood up on his knees. Looking into her eyes, he gave a wordless nod and a confident look. Even as he was barely hanging on, he knew he needed to reassure her.

“One… more thing…” Minato horrible coughed out as he felt his body begin to buckle.

“Wh-what is it, Minato…?” Kushina asked her husband, unable to believe that all of this was happening.

“That masked man… H-He isn’t… Uchiha Madara…” Minato said as he collapsed to the ground, falling onto his back.

“What!? But he took control of the Nine Tails with the Sharingan! Who else but Madara could do that!?” Tsunade asked in disbelief, finally interrupting the moment.

“A… A… monster…” Was all Minato let out. Then his chest stopped moving, and the light that burned in the 4th Hokage’s eyes went out.

Later: With Hiruzen

“Are you sure that the fox is gone, Seishin?” Hiruzen asked, desperate to make sure it wasn’t a trick.

“Positive, Hiruzen. We sensed its chakra disappear.” The Kamishini leader told the aged former Hokage.

“Then that can only mean one thing. Minato beat and sealed it.” Jiraiya chipped in confidently.

“Yes, but sealed it in who is the question.” Kodai piped up.

“That's the least of my concerns right now. The question I have is which seal he used.” Oda sternly said, which made the group of elders go eerily quiet. Which seal he used had drastic consequences.

However, the men stopped as they saw Tsunade and Minato’s team carry in the family, they worked so hard to protect. Kushina held Naruto close, so close some would swear that she was nearly crushing the baby boy. However, in Tsunade’s arms, was the lifeless body of Minato, his eyes closed and his face at peace with a smile on his face. Rin was sobbing, crying into Obtio’s shoulder as Kakashi had his eyes closed, as if opening them would bring about a similar fate. However, looking at the faces of the two boys, what they just saw… they would never be able to forget or suppress. The Sharingan had forever burned it into their minds.

“He didn’t. Tsunade, please tell me he didn’t do it. He didn’t use that seal.” Jiraya frantically asked her.

Tsunade teared up and looked down, telling Jiraiya all he needed to know. Everyone there, even the seemingly unbreakable face of Seishin, failed at that moment. This day was a day that would live in tragedy for the rest of the village's history. The day the Fourth Hokage died. It was then when Hiruzen finally spoke, breaking the silence like a hammer broke glass.

“Who did he seal the Nine Tails inside of…?” Hiruzen asked shakily, as if afraid to know.

“Myself… and Naruto…” Kushina sobbed out, holding her baby boy closer, the last thing of Minato’s she had left on this earth.

“The lad split the fox’s chakra in two and sealed it within each of you. A clever tactic, to be sure…” Oda admitted a bit respectfully.

“Oda. Not the time.” Kodai said, before motioning to the distraught group in front of them.

Nodding, he went over and hugged Kushina. “It’ll be okay, Kushina. We’re all here.” Oda told her, trying to be of some form of comfort.

“G… Great grandpa…” Kushina sobbed as he held her.

“I’m here, child. I’m here. I always will be, whenever you need me.” Oda said, rubbing her back as he kept her close.

“Unfortunately, we will have to call the council, the clan heads, and the elite jōnin of the village. We need to hold a meeting immediately.” Seishin reluctantly told everyone.

“Indeed. And I fear that choosing the new Hokage is only going to be the appetizer on offer for conversation this time.” Hirzuen said, worried about what lay ahead.

Later: Hokage Mansion Meeting Room

It was almost comical how many people were packed around the large table in the room. It was not that it was small, but that it was far too small for this many people. The people in the room, however, had more pressing concerns than being stuffed in there like sardines. However, even here, they made space for Oda, Kushina and Naruto, knowing they needed it.

“Order! Order!” Hiruzen yelled, using his iron staff like a gavel to silence the crowd.

“Who put you in charge, old man?!” A Jōnin called from the crowd.

“THE THIRD HOKAGE TOLD YOU YOUNGIN’S TO BE SILENT!!!” Jiraiya roared as the room fell silent, save for Naruto starting to cry. Which caused Jiraiya to come over to calm the child down.

“Right. Today is a dark day in our village’s history. Mercifully, it was nowhere near as bad as it could have been due to the sacrifice of Minato-san. I wish to commend every shinobi that fought this day and save civilians.” Hiruzen said, which calmed the room a bit.

“What has become of Minato, Lord Third? And what happened to the Nine Tails?” Asked a brown-haired, stern-faced man with the Uchiha Police Force crest on the back of his flak jacket.

“Minato-san used the Dead Demon Consuming Seal to wrangle the fox into a state where he could seal it, Fugaku. Inside of Uzumaki Kushina and their son Naruto.” Hiruzen explained, with reluctance as everyone turned to look at them.

Fugaku nodded solemnly. “Mikoto will be heartbroken to hear that for Naruto and Kushina’s sake. Though we can take some solace that Minato met an end worthy of a Hokage, giving his life for all of us standing up for what he believed into the very end.” He regretfully said.

“There is, however, an issue that we must address.” A voice said from the back, and Hiruzen scowled when he saw it was Danzō who uttered such a phrase.

“I should have kept him on house arrest.” Hiruzen muttered.

“I feel bad for the poor house.” Seishin chipped in quietly.

“We must address who will be the Fifth Hokage with Minato’s death. As tragic as it is, our village needs a leader.” Danzō pointed out.

“Couldn’t even let his corpse get cold, you damnable lich?” Oda scowled at the bandaged shinobi.

Danzō frowned at his senior for that. “I speak for the sake of the village. We have no time to mourn. Now is the time for action, before our enemies can take advantage of our weakened and leaderless state.” He told the old Uzumaki.

“Oh, you speak for the sake of the village, all right. The sake of a village you want to rule with an iron fist and turn my great-great-grandson into a living engine of destruction! You’re not fooling anyone, you mummified sack of crap!” Oda yelled, ready to throw hands with the bastard before him.

Fugaku frowned at Danzō as well. “As crude as he is currently being, I agree with Uzumaki-sama. Even if we need a leader, that leader should not be you.” Fukagu replied disdainfully.

“That isn’t necessary. Minato named his successor in my presence.” Tsunade said mournfully.

The others all raised their eyebrows. “Oh? And who did he name, Princess Tsunade?” Danzō asked curiously.

“He named Uzumaki Kushina as his candidate to succeed him.” Tsunade said boldly, stunning the crowd to brief silence.

The room erupted in whispers at that. Some questioning Kushina’s mental state to be Hokage at the moment, some questioning the idea of a foreigner being named Hokage, and the rest approving of her choice. It was then that Hiruzen spoke up.

“I have known Tsunade for many years, and I refuse to believe she is lying on this matter. And if it is Minato-san’s dying wish, then, after what he had just done for us this day, then the least we can do is honor him by granting it. Are there any other nominations? Speak now or hold your piece.” Hiruzen proclaimed to the great crowd before him.

The crowd stayed silent… save for Danzō who forced himself to the front of the crowd.

“Let me guess, Danzō: You wish to nominate yourself?” Hiruzen asked bluntly.

“Only for an interim until Kushina-sama is ready to take up the mantle.” Danzō replied with a frown.

“Oh, I bet you would, considering you’d be in the position to block her from ever taking the position.” Oda shot out, getting Danzō to grit his teeth and jeers from the crowd in agreement.

“All in favor of Kushina as the Fifth Hokage!?” Jiraiya called out, and the vote was near unanimous. Even Fugaku raised his hand in support.

“Then it’s unanimous. Now we will need an Interim Hokage until Kushina is ready to accept the mantle. Are there any nominations?” Hiruzen announced.

“I would… but I have my own child that was recently born that I have to be there to take care of.” Fugaku said with a sigh.

“We should set up a playdate, Fugaku! I’m sure Sasuke-chan and Naruto will get along swimmingly!” Kushina piped up in a better mood.

“He would eat your boy alive…” Fugaku muttered in response.

“I nominate Tsunade as Interim Hokage.” Jiraiya said, shocking the room. And his candidate most of all.

“What!? Why me!?” Tsunade demanded angrily.

“You have a damn good head on your shoulders, Tsunade. And who better to help the village heal then the greatest medical shinobi in the world?” Jiraiya explained.

“Not to mention that, since your grandfather and granduncle founded and practically helped build Konoha, you have both the pedigree and the political pull. As well as the financial savvy.” Hiruzen pointed out.

“Give me one reason why I should instead of leaving this village like I intended to after Naruto’s birth.” Tsunade demanded irritably. 

Kushina then turned to face Tsunade and lifted Naruto up to her face. The baby boy, being nearly blind at such an early age, did not understand what was going on. With a bubble of spit forming by his mouth gurgling, he groped the air and lucked his way into grabbing Tsunade’s nose. Even to a near cold blooded bunch like what filled the room, it was an adorably warm sight. Even Danzō felt a twinge of feeling at the sight.

“... You are an evil witch, you know that Kushina?” Tsunade replied with narrowed eyes.

“Flattery will get you nowhere. Now let Naruto snuggle, oh great godmother.” Kushina answered with a smile.

Tsunade felt her heart skip a beat as she accepted Naruto from Kushina. Holding him gently, the freakishly strong blonde woman looked down at him with a smile. Sighing, she looked up at the rest of the room.

“Fine, I’ll be your Interim Hokage. But only until Kushina is physically, mentally, and emotionally ready for the job.” She told them reluctantly.

“Let's make it official. All for Tsunade, say aye!” Jiraiya called out, getting a thunderous response from the ayes. “I think the ayes have it, sensei.”

Hiruzen nodded in agreement. “Indeed. Then I think we can call this meeting to a close for now. Young Naruto will be in the care of his mother and the Uzumaki clan and his training will begin as soon as he’s old enough.” The former Hokage said.

“And anyone suggesting he is used as a weapon will face the Uzumaki clan's wrath.” Oda growled, his gaze falling upon Danzō.

Danzō opened his mouth to say something only for one of Kushina’s Adamantine Sealing Chains to pierce the wall right next to his face. The elderly Warhawk paled as he looked down the chains towards their master. Kushina glared at him, her hair split into nine tail-like segments as she growled at him, her eyes turning slitted and red for a moment. Paling, Danzō wisely chose to shut his mouth.

“I think we should all let our future Hokage get some rest.” Hiruzen said to prevent a death inside the meeting room.

Nodding, the others stood up and turned to leave. Stopping, Fugaku looked down at Kushina as Naruto was returned to her arms. Giving a nod of approval, Fugaku prepared to leave as Naruto’s nearly blind eyes looked up at him.

“Maybe he and Sasuke would get along. He is quite vibrant for one so young.” Fugaku said simply, getting a gurgle out of baby Naruto.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

The weeks were long and arduous since the Nine-Tails attack. In the aftermath, the search for the missing and dead was conducted through the rubble. Despite the heroic sacrifice of the Fourth Hokage and the loss of hundreds of shinobi, there was a grisly toll upon the civilians. Most of which were from those that attempted to hide in basements and other buildings. It was work that even the most hardened of shinobi dreaded, to see the twisted and contorted faces of terror upon the mangled corpses.

From there came rebuilding. Despite no formal plan from the higher ups, many ate the cost to start rebuilding. Indeed, some of the larger clans donated sums of their own war chests to help those who had lost everything. However, to everyone's shock, the Uzumaki and Kamishini not only donated large sums of money, but even put in the back breaking labor to do it. Most shinobi loathed performing D-Rank missions, but these two clan’s members formed entire work gangs to work for free.

As all of this was underway, the leaders of said clans gathered for some weeks with Tsunade and her council. Despite Kushina’s condition, she insisted quite violently, and Tsunade’s neck can attest to the violence, to be there. Leaving Naruto at home with her extended family, she sat in the Hokage’s chair in front of the table full of the most powerful men and women in Konoha. Even Hiruzen, despite his retirement, was invited. Mostly to keep the unwanted, if required, guest in check.

“I apologize for my tardiness. I had… business to deal with regarding the rebuilding process.” Danzō told those present for the meeting.

“It’s quite alright, Danzō. It's not like we have a meeting to decide the reconstruction and thereby the fate of generations and all.” Kushina answered him cordially, if coldly.

“I was merely making sure we had managed to secure all the necessary supplies. It wouldn’t do for us to run out of supplies too early, now would it Lady Hokage?” He replied, trying to hold back his disdain at having to address Kushina by that title.

“Fugaku-san, can you have your boys check to make sure all those supplies are still there? You know, a second opinion and all.” Oda asked, turning to the leader of the Uchiha on his right.

“I had already intended to, Oda-dono.” Fugaku replied to his fellow clan leader.

“Please. No need to be so formal. We are all mostly equals here.” Oda said, directing a stern gaze to the leader of the shell formerly known as Root.

Gritting his teeth, Danzō took a deep breath to calm down. “You will all be happy to know that we, based on the inventory I took, should theoretically have more than enough supplies for the repairs. We may even be able to expand the village a bit if we have enough left over.” He explained, trying to watch himself.

“Expansion is a luxury. If anything, we need to consolidate. Rethink our defensive layout and structure.” Seishin said, getting approved nods from most present.

“Very true. Though it wouldn’t do for the Uzumaki and Kamishini clans, as the newest clans to join our village, to not have their own compounds within the village. If we have supplies left over, they can be put towards that.” Danzō told them, trying to make his intentions clear.

“We are very good at making do with small spaces. Something I hear you’ve gotten used to as well, Danzō-san.” Oda answered, his face turning to a stern glower. 

Danzō fought back the urge to glare at the old man as he nodded. “Fair enough. It is admirable that you’re willing to make do with what we can provide for now.” He replied, trying to not step on any toes quite yet.

“Oh, I’m sorry, Danzō, but that will not be necessary. We Uzumaki pride ourselves on resourcefulness and making do.” Oda countered, getting further looks from Danzo, as the new clan's humility began to impress the other clans.

“We Kamishini are used to being constantly on the move. We are more than capable of getting by on more spartan living conditions until better ones can be provided.” Seishin said, adding in his own two ryo.

“Is that all you wish for, Danzō-san, or do you have something else to bring up?” Hyūga Hiashi, leader of the Hyūga clan, asked drolly, clearly getting bored with the Root leader’s attempts at courting influence.

“There are two more things that must be addressed. What is to be done about the knowledge of both Kushina-sama and her son each having one half of the Nine Tails inside them. As well as when we should begin the child’s training and emotional conditioning to be able to control his half’s power.” Danzō explained, deciding to cut to the chase.

Soon a chair was flung as Oda rose violently from his seat, metallic-looking claws made of chakra forming around hands, as Fugaku and Seishin had to hold the ancient pillar of the Uzumaki back. This sudden change in the old Uzumaki shocked everyone. Even Danzō looked somewhat surprised at it.

“Touch that boy and I will kill you and all your slaves! He is a baby, a human being, not a mold of flesh for you to contort into a monster!” Oda roared, fighting both the Uchiha and Kamishini heads to get at the old Anbu leader.

“Oda-sama, calm down!” Seishin told him, trying to hold the ancient shinobi back.

“He isn’t worth it!” Fugaku added frantically.

“Great-Grandfather. Please calm down and be seated.” Kushina said with shocking amounts of calm and discipline, stunning the room to near silence.

“Yes, dear.” Oda said before sitting back down, though clearly not happy about it.

“I thank you, Lady Hokage. At least someone here can see sense.” Danzō told Kushina, surprised that she had so easily calmed the ancient, fiery redhead down.

“It would be completely unadvisable to perform such an action.” Hiruzen piped up, gaining Danzō’s ire as his old rival just couldn’t go quietly into retirement.

“And why would that be, Hiruzen? The child has one half of the most powerful being in this mortal plane sealed within him. Even one half of the Nine Tails is more than a match for more than half of the other Tailed Beasts at once. If he is not taught to control his emotions and that power along with them as soon as possible, it could spell disaster.” Danzō insisted, trying to make the others see sense.

“Say the boy's name.” Hiruzen said simply.

“I will do more than that. Uzumaki Naruto’s training must begin as soon as possible. The moment Lord Fourth Sealed half of the mightiest of the Nine inside him, young Naruto was robbed of the notion of having a normal life and childhood.” Danzō shot back, a bit of frustration peeking out.

Hiruzen then stood up before looking Danzō square in the eyes. “If Lords Hashirama and Tobirama were here, they would have run their blades through you without a second thought.” Hiruzen spoke, with an authority on the matter few others could.

Danzō’s one visible eye widened in shock before he sighed and nodded. “I see. Forgive my harsh words, I misspoke. I am simply-”

“Every other village that has held a Tailed Beast has had catastrophe every time they switched Jinchūriki. Why? Because they were incapable of effectively managing such power. Hashirama, our founder, was the one who brought every Tailed Beast to heel and gave them the beasts to strive for peace. If he had wanted to, we could have had all of them. Why did he not? Peace. To create a Jinchūriki for war, a weapon made flesh, you deprive the world of a chance of peace. Because the host cannot have peace with themselves. Why would we want to destroy someone like that? An innocent babe that we all have seen and held in our hands. Can any of you in good conscience vote upon that after having looked into the innocent eyes of a baby?” Hiruzen said, his voice flowing with passion. Not a single word he spoke, it was clear, he did not mean. As his eyes burned with the will of fire itself.

Even Danzō was perturbed by what his old rival said. He may have been a man of cold, hard logic… but even he could see what the former Hoakge was saying. To condemn the boy to a life like that so soon would be a level of cruelty even he was not sure he could completely live with if it harmed the boy’s progress. Regardless of how much it would benefit the village overall.

“Very well. We will leave that as a matter to be discussed when the boy is old enough to have a say in-” Danzō began to say only for a large chakra chain to pierce the wall next to his face, barely missing impaling him through the head and instead scratching his cheek as his eyes widened in shock.

This made the room go ice cold. Any heat, any passion, any fire of rage snuffed out by a cold abyss of wrath that had befallen the room. Everyone followed the links of the chain that had nearly killed Danzō towards the head of the table. From the slender pale hand of the Hokage herself. As her eyes burned with a cold fire that could scour bedrock. That dreadful gaze boring now squarely into Danzō’s soul.

“You may help train him. Only under supervision. And only when the Uzumaki clan deems him ready to begin training.” Kushina stated, without an inch of wiggle room to be found in such a stone-cold statement.

It took all Danzō’s self-control to not begin sweating bullets at that moment. He knew that, if he said one thing wrong in this moment, the redheaded Hokage before him would personally execute him in broad daylight, consequences be damned. And, from the look in her eyes, she knew that he knew that and would not hesitate to do so.

“Now then, what is the next topic of discussion?” Kushina asked as she sat down, her voice instantly changing to a far warmer and friendlier one, sending chills up everyone’s spine in the process.

Clearing his throat, Danzō nodded. “First and foremost, we must decide what part of the village will be the first to undergo reconstruction. Which of the most damaged parts takes priority.” He said, treading lightly.

“For once, I agree with Danzō. We need to organize the repairs.” Nara Shikaku, the head of the Nara clan, added, voicing his opinion.

“I put my vote towards housing. Without people, we have no village. And discontent will grow the longer we are without housing.” Akimichi Chōza, the head of the Akimichi clan, piped up, his voice booming with the resonance from his sheer size.

Yamanaka Inoichi, head of the Yamanaka clan, nodded in agreement with his old friend and former teammate. “Agreed. Right now, we need to make sure the village stays on a united front. The best way to do that is to start with housing.” The platinum blonde haired man added.

“I would like to add, in conjunction, the creation of communal gardens and fishponds. To provide a further bit of food security and means to foster closer communities.” Hiashi brought up, getting agreements across the room for that.

“The Uzumaki clan can assist in those efforts, Hiashi. You provide the cash; we can set them up. One of our clan families are exceptional gardeners and herbalists.” Oda said, proverbially reaching across the aisle, getting a smile from Hiashi. 

“We will also need to assess how many shinobi we still have capable of going on missions to bring in funds and resources.” Aburame Shibi, leader of the Aburame clan, was brought up.

Kushina turned to look at the Anbu commander, a fox-masked Anbu. “Can your information specialists assist temporarily in speeding up such a process, Commander Fox?” She asked, surprising everyone with such an unorthodox idea.

Commander Fox nodded in response. “I can have my second in command, Monkey, begin organizing them immediately.” The Anbu commander’s older, more seasoned voice replied.

“You really should consider retiring, Fox. You have done more than your fair share of service to the village. Perhaps promoting Monkey into the position?” Hiruzen said respectfully.

Fox nodded in response. “Monkey is a good shinobi and is well respected within the ranks of the Anbu. He would make for a good successor for me. And retirement would allow me to have time to spend with my grandchildren.” The aged Anbu commander replied, seemingly considering the idea.

Kushina raised an eyebrow. “I take it you don’t intend on retiring until you’re sure Monkey is ready to manage it, Fox?” she asked the Anbu commander, a light grin on her face.

One could almost feel the smirk behind Fox’s mask at that. “We have a saying within the ranks, Lady Hokage: The Anbu never die or retire. They just get reassigned.” He said, almost sounding amused.

“I’m sure your grandkids would see it very differently.” Kushina jested, getting a snort from behind the mask of the Anbu Commander. Eliciting chuckles from nearly everyone there.

After a few closing statements, all of which went over Kushina’s head, Tsunade helped close the meeting earlier than expected, as it was clear her charge had burned through even her heightened stamina after birth. With everyone filing out, chattering amongst themselves, Tsunade got Kushina into her wheelchair, before carting her back to the hospital.

“I told you to take it easy today.” Tsunade sternly said to her ward.

“It’s not my fault that that old bag of bones threatened my baby’s childhood. I wasn’t going to stand for that.” Kushina replied, almost childishly.

“Kushina, if you don’t control your anger more and let others manage things for you for now, then you're going to be in no shape to help Naruto. You're lucky your family made it through the war.” Tsunade sternly answered her, as Kushina slumped into the wheelchair.

Kushina sighed a bit. “I know. I’ll try to take it easier. It’s hard to do that confined to this damnable wheelchair.” She replied.

“If you’re good for the rest of today, I promise you I’ll bring Naruto in tomorrow.” Tsunade said, as if bargaining with a child.

Kushina looked at Tsunade sternly. “You promise you’ll bring him in tomorrow?” She asked.

“A Senju never goes back on their word.” Tsunade sighed at how troublesome her ward was being.

Kushina smiled and nodded. “Okay. Well at least the village has one of the few hospitals with food that doesn’t suck.” she jokingly said.

“If your cousin tries to sneak a bento box in again, I will beat you with him.” Tsunade threatened her.

Kushina pouted. “Oh, come on, Tsunade. He’s just trying to help. Right, Rea?” She said, looking at the shadows as she and Tsunade turned to look.

Out walked a man with gravity defying, medium length, spiky dark red hair. He was on the taller side and was wearing a dragon mask with a flame pattern on it. His outfit consisted of a black cloak complete with gloves and shinobi sandals, all with a crimson flame trim to them. The two could almost feel the mischievous smile beneath that mask.

“How could you tell I was there, Big Sis Kushi?” he asked, slowly taking off his mask to reveal a handsome face marred by a single scar across his forehead and grayish purple eyes.

“Kushina’s diet is being carefully monitored for maximum recovery rate. You're not helping.” Tsunade sternly said to the now unmasked man.

Rea waved off her concerns. “Come on, old lady. A little cheat day never hurt anyone. Besides, we can’t have Big Sis Kushi getting depressed eating the same things every day, now, can we?” He replied with a smile.

Tsunade then stopped and put the brakes on the wheelchair. Rolling up her sleeves, she turned on her heels to face him. Her eyes now staring at him with a fire akin to a real dragon’s. Which got a far more concerned reaction out of the spiky-haired Uzumaki.

“Um… Did I say something wrong?” Rea asked nervously.

“Old lady? Boy, I’m only in your mother’s range.” Tsunade said as she cracked her knuckles.

Rea paled upon realizing his mistake. “D-did I say, ‘old lady’? I meant to say, ‘bold lady’!” He nervously replied.

It was little to avail of him as a punch to the gut sent him flying across the village. Those who were in his flight path could swear to this day the distinct sound akin to a squealing schoolgirl could be heard. 

“... Did you kill him!?” Kushina asked in concern.

“Sad part is probably not. Those Thirteen Shadow Dragons from the Uzumaki clan are tougher than yesterday's leather on top of bent nails.” Tsunade sighed out, as an almighty crash could then be heard.

“... I’m okay! Think I’ve got a couple broken ribs, but, otherwise, I’m okay…!” Rea’s voice called out in the distance.

“Right. Time to get you dinner. It's chicken and broccoli tonight.” Tsunade said, unlocking the brakes.

“... With melted cheese on the broccoli?” Kushina asked hopefully.

“On the condition you skip the soy sauce with your rice. That stuff is too high in sodium.” Tsunade said.

The redheaded Hokage sighed and nodded. “Fair enough…” She conceded.

The Next Morning

Kushina groaned as her body ached from soreness, and she swore she slept on her side wrong. As the rays of sun began to peak through the blinds. Soon however the door opened, which caused Kushina to groan further and squirm. 

“Rise and shine, Kushina. Breakfast is here.” Tsunade’s voice said.

Kushina groaned in frustration and exhaustion. “Five more minutes…” She moaned in protest.

“And keep Naruto waiting?” Tsunade’s voice asked.

“... Damn it, fine. I’m up.” Kushina replied with a sigh, throwing off the covers.

Opening her eyes with a yawn, Kushina soon saw Tsunade carrying a tray of food with one hand, and cradled in the other was her blonde bundle of joy, who clearly decided to take a nap on the trip over as he snored ever so cutely. The sight brought an instantaneous smile to Kushina’s face.

“A Senju never breaks their word.” Tsunade said with a caring smile.

Kushina smiled and reached for her son only for Tsunade to stop her. “Up, up, up! Food first, then baby.” The blonde medic told her sternly. “And trust me, after how your family tuckered him out yesterday, he’s not going anywhere fast.”

Kushina sighed but smiled and nodded. “Fair enough.” She replied, waiting for Tsunade to put the tray of food down.

On the tray, alongside with a cup of breakfast tea, was the usual assortment. Steamed rice, miso soup, a rolled omelet, grilled fish, a small salad, and a small plate of pickles. Sighing, as this is about the fifth time this week, she gave her thanks and began to eat. She tried to eat at a normal pace, knowing Tsunade would get on her about that. Once she finished chasing down the last bit of pickle with her tea, Tsunade gently handed Naruto over to her.

Cradling him gently, Kushina planted a gentle kiss on her son’s forehead. Little Naruto squirmed and fussed a bit before calming down, slowly opening his eyes. Looking up at his mama with his limited amount of vision, he gave her a big, toothless baby smile. Seeing his blue eyes light up, Kushina smiled sadly, wishing Minato could be here to see and experience this. Kushina felt tears well up in her eyes at the thought of her deceased husband.

A tear fell onto Naruto’s cheek, getting a reflexive wipe from his chubby baby arm and the furry onesie he wore. Despite hardly being able to see what was going on, he could hear something was off with his momma. Instinctively, mimicking what he did with himself, he brought an arm up to her right cheek and waved his arm, trying to dry the tears. It was mostly ineffective, but the action of concern from her baby boy got one of the biggest smiles out of Kushina.

“I love you too, Naruto…” Kushina told her son, snuggling him gently. With Naruto giving out a big giggly baby noise, happy that he was able to help.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

“Mama… why do I have to come to this meeting?” A spiky haired, four-year-old blonde boy asked as he was practically pulled along by Kushina.

“Because I can’t leave you home alone for five minutes without you causing trouble, Naruto.” Kushina replied.

Looking down at the boy, it amazed her just how four years had gone by. What was once a little joyous baby had turned into a spirited young boy who she could not tell if he had left his terrible twos. Barely up to her knee, the boy was thin even for his age. Despite him being fed quite well if she said so herself. Clad in an orange kimono, it featured fiery red and furnished gold scenes of a great fox and dragon clashing in combat. Underneath that striking outfit, however, was a boy that was not as fiery in public.

“I promise to be good with Grandpa Oda…” Naruto said, giving her puppy dog eyes in a desperate attempt to change her mind.

“I’m sorry, Naruto, but the answer is no. Besides, this will be a good opportunity for you to make some friends your age.” Kushina told him sternly.

“Why do I need friends, Mama? I have you, Granny Tsunade, the clan, and papa’s old team.” Naruto innocently asked.

“Because friends your age will help you come out of that shell you always retreat into in public.” Kushina told him with a smile.

“I don’t wanna come out of my shell. I wanna be nice and safe inside it like a turtle. And it's cozy.” Naruto huffed, puffing his cheeks like a pufferfish in indignance.

Kushina giggled a bit. “Come on, Naruto. Having friends is important for a little boy. That way, you won’t have to pull pranks to get attention or keep yourself entertained.” She told her son, trying to encourage him to listen to her.

“HELP!! I’m being taken against my will and my way of life is being threatened!!” Naruto screamed in bloody murder, flailing his free arm.

Kushina quickly clamped a hand shut over her son’s mouth. “Keep that up, young man, and no Ichiraku’s for lunch today.” She hissed with a glare.

At that Naruto immediately shut up. However, it did not get his feet moving any more, forcing the Hokage to drag her son along like an ox with a plow. Arriving at the gates to the Uchiha compound, the guards had to hold in a chuckle at the sight. Swiftly ushered inside, Kushina saw Mikoto waiting for them.

“Greetings, Kushina-sama. Hello Naruto-chan.” Mikoto greeted her kindly as Naruto hid behind Kushina’s leg.

Kushina pouted like her son had earlier. “Mikoto-chan, you know you don’t have to be so formal with me. I may be Hokage now, but you’re still my best friend.” She told her old friend childishly.

“Try telling Fugaku that.” Mikoto sighed. “He’s been insufferable about proper etiquette for several days now.”

Kushina waved off her best friend’s words. “Don’t worry about what your stick-in-the-mud husband thinks. You and I have been friends since our academy days, so there’s no reason to be so formal regardless of my position.” She said with a grin.

“It's easy for you to say. You don’t sleep in the same bed as him.” Mikoto said, rolling her eyes. “Is something wrong with Naruto today?”

Kushina sighed. “No, he’s always like this when it comes to meeting people who are either new or unfamiliar to him. Naruto, say hi to your Auntie Mikoto.” She said to him with a smile.

Mikoto smiled and got down on her knees to get to his level. “Hello, Naruto. You don’t have to be nervous with me. I’ve known your mother since we just started to learn about being shinobi.” She said, giving a warm motherly smile.

“Y… you have…?” Naruto nervously asked, moving out a bit from behind his mama.

“Yes, I have. Would you like a snack?” She asked him.

Naruto perked up a bit. “Can I have some red bean soup…?” he asked tentatively.

The Uchiha housewife smiled at that. “Of course. Only if you come inside though.” She answered him.

Looking up at his mama, Naruto perked up a bit when Kushina gave him a smile and nodded. Coming out fully from behind her leg, Naruto looked up at Mikoto and gave a small smile. At that, the three walked inside. To Naruto, this clan compound was not his cup of tea. It was far more austere, cold, and downright gloomy. It reminded him more of a barracks than a home. Then he, while distracted, ran into something hard. Looking up, however, he saw the stern, unyielding face of Uchiha Fugaku.

Hiding back behind his mother’s leg, looked out nervously from behind her. “I-I’m sorry…!” He told the Uchiha leader, further unnerved by his stern looking face.

“It is all right, young Naruto. It happens to the best of us.” The Uchiha leader answered simply. Little did Naruto know that it was among the man’s most approachable responses to what happened.

Mikoto smiled at Naruto. “It’s okay, Naruto-chan. This is my husband Fugaku.” She told the blonde four-year-old.

“Mikoto, please take Naruto. By the looks of things, everyone else has already made it here. Glad to see you're in good spirits today, Fugaku.” Kushina said, turning to look at the clan leader after addressing her son.

Fugaku nodded and looked at his wife. “Sasuke is being watched by Itachi. I’m sure he’d like some company his own age.” He told Mikoto.

Mikoto giggled a bit. “I’m not so sure. You know how much Sasuke loves his big brother.” She replied.

Fugaku rolled his eyes with a small semblance of a smile. “Yes, I know. But friends his own age will do Sasuke some good.” He replied.

“Mama said that to me about me not wanting friends…” Naruto grumbled a bit.

“How do you know if you don’t try? It’s like trying a new type of food.” Mikoto said encouragingly.

Naruto looked up at Mikoto. “I don’t like new things. Old things are safe. Like mama.” he replied, pouting as Kushina tried to keep herself calm.

‘And I thought Sasuke was stubborn.’ Mikoto thought to herself as she led him into the kitchen to get him food.

“That boy is such a handful.” Kushina sighed as Naruto and Mikoto left the scene.

“Children usually are Hokage-sama. As a father of two, I speak from experience.” Fugaku replied to the redheaded Kage.

“Is everything ready for the meeting?” Kushina asked him.

“It is. Seishin-san wanted to meet with myself and you first before meeting with the Hyūga clan. That way, we can plan out how to tackle breaking this news to the rest of the higher ups of the village’s infrastructure.” Fugaku told her with a nod.

Kushina groaned. “Gods, I’m going to hate that meeting… let’s get this over with.” Kushina said with a deep sigh.

“Agreed. After you, Hokage-sama.” Fugaku replied, stepping aside to let her go through the door first when they reached the door to the meeting hall.

Opening the door, Kushina saw many faces among the Uchiha she did not know, but the face of Seishin stood out to her. However, he was not the only Kamishini present there. Unlike Seishin, who had faded light red hair, the woman next to him, being around Kushina and Mikoto’s age, had more of a deeper red color. She shared his royal purple eyes but had softer facial features. Not to mention that she had a very elegant but dangerous aura about her, something Kushina made a note of.

“Greetings, Seishin. I see you brought company today.” Kushina said, bowing her head politely.

Seishin nodded. “Indeed, Lady Hokage. This is my daughter Miko, the oldest of my still living children. When I eventually retire, she will be the new head of the Kamishini.” He explained, introducing his daughter.

“It is an honor to meet you, Miko-san.” Kushina said politely, giving her a small bow of the head.

Miko, from her seat, bowed in prostration for a moment before rising back into a sitting position and giving Kushina a smile. “The honor is all mine, Lady Kushina. Our clan has always had close relations from the shadows with the Uzumaki and Senju, so I hope I can serve you and the village well.” She replied, as calm and composed as could be.

“Do not worry about that. I know you all will.” Kushina said as she sat down at the head of the meeting hall, and everyone bowed their heads customarily. “Right, this meeting shall begin. Does anyone have anything to bring up before we begin?”

One of the Uchiha elders spoke up. “I do, Lady Hokage. What is the topic of this meeting that makes it important enough to gather the entire upper echelon of the Uchiha clan in one room to tell us about it?” The elder replied.

“The Kamishini have brought something important to my attention. Something that could threaten not just the Hidden Leaf Village, but the safety and security of the entire world.” Kushina said gravely.

“Should I be the one to explain this, Hokage-dono?” Seishin asked.

Kushina nodded. “It would be best if you do it, Seishin-san. I may be a master of sealing, but you know more about this particular brand than I do.” She replied, giving the floor over to Seishin.

“The world we live in is but one plane. However, there is far more to this universe than just us. Many planes exist, most of which are beyond even my clan’s comprehension. A few, relative to the sheer number of them, have connections to our realm. These are the planar gates. Their existence has been known to our clan and our ancestor’s for as long as we have been in service to the gods of Heaven and rulers of men. We had sealed them, preventing the occupants of those planes from entering our world in uncontrollable numbers. However, after so many thousands of years, the seals on the gates are failing.” Seishin explained, clearly using simple language as to best explain it.

This caused a murmur of chatter amongst the present Uchiha as Fugaku spoke up. “And what lies beyond these gates, Seishin-dono?” He asked the elderly Kamishini.

“Fugaku, we are family. You need not use such formality, even now.” Seishin said simply. “As to your question, the occupants of those planes are far too numerous and diverse to speak about anywhere close to comprehensively. Even my clan doesn’t know of everything that lurks out there.”

Fugaku nodded in understanding. “I see. Based on your clan’s vast collective knowledge, what can you confirm is out there beyond those gates?” he asked, having an idea of where this was going.

“I will keep it as simple and concise as I can. Every legend, every monster, everything that lurks and goes bump in the night, is real.” Seishin said, causing the room to go stone cold silent.

“That can’t be. If that is the case, then why haven’t we…?” One of the Uchiha elders began to ask before trailing off as he paled, realizing what Seishin was getting to.

“I apologize that I haven’t explained it sooner. However, in our long history, this is the first time we have been under the vassalage of another civilization since the kings of Seaheart over a thousand years ago. We aren’t used to having to explain these things to groups outside our clan.” Seishin explained regretfully.

Fugaku, hiding how nervous he was, then spoke up. “So, every type of monster, demon, and legend we’ve heard of over the course of our world’s history are what exist beyond those gates…?” he asked, already knowing that he would not like the answer.

“That is only the tip of the iceberg. Those are all of what lurk and live among us now, with more of their kind beyond that gate. If you will, only what slipped through the cracks. Much more lurks out there, things that we have kept from the eyes of the public.” Seishin said, disturbing the shinobi present by lumping them in with the wider civilian population in this context.

“If that is the case, then why the concern? Surely, if they haven’t made an appearance before now, the chances that they will any time soon are slim at best.” One of the Uchiha clan’s elite jōnin asked, confused.

“The seals are weakening due to lack of proper maintenance. Truthfully, we do not have the resources to maintain them to their proper level, and they are constantly hammered at by the forces beyond. Only the potent mystical forces of our elder cousins could fully repair the seals.” Seishin explained, the worry beginning to slip through his stern exterior.

This caused a clamor of whispers amongst the present Uchiha before Fugaku held up a hand for silence. “If that is truly the case, what can we expect if even one of those seals were to break?” The Uchiha leader asked, trying to hide his own concerns.

“An uncomfortably high chance, due to the current state of things after the world war, of complete global apocalypse.” Seishin said, not mincing his words.

The present Uchiha seemed to be stuck in a strange limbo of sheer disbelief and absolute panic as they whispered amongst themselves. Meanwhile, Fugaku nodded gravely as he took this information in. For those paying attention, they could already practically see the gears in his head turning\ as he contemplated this.

“What would you recommend is the best course of action?” Kushina asked, surprising everyone with how unfazed and to the point she was.

“First and foremost, our top priority is getting Kamishini and Uzumaki seal masters out there to reinforce the seals. We need the seals to hold for as long as we can accomplish. The second priority is the location of four certain individuals whose existence will be vital should those seals begin to break.” Seishin explained to those present once everyone had quieted down.

“Four certain individuals?” Kushina asked, her curiosity peaked.

“Tell me, Lady Hokage and esteemed gathered Uchiha: How much reverence and significance do you place on prophecies?” Miko asked, speaking up for the first time during this explanation.

“What are we now entertaining an idea out of my son’s fairy tales?” Kushina asked in a confused manner.

“Trust me, Lady Hokage. This is no mere fairy tale. The seers and the oracles of our clan, blessed and cursed with the gift of prophecy by the gods, have never been wrong. And this particular vision has plagued them for thousands of years, since the fall of our ancient homeland.” Miko replied grimly.

“And what does it entail, then?” Kushina asked, raising an eyebrow at this.

“A world set ablaze by the enemies of man and Heaven. A war to end all wars, on a cosmic scale that no mortal could even begin to comprehend. One that, if our side should lose, would spell the end of all of creation…” Miko replied, causing a commotion amongst those present.

“Order!” Kushina roared, silencing everyone. “What is it we need to look for to find these four?”

“Four warriors whose powers will grow to surpass human comprehension. A warrior of golden light, a man with the eye of a god, a shadow of white light, and a man who wields the powers of Susanoo himself.” Seishin explained, paraphrasing the prophecy they had told Hiruzen and the village elders.

“I see…” Kushina said as her face contorted into one deep in thought.

“If we are to find these four, then several Uchiha secrets must be brought to light to help put things in perspective.” Fugaku announced, causing a clatter among the Uchiha present.

“Surely that isn’t truly necessary…” One elder tried to say, before being cut off.

“If the survival of humanity and all of creation is dependent on finding these four, then it is very necessary.” Fugaku replied, causing the elder to shrink back with a glare.

“Which secrets?” Kushina asked, raising an eyebrow.

“There is a stone tablet hidden beneath our clan’s sacred shrine. The inscription on the stone tablet is one that only someone with the eyes of an Uchiha can decipher. A message passed down by the Sage of the Six Paths himself.” Fugaku told the non-Uchiha present.

Kushina raised her eyebrow further. “And what does that tablet say?” She asked.

“It tells how to awaken a power forbidden by our clan: The Mangekyō Sharingan. It also tells that, as the Sharingan evolves, it gets closer and closer to reaching the realm of a certain god. The power of the Rinnegan.” Fugaku announced.

At that, the few non-Uchiha in the room were stunned into silence. To all of them, the Rinnegan was a myth, a legend. Yet, in the context of this meeting, and what was being discussed, that fact had long since died. Therefore, it now was a matter of reality. And how to handle that reality. 

“We will need as full of a translation of that tablet as you can give us, Fugaku. It may be a clue to tracking down one of the Four Warriors.” Seishin told the Uchiha leader.

“So, we are in need of a treasure hunt then. On top of fixing the gates. Throw in a festival and we pretty much have a vacation right there.” Kushina said, attempting to make a joke.

Miko nodded. “Indeed. We may already have a clue about the location of one of the Four Warriors. The issue, however, is that the place where he is entombed is guarded by seals and traps the likes of which we have never seen. Obstacles that only a Kamishini with aid from a Hyūga, Uzumaki, and Uchiha can overcome to release him.” She added. 

“Knowing our luck, he’s under that Mountain of Death Minato and Hiruzen warned me about not sending shinobi towards…” Kushina said, which got an awkward silence from the two Kamishini. “You’re not seriously saying it's there…”

“Unfortunately, it is. The Mountain of Death is the last known location of Seaheart. They had managed to find and move this warrior’s tomb to their vaults deep beneath the mountain but were unable to release him.” Seishin explained.

“Of fucking course it is…” Kushina said as her voice trailed off.

Meanwhile: With Naruto and Mikoto

“Sasuke! I have a surprise for you!” The voice of Mikoto called out through the kitchen doors.

“Mom!” The voice of a little boy called out as he tackle-hugged his mother’s leg.

“Easy, Sasuke.” She replied with a giggle.

As Sasuke pulled his face from her leg, his dark colored eyes sparkled like gems. His black spiky hair shaked as he ended the hug on his mother’s legs. In typical Uchiha drab and spartan fashion, he wore a dark blue and plain kimono.

“What's the surprise, mama?” Sasuke eagerly asked.

With that, Mikoto stepped aside to reveal Naruto. Who flinched and hid back behind her, looking out at Sasuke from behind the woman’s leg.

“You found a hobo?” Sasuke asked confusedly.

“Sasuke! Show some respect! This is Naruto. He’s the son of my best friend Kushina, our current Hokage.” Mikoto chided her youngest before explaining.

“Why is he blonde? And short? And has whiskers?” Sasuke asked confusedly.

“I’m not that short!” Naruto piped up angrily before hiding back behind Mikoto.

“You barely come up to momma’s knees. Therefore, you're short.” Sasuke huffed.

“Better to be short than have hair that looks like a duck’s butt!” Naruto snapped back, stepping out from behind Mikoto.

“That's it! Come and face me, you coward! Today we duel!” Sasuke exploded in anger.

“You’ll have to catch me first, Little Duck Butt!” Naruto replied, running out of the kitchen and into the gardens.

“That's it, you little orange coward!” Sasuke yelled as he raced after him.

Mikoto giggled at the sight. “Oh, they remind me so much of Kushina and I at around that age.” She thought nostalgically.

Naruto and Sasuke raced through the garden. Barreling through bushes, trampling flowers, climbing up the tree at its center like starved monkeys. Naruto even attempted to get onto the roof but failed due to a mistimed jump. Landing flat on his back, Sasuke used the height of the tree to body slam Naruto, nearly knocking the wind from the poor boy.

“You take back what you said about my hair!” Sasuke growled from atop the Uzumaki.

“Why take back the truth!? You take back what you said about me being short!” Naruto snapped back, trying to throw Sasuke off.

“Fight, fight, fight!!” Several voices yelled from the sidelines, making the two turn to look at where they were coming from.

Before them stood three identical looking boys. The only difference between them was minor differences in their facial features. The three all had light red hair and royal purple eyes, but the slight differences in their faces made it barely possible to tell them apart. The one on the left had slightly stern facial features for a four-year-old, the one on the right had slightly soft facial features, and the one in the center was in between compared to the other two. All three had mischievous smiles on their faces as they watched the tussle between the two boys.

“Great, just what I needed today. Dumb, Dumber, and Dumbest.” Sasuke moaned in annoyance.

“Hey! You take that back, Duck Butt!” The three replied in unison.

“Thank you! I’m not the only one who sees it!” Naruto replied from under Sasuke.

“I’ll take it back when you three return the toys you stole from me!” Sasuke yelled.

“We didn't steal anything!” The one on the left replied.

“We just borrowed them!” The one in the middle replied.

“It’s not our fault you weren’t paying attention when we asked!” The one on the right finished.

“Borrowing and not giving back is stealing!” Sasuke yelled indignantly.

“Can you four just act like civilized little boys and not like loud, angry monkeys?” An older voice said from behind them.

Sasuke turned excitedly at the sound of the voice. “Big Brother!” The young Uchiha called out.

Naruto looked up at the boy, well to him man. He was far taller than Sasuke, and indeed looked remarkably similar. However, he looked far more like his father, with the kindness of his mother. He looked up in awe at him as the Uchiha spoke.

“Sasuke, Shinkoku, Keikoku, and Seikoku. What did I tell you all about being quiet?” Itachi asked.

“For the last time, Itachi-kun! Call me Kei! I don't like being called ’Keikoku’!” The now identified Kei, the triplet in the middle, snapped out.

“Don’t interrupt me.” Itachi said firmly, but not meanly.

Kei immediately flinched. “Sorry, Itachi-kun…” He apologized.

“Now then, what did I tell you four?” Itachi asked again.

Sasuke, Shinkoku, Kei, and Seikoku all sighed. “No fighting in the gardens…” They all groaned in frustration.

“And I distinctly told you four to be nice to our guest. You five stay right here. You’re all going to replant and clean up after your mess.” Itachi said, before turning to head to the garden shed.

Naruto turned to look at the other four boys. “Well, since we’re all going to be in trouble anyway, wanna go do something fun?” He asked.

“What you got in mind, new kid?” Kei asked, raising an eyebrow.

“The name is Naruto. Uzumaki Naruto. And, as for what I have in mind, have any of you ever pulled a prank before…?” he asked with a small, mischievous grin.

“Mom is gonna kill us for this, guys…” Seikoku groaned. “She said be nice to the Hokage’s kid. Now we are really gonna get it…”

“Oh, don’t be such a baby, Sei! What’s the worst that could happen?” Kei asked his brother.

“I can name a few…” Seikoku sighed.

“Well, if we are going to do it, then let's do it now. Before big brother gets back, preferably.” Sasuke said, looking at where his brother had gone to.

“Follow me, men! Onward! To mischief and adventure!” Naruto called out before running off as the other four followed him.

What followed would be described by the Uchiha clan as a plague of Kitsune wreaking havoc on the compound. Naruto, Sasuke, and the triples had placed buckets of water over open doors to fall on top of unsuspecting occupants, rigged tripwires that dropped paint cans on people, rope traps that strung people up by their ankles, and all other kinds of mayhem and chaos. They even painted graffiti on the walls of the compound as the older kids and adults raced after them to catch them, laughing their heads off with joy.

“Okay, new kid! I like your style!” Seikoku chuckled.

“This is the most fun I’ve had since hide-and-seek with Itachi!” Sasuke called out with a smile, painting graffiti on a wall as he ran past.

“Well done, new guy!” Shinkoku said, smacking Naruto on the back as they went.

“All hail Naruto, King of Pranks!” Kei called out as he smeared paint on the face of an older kid who tried to grab him, getting himself free and running around the older boy.

“May his reign be short and terrible.” A familiar, less than enthused voice said from behind them.

The five boys all flinched and turned to look to see Itachi. The older boy had a frown on his face and a gleam in his eyes. Gulping, the five boys turned to look at each other as they weighed their options for getting out of this.

“... I’ll give you five ryo if you don’t tell my mom.” Naruto offered in a hopeful tone.

“Sasuke? Do I take bribes?” Itachi asked, looking at his little brother, expecting an answer.

Sasuke sighed and shook his head. “No, big brother. No, you don’t…” He confirmed.

“Then there’s only one option left.” Kei replied before throwing a can of paint on Itachi. “RUN FOR IT, BOYS!”

The five then took off running as Itachi tried to wipe the paint off himself. Once he had wiped the paint off himself, he took off running after the five four-year-old miscreants. Splitting up, the five tried to hide to avoid Itachi, knowing that he could not go after all of them at once. However, to their dismay, Itachi found all of them and tied them up. He then began dragging them back to the garden to clean up their first mess before working on the rest of their reign of terror.

“When you’re done fixing up the garden, you can work on apologizing to everyone you pranked and cleaning up everything else.” Itachi firmly told them as the five boys worked.

“Worth it…” Naruto mumbled with a grin.

“Yes, it was…” Sasuke agreed with a small smile of his own.

The triplets nodded as the five boys did a group fist bump before getting back to fixing up the garden. Despite the work ahead of them, there was not a single regret in any of their minds. What the boys did not know now was that it was the beginning of bonds of friendship that would follow them going forward. For now, it made for one hell of a day.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

“Hey pale eyes, why don’t you poke us!?” A boy cackled, poking a shy, blue haired girl in the head.

“P-Please leave me alone…” The girl stuttered out.

“And who exactly is going to stop us? You? Or your bodyguards?” Another boy asked snidely.

“Yeah! What’s wrong, pale eyes? You scared?” A third boy sneered.

As the boys, four strong, crowded around the blue haired, pale eye and skinned girl, clad in a maroon coat with matching mittens, navy blue long johns, and a yellow scarf trembled in fear. A look across her face of genuine uncertainty and fear, trembling as much from fear as the cold. Snow slowly fell in large wet flakes in the small, yet bitter breeze. Yet this scene had a watcher. Sharp blue eyes and spiky blonde hair poked out from behind a tree to look at the scene before ducking behind. An orange clad chest heaved heavily as lips curled whiskered cheeks, while a red scarf was tugged at by the same bitter breeze.

‘Wh-what should I do? Those four look kinda strong…’ The boy thought nervously.

“Hey, what's this?” One of the boys said, which got an immediate reaction out of the girl.

“P-Please leave him alone! Mother gave him to me…!” She stuttered out, trying to reach for a stuffed fox toy that one of the boys took from her.

“Or you’ll do what? Sit down, small fry, and shut up!” One of the boys yelled fiercely at her, shoving the girl down.

The orange clad boy felt something inside him begin to swell to the surface. He was afraid, he knew he could not take them on… yet he could not hide. He had to do something. Stepping out from behind the tree, he marched up the boys and made his presence known.

“H-Hey! P-Pick on s-someone your own s-size!” The orange clad boy yelled, trying to steel himself against what he knew would come his way.

The four other children all turned to look at the boy. As soon as they saw him, the four boys smirked.

“Well, well! Look at this! One freak defending another!” One of the kids said.

“What can you do, Hokage’s brat? You look like you’re barely out of diapers!” Another one sneered.

“A-At least, u-unlike you four, I a-actually have a mom w-who loves me.” The orange clad boy said with a small brazen smirk.

The four boys glared at the orange-glad kid at that. “Whoop his butt!” One of the boys shouted out in rage.

However, to their surprise, the blonde reacted before they did. Running in, he tackled one of the boys to the ground and began punching him. Reacting quickly, the boy kicked the blonde off him as one of the other boys punched him in the face. Reeling back, the blonde boy quickly recovered and threw a punch of his own. One of the kids tried to kick the blonde boy, only for the orange clad kid to dodge and kick him between the legs.

“OOOOWWWWW!!!” The boy who got kicked between the legs let out of his mouth.

“You little freak! Let's see how he likes it!” Another of the boys yelled.

Two of the boys grabbed the blonde kid by his arms, holding him in place. The third boy who was still standing smirked and cracked his knuckles as he walked over. But, before he could do anything, the five “combatants” heard something.

“GET OFF MY SISTER AND THAT BOY, YOU BRUTES!!!” Screamed out a female voice, forcing everyone involved to look at its source's direction.

Standing up in a tree was a girl identical to the blue haired girl in almost every way. The only difference was their outfits and hair. This new girl had longer hair pulled up in pigtails and wore a navy-blue coat and matching mittens and maroon long johns. Between those factors and the angry look on the new girl’s face, the only major similarity in their appearances was the matching yellow scarves they wore.

“What the…” Was all the boy got to say before being cut off by what the new girl did next.

“RAAARGH!” The girl in the tree roared before pouncing down on top of the boys from the branch she was standing on.

“She’s a spider girl!!!” One of the boys yelled in panic.

“The blonde boy is right, you jerks! Pick on someone your own size!” She snapped, punching the boy she pounced on in the face.

“Get her off me!” The boy that was pounced yelled, trying, and failing to get the new girl off.

Before the other two boys could react, the orange-clad boy wiggled free and tackled one of them to the ground. Getting on top, the blonde began punching the other boy as the last boy began to move to assist his friends while the boy the blonde kicked tried to recover. However, before they could intervene, a voice was heard that called out in anger.

“ATTTTAAAAAACCCCKKK!!!!” Came the telltale cry of Sasuke Uchiha.

Behind him came the three triplet tornadoes as the quadruplet of dumbasses surged in to assist the two. Seeing that they were outnumbered, the four bullies did the only wise thing they could.

“RETREEEEEEAT!” One of the four bullies called out to his compatriots as the four bullies took off running.

“And stay gone, you losers!” The punchy girl roared at them, shaking her fist wildly.

“Enten… please b-be civil…” The shy girl said nervously as she picked up her dropped stuffed fox.

“Oh, lighten up, Hinata! Those jerks had it coming!” The bolder twin, now identified as Enten, replied with a sigh and a shake of her head.

“But father will get angry again…” Hinata said weakly…

“Who cares what father thinks? The only way to make a bully back off is to show ‘em who's boss!” Enten insisted before turning to look at the boys before them.

“You okay, Naruto?” Sasuke asked his blonde, orange-clad friend.

“I-I’m fine…” Naruto said, though a quick wince of pain made it clear he was lying.

“It doesn’t look like you are. Follow us to our place. Our mom can help patch you up.” Enten offered the boy.

“A-And you are…” Naruto sheepishly and awkwardly asked.

“Hyūga Enten! And that’s my big sister Hinata.” Enten told the boy, introducing the two of them.

“W-we’re the same age, Enten…” Hinata insisted.

“Not true, Hinata. I’m two minutes younger and prettier.” Enten said with a playful smile.

Hinata pouted at that. “It’s only two minutes…” She insisted.

Naruto looked at one sister, and then the other. “Y-y-you b-both look p-pretty…” Naruto said, not understanding why the two would argue on that.

Hinata and Enten both blushed at the blonde’s words, Hinata much more so than her sister. “Well, look at you. You work fast, don’t you, Blondie?” Enten playfully asked, trying to hide her embarrassment. 

“I don’t understand the question.” Naruto said in genuine confusion.

“He never does.” Kei answered bluntly.

Sasuke rolled his eyes at that. “That’s Naruto. I’m Sasuke. The three identical idiots are Kamishini Kei and his brothers Shin and Sei.” He said, introducing Naruto and their friends.

“Care to repeat that?” The triplets sternly said in unison.

“I rest my case.” Sasuke replied in a deadpan.

“You do realize we outnumber you, right Uchiha?” Sei asked, narrowing his eyes.

“Try it, loser.” Sasuke replied with a smirk.

“Don’t call our brother a loser!” Shinkoku told the Uchiha boy.

“Yeah! Only we can do that!” Kei insisted angrily.

“G-Guys don’t fight now…” Naruto said, shuffling his hurt body between the four.

The four boys looked at Naruto, then sighed and nodded before backing up. The five of them then turned to look at the Hyūga twins.

“You said your mom can patch this basket case up?” Shinkoku asked, pointing to Naruto.

Enten nodded. “Yeah. Follow us.” She replied, motioning for the boys to follow her and Hinata.

The boys followed, with Naruto having to be helped along by two of the brothers. After a sizable walk for the small children, they arrived at the gates of the Hyūga estate. While externally it was very austere and traditional, the Uchiha and Kamishini boys could tell the sheer opulence between the lines. Internally they were a bit worried, as the Hyūga clan were not ones to host visitors. Naruto, however, remained undaunted as the group was stopped at the gate by two guards. 

“Lady Hinata and Lady Enten, what are these boys doing here?” One of the guards sternly asked.

“They saved Hinata and helped me out. Now let them pass with us or we’ll tell mother and father on you.” Enten told the guards equally as sternly.

The two guards looked at each other before the other addressed them. “Apologies, Lady Enten.” The other guard said before letting them enter.

After that, the group made a swift entry. After politely taking off their shoes first, some servants soon came over to put their winter clothes on racks. They then made their way deeper into the estate. The floors were lacquered maple, the walls painted in simple, yet resplendent colors. Shoji screens depicting the greatest myths and greatest sagas of the Leaf village were everywhere in every room. At each corner was a statement of wealth and power few groups in the village could hope to match.

“Hinata? Enten? You are back early.” A maternal female voice said from a tearoom.

“Hi, mom!” Enten called out, rushing into the tearoom.

“I see you brought company, dear.” The woman, eerily similar in appearance to the twin sisters except older, said after notice the group of five boys come in.

“Hinata was being a scaredy baby dealing with some bullies. But Naruto protected her and got hurt for it before me, Sasuke, Kei, Shin, and Sei could step in.” Enten told her and Hinata’s mother.

“But they were really mean…” Hinata whined, cuddling up to her mother like a cat.

Their mother smiled at that. “Hinata, dear. You will learn soon enough that, while its okay to be kind and not like to hurt people, you need to learn to be brave and stand up for what is important to you.” The woman wisely told her shyer daughter.

“Like Ko-chan…?” Hinata asked in confusion, holding up the stuffed fox.

The woman giggled a bit. “Yes, Hinata. Like Ko-chan. He cannot protect himself, so it is your job to keep him safe.” She told the shyer of her twin daughters.

At that, Naruto, in pain, walked up to the twins’ mother and bowed. “Mrs. Hyūga… your daughters are equally pretty…” Naruto said sheepishly, causing the other four boys to facepalm.

Hinata and Enten blushed at Naruto’s words while Lady Hyūga giggled. “Why thank you, Naruto-kun. I do believe you are right.” She playfully replied, looking at her daughters with a demure grin.

“Enten, why did you have to put us in this situation!?” Hinata sharply whispered to her sister.

“How was I supposed to know!?” Enten whispered back just as harshly.

“Why do you always have to run your mouth, and then drag me into things with mother!?” Hinata harshly whispered to her.

“How is this my fault!? You’re the one who was too scared to stick up for herself!” Enten quietly and harshly replied.

“Girls, can you please get me my first aid kit and my homemade ointment?” Lady Hyūga asked, which shut the two girls' argument up.

“Yes, mother…” The two girls said before rushing off to get it.

“Now then, Naruto-kun. If you could take your top off so I can fix you up.” Lady Hyūga said calmly.

“Y-yes, ma’am…” Naruto politely said before taking it off, revealing several large bruises forming. 

It was at that moment that Hinata and Enten walked in to see a shirtless Naruto. The two blushed deeper red as Naruto sat in front of their mother, waiting for her to get to work healing him.

“Don’t dawdle, girls.” The two’s mother said simply.

“Yes, mother!” the two girls said before rushing over.

As Lady Hyūga began to work, everyone began to hear far heavier footfalls walking towards them. Through the still open door came a tall, fit man with pale eyes and black hair, wearing dark yet rich clothing. He observed the situation, before looking at Lady Hyūga directly.

“... Nikkō [1]. Why are these boys in our house? And why is the son of the Hokage shirtless and bruised in our tearoom?” The man asked, cutting right to the chase.

“He saved our baby girl Hinata from being beaten up by bullies. And these four, along with Enten, helped him send them packing. And do you want to send him home in such a condition to our dearest leader, Hiashi-kun?” Nikkō explained, before putting that question on his plate to let him decide what would be best.

“... Fair enough, beloved. Carry on.” Hiashi replied, taking a seat in the tearoom.

“I-It’s an h-honor, Lord Hiashi…” Naruto nervously said, wincing at ointment being put on one of his bruises.

“The honor is all mine, young Lord Naruto. Thank you for protecting one of my daughters.” Hiashi replied with a nod.

“Kei. Why am I a lord again?” Naruto whispered, leaning over to whisper in the Kamishini’s ear.

Kei rolled his eyes. “We’ve been over this, chief. Your mom’s Hokage, which makes you practically royalty in this village.” He quietly told his friend as if it was the most obvious thing in the world.

“Then why don’t I feel like it?” Naruto whispered.

“Because you’re… what did grandpa call it…? I think it was ‘down to earth’...” Shinkoku replied with a smile.

“I thought it was because his mom is a scary old bat?” Seikoku asked in a whisper.

“I’m telling Auntie Kushina!” Sasuke told Seikoku.

“Not before I kill you first rat face!” Seikoku snarled.

“Boys, please behave.” Nikkō sternly said, glancing over at them.

“Yes ma’am…” The four idiots said in mortified unison, which got a proud smile out of Hiashi.

“Young Lord Naruto, have you heard a word from your mother about when she wants to meet with us? She told me that she had something important to tell us in private as soon as she had met with the Uchiha clan.” Hiashi asked the blonde boy.

“I h-heard her, at breakfast, say about a week from now…” Naruto nervously said.

“Hiashi, don’t grill the poor boy.” Nikkō sternly said to her husband.

Hiashi nodded in response. “Fair enough. You are more than welcome to tag along that day if you wish. It will give you more time to bond with Hinata and Enten.” He told the orange-clad boy.

“T-Thank you, Lord Hiashi. Y-Your daughters are e-equally pretty.” Naruto nervously answered.

The twin girls blushed red at that. “P-Please be quiet-Naruto-kun…/Shut up, Naruto-kun!” Hinata and Enten said simultaneously.

Hiashi raised an eyebrow at that. “Um… thank you, young lord…” Hiashi replied, unsure of how to respond to that.

“All better. You can put your shirt back on. Hinata, Enten, why don’t you go play with the boys while your father and I talk?” Nikkō said after finishing fixing up Naruto, before turning to face her daughter.

Enten nodded in response. “Yes, mom.” She said as she and Hinata led the boys out of the room.

“What do you think of the boy, Hiashi-kun?” Nikkō asked her husband, keeping an eye on his reaction.

“He seems… interesting. Strange, but not a bad child.” Hiashi replied, looking away from the children’s retreating forms to look his wife in the face.

“Well then, I think we have a winner, then.” she said with a knowing smile.

“... I’m sorry, what?” Hiashi replied in confusion.

“I think we found the perfect boy for our two girls.” Nikkō reiterated.

Hiashi went wide-eyed in shock. “N-Nikkō, aren’t they a bit young for us to be thinking about that…?” He stammered out.

“Is it ever too early to think of our daughters’ futures and their lifelong happiness? Think about it. You saw how the girls reacted around him. He practically had them at his whims with a simple comment. And, due to his status as the Hokage’s son, then there is zero reason the elders can give this any scrutiny. It provides the best balance of status for the clan and our daughters' own happiness.” Nikkō explained with confidence.

Hiashi smiled at that. “I knew there was a reason I married you, Nikkō.” He told his wife.

Nikkō grinned playfully at her husband. “I thought you married me for, and I quote, ‘my stunning beauty and because you loved me more than anything else in the world’.”

The Hyūga clan leader’s throat seized a bit as he blushed. “W-Well you a-are quite beautiful but…” He stammered out, eerily similarly to his eldest daughter.

Nikkō giggled at her husband’s response. “Oh relax, Hiashi-kun. I am merely teasing.” She replied playfully.

One Week Later

“Naruto, why didn’t you tell me sooner that's why you got those bruises!?” Kushina yelled out at her son, who was cowering behind Rea.

“I-I didn’t want you to be worried…” Naruto stuttered out in fear.

“Come on, cousin. Surely, him getting close with two Hyūga princesses is enough to calm your wrath?” Rea asked rhetorically, fully knowing the answer.

“Only because I’ll be getting half-Hyūga grandbabies.” Kushina replied with a smile.

“M-mama… would you have been mad at me if I told you how I got the bruises?” Naruto asked nervously.

“Just a bit. Only because it’s just like something I would have done at your age.” Kushina replied with a small sigh.

“Would it be more like Minato considering you were the one having to get saved all the time?” Rea asked.

“One time!” Kushina called out in annoyance.

“Anyways, let's get you two moving so you’re not late.” Rea said, moving the two along.

With that the three made swift time to the Hyūga Estate. This time they were waved past the guards without a fuss. Arriving at the door, the myriads of Hyūga elders greeted them, along with Hiashi and Nikkō themselves.

“Lord and Lady Hyūga. It is an honor as always. I must say, you have a lovely home.” Kushina said with a small smile.

“The honor is all ours, Lady Hokage. Kō, show the girls and the young Lord Naruto to the garden.” Hiashi told Hinata’s caretaker.

“Of course, my lord.” The caretaker replied, bowing politely before having the children follow him.

“You run quite the orderly house here.” Kushina said with a somewhat impressed tone.

“That simply comes with being from a noble clan, Lady Hokage.” Nikkō replied with a smile.

“And what exactly does that make us…” Rea muttered before Kushina bonked him on the head.

“It makes you a redheaded monkey’s uncle.” Kushina growled.

“Come, Lady Hokage. We have much to talk about.” Hiashi said, motioning for the two Uzumaki to follow him.

“Of course.” Kushina said as the group made their way into the hallowed depths of the estate.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

“So how was your meeting, mama?” Naruto asked, concerned about the somewhat exhausted look on his mother’s face. The two walked slowly beyond the gates of the Hyūga estate, the guards bowing to them out of respect.

“It went well, son. I’m just tired from it.” She explained to the boy.

This confused the blonde boy greatly. “But, if it went well, then why are you tired?” Naruto asked confusedly.

“Because talking to stubborn old people about important things can be exhausting.” Kushina explained.

“But Hinata and Enten’s parents aren’t old…” Naruto said confusedly, and it was clear the boy just did not have his head on the right way about the topic.

“No, but the elders of their clan are…” Kushina tiredly elaborated for her son.

“Oh, the old farts with the stern looks at me playing with Hinata and Enten?” Naruto asked with a giggle.

“Naruto! Watch your language!” Kushina said, looking at her son in shock.

“But you just said…” Naruto tried to defend himself but was cut off.

“Do as I say, not as I do.” Kushina replied nonchalantly.

“You got that right.” Naruto grumbled under his breath.

“What was that, young man?” Kushina asked with a sickly-sweet smile, her hair slowly splitting into nine tail-like segments.

“I love you, mama.” Naruto sheepishly said, his knees beginning to chatter with dread.

“Mama loves you too, Naruto. Now let’s get you home and have some dinner.” Kushina replied, offering her hand to her little boy.

“Yay, ramen!” Naruto squealed happily, throwing his arms out in the air.

“No ramen tonight. You need something healthy.” Kushina sternly told him.

Naruto thought for a second before speaking. “Veggie ramen!” Naruto cried out in the same enthusiastic tone.

“... Clever boy. You are definitely my son.” Kushina replied with a giggle and a smile.

As the two walked along, Naruto’s enthusiasm was through the roof. It was to the point where he was practically pulling her along, like a big dog would its owner on a walk. However, he was, for once, blissfully ignorant of the many foul and venomous looks others gave. Kushina, however, was far more observant on that front. When the villagers realized she had noticed, they instantly stopped and clammed up. In the first few years of her reign as Hokage, her legendary temper was already well known. To calm herself, Kushina decided to spark up more conversation with her boy.

“How was your little playdate with the Hyūga twins, Naruto? Did it go well?” Kushina asked her boy with a smile.

“It went great! Enten had like a bunch of games all lined up. Hinata made sure snacks were there. I even got to meet their cousin. It was Weji or Neji. I kinda forgot…” Naruto said, ending with a sheepish tone. “He was really cranky for some reason.”

Kushina shook her head. “Neji has… been through a lot, Naruto. Try not to be too tough on him, okay?” She asked her son.

“Like what?” Naruto asked genuinely.

“It’s… not my place to say. You should ask him yourself if he feels comfortable with telling you.” Kushina told the blonde Uzumaki.

“He said he’d only tell me over his dead body…” Naruto nervously and glumly said.

“Well don’t give up. If anyone can get through that hard shell of his to get to the soft side underneath, it’s you.” Kushina told him.

“But… what if I’m not good enough…” Naruto said before getting cut off.

“You’re more than good enough, Naruto. Just do your best, okay?” Kushina told her son with a smile.

“Okay, mama…” Naruto said, the encouragement not fully setting in.

Kushina smiled and gently picked Naruto up. “Come on. Let’s get you home so I can make you some homemade veggie ramen.” She told him.

Naruto’s eyes lit up at that. “Really? You're not gonna have servants make it?” Naruto asked joyfully.

Kushina shook her head. “That’s only when mama’s too busy to do it herself, Naruto. Now let’s get you home and make that veggie ramen.” She told him with a grin.

“Onward!” Naruto yelled, pointing in the general direction of the Uzumaki estates as Kushina giggled and took him home.

“Do you wanna help mama make it? It’ll help you have a way with the ladies. Well, more of one.” Kushina said with a teasing grin.

Naruto blushed a bit at that, knowing who she was referring to. However, he gave her a sheepish nod, which was all Kushina needed. In the blink of an eye, the two were gone.

A Few Months Later: Hokage Mansion’s Meeting Hall

“Rea! I thought you got this place presentable by now! They’ll be here any minute!” Kushina yelled at her cousin, working with the servants to liven the place up.

“Take it easy, cous! I’m almost done! Hey, I see a speck of dust on that table!” He replied, pointing towards a small speck of dust on the mostly clean table.

“Oh, you think you're cute?” She said while putting her hands on her hips.

“Cuz, I’m adorable.” Rea said with a smirk.

“Have you seen Naruto? I need him to keep the heirs to the clans busy.” Kushina said, looking around the chaotic room.

“The squirt? He said something about ‘going to greet them for mama’ or something.” Rea said with a shrug.

Kushina sighed deeply at that. “How the hell can’t I trust any of you?” Kushina groaned, pinching the bridge of her nose.

“Oh, come on. I’m almost done here, then I’ll go meet with the kid to help greet them.” Rea pointed out as the last of the cleaning was finished.

“Milady! Young Lord Naruto is in the courtyard with the clan delegations!” A Uzumaki member called from the top window.

Immediately realizing she was out of time, Kushina made a hand seal and used the Body Flicker technique to disappear in a burst of speed.

Meanwhile: With Naruto and the Delegations

The three delegations were swiftly let through the gate, the Uzumaki guards bowing alongside the Hokage guard. As the three clans, historically close and powerful allies, entered the courtyard, they soon stopped. Before them was the odd sight of Naruto, all by himself, there to meet them. Dressed in as formal of robes as his mother could get him in… and survive this long.

“Hello. My name is Uzumaki Naruto, the son of the Fifth Hokage. It is very nice for me to meet you, your greatnesses.” Naruto awkwardly told them, bowing like he was taught.

The great and massive Chōza let out a hearty belly laugh. “A little awkward, my boy, but thank you. I like you, young man.” The lord of the Akimichi said, patting Naruto’s head gently with his great oni-sized hand.

The laid back and lazy Nara Shikaku blinked for a moment before turning to look at the lord of the Yamanaka, Yamanaka Inoichi. “... Are we sure he’s an Uzumaki? He’s acting more like Minato did in the academy right now.” The lord of the Nara asked his longtime friend.

The blonde Intelligence officer gave his friend a look. “Be polite. It takes a great deal of bravery to do such a thing unattended.” Inoichi said sternly.

Naruto immediately perked up at Shikaku’s words, rushing up to him excitedly. “You knew papa? What was he like!? Was he as cool as people say he was!? Did he really invent an A-Rank jutsu in just three years!?” The boy asked, firing off questions like a repeating crossbow firing bolts.

Shikaku chuckled at that. “Okay, now I see it. You’re definitely an Uzumaki.” he said, ruffling the blonde’s spiky hair.

“Was there ever a doubt?” Inoichi asked in confusion.

“Daddy, who’s he?” A girl’s voice asked from behind Inoichi.

“Come now, Ino. Don’t be nervous. I don’t need to read his mind to know he’s harmless.” Inoichi said, reaching behind to pet a child's head.

From behind came a girl somewhat taller than him, with shoulder length blonde hair. Teal blue eyes locked on the boy, as if trying to understand everything about him. This made Naruto nervous, making his eyes look down, noticing her luxurious floral patterned purple kimono. However, the girl's gaze did not let up.

“Quit staring so much, Ino. You’re scaring him.” A lazy little boy’s voice drolled out from behind Shikaku.

From the crowd of the Nara clan came a boy with black spiky hair pulled up into a knot and dark colored eyes. Blue flowing robes followed him as his expression was one of seemingly eternal boredom. All of which confused Naruto.

Ino glared at the boy who just came out of the Nara clan’s crowd. “Shut up, Shikamaru! I’m just trying to get a good feel for him!” She told the boy, now identified as Shikamaru.

“Please don’t fight, you two…” Came a gentle voice from the towering forest of giant Akimichi members.

From the great crowd of titanic shinobi came a boy with brown spiky hair. He stood taller than the other two kids, almost the size of an academy student. While not as rotund as his clansmen, it was clear to Naruto he was already packing on the pounds through his red robes. His chubby cheeks with swirling symbols on them jiggled a bit as he walked.

Ino looked a bit sheepish at that. “Sorry, Chōji.” She replied, seeing that she was freaking the large boy and the blonde before them out a bit.

“It’s fine, but I don’t think I’m the one you should be apologizing to.” The rotund boy, now identified as Chōji, replied.

“Don’t make me.” Ino said.

“Ino, come on. Just do it and get it over with before you scare him off.” Shikamaru told her.

“I’m sorry for scaring you, Naruto-san.” Ino said, bowing her head politely.

“J-Just Naruto is fine. You don’t have to be formal with me.” Naruto replied a bit nervously, not used to a pretty girl being so polite to him outside of Hinata.

Ino gave a smile at that. Naruto blushed a bit and then turned to Chōji to avoid the idea of talking to a pretty girl for now.

“S-so… y-you three seem to know each other pretty well…” Naruto nervously noted, motioning towards the three clan heirs his age.

“It comes with having very close clan ties. It's troublesome.” Shikamaru said with a shrug.

“What’s so troublesome about being friends with a pretty girl like me, Shikamaru?” Ino asked proudly, flipping her hair a bit.

“Less hair on my robes for one.” Shikamaru snarky said.

“What was that, Cloud Brain!?” Ino asked sharply, glaring at him.

“E-Easy now. We shouldn’t fight. We’re gonna probably be in the academy together, so we should all try to get along.” Naruto told the two.

“Finally, someone who agrees with me.” Chōji said in slight exasperation.

“Question… why are you fat?” Naruto asked a bit too bluntly.

Ino and Shikamaru paled as Chōji immediately snapped in rage. “I’M NOT FAT! I’M JUST A LITTLE CHUBBY!” The rotund Akimichi boy yelled at the blonde boy.

Naruto flinched but looked confused. “Isn’t that just another word for…?” He started only for his mother to appear in a burst of speed behind him.

“No, no. Go on, Naruto. Don’t let me stop you.” Kushina sternly said to her son, with enough hidden wrath to frighten the shinobi before her.

“... No. I feel like I’ve made some kind of mistake….” Naruto replied, terrified at that moment.

“Good. Thank you, everyone, for being so punctual. I’m glad to see you met my dearest boy Naruto.” Kushina said, scooping him up into her arms to prevent him causing more trouble.

“He’s as cute as Hinata and Enten said he’d be, Kushina-sama.” Ino told the older woman with a smile.

Kushina let out a small smile as Naruto blushed and hid his face on Kushina’s shoulder. “Thank you dear. Inoichi, you have quite the polite and well-mannered daughter.” Kushina said to the intelligence officer.

“You should see her at home…” Inoichi muttered in exasperation.

“I know the feeling. Now then, if you will all follow me in, we can get the meeting underway. Don’t worry, my cousin Rea will watch over the children and ensure nothing bad happens to them.” Kushina explained as Shikaku raised his eyebrow.

“Isn’t your cousin, and I quote you, ‘barking mad’?” Shikaku asked. 

“Being barking mad doesn’t mean being unreliable.” Kushina noted.

With that, the lords of the clans saw no further reason to argue as the contingents followed their leader inside. Soon dropping the kids off with Rea and giving their goodbyes. As the massive crowd of elites walked off, that left the kids to figure out what to do.

“What now, oh great and glorious leader?” Shikamaru dryly said, turning to look at Ino.

“I don’t know. What’s there to do around here?” Ino replied before turning to Naruto.

Naruto thought for a moment before smiling. “We could play hide-and-seek. I tried playing with Hinata and Enten, but they kept cheating. Stupid Byakugan and it letting you see through stuff…” He replied, pouting at the memory.

“That sounds like fun.” Chōji said with a smile.

“Who’s gonna be it?” Ino asked, raising an eyebrow.

“You're it!” Shikamaru said before running off.

“No fair! Why me!?” Ino asked, pouting.

“’Cause it's not fair if I’m it ‘cause I’m here every day.” Naruto said cheekily.

Ino grumbled and nodded. “Okay, I’ll be it. Go hide while I start counting.” She told the two remaining boys.

“No peeking, Ino.” Chōji told his friend.

“Oh, one time!” Ino replied before turning around, covering her eyes with her hands, and starting to count. “One… two… three…”

With that, Chōji and Naruto rushed off to go hide as Ino continued to count down. Inside Naruto's mind, he knew he was going to have some real fun today.

Meanwhile: In the Meeting Hall

As the laborious processions of the clans and their elders sat down in their proper spots and got comfortable, Kushina’s mind began to wander. She did not show it, but such meetings were the worst part of her job to her. She would rather do paperwork than this, as at least, with that, she could sit in her comfortable Hokage chair. All of this got interrupted by a voice coming from her inner mindscape.

“Don’t you think you’re being a bit hard on the boy, Kushina? I know for a fact you were much more of a troublemaker at his age.” The voice asked from within her.

‘Quiet, fox! I’ll raise my child my way!’ Kushina snapped inside her head, not wanting this kind of talk now.

“I would still advise caution. Be too harsh and you’ll push him away. Coddle him too much and he won’t be prepared for the shinobi life you apes seem so intent on having your children be a part of.” The voice of the Yin half of the Nine Tails told her.

‘I don’t coddle him. And I am far from harsh.’ Kushina said sternly back before stopping to think. ‘Do I…?’

This caused the Hokage to shake her head. No. She needed to focus on the meeting. Not focusing on what that fox somehow knew about parenting. It did not even have junk, what did it know about being a parent? Hardening herself internally, she then looked over the meeting hall to see everyone ready.

“Alright, we’re here. So why did you call us to this meeting, Lady Hokage?” Shikaku asked, getting right to the point. He already knew that Kushina would not have called them to a private meeting if it was not important.

“You’re not in the habit of calling several clans for a social call.” Chōza said, trying to break the ice.

“Which tells us that this is a matter of great importance and seriousness.” Inoichi said gravely, which got a nod out of the Hokage.

Kushina sighed and took a deep breath. “I believe you’ve all been made aware of the purpose the Kamishini have served in our world? Long before they joined this village and, hell, even long before the time of the legendary Sage of the Six Paths?” She asked, aware that this was likely the case.

The rest of the clan heads at that, understanding that. Though the elders were less than confused.

“Their purpose was to protect the lands from things that we were unaware of and to keep those things merely as legends. At least for a long time.” Inoichi said, explaining for the elders’ sake.

“What are you getting at, Lady Kushina?” Chōza asked, already getting a bad feeling about this.

Shikaku’s normally relaxed face however turned very grave indeed. “The seals to the other realms are weakening. Aren’t they, Hokage-sama?” Shikaku asked with worry oozing from his voice with the elders of the clans and other three lords looking equally as worried.

Kushina sighed and nodded. “As observant as ever, Shikaku. Yes, the seals are weakening. And the Kamishini only have the resources and skills to slow the process down rather than fix them. If something isn’t done, the seals will all break in less than eight years.” She explained to the present delegates.

“Then what can be done?” An elder of the Nara clan asked, looking around the room.

“Only one thing can be done. A journey must be made to the Mountain of Death on the border to reawaken those who can. To dig up a past that this world has long since forgotten.” Kushina told them grimly.

This, however, had a very animated effect on the clans, including their heads. As one elder of the Akimichi made that very clear.

“Milady! That is suicide! Entire armies have attempted to scale that peak, and none have returned!” The elder protested in horror.

“I am well aware of that, honored Akimichi elder. However, we have no other options. It’s either that or allow the seals to be broken and untold ancient horrors and nightmares to flood our world. Ones that we are far from prepared to face as a species.” Kushina told the present delegates, causing them to see the gravity of the situation.

“Is there any way to potentially get into the mountain without costing untold amounts of lives? And does it have anything to do with why you’ve, based on what I’ve heard, already spoken with the Uchiha and Hyūga?” Shikaku asked, his planning and strategy face on.

“Astute again, Shikaku. Yes, it does. Only a Kamishini, Hyūga, Uchiha, and either an Uzumaki or Senju together can get past the traps to get inside the mountain. And, to awaken the thing we need the most from within the mountain, we will need those who can pass tests of loyalty, compassion, and ambition.” Kushina explained to the delegations, much to their confusion about the specific requirements.

“Lady Hokage. What is inside that mountain that you would risk so much death that would be of help to us?” Inoichi asked.

“A people who are also descendants of the People Closest to the Gods like the Kamishini. A kingdom whose name has long been lost to history, known as Seaheart…. As well as one of the potential Fated Four of the Prophecy of the Four Warriors.” Kushina told them.

“Those four? As in the four champions of humanity that will lead us to the future or destruction?” An elder of the Nara clan asked.

Kushina nodded. “Exactly. The Kamishini have long suspected that Seaheart had managed to find one of them and was keeping that certain individual in a vault beneath the Mountain of Death. Finding him and training him to use his abilities will be the key to ensuring humanity’s survival in a coming war. A war to end all wars. One that will be waged to decide the fate of all of creation…” She continued explaining.

“Milady, forgive me for my concern but… how do we know that this Kingdom of Seaheart will help us? For all we know, the Kamishini misremembered their past.” Inoichi asked, a rare look of worry across his face.

“Because they are just as much a part of this world as we are. If they do not aid us and our world is destroyed, they will be destroyed along with it. Just like us.” Kushina told them gravely.

Chōza then stood up from this tatami mat sternly. “Milady, you have my clan's assistance in this matter. Even if we must batter the mountain down to reach that vault, we will at your command.” The towering Akimichi said with stern deference in his voice.

Shikaku stood up as well. “The Nara clan will lend our support as well. Our shadows and strategic minds are yours to command.” The lord of the Nara clan spoke up.

Inoichi stood up to match his friends and teammates. “No plan or secret of our foes shall remain hidden, milady. You have our unwavering support in this operation.” Inoichi said sternly.

Kushina nodded and smiled in relief. “Thank you all. Now we simply need to rally the remaining Lee, Sarutobi, and Shimura clans to aid us.” She explained.

As the elders and the clan heads began to talk strategy, Shikaku had a worried look. And it was not long before he was vocal again.

“Milady… something doesn’t add up from what the Kamishini have told you.” Shikaku said, which caused everyone to look at him.

Kushina raised an eyebrow. “Please speak freely, Shikaku-san.” She told him.

“How much more powerful and capable did the Kamishini describe these Seaheartian’s to you?” Shikaku asked inquisitively.

“When it comes to matters of magic, trade, and sealing off entire realms? Much more so than them. From what they told me, the enemies of humanity would have been foolish to try to attack them without entire armies at hand.” Kushina explained, a grave look dawning on her face as she realized where the Nara lord was going with this.

“Then it leaves me with a single question on my mind. Why are the Kamishini the ones up and walking about in this world to tell us this if Seaheart was so much their superior?” Shikaku asked, which left a near deafening silence to hang over the room. For no one had an answer, and they all dreaded what said answer could be.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

“Bye, guys. See you next time.” Naruto said, waving to Shikamaru, Chōji and Ino as he walked away with his mother.

“I gotta admit, this wasn’t so bad. You’re not as much of a pain to deal with as Ino, Naruto.” Shikamaru admitted with a lazy smile.

“What was that?” Ino growled, slowly turning to look at him.

“Easy, Ino. You know Shikamaru didn’t mean it that way.” Chōji told the blonde girl.

“Oh? And what way did he mean it?” She asked her larger companion in a sickeningly sweet tone.

“He just meant that Naruto isn’t as loud as you are. Or as…. well… pushy.” Chōji admitted, trying to be as nice as he could before he and Shikamaru were jumped by Ino.

The trio rapidly devolved into a cloud of fighting as Kushina pulled Naruto along deeper into the clan compound. The sun had begun to set, its orange hues consuming the blue sky to make way for the darkness to come. Once all the guests had left through the front gates, Kushina let out a deep sigh.

“Okay… that wasn’t a complete disaster… Rea, what do you think?” Kushina said before turning to look at her cousin.

“I think it went pretty well. Looks like Naruto’s made some new friends and your meeting with their fathers went well enough.” Rea commented, suppressing a chuckle at the still brawling children’s antics.

“Naruto, how was your playdate?” Kushina said, trying her best to suppress a sigh.

“It was great, mama. I had a lot of fun. Shikamaru may act like everything is a pain, but he’s nice once you get to know him. Chōji’s one of the nicest kids I’ve ever met. Ino may be a little loud and pushy, but she’s nice and really pretty. She kind of reminds me of you.” Naruto told his mother.

“In what regard?” Kushina asked, raising her eyebrow sternly.

“Well… she’s loud, pushy, and kinda scary… but she’s also really nice, really pretty, and she seems like a good friend to have by your side.” Naruto told his mother, trying to choose his words carefully due to feeling as if he had made a mistake of some kind.

Kushina at first had a very stern wordless face before she gently patted his head. “Thank you, Naruto. Now then. Rea, please tell me dinner is done.” Kushina said, turning to look back at her cousin.

“It is. On Naruto’s request, it’s char siu pork ramen tonight.” Rea replied.

“You can’t let him keep getting away with this, you bird brain! How else is he supposed to grow up big and strong if we feed him nothing but ramen!?” Kushina yelled angrily before pounding her cousin directly on the head.

“He made new friends, so I felt it was cause for celebration! Besides, it’s not my fault that your genes and the Fourth’s genes got along so well to create such a cute kid!” Rea replied to her cousin a bit defensively.

Kushina turned to look at her son. He looked up at her like a puppy who was begging for mercy and snuggles. Eyes widened, a quivering lip, just a hint of glossiness to the eyes. All completed when he opened his mouth to speak.

“Pwease, mama…” He said in his best cute, begging tone.

“... Damn it, why do you have to be so cute? Alright, fine, but just tonight. You're not getting ramen for the rest of the week, young man. Got it?” Kushina said, exasperated at the kid’s ability to manipulate everyone.

“Yay! I love you, mama!” Naruto replied happily, hugging his mom.

Kushina chuckled as she ruffled his hair. Without another word, the three were off to the dining hall, ready to enjoy a well-earned feast.

A Few Months Later

“Oda, Rea. Are you sure this is going to be okay by inviting the Inuzuka clan here? The Aburame are well behaved, polite, and their insects do as they are told. But that lot…” Kushina said with clear concern in her voice as the Uzumaki residence was getting the finishing touches for the big day.

“Don’t worry, cous. I’m sure it’ll be fine. The Inuzuka clan’s ninja hounds are house trained. Mostly.” Rea said semi-jokingly.

“I wasn’t talking about the hounds.” Kushina said with a deadpan tone.

“Nonsense, child. The Inuzuka have similar personalities to us Uzumaki. I’m sure our two clans will get along like a house on fire, just like you and Tsume did in your younger years.” Oda told his great-granddaughter.

“Tsume and I got into a fight on our first day meeting each other. But we did become good friends afterwards and fought off some bullies together…” Kushina replied, seeing her great-grandfather’s point.

Rea then looked around the room. “Has anyone seen the kid? I haven’t seen him all day.” The Uzumaki asked in confusion.

“I’m ready!” Naruto’s voice replied from the doorway of the hall.

The three turned towards the doorway. To their surprise, and Kushina’s horror, Naruto was wearing an oversized attack dog suit, the sleeves dragging across the floor due to its size. When he tried to waddle inside the room, he fell over and Kushina had to help him back up.

“... Naruto… Why are you in that?” Kushina asked, facepalming in exasperation as she got him on his feet.

“The Inuzuka have doggies. Not all doggies are nice. I don’t wanna get bit.” Naruto explained, like it was the most obvious thing in the world.

“Honey, if any of them even think of biting you, Rea will take the bite for you and kill it on the spot.” Kushina told him.

“Wait, I am?” Rea asked in surprise.

“Yes, you are.” Kushina sternly told him.

“Dog bites were not part of the deal.” Rea said, slowly backing away.

“I have altered the deal. Pray I do not alter it further.” Kushina replied seriously.

“That's low.” Rea said, squinting his eyes at his cousin.

“Get Naruto out of that thing and into his semi-formal robe!” Kushina sternly told her younger cousin.

“Come on, kid. Let's get you changed before we both get put in the doghouse.” Rea said, walking out of the room as quickly as he could and grabbing Naruto on the way.

“What does ‘get put in the doghouse’ mean, Uncle Rea?” Naruto asked, confused.

“I’ll explain when you're older.” Rea sternly said, disappearing with the boy into the depths of the estate.

Kushina let out a deep sigh. “How long is it until the two clans arrive?” Kushina asked Oda with thinly veiled disappointment.

“We should have enough time to get Naruto changed and finish getting ready.” Oda told her.

To their shock, however, they heard a loud knock on the door. Kushina walked up to the door, and to her horror, the Inuzaku clan delegation was early. Aside from the throng of massive ninja hounds and their intensely wolfish appearance, and the old yet still near tribal elders, was a woman and a child struggling with each other. The woman, Tsume, Kushina knew all too well. Her wild hair, intense facial markings, and abrasive angry tone gave that way. But the boy was someone new to her. Brown spiky hair wilder than even Narutos, two fang-like red markings on his cheeks indicative of the Inuzuka clan heritage the boy had, near fang-like canines, and an extremely wild and unkempt personality. One who was already in a clash with his mother’s intense, domineering one.

“Kiba, you're going to come in here, play with Naruto, and you're gonna like it, you stubborn little brat!” Tsume yelled at the boy in her clutches.

“C’mon, mom! It’s my turn to help with the pups today!” The boy now known as Kiba Inuzuka replied in frustration.

Tsune hoisted the boy up to look her in the eyes. “Once, just once can you not make us look like a laughingstock Kiba?” She growled at him.

Kiba flinched. ‘Sorry, mom…” He replied, becoming surprisingly compliant.

Tsume sighed and put him down onto his own two feet. “Good.” Tsume said through the sigh.

“Tsume? You're here early.” Kushina said with some surprise in her voice. This immediately got Tsume in a hint of a panic, but quickly controlled it.

Tsume smiled at her old friend. “Hey, Kushina. Yeah, I figured it’d be nice to have Kiba make a good first impression, so I insisted that we show up early.” She told the redheaded Hokage as her large ninja hound Kuromaru, a large, dark furred wolf-like hound with a missing ear and eye, walked up behind them.

“‘Course I get dragged around by an angry old hag…” Kiba growled under his breath.

“What was that, Kiba!?” Tsume snapped, glaring at her son.

“N-Nothing, momma…” Kiba sheepishly said in response.

“Well, at least my son isn’t making an impression this time. Nearly gave me a heart attack at the last meeting.” Kushina said with a small chuckle.

“What did Naruto do this time?” Tsume asked, raising an eyebrow.

“Went out to meet the indomitable trio and put his foot in his mouth. Love the kid to bits, but he can’t help but say stupid things…” Kushina said with a deep sigh.

Tsume chuckled at that. “Reminds me of a certain redhead I know.” She replied playfully.

“Funny. Your son not following the authority of an equal authority denier. Like mother, like son.” Kushina said with a smirk, crossing her arms in the doorway.

Tsume laughed a bit at that. “Hah! Fair point, Kushina!” She replied as she dragged Kiba inside, making sure they both took off their footwear at the door.

“Come on in, everyone. We just have to wait for the Aburame to arrive and we can begin.” Kushina said, inviting the clan in.

It was at that moment that Naruto walked in at Rea’s side, wearing semi-formal robes. As soon as he saw Kuromaru, he flinched and hid behind Rea’s leg. “Nice hellhound… good hellhound…” He nervously said.

“Is that to Kuromaru or my mom? Not that I’d blame you if it was to my mom…” Kiba said before getting bonked on the head by said mother. “Ow! What was that for!?”

“Be respectful of your elders, Kiba!” Tsume sternly told her son.

‘Lord, this is going to be a disaster. I have to delay them. I have to distract them…’ Kushina frantically thought, trying to stop this ongoing trainwreck.

“You’re Naruto, right? What’s wrong? Don’t you like dogs?” Kiba asked the boy who looked like the one his mom described to him.

“It's not that I don’t like dogs… I’m just nervous. He doesn’t bite, does he?” Naruto said nervously, pointing to Kuromaru.

“No, but Kiba might.” Tsume said with a teasing smirk.

“MA!!” Kiba shrieked.

“To answer your question Naruto, no, he doesn’t bite. Observe.” Kushina said as she petted the top of Kuromaru’s head. 

Kuromaru nuzzled into Kushina’s hand before looking at Naruto. Nervously, Naruto walked up and slowly held his hand out. Kuromaru sniffed Naruto’s hand before lowering his head to let Naruto pet him. Reaching up, Naruto gently stroked the wolf hound’s head before scratching behind his one ear as Kurmoaru’s leg kicked in joy at the gesture.

“He’s… fluffy…” Naruto said sheepishly.

Kiba smiled. “He sure is. I used to love snuggling into Kuromaru at night when I got scared and mom wasn’t home.” The wild looking boy admitted.

“You still do, Kiba.” Tsume teasingly said.

“Cousin! Our other guests are coming through the gates!” Rea yelled from the top floor.

“Oh! Shibi and his boy are here!” Kushina said as she got ready to go greet them.

“Great. We get to deal with bug boy.” Kiba sighed.

“Kiba…!” Tsume growled, looking at her son out of the corner of her eye.

“I didn’t call him spider punk this time!” Kiba exclaimed.

Tsume raised her fist threateningly as Kiba flinched, only for Kuromaru to nuzzle her side to calm her down. Sighing, Tsume took a deep breath to calm herself and lowered her fist. Much to Kiba’s relief, as he was not looking forward to another bonk on the head. Kushina smiled before opening the door. To her shock, only Shibi and his son Shino were there. To say the two looked similar was an understatement. Both wore high collared robes in the traditionally drab colors of their clan, both had spiky black hair, and both wore sunglasses. The only difference was skin tone, Shibi tanned while Shino pale, and Shibi’s facial hair was the true difference. The two then politely bowed to the Hokage.

“Greetings, Kushina-sama. Thank you for having us today.” Shibi stoically told his village leader, a small hint of a smile able to be felt beneath his high collar.

“Thank you for having us, Hokage-sama.” Shino added, equally as stoically as his father.

“Hello, Shibi. Greetings, Shino-chan. Where’s the rest of your clan’s upper hierarchy?” Kushina replied, raising an eyebrow near the end.

“We killed them and ate their livers.” Shibi said in his normal stoic voice.

The others all looked perturbed at that statement, unable to tell if he was serious or joking. “R… really…?” Naruto asked fearfully.

“Worry not, young lord. That was what the kids would call a joke.” Shibi said to Naruto.

Shino gave an ever so slight but stoic chuckle at his father’s joke. “Well done, dad.” He replied.

“Lord Aburame…” Kushina tried to say, before Oda cut her off.

“Delivery could’ve used some work.” Oda piped up, critiquing Shibi’s joke.

Kushina glared at her great-grandfather before taking a deep breath and looking back at Shibi. “Shibi-san, if you don’t mind my asking, where are your clan elders right now?” She asked again.

“This week is the mating season of the Giant Rock-Boring Beetle. Only my son and I could be spared in such an intensive and active time.” Shibi explained, his voice tone not really changing from earlier.

“Are they that important?” Kushina asked, a bit surprised.

“We have been attempting to build a self-sustaining population since my grandfather’s time, and we believe we finally may be on the verge of our goal this season.” Shibi explained further.

The others nodded in understanding as Naruto piped up. “What do they do?” Naruto asked.

“They produce a natural acid that allows them to work through even chakra-enhanced stone. Perfect for sabotage work in the most covert of circumstances.” Shino explained, not missing a beat.

“So, you use them to weaken a bad guy’s walls and stuff in a fight?” Naruto asked, wondering if he translated that right.

“Correct. They also really like to eat flowers as well.” Shino replied.

The others could not tell if the young Aburame heir was joking or not with that comment. And, before any of them could ask, Shibi turned to look at his son. “Shino, why don’t you go play with Kiba and the young lord?” He asked his son and heir.

“Would you like to see the beetles I’ve been working with this year?” Shino asked the two boys after taking in his father’s order.

Naruto and Kiba looked at each other before Naruto shrugged and looked at the stoic boy with a smile. “Sure. They’re super important for your clan’s jutsu, right?” He replied, asking to try to learn more.

“That is correct. I, however, am too young to receive a colony of Kikaichu yet…” Shino said with some disappointment leaking into his voice.

“Don’t worry. I’m sure you’ll be ready before you know it. Then you and your beetles can kick some serious butt.” Naruto told Shino, trying to cheer him up.

Shino nodded, with a small smile poking above his high collar. With that the three boys rushed off, with Rea reluctantly following. Hoping those beetles did not hurt humans as much as they could hurt stone. With that, Kushina and Oda led the delegations deeper into the estate. Once outside in the courtyard, Shino pulled out a bug jar from his robes with a whole menagerie of insects inside it. 

Naruto looked at the beetles in the jar in awe, having never seen bugs like them before. “Cool. What do they do?” He asked, a bit amazed due to his child-like wonder at the sight of new bugs.

“Each species is used for different tasks based on its greatest feature. Though the most basic ones are used for tracking and eating chakra.” Shino explained simply, knowing he would need to use smaller words for the two.

Naruto got excited about that. “You can find people with them or use them to beat someone by making them eat their chakra? That’s awesome!” he told Shino, taking this information in with the enthusiasm only a little kid could.

“At least he doesn’t have fleas. I hate fleas.” Kiba said with a sigh of relief.

“Fleas are a necessary part of an ecosystem, Kiba. Even if their biting does cause itching for their victims.” Shino explained.

“You are the first person ever to stand up for parasites.” Kiba said with a raised eyebrow.

“You know what’d be funny? If we released some fleas into some old bag of bones Inuzuka clan member’s drawers.” Naruto said with an impish grin.

Kiba smirked. “That is evil! I’m in!” He told the blonde Uzumaki.

“If none of the fleas get hurt, I will participate.” Shino told the other two boys with a nod.

“Then let’s go to the forest outside and find some fleas!” Naruto excitedly told the other two boys as they headed for the forest near the Uzumaki compound.

Meanwhile: With the Delegations

“Now then, with you all updated on the situation with the seals, I can give you an idea of what we are up against. As our village’s two foremost reconnaissance clans, it is likely that your shinobi will be among the first to meet the new foes we are about to face.” Kushina said to the representatives of the two clans in the meeting hall of the estate.

Shibi, Tsume, and the Inuzuka elders nodded in response as the Aburame leader spoke up. “What sort of threats will be lurking beyond those gates that we will need to collect information on, Hokage-sama?” Shibi asked her.

“The Kamishini classify threats into groups. These groups are based upon common broad traits they share, though can vary on the more minute details. I was informed the most common group at this time would likely be the giant kin group.” Kushina explained as Oda produced a scroll with the Kamishini symbol.

“Giant kin? Like oni, ogres, and trolls?” Tsume asked, surprised.

“Correct. If you think of a legend or myth, it is based on some part of reality. And the monsters, yōkai, demons, and gods of those tales, are real. Only by the miracle of the Kamishini’s vigilance have we had that luxury up to now. But the war took a heavy toll on their capabilities, and with the weakening seals, we will soon have to face these monsters ourselves.” Kushina explained, which visibly worried those in the room.

“The Aburame clan will provide whatever aid we can. Whether it is gathering data and information or on the battlefield, we will play our part. We simply need to know what kind of information we have to start with.” Shibi stoically told his village leader, being the first to speak up.

“The same goes for the Inuzuka clan. No monster, no matter how insidious, is going to get past us. And we will hunt them down to the ends of the earth if it means keeping our village safe.” Tsume said defiantly, which got a verbal cheer from the elders behind her.

Kushina let out a smile at that. “Thank you, everyone. Your support is appreciated. Great-grandfather Oda will provide you with copies of the scrolls of both the main monster groups and the various kinds of supernatural chakra’s that we will have to deal with. At the conclave of the clans, council, and jōnin later this year, we will go more in depth and discuss a greater grand response to this new threat.” Kushina said with a big smile.

Tsume and Shibi, along with the Inuzuka elders, all nodded in response. “We Aburame will study this scroll’s information inside and out to see if we can uncover any information not mentioned in the subtext, Lady Hokage. After all, to defeat one’s enemy, one must first know them well enough to read them.” Shibi replied as Uzumaki Oda began passing out the scrolls.

“You are a credit to your clan, Shibi-san.” Oda said with a smile, as he gave him a large bundle of scrolls.

Shibi nodded and accepted the scrolls, pulling out his copy to slip into his pocket to study later. Tsume and the Inuzuka elders accepted their own copies of the scrolls and held onto them for later. However, as soon as the Inuzuka members began to look at the scrolls, they soon yelped in sudden pain and began scratching at the lower parts of their body. Kushina and Tsume immediately noticed the substantial number of fleas coming off the scrolls. And a distinct sound of giggling coming from the doorway.

“Hmm…” Shibi grunted, knowing exactly who did it already.

“KIBAAAA!!!” Tsume roared in fury.

“NARUTOOOO!!!” Kushina wrathfully cried out, her hair splitting into nine points.

“Retreat! Fall back, men!” Naruto called out as the three boys took off running.

With that, the two women heard the distinct sound of feet running on the floor. Smashing open the door, the two women gave chase. Determined to punish them for disturbing the meeting.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

“Momma, why do I have to keep coming to these old people meetings?” Naruto groaned, so lethargic that the Hokage had to drag him along the ground.

“Because Momma has to do very important things, Naruto. And you can’t be trusted to stay out of trouble for five minutes.” Kushina explained to her son.

“That's nothin’ but lies and slander. I can at least go for six minutes.” Naruto pouted, puffing his cheeks indignantly.

“Hyperbole, Naruto.” Kushina replied simply.

“What's a hyper bowl?” Naruto asked, confused at the new fancy word in his midst.

“A hyperbole, son. It’s an exaggeration to get a point across.” Kushina explained.

“Exagger… what?” Naruto asked in further confusion, as his brain was on the verge of crossing wires from all the unfamiliar words.

“It means saying something to make something seem way worse than it actually is.” Kushina explained further, happy to be expanding her baby boy’s vocabulary.

“Then if I'm not as bad as you say, why do I still have to go to the ancient gallery of decrepit shinobi?” Naruto asked, raising an eyebrow.

“Wow, Naruto. That is a lot of big words. I guess those vocabulary lessons really are paying off.” Kushina teasingly replied.

“They aren’t. I just heard Grandpa Oda say those along with a bunch of words like fucking…” Naruto said, before being cut off by Kushina.

Kushina’s eye twitched at that. “Naruto, never say that F-word again. That is a word only used by bad, naughty adults.” she sternly told her son.

“I heard you say fuck last night to Uncle Rea.” Naruto said bluntly to his momma.

“Do as I say, not as I do.” Kushina told him.

“If you don’t do it, then why should I?” Naruto asked.

“Because I said so and I am your mother.” Kushina replied.

“But if momma does it then it can’t be that bad…” Naruto said placatingly, as if trying to get to her.

Kushina sighed. “How about this: Momma will try to not use those words anymore as long as you don’t say them.” she offered in an attempt to get her son to stop.

“Deal.” Naruto chipperly answered.

Kushina smiled. “Good. Now come along, Naruto. Your new friends will all be there too.” she told him.

“Yay… wait… I sense a catch.” Naruto said, squinting his eyes suspiciously.

“You have to stay out of trouble. Someone new may be at the meeting and I want you to make a good first impression.” Kushina explained to the blonde toddler.

“There’s always a catch…” Naruto sighed.

“If you wanna be a big, strong ninja, you’ll have to get used to that. No one in our world ever does anything for free out of the goodness of their heart, Naruto. Even when they really should.” She told him sadly.

“Well, I will.” Naruto said, puffing out his chest to try and make himself look bigger.

Kushina smiled at that. “And that’s why you’re mommy’s sweet little man.” she replied, pinching his cheek gently.

“Momma… you’ll make me look like a dork…” Naruto groaned as his cheek was stretched a bit by his mother.

Kushina giggled. “Oh hush, Naruto. I think it’s cute that you’re so honest.” she replied.

“Just don’t let Kakashi get a hold of him then, Kushina-sama.” A familiar, cheeky sounding voice called out.

Turning to look, the two saw the telltale sight of Kakashi, Rin and Obito walking towards them. The three had grown taller and looked more physically mature. Rin had filled out to become the mature, near motherly figure the two strong personalities on the team needed. Obito had even lost some baby fat and ditched his goggles, having a leaner and more mature looking face. Donning an eyepatch with the Uchiha symbol to cover his donated eye, and a face that could conquer the shinobi nations. As for Kakashi, he had the headband of his forehead protector covering his Sharingan eye, having shed his aloof pride and replaced it as a snake would its own skin with a distant, yet visible kindness. Naruto soon got a smile as he broke free from his mother’s grip and rushed over, leaping into Obito’s awaiting arms. As Rin giggled at the now snuggling Naruto, and Kakashi a hint jealous at it not being him he ran to.

“No hug for your Big Brother Kakashi, Naruto?” Kakashi asked, sounding a hint of jealousy.

“You still have yet to pay the toll.” Naruto ominously said to Kakashi.

“Ah, of course. How silly of me.” Kakashi replied, pulling out a bar of chocolate.

Naruto then, in the blink of an eye, faster than even the Sharingan could perceive, snatched it out of the white-haired cyclops’ grip and devoured it. Then, like a frog, he leapt out of Obito’s arms and into Kakashi’s.

“When did this start?” Kushina asked, raising her eyebrow at the curious custom.

Rin rolled her eyes. “His Big Bro Obito started sneaking him extra sweets in exchange for being good during our lessons with him.” the brown-haired medical ninja explained.

“That explains why Naruto’s been getting fat…” Kushina muttered.

“I’m not fat!” Naruto yelled in indignance.

“You could stand to exercise a little more, baby brother.” Rin said playfully.

“Whose side are you on, Big Sis Rin?” Naruto asked, squinting at the Jōnin nin.

“The side that keeps you healthy and strong.” Rin replied, ruffling his hair.

“Obito, how many sweets are we talking about?” Kushina asked, turning her attention to the Uchiha in question.

“Only one… for every subject he behaves during…” Obito reluctantly admitted.

“At least you aren’t reading Jiraya’s literature in public this time, Kakashi…” Kushina sighed in relief.

“Some people don’t appreciate good literature…” Kakashi sighed, shaking his head.

“Can I read it?” Naruto asked curiously.

“No.” All of the adults, including Kakashi himself, simply told Naruto.

Naruto began to pout as Kushina was forced to part ways, leaving the boy in the care of the team. Obito let Naruto ride on his shoulders to help cheer him up as they headed off to the predetermined meeting point. All of Naruto’s friends were there, with their own guards and chaperones for safekeeping. However, Naruto noticed another familiar face and the new face of a young lad he had not met before. One of them had long brown hair, bandage wrappings over his forehead, and the same eyes as Hinata and Enten. He also had what he had heard Big Bro Obito once refer to as “Resting Bitch Face.” He immediately recognized him as their cousin Neji.

The other boy, on the other hand, looked very bizarre. He had long black hair tied up in a martial artist style braided ponytail, perfectly round eyes like a bug’s, and big, bushy eyebrows. He also had what Naruto could only describe as a “youthful” air about him, as he had heard Big Bro Kakashi’s friend Guy once call it. Despite their disparate appearances and demeanors, they both wore amazingly simple attire. The Hyūga boy had very traditional robes of the clan, while the other boy wore deep forest green.

“Um… who are you?” Naruto nervously asked the green clad boy, being forced in front of the comforting leg of Obito.

“I am Rock Lee of the Lee clan! It is a pleasure to meet you!” The boy, now identified as Rock Lee, said exuberantly before bowing to Naruto in respect.

“Big bro Obito! Help me! He’s weird!” Naruto huskily whispered back to his brotherly protector.

“Just go along with it, Naruto! He seems like a good kid! In fact, he… actually reminds me a lot of Guy… gonna need to ask him later if he ‘spread his youth’ with some girl…” Obito replied before muttering to himself.

Almost immediately after saying that, Rin smacked Obito across the back of the head. As Obito soon cowered over the scowling face of a protective big sister, Kakashi shook his head.

“Gods above, he’s spreading…” Kakashi said, pinching the bridge of his nose, earning Kakashi smack upside the head from Rin.

“Both of you, shut your face holes! Let Naruto make new friends uncorrupted by your weirdness!” Rin screamed at the two.

“Sorry, Rin…” The two young men replied, rubbing the backs of their heads where they got hit.

“Despite his eccentricities, I can vouch for him being a good and reliable friend.” Neji plainly and coldly said.

“I knew you liked me!” Lee yelled happily before crushing the poor Hyūga in a vigorous bear hug.

“Lee…! Too tight…! Need… air…!” Neji groaned out, his vision beginning to blur.

“Who needs air when you have youthful friendship flowing through your body!!” Lee yelled, crushing ever tighter.

“The… affection…! It… burns…! Passing… out…!” Neji groaned, his vision beginning to go dark.

Enten sighed and rubbed her forehead. “Lee, as much as my cousin annoys me, can you please stop killing him through extreme affection? You can have a youthful friendship a lot longer with him if he’s alive.” Enten ordered Lee, who seemed to understand her logic.

“Fair enough, Enten-san! That is a very good point!” Lee replied, dropping Neji in a crumpled heap on the floor as the Hyūga boy took in deep breaths of life-giving air.

“N-Neji! Are you okay!?” Hinata yelled, rushing over to check up on him.

“I… I swear I saw my life flash before my eyes! It was so boring…” Neji noted as he began to get his breathing under control.

“Right, can we move on from attempted rib cage crushing to actually doing something?” Sasuke asked, looking around the vast group of peers.

“Um… sure. Let’s play a game of some kind. Anybody got any ideas for something that’d be fun with all of us here?” Naruto asked a bit uncomfortably.

“I suggest a youthful game of Onigokko!” Lee called out enthusiastically.

“Oni!” Enten giggled, poking Naruto on the cheek before running off.

“No fair, Enten! I wasn’t ready!” Naruto called out before chasing after the exuberant sister among the Hyūga twins.

“All’s fair in love and war, Naruto-kun!” Enten cackled, playfully running away from the Uzumaki Prince.

Meanwhile: During the Meeting

“Thank you for meeting with me Mr. and Mrs. Lee… I’m terribly sorry, I didn’t catch your names.” Kushina said as she was led into the depths of the Lee Clan compound.

“‘S cool, Lady Hokage. The name’s Jazz. Jazz Lee.” The woman with long black, wearing a pair of circular sunglasses and a fedora, replied smoothly, pointing a finger gun at the Uzumaki Hokage.

“Don’t you worry, boss lady. We all can lose track of each other’s names in the vast waves we call life. Ma’ name’s Reggae Lee, mon. And yes. I am quite straight.” The man, eerily similar in looks to his son but wearing a rasta hat, said as he wrapped an arm around his wife.

“Noted… why did Rea have to stand outside?” Kushina sighed. Though other Uzumaki and Kamishini had followed her in, she felt a miss without her cousin to strangle.

They eventually were led into a large if plain meeting hall. Though Kushina could not fault them for that, they were not the richest of clans. After everyone was assembled, Seishin had prepared visual representations of what they needed to bring up to the clan, having heard of their… simple reputation. Once it was set up, Kushina stood up in front of the clan elders.

“I thank you all of the Lee Clan Council for being able to be here today. Today's topic is of paramount importance, and I believe due to your clan’s unique skills, your clan will be essential to helping to solve these issues.” Kushina said, pulling out a pointer from her robes.

“We-hee understand, Lady Hokage! Please, go ahead and explain!” One of the Lee clan elders, an older man in a suit, a fedora, and white gloves, replied as he tipped his hat up and looked at her.

“Thank you, Pop Lee. Now Seishin has, in the previous weeks, got you up to date on the current state of affairs with the seals to the other realms. To ensure that any potential strategy we do go with works, we will have to work with other villages.” Kushina explained, pointing to an equivalent point on the board.

Jazz Lee nodded in understanding. “The seals on the other realms could break and let untold horrors into our world. Not cool. We may have issues with the other villages, but we need to set those aside for now.” Jazz replied smoothly.

“Which is why I have chosen your clan to be the foremost ambassadors to the other villages and their daimyō.” Kushina said, pointing to Jazz in the process with her pointer, leaving both her clan and the Kamishini nervous.

“Don’t worry, mon! We’ll get the other villages on side. The vast ocean that is our world must be kept clean of the sharks that would plague it.” Reggae assured his village’s leader.

“Well, that went better than expected. I was almost expecting immediate objections to that idea…” Kushina nervously said.

“Are you certain it’s a good idea to allow the Lee clan to handle diplomatic relations?” Shikaku asked a bit nervously.

“Agreed. How do you think the Second Great Ninja War started?” Hiashi added, looking at Pop Lee.

“Oh, sure. You get a daimyō’s daughter pregnant one time, and you never hear the end of it…” Pop Lee muttered.

“Only one?” Oda asked, raising an eyebrow. “Son, that's rookie numbers.”

“Great-grandfather!” Kushina called out indignantly.

“Right, right. Moving aside from the fact that the current daimyō may or may not be descended from me, does anyone have any questions?” Oda said, pivoting back to the meeting.

“How will we be organizing our forces to deal with each individual seal?” Shibi asked, raising a logical question of tactical importance.

“No concrete plans have been made at this time. The Kamishini are still scouting on the seals to get a better idea at what is leaking through from what realm. When we have sufficient data, we will be able to make a plan.” Kushina explained, which got Shibi frustrated, but pressed the Hokage no further on the matter.

“In that case, we will need to prioritize whichever seal is the weakest according to their findings. As soon as we know which one is going to break soonest, we will arrange for a contingent of our forces to head out to ensure it gets reinforced.” Shikaku noted with a nod.

“I have every force I have available scouting the seals. However, getting close to one is not easy even at the best of times. You will all have to be patient.” Seishin said with a sigh, crossing his arms.

“Agreed. For now, all we can do is wait patiently for the Kamishini’s findings. Once we know which seals we need to prioritize, we can begin strategizing before we make our move.” Hiashi added, backing up Seishin’s words.

“What I wouldn’t give for our cousins Iron Feather forces right now…” Seishin muttered under his breath, sinking back into his seat.

Before anyone could say anything further, the doors burst open as two blurs shot around the room. One clad in orange and red while the other wore a deep forest green. And two very familiar voices called out to each other as the two raced around the room.

“Stay away, Lee!” The orange blur called out as he ran around the table.

“Nonsense, Naruto-kun! The rules of Onigokko say I must tag you in order to not be it! In this springtime of our youth, we must enjoy it to the fullest!” The forest green blur called out.

“I do not consent to this!” Naruto called out as he and Lee ran out of the room.

“Naruto! Lee! You little brats stop interrupting my meetings!!!” Kushina roared down the hall after them.

“Play it cool, Lady Hokage. Boys will be boys.” Jazz smoothly told her leader, trying to calm Kushina down.

“Me wife’s right, mon! Let the boys enjoy this time of youth while it lasts!” Reggae replied, trying to back Jazz up.

Kushina sighed before pinching the bridge of her nose. “You win this round… this once…” Kushina sighed out before composing herself to continue the meeting. A long day was indeed ahead of her.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

Chapter 9: Academic Woes

“Lee! Don't leave me with Kei and Duck Butt! I need your optimism!” Naruto cried out as he, on his knees, clung to Lee’s leg desperately, forcing Kushina to try and pull him off.

“Naruto, you’re embarrassing us! Calm down!” Kushina told her son chidingly.

“Lee, please don’t go and leave me with my old hag mom!” Naruto yelled more, still clinging to the boy's leg desperately.

“Excuse me, young man!?” Kushina roared out, her hair beginning to split into nine segments resembling tails.

“Don’t leave me with my beautiful old hag mom!” Naruto squealed before finally being ripped from Lee’s legs.

“I…” Kushina started with an angry face before taking a deep breath. ‘Just take the compliment…’

“Naruto-kun! He’s not going away forever!” Enten groaned as the Hyūga assembled with Neji.

“But a year is a really long time!” Naruto bemoaned as he was set back on the ground by his mother.

“You still have us to keep you company, Naruto-kun.” Hinata noted to her friend.

“My hair doesn’t look like a duck's butt…” Sasuke grumbled in the crowd, only to get an elbow from Kei.

“Relax, Duck. You know he’s just teasing.” Kei replied playfully.

“Enten-sama, why is your friend who happens to be a boy so melodramatic?” Neji asked his cousin confusedly.

“Just call him a boy friend, cousin. You don't need to be so formal all the time.” Enten replied in annoyance.

“Apologies. Why is your boyfriend so melodramatic and offensive?” Neji said, rephrasing his question.

Enten blushed at that. “Not boyfriend! Boy friend! There’s a difference!” Enten snapped at her socially inept cousin.

“It appears you have gained that trait from your boyfriend as well.” He said as he headed over to Hinata.

“I’m gonna hurt you, Neji!” Enten called out, still blushing.

Naruto cocked his head in confusion. “Why can’t I be your boyfriend, Enten-chan?” Naruto asked with a tone of innocent confusion.

“B… because… because… you know…” Enten replied surprisingly shyly, looking down while blushing.

“Hiashi-sama, your daughter’s broken.” Naruto said, pointing to Enten.

Hiashi chuckled a bit. “No, Naruto. Enten is not ‘broken,’ as you oh so elegantly put it. Merely embarrassed.” He told the boy in amusement.

Neji then walked up to Hinata and bowed his head respectfully to her. It was a thing that Hinata never truly understood from him. Her parents had told her he was in the lower house, and somewhat of what that meant, but something just did not sit right with her. This line of thought was broken when Neji spoke to her.

“I wish you and Enten-sama well on your day while I am gone, Hinata-sama. Until I return from the academy for the day, I must delegate my duties as your future protector to another.” Neji told his cousin.

“I volunteer!” Naruto told Neji, raising his hand.

“Gods help me…” Enten said, her hands in her face as the twins’ mother spoke up.

“How wonderful of you to volunteer, Naruto-kun.” Nikkō, the Matriarch of the Hyūga clan, told the boy.

“I am in your debt, Naruto-san.” Neji said, bowing in respect to him.

“Do not worry, Naruto-kun! I will ensure that you will not miss me and prove to be the greatest shinobi I can become! Onward, Neji-san! Let us go to victory!!” Lee yelled, strapping his lunchbox to his back and grabbing the formal boy's arm.

“Lee! I can walk on my own!” Neji replied as the… ‘enthusiastic’ boy dragged him off to the entrance ceremony.

“Who said anything about running, Neji-san!? For the bold fly!” Lee said with a grin so wide it looked like his face would split.

“Lee, don’t you DAAAAAAAAARE!!!!” Neji said before screaming in fear as Lee took off with him in tow.

“Should we be concerned?” Naruto asked Sasuke.

“At this point, I’m not sure what concern means in relation to Lee.” Sasuke said with a shrug.

“Unless they both come back in green spandex, I think it’s fine.” Kei replied with a shrug.

At the Academy: Post-Entrance Ceremony

“Alright, everyone. Your class placement will be dependent on the entrance exam scores. Our staff will soon be done with putting your class placement up on the board. When they are done, please look at which class and report to it immediately.” The principal, a stern and scar faced shinobi said through a thick mustache.

“Do you think we will be in the same class, Neji-san?” Lee whispered loudly to his peer.

“I am uncertain, Lee. We will have to check the results for ourselves.” Neji told the ‘enthusiastic’ boy.

“Oh, they're done! Let's go!” Lee yelled, seeing the board free to look at, and dragging the poor Hyūga along.

“One side!” A voice called out, catching the attention of the two boys.

Neji was shocked and near horrified as he and Lee were bowled over by a flash of red and electric yellow. Groaning as he checked that Lee was all right, he then stood and turned to chase down the devil that did that.

“Stop, you! You bowled over my compatriot and I!!” Neji yelled with authority in his voice.

Stopping, the figure turned to look at them. Dressed in red and electric yellow combat robes with storm clouds and lightning bolts on it was a boy their age with medium length, spiky red hair. Though what the two recognized right away was the Kamishini crest displayed loud and proud on the back of his robes. Running back over, he sheepishly helped them up and tried to help them dust off.

“Sorry. Got a little over excited there. The name’s Issen. Kamishini Issen. Nice to meet you.” The boy, now identified as Issen, told them as he helped them dust themselves off.

“Rock Lee! At your service, fair and most speedy of lads!” Lee chipperly yelled, jumping to his feet to greet him.

“Hyūga Neji. Pleased to make your acquaintance.” Neji replied, still a bit irritated.

Issen smiled. “Neji and Lee? Like the boys my little brothers mentioned?” He asked.

“Brothers?” Neji asked, raising his eyebrow in confusion.

“Yeah. Kei, Sei, and Shin have told me about you two.” Issen told the two.“Oh.” Neji said simply.

“Yes indeed, they are friends. Most joyous of friends.” Lee proudly said, putting his hands on his side.

“Forgive my rudeness, but they didn’t tell us they had an older brother.” Neji told Issen.

“No surprise there. They were probably worried you two would like me better. Those three have a hard time standing out because of how much they look alike.” Issen replied with a shrug.

“Naruto-kun always tells them apart.” Lee said simply, shocking Issen greatly at first.

“He does? Normally, only our family and I can tell them apart.” Issen replied, still surprised.

“Each one of them do have very kickable faces.” Lee said, adopting a thinking pose about the comment. “That explains why Neji always beat them so thoroughly in games.”

Issen chuckled. “Yeah, that’s my brothers for you. Well, since we’re here, wanna check together what class we’ll each be in?” He replied.

“FOR FRIENDSHIP!!” Lee yelled excitedly, grabbing the two of them by their arms and rushing off with them.

“ONWARD!!” Issen called out as he ran alongside Lee, the two dragging Neji behind them.

“HELP MEEEEEE…!” Neji called out as the two mad lads absconded with him to the board.

Rushing over to the board, somehow not turning any poor child in front of them into red paste, they arrived at the boards. Across the well-worn and weather-beaten board was written the various classes' compositions. They did not have to look far, as they all landed in Class 1-A. This only got Lee and Issen even more excited.

“We are in the same class, Neji! I even managed to be accepted as an alternate!” Lee yelled, before bear hugging his poor Hyūga comrade with the force of an over excited puppy.

Issen sighed in relief. “That’s good. For a second there, I thought I’d fail everything but Taijutsu and Bukijutsu.” He admitted.

“Lee… losing… consciousness… light… fading…” Neji choked out, his face turning red from the hug.

“My apologies, Neji!” Lee replied before dropping his compatriot.

“Let's get to class before we are somehow late.” Lee said, focusing himself again.

“Yeah! Before the good seats are taken!” Issen pointed out.

“No seat isn’t good when you have friends to share them with!” Lee asserted forcefully to his new friend.

“Now you’re speaking my language, Lee!” Issen replied excitedly.

‘By the gods… they're multiplying…’ Neji thought with a tinge of horror as the three of them headed off to class.

In Class 1-A

The trio arrived in the class to be greeted by a creaky floorboard at the doorway. Despite being the classroom of the best and brightest, it was clear that said best and brightest had put it through the ringer. Worn class, creaky floorboards, a teacher’s desk with multiple shuriken still in it, the place looked less like a classroom and more like a warzone. As they made their way up to the multi-tier seating, Lee’s eyes scanned the room and saw a row of three seats. It was in the center of the classroom, not too far away from the teacher, but far enough to hear both them and those around them. It was… perfect!

“There, my friends! Our seats await!” Lee called out to Issen and Neji.

“Then let’s get ‘em! C’mon, Neji!” Issen told the Hyūga boy.

“Can you two please keep it down?” A voice said from the seat next to where Lee was about to park his overly eager behind.

Next to them was a girl with twin black-haired buns, gray eyes, and creamy smooth skin. She wore a sleeveless blue… Lee thought it was a dress, which was odd for a shinobi. Neji corrected him that it was a blouse. Whatever that was. Granted he liked forest green as a color, so he was not one to judge. Her face, a fairly round one by village standards, was contorted into an annoyed frown.

“My apologies, dear classmate. My friend and I were not attempting to be rude. And you are?” Lee replied, trying to be more polite.

“Tenten.” She answered him.

“Pleased to meet you, I am Rock Lee.” Lee told her, bowing.

“Kamishini Issen. A pleasure.” Issen replied, bowing as well.

“Hyūga Neji. A pleasure to make your acquaintance.” Neji added, giving a polite nod.

“Pleased to meet you all. At least you're not late. From what I can tell, our teacher is a proper battle ax.” Tenten warned as they sat down.

“Then it’s a good thing we made it on time.” Issen replied with a smile.

“Pipe down, everyone! Class is in session!” A loud, booming, distinctly female voice yelled.

Everyone shut up faster than a steel trap as their teacher walked in the room. Wearing standard shinobi fatigues and flak jacket, she wore a battle worn and scarred headband proudly across her forehead. Turning to face them, the woman, who they figured had to be at least six feet tall, revealed a heavily scarred face, including a truly nasty looking one across her nose and upper cheek. Deep green eyes scanned the room, looking over the class before her for every detail. Then, and only then, did her lips move to speak again.

“Alright, Class 1-A! I will be your teacher Kamatsuma Raidori. This class is traditionally for those who excelled in their entrance exams, and I intend to keep that tradition alive. I will push you hard, to show this academy what you are made of, and to push you to see your potential through.” The woman said with her booming voice. “Any questions?”

Neji slowly raised his hand. Seemingly almost afraid to do so for a moment. However, she then pointed to him.

“Yes, Hyūga Neji?” She asked firmly, shocking him with his name.

“Sensei… where is your teaching assistant?” Neji asked, almost afraid to know the answer.

“I killed them and ate their liver.” She answered him simply.

Everyone looked at her with fear and disgust at that. However, she then broke into laughter.

“Oh, I didn’t think you all were so gullible. No, she’s fine. She’s actually behind you all.” Raidori replied with a cheerful smirk.

The class all looked behind them only to see no one there. Then, as if a mirage were dissipating, the air shimmered before a woman came into being. She had a light shade of blonde hair, not platinum blonde but more sun kissed. She had brilliant emerald-green eyes and a thin but well-developed shape. Giving a smirk at the class looking at her in awe, she giggled a bit.

“Well done, assistant.” Raidori said with a small smile, before motioning her to join her by her side.

“Thank you, Sensei. Class, I am Kingyosō Kin. My teammate and brother-in-law, Haruno Kizashi, taught me that little trick before he retired.” The now identified Kin told the class with a smile.

“Indeed. Right, without further ado, time to put you brats through your paces!” Raidori yelled. “On your feet and 30 laps around the academy!”

“Thirty!?” Tenten asked in disbelief.

“Oh, I’m sorry! I thought you all wanted to be shinobi, not runway models! Any further backtalk and said person gets to wash the school's walls!” Raidori yelled, this time giving no illusion on what she wanted them to do.

When no one replied, she smirked. “Then hop to it, maggots!” She called out as the class scrambled from their seats to head outside.

Saying the next eight hours were the worst that that classroom of newcomers had ever had was an understatement. The laps quickly escalated to eighty around the academy building due to perceived slights by the kids. Genjutsu class was a complete disaster, as the teachers intentionally distracted them to force them to get better at control. Taijutsu was a complete and utter bare-knuckle slugfest, sparring with an opponent to see where they were. Ninjutsu was the tamest, simply because they had to be taught the basics of how to do a Ninjutsu technique. But weapons? They quickly learned why the shuriken were in the desk, to say the least. It was less like school, and instead like something out of a war movie. Only this was real.

The fact Lee even survived that first day was practically a miracle. Even the best course he was on, Taijutsu, he still was covered in bruises from. Weapons got him cuts all over his body that he needed to see the nurse for. Ninjutsu and Genjutsu were complete flops, he showed no talent in either. It did not feel his spirits any that Issen did somewhat better than him, though he still ended up with the same number of bruises and cuts as him.

Tenten to his shock was a ferocious fighter, and the one that gave the two the cuts from weapons class. But Neji… he impressed the teacher; he did that well. Which Lee and Issen were convinced was not possible. It was as if he walked on air and could part the clouds he breezed through the day. By the time the new group had broken off for home at the end of the day, Lee staggered through his clan’s estates gates, opened the door, and fell face-first into the entryway.

“I’m… Home…” Lee groaned into the floorboards.

“Welcome home, son.” Jazz told him smoothly, having already prepared a snack for him.

“How was ya’ first day, ma’ boy?” Reggie asked from the kitchen.

“Brutal…” Lee groaned, heading to the dining room table to be given his snack.

“What doesn’t kill ya’ makes ya’ stronga’, boy. That's what me old man always taught me!” Reggie said, patting his son on the shoulder, causing Lee to groan in pain. “My bad, mon.”

“Thank you, Dad…” Lee groaned as his mother put two bowls before him, causing him to look up.

“Did you make any friends, son?” Jazz asked as she poured him some tea.

“Yes, Mom. I made two.” Lee replied, looking at the bowls.

“Well, tell us all about them, boyo!” Reggie said with a great big burst of joy.

Lee smiled. “First and foremost, there’s Kamishini Issen…” Lee began.

At the Hyūga Compound

Neji sighed as he walked along the well-maintained path back to the compound. A lot happened that day, yet it was as if nothing had happened at all. Not like he cared. It was all part of the process. A process to become a shinobi. Yet, as he neared the gates to his surprise, both Hiashi and his cousins were waiting for him.

“Hiashi-sama, Hinata-sama, Enten-sama? This is a great surprise to be greeted at the gate by your august presence.” Neji said, bowing deeply to him as he addressed them.

“For the last time, Neji, you don’t need to be so formal with us. Different branches or not, we’re still family.” Enten told her cousin with a smile.

“Family is only a secondary concern for my mission, cousin.” Neji said after he lifted himself up from his bow.

“How was class today, Neji?” Hiashi asked his nephew as the four of them headed inside.

“It was grueling, but it was nothing that I could not manage, Hiashi-sama.” Neji explained simply.

Hiashi nodded. “That is good to hear. Your father would be immensely proud of you if he could see you today, Neji.” He told his nephew.

Neji flinched at that and clenched his hands into fists but held back what he wanted to say to him. “Thank you, Hiashi-sama.” Neji said curtly to him.

“I do not mean to antagonize you, Neji. I am merely being honest. Hizashi would be immensely proud of you if he could see you now.” Hiashi reassured his nephew.

At that, Neji stopped walking alongside them. It was the last thing he ever expected his uncle to say to him. He wanted to say something, he wanted to shout, to scream. Something, anything. Yet… no words came to him. He stood there in stunned silence to the three, before Hinata came over and gripped Neji’s hand.

“Brother Neji? Are you okay?” She asked him, a bit concerned from her tone of voice.

At that, Neji snapped out of it and looked at his cousin. “I am fine, Hinata-sama. Did Naruto-san serve as an adequate protector for you and Enten-sama today?” Neji asked her, trying to see if something was going right around here.

Hinata blushed at that, but Enten smiled. “He sure did. Honestly, he really threw himself into the role.” Enten told their cousin.

“Didn’t he leap to tackle you to safety because he thought a big dog was going to run you over?” Hinata asked curiously, raising her eyebrow at her answer.

Enten blushed at that. “Hinata…!” She cried out in embarrassment.

“He then also jumped into a water barrel to save the coin you accidently dropped in it.” Hinata continued, getting the rowdy Hyūga princess quite flustered.

“At least he didn’t climb a tree to save a stuffed animal for me like he did for you because a squirrel fox-napped Ko-chan!” Enten replied.

Hinata blushed embarrassed as the two rapidly devolved into bickering over Naruto’s antics. It got a small smile out of Neji seeing this, as at least he made the two happy. Even if it was questionable how much actual protection he gave them. If he had to guess, the real protection came from whatever Uzumaki the Hokage put to guard Naruto. At least his heart was in the right place. At that, however, his aunt’s voice broke him from his musings.

“Hello, Neji. Welcome home.” Nikkō told her nephew as Neji looked up to see her.

“Greetings, Nikkō-sama.” Neji said, bowing deeply in her presence. 

Nikkō sighed in exasperation but smiled. “I trust class went well today, dear nephew?” She asked him kindly.

“It did, ma’am.” Neji said, keeping it brief.

“Excellent. Did you manage to make any new friends today?” She asked him.

“I had made acquaintances with a couple of people.” Neji answered simply.

“I’m glad to hear it. Kiru [1]! Your son is home!” Nikkō called out, surprising Neji.

“Mother is here?” Neji asked, a small smile on his face.

Soon, out strode a woman, clearly of their clan, with the Hidden Leaf’s symbol on her forehead protector that covered her forehead. She was lithe, but powerfully built and surprisingly elegant. She had a face as beautiful as the light of a full moon on a starless night and long, flowing dark brown hair. Said face was thinner than Neji’s, a bit more like a fox’s, but she gave a bright smile upon seeing her son.

“Welcome home, Neji.” Kiru told her son.

“Thank you, mother. How was your mission?” Neji said, bowing to her politely as he spoke.

“Quite well. Just a simple courier mission into the nearby Land of Grass. Nothing too difficult. Come, I’ll make us all some tea and you can tell us in detail about your day.” Kiru told her son with a bright smile.

“That is not required, mother.” Neji said, trying to politely decline.

“Nonsense, my boy. I insist.” Kiru told him, a bit firmly but still gently.

“So, who did you meet today, Neji?” Enten asked.

“A girl named Tenten and a boy from the Kamishini clan named Issen. He reminds me far too much of Lee in terms of his… ‘enthusiasm’...” Neji told his cousin as the five of them headed into the main house.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

Another long day at the academy had passed, and Neji dragged his feet on the way home. He was easily waved past the guards, as always. Even though he had achieved what he desired… something was off to him. He did not expect the monotony, the drudgery of it all. He walked on autopilot through the halls before a familiar voice snapped him out of it.

“Hey, Neji! How was class?” The voice of the Fifth Hokage’s son asked.

“What? Oh, it's just you Naruto… wait, why are you here so late?” Neji asked, having to take a double take on the blonde Uzumaki being in the house so late.

“Oh, quit being a stick in the mud, Neji.” Enten groaned, rolling her eyes at her cousin.

“And he did say he was going to protect us while you were gone, remember?” Hinata chipped in. “Are you okay? You look exhausted.” she asked with concern.

“I’m fine. The academy was just… difficult today.” Neji said with a sigh, trying to end the conversation quickly.

“Difficult how? Did you get tripped? Wait, Lee threw you into a wall.” Enten asked, but Neji cut her off before her ‘predictions’ got too crazy.

“It was just a difficult day. My teacher just pushes us hard because we are the top class.” Neji growled, shocking the three with his tone.

“Well, on the plus side, that means that they probably think you’re strong and wanna make you stronger.” Naruto added with a small smile.

“Don’t you have to go home or something?” Neji asked Naruto.

“Not until six.” Naruto replied.

Neji let out a deep sigh. Seeing no way out of this… chatty conversation, he threw his bag on the ground. Then he sat on an unused cushion, likely one they had out for him. However, his ever-fouling mood was quickly noticed by the others, and Naruto decided to try to fix that.

“Neji… are you sure you’re okay? If something’s bothering you, you can talk to us about it.” Naruto told the older boy.

“Nothing is wrong. Stop asking.” Neji growled, crossing his arms.

Enten glared at her cousin. “Hey, Naruto’s just trying to be nice! Learn to lighten up, Neji!” She chided him.

“Being nice doesn’t help you as a shinobi.” Neji shot back, further shocking the twins with his behavior.

“It helps you make allies, which can be useful in battle.” Hinata added, trying to help her sister.

“Allies across shinobi history only bring betrayal. No alliance has lasted for more than a few decades at most.” Neji explained coldly.

“Because nobody’s bothered trying to change that. Be the change you wanna see in the world, that’s what my mama always says to me.” Naruto added clearly trying to get Neji to be more optimistic.

“Such optimism got Hashirama nowhere. When the body dies, optimism dies with it.” Neji answered, turning his pupilless eyes to the Uzumaki.

Naruto glared at the older boy with a look that surprised the three. “Because that was fresh off a time of a lot of fighting and pain! I’ll show you that optimism can get you somewhere if I have to beat it into you!” He declared, standing up.

To the twins' further horror, Neji stood up, towering over the short blonde. “I’d love to see you try.” Neji replied.

“B-boys, boys! We don’t need to go that far…” Hinata nervously told them.

“Oh, I think we do, Hinata…!” Naruto replied, glaring coldly at the long-haired boy before him.

“Alright then, Naruto. If you want to fight, then let's do it. Meet me at the Hyūga Dojo in half an hour.” Neji declared; his icy stare locked on Naruto.

“You’re on!” Naruto replied, his own glare burning red-hot into Neji’s soul.

Meanwhile: Lee Clan Compound

“505. 506. 507. 508. 509…” Lee grunted as he performed pushups with several planks of wood on his back.

“Rock! Your weird friends are here!” His mother’s smooth voice came from the front lobby.

“Issen-kun and the triplets accepted my invitation!? Please, send them in!” Lee excitedly replied.

“Death Lee!” Jazz Lee called out.

To the four Kamishini boys’ shock, out of a surprisingly tiny door came the largest man the boys had ever seen. Wearing a traditional set of serving clothes, the man threatened to burst from them with his sheer size and bulk. Easily exceeding seven feet and nearly as wide as the hallway, it was as if a statue of some great hero had been made flesh and bone. His face was near flat, with an almost squarish shape to it. Two gray eyes looked down, as if taking in every detail of them, and a set of bushy eyebrows were raised at them. His giant mallet hands smoothed out his crop top hair, with white jagged lightning bolts running through it.

“You called, Lady Jazz?” The giant of a man asked in a slow, monotone voice.

“Yes, Death. Please take them to see Rock in the dojo. Oh, and feed the snap trap plants along the way. I think they are getting peckish.” Jazz ordered with a delightful smile.

The now identified Death Lee put an arm across his chest before bowing slowly and stiffly. “As you wish, Lady Jazz. Mind your step and walk this way please, honored guests.” Death replied before beginning to walk in the direction of the dojo with a stiff, lumbering pace to him.

Seikoku began trying to walk like the lumbering giant only to be smacked in the back of his head by Shinkoku. Seikoku cried out in pain and winced, rubbing the back of his head, and glaring at his brother. Kei and Issen rolled their eyes as the four then began to follow the mountain of a man to the dojo. Eventually, Death opens the door to the Dojo to reveal Rock Lee having added several more blocks on top of the boards, and already on his 177th rep.

“Master Rock. Your weird friends are here to see you.” Death Lee said, stepping aside so the four could pass.

“Why do they call us weird when they have a living mountain and snap trap plants in their home…?” Issen muttered to the triplets only to get elbowed in the gut by Kei.

“Thank you, Uncle Death! And compliments on how slippery you made the Dojo floor! It took me five minutes to get my balance!” Rock Lee chipperly answered.

“You flatter me, Master Rock. Will that be all?” Death replied, looking down at his nephew.

“That will be all. Thank you as always, uncle!” Rock Lee said with a smile.

Death simply put an arm across his chest and bowed slowly and stiffly. Rising back up to his full towering height, he then turned and slowly exited the dojo. As he did, his feet slid ever so slightly along the slippery floor, as if he were gliding out of the room.

“Hey, guys! Thank you so much for accepting my invitation! No one ever wants to come home with me.” Lee said happily, as he stopped his pushups.

“I can’t see why. Also, what are you feeding that guy? Mountains?” Seikoku replied to their… ‘enthusiastic’ friend.

“Grandpa had him stop eating mountains decades ago. It made him lose his girlish figure.” Rock Lee answered simply, before seeing the horrified looks of his friends. “It's a joke, guys. Come on!”

“I can’t help but wonder about that…” Issen muttered.

“What is wrong with Uncle Death? Your Grandpa is big too…” Lee tried to say before being cut off.

“Yeah, but gramps isn’t the size of a large summoning animal.” Kei replied.

“Grandpa also forbade him from eating those too.” Lee said.

“... Please tell me that was a joke too.” Seikoku replied in disbelief.

“... We are getting off topic.” Lee replied simply.

“So… what did you want us over for Lee?” Shinkoku asked nervously.

“I wished for us to do some training together and play until dinner time. Work up our appetites to make the food taste better.” Lee informed his friends with a smile.

“How we gonna do that, wrestle lions?” Kei muttered under his breath.

“No. We will be using the obstacle course.” Lee replied before walking to a lever in the dojo.

“How do you guys have an obstacle course? We don’t have an obstacle course!” Seikoku exclaimed in shock.

“My great grandpa had it built. Great grandpa Opera always was an eccentric man.” Lee replied before pulling the lever.

As the shoji screens opened, they revealed the hell that lay before them. Pit traps, crocodiles, fire-spewing pillars, spike jumps, and more. Flying blades spanning chasms filled with giant spiders. The sheer dizzying number of things just seemed to go on and on and on. Shinkoku soon fainted at the sight as the other three brothers stared in pale-faced horror.

“Who would like to go first? We can start you on the lowest difficulty instead of this one!” Lee announced to his friends.

Meanwhile: Back at the Hyūga Compound

Hinata and Enten sat in the audience portion of the dojo as Naruto and Neji stared at each other. The only reason they hadn’t started throwing hands yet was some form of dominance display. They wanted to prove they were right just through the power of eye contact. Finally, after what felt like forever, long enough for Enten to want to take a nap, the two finally started. Dropping into their own individual stances, the two rushed at each other with as much force as their legs could muster.

“About time… I was ready to fall asleep, these two were so boring…” Enten tiredly said.

“Enten! Naruto-kun and big brother Neji could hurt each other!” Hinata chided her twin.

“Most likely. Why can’t they have entertaining beef like Father and Uncle?” Enten groaned, waving off her sister's concerns.

Hinata sighed. “Because boys are stupid. You know that as much as I do…” She replied in frustration.

“At least Naruto is entertainingly stupid. Right, sis?” Enten said with a sly smirk.

Hinata blushed and glared at her sister. As this happened, Naruto and Neji made it to each other as Naruto dodged a palm thrust from Neji. Clenching his hands into fists, he threw a wild haymaker at the older boy that Neji dodged. However, when Neji went for a palm strike to Naruto’s solar plexus, the blonde Uzumaki swung his leg low to sweep Neji’s feet. Jumping up to dodge, this left Neji open for Naruto to swing his leg up and back in the other direction, forcing Neji to put his arm up to block while bracing it with his other hand.

The force of the kick, as minor as it was, still knocked Neji from his jump and sent him tumbling. Naruto took off running after the Hyūga boy, jumping a bit to bring his foot down in a move he had seen his older cousin Rea use once. Rolling to dodge the sloppy heel drop kick, Neji got to his feet and took off, aiming a two-fingered strike at Naruto’s thigh where he knew a pressure point was from his lessons. Sensing danger, Naruto stepped his leg back to dodge before moving with his own momentum into another haymaker.

Catching the punch, Neji tried to strike another pressure point only for Naruto to aim an uppercut at his chin. Changing the position of his hand and moving to intercept, Neji caught the fist before it could get to his chin. However, this left Neji open to a knee to his stomach that knocked the breath out of him. As Naruto reeled his knee back for another blow, Neji stopped the impact with his foot before pushing Naruto’s knee down, forcing Naruto down to one knee on the floor of the dojo.

With a quick roundhouse kick to the face, Neji knocked Naruto to the floor. Before Neji could get on top of him to pin him down, Naruto swept his foot, kicking Neji’s legs out from under him. Quickly getting on top of the older boy, Naruto went for a blow his mama taught him called a Hammer Fist. Raining blows down on Neji, who covered himself to block them, Naruto tried to get a punch through Neji’s guard. Seeing Naruto about to go for a double hammer fist, Neji rolled his upper body aside before kicking Naruto off him.

Climbing on top of Naruto, Neji went for multiple Hammer Fist and palm thrust blows of his own, trying to break Naruto’s own defenses. When Neji went for his own double hammer fist, Naruto shot up as fast as he could, headbutting Neji in the face. Jumping off Naruto and clutching his nose, Neji was unprepared for Naruto to tackle him to the ground with a shoulder-tackle to the stomach. The impact knocked the breath from the prodigy’s lungs, having not expected such a tactic from a future shinobi.

Shaking himself to try to get some sense of what was going on, Neji barely dodged as Naruto went for a running punt kick to his chin. Stomping his foot to the ground to stop his own momentum, Naruto turned on his heel and sent a backwards roundhouse kick Neji’s way that the boy was forced to block with his arm. As Naruto’s heel impacted Neji’s arm, the two sprang apart, panting a bit. Catching Naruto’s foot as he rushed in and went for another kick, Neji pulled him in to throw him off balance before landing a palm smash to Naruto’s face. This disoriented the blonde Uzumaki long enough for Neji to wrap his hands and legs around Naruto’s leg and drop to the ground, pulling tight on it.

Crying out, Naruto tried to get loose as Neji pulled tight on his leg. Punching at Neji’s legs and wrists, Naruto tried to force him to loosen his grip as Neji refused to let go. Finally, after a full-strength hammer fist to his wrist, Neji winced in pain and finally released the son of the Hokage. Rolling away from each other, the two scrambled to get to their feet, panting and glaring at each other. Giving each other small smiles, the two fell over, panting heavily.

“See, Hinata? They’re alive.” Enten said simply, motioning her arm towards them.

“Oh good. I hope they didn’t hurt each other too much. Should we get the first aid kit?” Hinata replied, looking at her younger twin.

“I’ll get it. You go over and keep them from getting up again.” Enten sighed as she soon walked out of the room.

After Enten returned with the first aid kit, she already saw Hinata fretting over them like a mother hen. Much to the boys’ mutual annoyance. However, as they were getting patched up, the two could not help but smile. Even if the two did not say it, they at least worked out part of their issues with each other. And having a good scrap like that was kind of fun. After being patched up, Naruto walked home with a smile across his face.

To say that his mother was livid would be a charitable interpretation of what he received. In fact, she was ready to march over to the Hyūga’s and break skulls open. Only the stern words of old man Oda and several of the strongest Uzumaki holding her back prevented a potential massacre. After fretting over Naruto all night, a lovely dinner, and a warm bath, Naruto was finally ready for bed. He even went to bed at a reasonable time for once, which further freaked Kushina out.

However, after Kushina tucked him in, Naruto swiftly went to sleep. He was excited to get to his dreams. His dreams were always great. Mostly involving his friends, family, and ramen. Tonight, however… tonight, it was different…

He opened his eyes to the dark, dank, and chilly sewer corridor. Rarely did he ever get in this dreamscape. He trembled as he heard a rumbling growl going further into the darkness. He never got close, too afraid of whatever monster was over there. Yet, tonight, he heard something… no… felt something. Something the other direction of the growls. Turning around, he began to take the tentative first steps. Eventually, he reached a door, and nervously opened it.

The room was far different than any he had ever been in his dreams. It appeared to be that of a temple, one of dark stone and red wood. On the red wood pillars were strange flowing runes, running like water in ways he had not seen kanji done before. Bizarre gray and green accents began to form around in various features, as he saw a cloaked figure in front of him. The figure turned to face him, indicating a cloaked boy older than himself by some years. Yet what was odd was his face.

The only discernible feature of his was dual-colored eyes one of topaz yellow one of amethyst purple, as if he were staring at the gemstones of a master craftsman. Beyond that, however, he could not pick anything out. His face seemed to shift and twist, conjuring, changing, and deleting features in mere moments. As if his face was reflecting a kaleidoscope of the human condition. Finally, the boy before him spoke, catching Naruto off guard.

However, to Naruto’s surprise, no sound came out of the boy’s mouth when he spoke. When Naruto tried to call out to him, Naruto found that no words came from his own mouth. Raising his arm, the cloaked boy pointed towards a door in the temple. Looking at it, Naruto walked over to the door and slowly opened it. As Naruto opened it, light burst from the door as Naruto covered his face. When the light faded, Naruto was surprised to find himself in a wide-open forest clearing with beautiful green tree leaves being blown from the branches of their trees by a gentle breeze.

Looking, Naruto saw an older version of himself standing with the hooded boy. The two walked as Naruto followed them. Soon, the three of them came across a family of four Timberwolves, three cubs and a mother, opposing a larger wolf. The youngest cub, black and white with green tribal markings on its fur and emerald-green eyes like the hooded boy’s, was injured and bleeding from its leg. The three watched as the cub cowered before a massive male wolf, its fur black as the darkest void with faded green markings similar to the cub’s, its eyes an empty black with white sclera and emerald-green irises. The massive wolf growled at the cowering cub as it made its way closer.

The other adult wolf, a smaller female with white fur and emerald-green markings that resembled the youngest cub’s, snarled at the male with a vicious glare. The other two cubs, an adolescent, black-furred male cub identical to the opposing wolf with green markings and eyes that resembled the youngest cub’s, stood beside his mother in defense of the black and white cub, snarling and growling at the male in a defensive stance. The middle cub, a white-furred cub with the same markings and eyes as the others, stood back behind the older cub and mother, gently licking its injured sibling’s wound before turning and snarling at the massive male before them.

Rushing in, the older Naruto rushed in to stand beside the wolf cubs and mother. The three glared and snarled at him before he walked forward and stood in front of them, opposing the male. Putting his hands in a hand seal with his index and middle fingers extended and placed in a cross, the older Naruto looked back and said something to the hooded boy. Confused, but nodding, the hooded boy rushed ahead and stood before the vicious male wolf, extending his hand towards it in a threatening motion as a strange spearhead made of glowing, electrically sparking energy, one that did not resemble chakra in the slightest, appeared in the palm of his hand.

The mysterious hooded boy fired the spearhead towards the great wolf, sending out a flash of light. The flash soon made Naruto forcibly wake. Panting heavily, he sat there sweating. He could not figure out what exactly happened. Yet only one thing stayed on his mind. The word his older self said in the dream.

“Ranmyaku…?” Naruto asked in confusion…

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

The Uzumaki Estate had fallen into a relative quiet, something that had greatly unnerved the residents of Konoha. Especially after Kushina had hardly been at the residence for nearly a week and finally just returned. They had only just started getting used to the wild clan that they had in their midst. Having a Konoha-raised Uzumaki as their Hokage, and her expert navigation of the post-war stressors had done wonders for the clan. However, Kushina was quietly working on some more minor duties in the lounge, she heard Naruto from beside her say something that shook her.

“Momma… I’m bored.” Naruto moaned, as he barely kept his head up as he sat on a cushion next to her.

“Naruto, honey. Momma has important Hokage business to attend to.” Kushina tried to explain to her son.

“Why do I have to be here though…?” Naruto groaned, before finally giving in and letting his head hit the table before him.

“Because I can’t leave you alone for five minutes without you getting yourself into trouble.” Kushina explained with a sigh.

“Trouble is fun…” Naruto grumbled through the table.

“No, trouble is not fun. Trouble is dangerous.” Kushina told her son with a frown.

“Just like being a shinobi. And Uncle Kakashi and Obito say it's fun too.” Naruto countered, barely lifting his head back up.

Kushina sighed. “Naruto… being Hokage is a very important job for a shinobi. Not to mention a huge honor. Your poppa was Hokage before me and everyone respects him for it.” she explained to her son.

“Poppa would let me have fun…” Naruto grumbled to himself, spacing out a bit from boredom. 

Naruto was expecting a reply from his mother, as he always got. Yet none came. Naruto turned to look at his mother, who was doing her best to hold back tears. It took him a second to realize why she was crying before he leapt over to hug her.

“Sorry, momma…” Naruto said, snuggling his face into her as he spoke.

Drying her tears, Kushina looked down at her son with a sad smile. “It’s okay, Naruto. I just… wish your dad could be here. He would’ve loved helping to raise you and seeing how you’re turning out.” She told him, stroking his spiky blonde hair.

“Was dad really that good at being a Hokage?” Naruto asked.

“He wasn’t Hokage for long, sadly. But, despite that, he made great strides for the village in the little time he did get.” Kushina told him, a smile on her face as she recalled the day Minato told her about him being appointed the Fourth Hokage.

Naruto sat there, as his mind turned to the dream he had had some nights ago. “Did dad go on adventures before becoming Hokage?” Naruto asked curiously, trying to shift the conversation.

Kushina giggled a bit. “Oh, he had a lot of adventures out on missions. We both did. In fact, one such adventure that happened when we were children was why I fell for him in the first place.” she explained, a wistful smile on her face.

“Blegh… Ino germs…” Naruto said, making a disgusted face.

Kushina grinned a bit. “Does my Naruto have a crush on the Yamanaka princess?” she asked playfully.

“No. Shikamaru said girls have germs like Ino.” Naruto answered in a matter-of-fact tone.

Kushina giggled. “No, they don’t, Naruto. Momma is a girl, after all.” she pointed out.

“Momma’s not a girl. Momma is momma.” Naruto replied, denying that fact.

“... I can’t be mad at you. Come here” Kushina said with a sigh and a smile, hugging Naruto close.

Naruto happily snuggled into the hug before looking up at her. “Did you two ever go to any big, scary mountains?” Naruto asked curiously.

“Oh, plenty of times. And scary valleys, abandoned mansions and castles. All kinds of places.” Kushina explained, smiling as she recalled some of their missions together when their teams worked together.

“Have you ever been inside any scary mountains?” Naruto asked curiously, which got an eyebrow raise from Kushina.

Now, Kushina began to get confused. “No. Why do you ask, sweetie?” she asked, raising her eyebrow.

“One of the kids at school told me about a Mountain of Death. Is it real? Or is it like those things in Grandpa Jiraiya’s books?” Naruto replied. He was lying through his back teeth, but it is not like his mother noticed that.

Kushina picked Naruto up and brought him face to face with her. “Naruto. Never. Ever. Ever go to that mountain.” she told him with a serious face.

“Why?” Naruto asked simply, blinking in a confused manner at his mother’s change of demeanor.

“Because it’s a ‘Mountain of Death.’ You’ll die if you go there and that would make momma sad. Do you want to make momma sad?” Kushina explained, trying to get the point across to her boy.

“Auntie Rin calls Uncle Obito’s laundry a Mountain of Death, but I survived falling in it.” Naruto explained, as if trying to calm her down. However, it had the opposite effect.

“I’m not joking, Naruto. You are never, ever, ever allowed to go to that mountain by yourself. Not until you’re strong enough to be Hokage. Understand?” Kushina told her son, her serious gaze locked on his eyes.

“Yes, momma.” Naruto answered blankly.

Kushina smiled. “Good. Now, if you’re good while momma gets some work done, I’ll take you to get some ice cream.” she told him gently.

“Yay ice cream!” Naruto yelled happily, reaching his arms to the sky in joy.

With a smile, Kushina set Naruto gently in her lap and got back to her work. However, contrary to what she thought she instilled in her son, it had the opposite effect. He wanted, no, he needed to head to that mountain he saw in his dreams. The Mountain of Death.

Half An Hour Later: Fruit of the Cream Ice Cream Stand

Naruto happily skipped ahead of his mother towards the ice cream shop. The summer sun beat down on the two Uzumaki, making it a perfect afternoon for the village's best dairy confections. As Naruto impatiently waited for his cone to be done, he noticed Kei and Miko walking towards the stand. Seeing his friend, Naruto smiled and waved his arms wildly towards his friend.

“Kei!” Naruto chipperly called out and rushed over towards him.

Hearing his name be called, Kei looked and smiled at the sight of his friend. “Naruto! How are you doing?” he replied, rushing up to greet his friend.

“Momma’s finally done with all her boring paperwork and we’re getting ice cream!” Naruto answered eagerly, jumping up and down in excitement.

“Sweet! Mom and I just got done with studying. Stupid dusty, old scrolls…” Kei replied, muttering the last part.

“Kushina, you old fox. Glad to see you got yourself out of all that paperwork for the day. How have things been going for you?” Miko asked with a smile before she quickly ordered.

Kushina groaned. “I feel like my wrist is cramping up from all that paperwork…!” she replied in frustration.

“Oh, you’ll get used to it. It's like learning to throw shuriken. You never forget.” Miko joked, trying to cheer her up.

“Don’t mention throwing. I wanted to chuck my desk out the window. I was getting so frustrated…” Kushina sighed, shaking her wrists to loosen them up.

“Oh, tell me about it. Father has been driving me up the walls over the scroll organization lately. I’m ready to send a desk into his face at this rate.” Miko sighed as well, remembering the arguments as if they were yesterday.

As the two women began to talk, Naruto sensed an opportunity. He soon grabbed Kei and pulled him away, but not too far as to make it suspicious. He then turned to confront his friend.

“Kei. What do you know about the Mountain of Death?” Naruto asked.

“I know that some pretty weird stuff goes on in it. I also know that very few who go into it come back alive. The ones who live… don’t live well.” Kei replied while raising an eyebrow, wondering where his blonde friend was going with this.

“Okay, I know I’m going to sound crazy, but I had a dream some nights ago. There is someone inside that Mountain.” Naruto explained, which caught the Kamishini boy off guard.

Kei was surprised by that. “Wait… you too?” he asked, surprised by his friend’s words.

“Wait… you had a weird dream about it?” Naruto asked, confused that his friend was not calling him an insane moron. He was not complaining, but it was certainly confusing.

“Yeah. I had a dream that I was making my way through it down into some weird vault. Sei and Shin had the same dream too, for some reason.” Kei told him, finding this whole situation odd.

“Four people having weird dreams about the same mountain… that isn’t a coincidence, is it?” Naruto asked, his mind beginning to wander onto more… interesting conclusions.

“We need to talk to Sasuke. If he’s been having it too, then something really weird is going on here.” Kei told his blonde friend, having a feeling that something was off.

“I asked my mom about that place, but all she told me was not to go there. Did you ask anyone about it?” Naruto asked.

“I asked my grandpa about it, but…” Kei said, recounting the conversation with Seishin.

Earlier that Morning: Kamishini Residence

Kei walked through the labyrinthine halls of the Kamishini Estate, looking for a specific room. Contrary to what anyone would believe about them, the higher rank you were in the clan, the harder it was to find your room. However, Kei had just enough knowledge to get where he was going and knocked on an old oaken door.

“Who is it?” The elderly, but powerful voice of Seishin asked.

“Grandpa? It’s Kei.” he called.

“Come on in, boy. The door’s unlocked.” Seishin answered through the door.

With that, Kei opened the door and stepped inside. Despite the room being the largest one other than the ordinary one in the house, Kei certainly would not know it just by looking. Titanic bookshelves stuffed to the gills, grand cases full of ancient artifacts, and literal mountains of paper covered the place. He had to use what shinobi grace and reflexes he had to walk through the place. However, he soon arrived at a colossal desk of thick, dark hardwood, made in a style not used in centuries. It was equally cluttered with many different things of similar old origin. All before homing in on the towering, ancient figure that was his grandfather, who turned around on his swivel chair.

“What is it that you need, my boy?” Seishin replied, raising an eyebrow.

“What do you know about a creepy, old mountain at the edge of the Land of Fire? The one right near the coast.” Kei asked, trying to be subtle.

A bushy white brow on the top of the elder statesman's head raised high at such a specific question. “I know many things. Though I fear your mother will be furious if I tell you much about such a… mature topic.” Seishin replied, the old man showing a rare moment of fearful vulnerability over his daughter's temper.

“I overheard a shinobi in the village talking about it. Something about, and I quote, ‘a lot of weird and dangerous shit’ being inside it…” Kei explained, lying smoothly.

“... If I tell you, your mother isn’t finding it out. Understand?” Seishin answered sternly.

Kei nodded and made a motion of zipping his mouth shut, locking shut, and throwing away the key. Seeing that his grandson understood, Seishin nodded and continued.

“It is known more recently by that title. That is merely due to the fact no shinobi has come out of that mountain alive. However, there is a reason for it.” Seishin explained, which immediately got his grandson asking questions.

“What reason is that, Grandpa?” Kei asked him.

“The mountain was settled, long ago, by a people older and grander than our own. A people that we long have held kinship to. The mountain’s true name is Seaheart, home to the Seaheartians.” Seishin answered, as simply as reciting something that was common knowledge.

Kei was surprised to hear that. “The kingdom descended from the royal family of our homeland?” He asked in disbelief.

“Indeed. The sole unbroken line of blood connected to our homeland. Lord Moto, our ancestor who had last interacted with them, spoke of a kingdom of splendor, riches, and mystical might that seems… even as we mix chakra and the power of the divine… honestly impossible.” Seishin said, as if trying to pick out the right words to use. An act that further shocked Kei, as it was rare for his grandfather to be at a loss for words.

“They used power from the gods without needing chakra to make it easier to control?” he asked his grandfather in sheer disbelief.

“No, boy. Able to use the raw essence, the raw power of the realms themselves. Beyond that, even fashion that power into items, scrolls, weapons, armor, and even into themselves using runes. Yet unlike us, they were not warlike people. Despite their power.” Seishin continued.

Kei was in sheer awe of what he was hearing. “That’s… that’s…” he tried to say, at a loss for words.

“Indescribable? Incredible? Unbelievable?” Seishin asked, trying to help his grandson along.

“Y… yeah…” Kei replied, nodding as best he could.

“It is a concept that many pillars before me have had to wrangle with. The concept of beings so powerful, so knowledgeable and skilled, yet not using it to destroy like so many have. And to vanish without a trace in the blink of an eye from the world.” Seishin said, with contemplation and mournful sorrow in his voice.

“Do… do we know if they’re still there…?” Kei asked hopefully, praying that answers to his and his brothers’ strange dreams lay within that mountain.

“We don’t know if they are even still there, boy. All we know is no Seaheartian has been seen in forever, and that anyone who attempts to enter their mountain now, does not return.” Seishin explained in a guarded tone.

“Oh…” Kei replied a bit nervously.

“Now then. Like I said earlier. Do not let your mother know I told you this.” Seishin said sternly.

Kei nodded. “I won’t, Grandpa. Not a word.” he replied to his grandfather.

“Good. Now off you fly, young one. I’ve got research to do.” Seishin said with a dismissing hand gesture.

Kei nodded and saluted before heading off. As he did, one thing was already on his mind: He had to tell his friends about this…

Present Time

“... If Sasuke has had these kinds of dreams, then we have to go to that mountain.” Naruto said sternly, looking over his shoulder to check to make sure his mother had not noticed them.

“As bad an idea as that sounds, I’m with you on that. If Sasuke’s been having dreams like ours, then this can’t be a coincidence. We gotta check this out.” Kei agreed, nodding as he looked at their mothers to make sure they did not overhear while trying to make it look like they were picking out ice cream flavors.

“Right. Later, we go check up on Sasuke.” Naruto said simply.

Kei nodded as the two boys looked at ice cream flavors. Trying to make it seem like they had not just had a conversation about a potentially life-threatening personal mission. When the two women looked at their sons, they simply saw them looking over ice cream flavors with contemplative looks on their little faces.

Later: Uchiha Clan Compound

The two boys headed through the gates, ice cream in hand with the guards letting them through without a second thought. Both were common sites on the compound… even if it meant trouble. Mercifully, they did not have to go far to find Sasuke, as he was sitting looking at the Koi in the Koi Pond out front.

“Hey, Sasuke. I didn’t know you liked fish.” Naruto said with a smirk.

“They relax me. Is one of those for me?” Sasuke replied, raising an eyebrow when he noticed his friends with three cones, one held by Naruto and two by Kei.

“Yes, it is. Here you go, buddy.” Kei said with a smile, handing Sasuke his cone.

“Sasuke, I need to ask you a question.” Naruto said after eating a bit of his ice cream.

“What do you need to know?” Sasuke asked, licking his mint chocolate chip ice cream.

“Have you had any dreams about a mountain lately?” Naruto asked bluntly.

Stopping mid-lick, Sasuke thought about it. “Now that you mention it… yeah, I have.” he noted, going back to his ice cream.

“That's it. We are going.” Naruto said to Kei almost immediately after hearing that.

Sasuke raised an eyebrow. “Going where?” he asked before getting a surprised look as he realized. “Wait… have you guys been having dreams about that weird mountain too?”

“Both of us and Kei’s brothers have. Five people having similar dreams? That's not a coincidence.” Naruto said sternly.

“My dreams involve going through a weird mountain maze to get to that creepy mountain. What about yours?” Sasuke replied, starting to wonder what was going on.

“Mine had me ending up in a weird clearing with wolves in it….” Naruto began to explain.

“With three cubs and two grown up ones? With one cub being hurt?” Sasuke asked in disbelief.

“Yeah! Then I somehow end up walking and ending up at that mountain maze you mentioned with a huge mountain in the middle!” Naruto explained, starting to become more suspicious.

“Me and my brothers had the same dream. Except ours goes to us being inside the mountain after the clearing and making our way through it down to some weird vault.” Kei noted, finding this whole situation crazy.

“Alright. Get packing as stealthily as we can, boys. Tonight, we are heading out for it.” Naruto said as he put his hands on his hips.

“I’ll try, but we can’t let Itachi find out. He’ll tell the grownups, and we’ll never get to go.” Sasuke told his friends, looking around for any signs of his big brother.

“Well, then don’t let him catch you. Simple as that.” Naruto said nonchalantly.

“I have an idea of how we can avoid getting caught…” Sasuke told his friends, a clever smirk on his face.

“And that is…?” Kei nervously asked.

“We tell our parents that we’re going on a camping trip with just our friends. Help us get ready for the academy in a year.” Sasuke told the two, licking his ice cream.

“That's perfect! I knew you were smarter than a duck Sasuke!” Naruto said, jumping to hug his friend.

“To be fair, ducks are actually really smart. Still, that’s a good idea.” Kei told his friends, a smile on his face.

Sasuke gave an annoyed grunt at his blonde friend's antics but had a small smile. “I have my moments.” he replied as the three went back to their ice creams.

Dead of Night: Outside the Walls of Konoha

Naruto and Sasuke stood at an old, twisted oak tree a few hundred feet beyond the city gates. The two were ready to give up the ghost until finally the triplets arrived, packs all set for a long journey. Sasuke turned to face them with an annoyed look.

“What took you three so long?” Sasuke growled.

“Mom and dad wanted to make sure we were all set up for our ‘camping trip.’ They worry too much.” Shinkoku told the two.

“It's probably a good thing they don’t know where we’re going. They’d lock us in the hashi for good…” Kei said fearfully. 

“Right. Is everyone ready?” Naruto asked, steadying his own pack.

The other four nodded, looking to make sure they had not been found out yet.

“Alright then. Let's get going. And let's hope that mountain has what we’re looking for… with not as much danger as everyone says there is…” Naruto said nervously, as he turned to look at the long road ahead of him.

He did not know what was out there, or what was waiting for him, but it was now or never. They had to face the Mountain of Death. And whatever secrets laid within…

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

Bolded Italicized is used for descriptive actions.

Italicized is used for internal thoughts/flashbacks.

Bold is for emphasis.

“Underlined Bold” is for dialogue/internal thoughts concerning otherworldly beings.

Naruto always wondered how his mother, aunts, uncles, cousins, and even his ancient grandfather performed long treks across the Land of Fire. Because his feet were blistered, sore, and felt like they were going to break. After three days. He could tell the others were not much better, but this trip was his idea, so he had to put on a brave face. The nearly endless forests of the nation had sheltered them through most of it, keeping potential dangers at bay. However, as they approached the border with the Land of Lightning, this began to change.

The forests began to thin, and the land became rockier and drier. Hills began to form before they too were swallowed by the rising forms of mountains. Roads became more jagged and windy, forced to follow the contour of the land, unlike where man could cut their way through nature. The air became cooler, smacking them with a chill and dryness they had only ever felt in winter. Yet they trudged on, guided by the maps and tidbits they could scrounge up without suspicion.

Yet in all of Naruto and his band of merry boys' wildest dreams, they were not prepared in spirit for the land they had to traverse. To them, the largest outcropping of stone they had seen was the great bluff the Hokage Monument was carved into. Its imposing size and serenity gave them hope, inspiration, and comfort. These lands and nature's crafted monuments gave no such feelings. Towering spires of stone jotted the jagged canyons that clung with mist, piercing the sky like a spear poised for the kill. They marched under the dank, and shadowed forms of bluffs so massive that several Hokage Monuments could have been stacked on them. It left them with a sense of crushing, near hopeless insignificance, like they were so small they were specks of sand. And the uneasy feelings kept on coming.

“Kei… are you sure that the mountain is through this?” Naruto asked nervously, his head darting between canyon walls for threats.

“According to the map, it is. Thank the gods grandpa taught me how to read one.” Kei replied, looking the map over carefully.

“You’re the only one he did teach how to read one, so I’d hope you can read a map.” Shinkoku grumbled.

“Guys… why would these people have someone locked up, or be involved with those wolves? Do you guys have any idea what that's all about?” Naruto asked confusedly.

“... I’m not sure. Whoever this kid is, if he’s in one of the vaults, he’s probably powerful or potentially dangerous if he falls into the wrong hands. But these visions are guiding us for a reason, so I say we follow them.” Seikoku replied after giving it some thought.

“... And why did you morons drag me along again? I have training with Itachi I could be doing.” Sasuke cracked back.

“Because, if you’re having visions too, then you’re going to be involved somehow in the future.” Kei told him, looking over a trail marker on the map.

“And why would you pea brains think releasing a prisoner is a good idea?” Sasuke questioned.

“To be fair, we don’t know for sure that he’s a prisoner. But he’s in those vaults for a reason. I just have a feeling that these visions are telling us to release him.” Shinkoku added.

“How do we know it's a he? We only saw their eyes…” Naruto said simply.

“Good point. I guess we’ll find out when we get there.” Seikoku replied with a shrug.

“Wait… I think we found the spot from Naruto’s vision! There’s a clearing just up ahead!” Kei replied, pointing at a spot on the map.

The mountain path soon began to climb, but even at the angle, they could see the edges of the forest, one more full of pine trees than the oaks they were used to. Yet it felt familiar to them. When they finally arrived, rising over a crest in the path, it was the clearing, just as it was in the dream. Full of the same swaying grasses, flowers, and the same aura it had. Yet there was no sign of any wolves, which confused them.

“This is it… this is the clearing. The wolves aren’t here, but this is definitely it.” Naruto noted in awe, looking around the clearing.

“So… what now?” Seikoku asked, looking around expecting something.

“Now Naruto guides us through to the mountain maze so I can take over.” Sasuke noted, looking around as well.

“So, we have chosen death. Got it.” Shinkoku sighed.

“Hey! I’ve got a great sense of direction!” Naruto offendedly huffed.

“You got lost going to the bathroom down the hall at the last Chūnin Exams!” Shinkoku shot back.

“I was running on low sleep!” Naruto replied indignantly.

“And you're not now!?” Seikoku chipped in.

“Guys, please focus…” Kei groaned, pinching the bridge of his nose.

“Right! If I remember… the mountain maze should be that way.” Naruto replied, pointing in a direction to their center right.

Kei looked at the map to make sure. “Well… there is a pretty big mountain area in that direction, according to the map…” he noted.

“What kind of madmen are we related to if they were willing to live in the center of this horrible place? How did they move around this craphole?” Seikoku asked, looking around at the mountains that surrounded them.

“I think it’s kind of nice. Fresh mountain air, nice plants, hungry cave leopard… wait, what!?” Shinoku noted before realizing what he just said as he noticed the creature coming out of the shadows.

The boys had seen the big cats before behind the safety of steel bars. Yet, as the beast stepped into the sun, it was clear that this was not the kind of animal they had seen before. Its spotted hide was more faded silver in color, as if the mountain air had sucked the color out of it. However, while it superficially looked like a leopard, it was far more massive. Standing nearly as tall as a tiger, it curled back its lips to reveal fangs like steak knives, and its eyes bore the distinct look of a cruel intelligence. As if it knew exactly what it wanted to do to them, and it was going to enjoy it.

“Don’t move. Its vision is based on movement.” Seikoku whispered.

“That’s dinosaurs, you idiot…!” Shinkoku hissed in annoyance.

“Sasuke. You like cats. You talk to it.” Seikoku whispered to him, while keeping his eyes on the cave beast.

Gulping, Sasuke took a step forward as the leopard growled. “N…nice cave leopard. We’re not food. We’re just passing through…” he tried to calmly say, not wanting to agitate the predator.

However, the feline cocked its head, as if almost offended by such a crude gesture. And they soon found out what happened when you offended them. The beast growled before snarling and leaping, trying to pounce on them.

“Scatter!” Naruto called out as the boys scrambled to dodge the beast’s lunge.

The massive cat landed with its claws digging into the ground where they had once stood. Drawing kunai, the boys surrounded it and tried to always keep one eye on it. Snarling, the hungry beast stalked around in a circle, looking at the morsels that had surrounded it as it waited for an opening. Seeing one, it lunged at Sasuke, trying to pounce on him. Just barely dodging, Sasuke slashed at its side only for it to jump aside, growling viciously.

Drawing three shuriken, Kei threw them at the predatory beast to try to catch it off guard. However, as if sensing the move, it jumped over the throw as the shuriken soared and stabbed into the trunk of a tree. Cursing, Kei had to jump to dodge as the beast tried to pounce down on him, its claws digging deep into the trunk of the tree behind him. Growling, the leopard growled at the boys as it circled them like a shark that had smelled blood in the water.

Seeing its opening, it lunged, heading right for Naruto. Crying out, Naruto pulled his kunai up as the leopard pounced on him. The blade of the knife dug into its chest as it yowled in pain, leaping back. Scrambling to its feet, injured but far from fatally, it snarled at the boys before running off, clearly deeming them not worth the effort. As easily as it showed up, it slunk back into the undergrowth of the forest as the boys panted in fear.

“Anyone hurt?” Naruto asked, looking over at his team.

“We should be asking you that! You’re the one it almost made a meal out of!” Sasuke snapped at his friend, rushing to check on him.

“I’m just glad you guys are safe…” Naruto said, before being cut off.

“We’re fine, thanks to you. Nice move with getting your kunai up that fast.” Kei noted with a smile.

“Let's get moving before something else thinks we look like a meal…” Naruto said, before taking the path towards the maze, throwing the blood-soaked kunai into the undergrowth.

As the rest of them began to follow their orange-clad leader, they walked through the small patch of forest before taking a winding trail down into a mist-covered valley. Carved by a mountain stream, sprays of water kept the area moist and covered in plants. To their surprise, the leopard was not the only larger than expected animal. Deer towered over the size of cows, shaggy cave beasts like a cross of a rhino and a boar were as big as elephants, colossal turtles as big as houses swam in the streams, catching fish as long as telephone poles. It was as if it was a land time had forgotten, where the rules of nature did not apply. 

Yet, as they walked down the old path, they began to notice signs that man had indeed trod upon these lands. Carved into the sheer canyon walls, inside large stumps of ancient trees long dead, or out in the open, were small shrines in shockingly good condition. Each had a statue to a god or spirit in them, sometimes multiple, but none were of a deity or spirit that they recognized. And as they went, their numbers seemed to increase, but so did the caves that formed in the sides of the canyons. Some clearly were simple holes while others had bones around them, indicating predators, of which they made a swift passage past.

However, as they approached one around a corner, they heard the distinct sound of munching. Not like a cow eating grass or people eating a meal. It was the raw, visceral sound of something crunching bones like they were crackers between iron hard teeth. Something that was not friendly or ever would be friendly. Seeing no other way around, as they had no means of running on the canyon walkways or climbing it, they had to try to face what was before them. They wished they would find another way around very soon.

Rounding the corner, they saw several small humanoids with a sickening green colored skin, greasy black hair in wild fuzzy manes, and skinny bodies akin to monkeys. Yet what creeped them out were their heads. It was as if someone had forced a pumpkin onto such a small body, no more than three feet tall. Yet the large, almost oval heads bore great maws, filled with jagged, snarling teeth as if they had become no more like feral cats. Between the two of them, however, was one that was far larger, pushing that of height closer to their mothers. All three however were morosely eating away at scraps, not at anything substantial in terms of sustenance. Yet, despite this disturbing sight, there was somehow something even more horrifying near them.

The source of the crunching sounds came from a far larger humanoid. Despite sitting and having a perpetual stoop, almost like a gorilla, the mammoth monster was likely pushing ten feet tall. Its skin was an earthen grayish brown, cobbled and warted almost like a stone street. Long, thick arms tipped in great anvil sized hands gripped the leg of a cave beast, bringing it to a thick, boxy head on an equally thick and stout neck. Though it was so thick and short one would swear it did not have a neck next to its massively wide shoulders. When it finally stood, its legs were so stout that its gargantuan hands nearly dragged onto the ground. Yet it turned to look at them with beady amber eyes, and its slitted nostrils gave a mighty sniff, before craning its vision to look at the five.

“They have a cave troll. Of course they have a cave troll.” Shinkoku sighed.

“I think you mean it has goblins. Grandpa did always say they were easy for powerful creatures to force them into servitude.” Seikoku retorted.

“Less lecturing, more getting ready to fight…” Kei growled at his brothers.

As if a switch had flipped in the brain of the mountain of muscle, the cave troll let out a bellowing, guttural roar. The goblins soon yipped and yapped as they drew jagged, rusty shanks, their thin lips stretched with glee at what they knew was about to happen. This time, however, the young shinobi were ready to fight. Seeing the corpses around the cave mouth, they noticed swords of varying makes and conditions strung among them. Soon the five bolted, scrambling to get something bigger than a kunai. However, their search was interrupted by the barreling charge of the giant lummox.

Dodging aside, this allowed the cave troll to barrel into the side of the cave, the stone wall shaking from the impact. Rolling to their feet, each boy grabbed a sword, shield, and a helm that were suspiciously close to their sizes. Shaking off any questions for now, they prepared for battle, now armed and ready. The goblins hissed and yapped as they rushed in, trying to stab at them as they rushed in with their rusty weapons. Blocking them with their shields, the boys tried to push the goblins back only to have to dodge around the charge of the troll again. Letting out another bellowing roar, the beast hefted a great club that looked more like part of a small tree that had been ripped out of the ground, tipped in a sharpened stone made into a makeshift ax head.

Bellowing again, the cave troll swung its massive weapon at our heroes, who ducked and jumped over to avoid being hit. The sharpened edge of the stone slammed into the wall, rattling the cave from the strength of the beast. Noting what would happen if they got hit by a blow like that one, the boys made note to keep the troll in sight at all times while trying to deal with the goblins. Bashing them with their shields and slashing and stabbing with their swords, the boys tried to beat back the goblins while they stalled for time to think of a way out of this. All the while, the troll lumbered about the cave, slamming edged club and fist down in an attempt to crush the boys and make a meal out of them.

Finally, Sasuke managed to shield bash a goblin in the face, dazing it as it stumped back. Seeing his opening, he plunged his blade into its face, stabbing the goblin in the eye. As it yapped and hissed in agony, trying to pull the blade out, he kicked it hard in the stomach to knock the wind out of it as he jumped onto it, plunging his short sword deep into its skill and killing it. Rolling aside, he barely avoided being crushed by the cave troll’s club as the goblin was smashed with a sickening, gory crunch, its head sent flying with Sasuke’s blade still impaled in its face. As the head rolled to a stop before him, Sasuke tried to not gag and throw up at what he’d just seen as he reached down, planted his foot on the severed head, and then grabbed the hilt of his sword before pulling it free of the goblin’s eye socket.

Gagging and fighting down bile, Sasuke wiped the blood off of the blade and onto the clothes of a nearby corpse as he prepared to keep fighting. Meanwhile, Naruto clashed with another goblin as he slammed the edge of his shield into its temple. Seeing it stagger back and leave itself open, Naruto swung his sword down in a chopping motion and sliced off the hand that held its shiv. As the goblin yapped and hissed in pain, it clutched the stump where its hand once was as Naruto stabbed his sword into its mouth, piercing through the back of its neck and severing its spine. Gagging and fighting down bile, Naruto kicked the corpse of the goblin off of his blade before wiping his blade clean on its loincloth, trying to not be sick before rolling away to dodge as the fist of the cave troll came down, crushing its slain subordinate under its massive knuckles.

Meanwhile, the triplets triple tag teamed at the largest of the three goblins. The monkey-like beast had thrown aside its shiv in favor of a short sword and shield of its own. Blocking slashes from the three Kamishini boys and slashing and stabbing with its own blade, it tried to outmaneuver them and take them down one by one. Dodging around a stab from one of the boys, it tried to slash down on Kei only for Shinkoku to block the slash with his shield.

Meanwhile, Seikoku let out a battle roar as he got a running start, jumped, and kicked off a wall to land on the head of the goblin. Hissing and snarling, the ape-like beast tried to shake and throw him off as Seikoku held on, stabbing his blade into its shoulder to have something to hold onto. As the beast howled in pain while it shook and bucked, Kei and Shinkoku turned to look at each other and nodded. Running up, Shinkoku slid to the floor and kicked the goblin between its legs, forcing it to stumble back. 

Running up as well, Kei got into a full sprint as Shinkoku held up his shield to give his brother a platform. Running up, Kei vaulted off Shinkoku’s shield as Shinkoku slashed at the Goblin’s ankles with a sweeping cut. Yelping in agony, the beast threw itself back in agony as it fell to its knees, throwing Seikoku off it as he rolled with the momentum, getting back to his feet and pulling another sword from another corpse as he got up. Meanwhile, Kei raised his sword as high as he could and, using the momentum of his fall, swung with all his might, cleaving the goblin’s head in two in a shower of blood.

Panting, the five boys turned to look at the cave troll as it bellowed and charged like a mad bull. Rolling aside, they barely avoided it as it slammed into the wall of the cavern with the force of a runaway locomotive. Stumbling back, the troll roared and swung its club wildly in an attempt to hit them. As the boys jumped, ducked, and dodged around the swings of the massive club, they caught sight of something. An indention in the stone where the troll’s last charge had hit the cavern wall. Getting an idea, Naruto called out to his friends.

“Guys! I have a plan! Lure it to the wall of the cave and get it to smash at it trying to hit you! Then we bring the cave down on it!” Naruto called out.

“Are you crazy, Naruto!?” Sasuke demanded, dodging under a swing from the cave troll.

“Just do it, Duck Butt! We can’t kill this thing if we don’t!” Kei called out to his Uchiha friend.

“Fine, but, if we die, I’m kicking all of your butts when we get to the underworld!” Sasuke called out back.

“Noted! Now follow the order!” Shinkoku called out, dodging a punch from the ape-like behemoth.

With that, the boys began to stab and slash at the troll to anger it, then guided it towards the spot Naruto pointed at. Kei stepped in front of the spot and blew a raspberry at the troll as he called out.

“Hey, ya’ big, dumb ape! Over here!” the Kamishini boy called out, turning his butt to the troll and smacking his own behind with his shield to taunt it.

Letting out a bellowing roar, the troll charged with all its might. Rolling aside, Kei let the troll slam headfirst into the wall, hitting the same spot from earlier. Dazed for a moment, the troll stumbled back as it tried to shake its head. Meanwhile, Shinkoku ran in front of the same spot and threw his sword at its head. The blade hit the stone-like behemoth in the nose, piercing it and making it roar in pain as it turned to look at him. He stuck his tongue out at it and taunted it.

“Nice try, Ugly, but you’re too slow!” Shinkoku called out, enraging the troll even more.

Letting out a bellowing roar, the troll swung its club with all its strength at the spot where the young Kamishini was standing. Shinkoku rolled to the side to dodge as the club slammed into the wall sharpened stone first. The cave rattled from the impact as a small crack began to form in the wall. Soon, the crack began to spread as the troll looked up at the cracking ceiling above it. Throwing a kunai at the troll, hitting it in the eye, Sasuke then took his turn as it roared in pain.

“Come on, dumbass! Is that all you’ve got!?” the young Uchiha taunted.

Glaring with fury in its eyes, the troll had had enough. Half blind from its eye being impaled and blind with fury, it charged with full strength and top speed. However, Sasuke positioned himself so that it would collide with the wall, then jumped aside as it got close enough to cause it to barrel into the wall like a runaway train. The cave began to shake and tremble as the cracks on the wall and ceiling spread and grew from the troll’s head slamming into the source.

Running out of the cave, the boys got to safety as Naruto drew a kunai and reached into his backpack to pull out something special. Something he had packed in case of an emergency. Considering their situation, he believed this qualified as an emergency. Pulling out an exploding tag, he wrapped it around the handle of the kunai.

“It's crushing time!!!” Naruto roared with vigor.

Throwing it with all his might, he hit the spot where the now dazed troll’s head had impacted, the kunai plunging into the crack. Soon, the tag hissed before exploding. The blast rattled the cave as the entire place began coming down. The troll bellowed as it was buffeted by falling rocks before being buried alive. All that was left that was visible was the troll’s hand, which was barely visible from the rubble.

“You maniac!! Where did you get an exploding tag!?” Sasuke roared as he coughed from the dust.

“I found it in my mom’s underwear drawer for some reason.” Naruto answered.

“Why did your mom have an exploding tag in her… never mind. I don’t wanna know…” Kei replied, coughing as he waved the dust out of his face.

“No one is going to ask why he was in her underwear drawer?” Shinkoku coughed out confusedly.

“I was looking around in her room for something that could come in handy during the trip.” Naruto coughed out in reply from the dust.

“Can we get to this damn mountain before we have to deal with another thing that wants to eat us?” Seikoku asked as he picked himself up before dusting himself off.

With a mutual nod from the others, the five continued their march as Sasuke took the lead. Through further winding valleys, canyons, and crags they marched, their feet on the verge of bleeding through their sandals, and their legs feeling the burn of their forced march. Yet, finally, it came into view. They could not mistake the colossal peak for anything less. Reaching so high that they could not see its peak through the clouds, the wide based mountain could not have been anything other than the Mountain of Death. The home of titans among men.

With vigor finally finding its purchase and a second wind upon their loins, they redoubled their efforts. By nightfall, they finally reached the edge of the peak, and into the nearest opening. Unlike the caves they had seen, it was a gate made of arched and vaulted stone, carved directly into the mountain itself. The floors were smoothed and polished, though dusty with a sandal thick layer on the floor. The walls were covered in kanji like runes and various works of art, depictions of events long since passed that they could not understand. Yet hardly any of them were battle scenes, much to their confusion.

“Kei, you said these guys were super powerful and stuff, right?” Naruto asked as he looked at a mural depicting a leader before his people.

“Extremely so. Why?” Kei replied, raising an eyebrow.

“Then why are there no battles on these murals?” Naruto asked in confusion, as more and more murals continued to appear, melting and shifting into new forms as they walked along.

“... I love magic…” Kei replied with a smile, sensing what this was.

“How can you say that? You’ve never felt magic before?” Seikoku scoffed at his brother.

“Close your eyes and feel it. It feels just like how grandpa said it would to anyone who can use sensory powers.” Kei explained to his cohorts.

The two closed their eyes, and nearly immediately they were hit by it, as if someone punched them in the chest. Shocked, Naruto and Sasuke closed their own eyes. Despite them only having chakra, even they could feel the overwhelming presence of this thing they called magic.

“It's like… a wind. A gentle fall wind that’s swirling around, weaving itself in and out of everything…” Shinkoku said in awe as he opened his eyes, as if now seeing a whole new world.

“But it’s… chaotic. Like there’s a storm roiling under it, waiting to be unleashed.” Sasuke continued, in awe at what he felt.

“This… this is definitely the right place.” Naruto said with a big smile.

Soon, however, this moment was shattered by a wild cackle. “Except you’re here at the wrong time! AHH-HAAAAAAHAHAHAHAAAA!!!” Came a cackling, feral voice from the shadows, pinning the boys in fear at what was yet to come…

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

Bolded Italicized is used for descriptive actions.

Italicized is used for internal thoughts/flashbacks.

Bold is for emphasis.

“Underlined Bold” is for dialogue/internal thoughts concerning otherworldly beings.

“HAAAAYYYYAAAAHHH!!!” shrieked the creature as it lunged from the shadows with blazing speed.

“Evasive action!” Sasuke called out.

“Evasive what-AGH…!” Seikoku asked only to be kicked in the stomach by the tiny beastie.

“Dodge, you idiot!” his brothers told him in frustration as they dodged aside to avoid an assault from the thing attacking them.

“Ugh… that’s more distracting than helpful…” Seikoku replied as he got up, looking at his brothers as he jumped aside as well.

When it hit the ground between them, they finally got a good look at it. Standing on two crooked legs, it was covered in a moist, mottled skin of grays and yellows. Its limbs, if one could call them such, were long and gangly, yet still with a seeming strength to them. Slinging a large wrench like the kind the boys had seen from workmen on machinery, it was as tall as the creature was. Wide pointed ears stuck out from the sides of its craggy, wrinkled face. Stretching its thin lips into a smile, they saw crooked, sharp fangs inside its maw, as cat-like eyes darted amongst them. Trying to figure out which one it wanted to brain first with its weapon.

“Gremlin…!” Kei hissed in surprise.

“What’s a gremlin?” Naruto asked in confusion.

“Don’t they steal your socks?” Sasuke asked, equally confused.

“No, those are the sock gnomes.” Shinkoku said in response.

“Gremlins are nature spirits that have been altered by human settlement. Their job is to ensure a balance of man and nature by messing with human things.” Kei explained, getting into a defensive stance.

“They sound annoying.” Sasuke grumbled, cracking his knuckles.

“I’ll show you annoying, Duck Butt!” it cackled, cracking its neck before lunging.

“Why does everyone always call me that!?” Sasuke growled before dodging a smash attack from the wrench.

“Okay, to hell with this! Sasuke, roast him!” Naruto called out to his friend.

“Gladly…!” Sasuke growled out before going through hand seals.

Completing his hand seals, Sasuke took a deep breath. Making a ring in front of his mouth with his index finger and thumb, Sasuke unleashed his jutsu. ‘Fire Release: Grand Fireball Jutsu!’ he thought before exhaling the biggest fireball he could.

In an attack more akin to a flamethrower, Sasuke exhaled a fireball multiple times his size at the gremlin. Its eyes widened in surprise as it put up its wrench to block the attack. The fireball collided against the makeshift shield, heating the metal while burning the gremlin’s hands.

“Hot, hot, hot!!!” the gremlin screeched, but it was too late for it to say more.

Dropping its wrench in pain, the beastie was hit by the rest of the fireball and lit ablaze. Shrieking in agony, it dropped to the ground and rolled to put out the flames. Hissing in fury, it glared at the boys with eyes full of hate as it got to its feet, its hair and skin singed by the fire that had engulfed it.

“Stupid, stupid heavenly manthings! I’ll crush your bones!!” it screeched like a maniac before grabbing its heated wrench and rushing at them, swinging it wildly like a blazing, glowing club.

Ducking, Sasuke threw a pair of shuriken at it that the gremlin deflected with its wrench. Eyes wild with agony and fury, the beast rushed at him and swung its wrench down in a hammer blow that Sasuke barely got a kunai up to block. However, the kunai heated up from contact with the red-hot wrench and burned Sasuke’s hand, making him cry out in pain and drop it as he subconsciously jumped back. Blowing on his hands, he barely avoided getting his skull caved in as the wrench slammed into the dirt, leaving a small crack in the ground.

“That’s enough! CHARGE!” Naruto called out as the boys jumped the gremlin, dog piling on it.

“Shut it, or I’ll clip your wings!” it roared back in rage, looking at Naruto as if it saw something that he did not.

“Hold it down!” Kei called out, wrapping his arms around its neck as the others each went for a limb.

Struggling against them, the gremlin tried to get loose as Kei’s arms around it choked it. Having no other options, the gremlin opened its mouth and bit down hard into one of Kei’s arms. Its fanged teeth drew blood from the young Kamishini’s arm as they sunk into his flesh.

“GAAAAGH! You’re gonna bite me, I’ll bite back!!!” Kei screamed in pain and rage before biting down hard enough on its neck to draw blood as well.

“AAHH! You little git!!” it shrieked, thrashing like a recently caught fish in their grasp.

Drawing kunai, the boys began stabbing into the gremlin’s flesh. Trying to weaken it enough to bring it down. Screeching and howling in pain and fury, it shook and writhed as it tried to throw them off. Eventually, the beast collapsed to the ground in exhaustion, panting as it licked its own wounds, glaring at the boys.

“W… we’ve got you now, you little jerk! Now tell us what we wanna know…!” Kei panted as they got off it, sitting on the beast’s back with his foot on its head to pin it down.

“I’ll never talk to you, god killer! Not while there's blood on your people’s hands!” it hissed, spitting at Kei in defiance.

“I didn’t wanna do this… I really didn’t…” Kei sighed before pulling out his kunai and aiming it at the gremlin’s eyeball threateningly. “Talk. Now. Or, maybe, you don’t care about losing an eye or two…”

“You think you can free the big men, huh? You think you can bring them back? He made them flee. He crushed them. And he will crush you.” it snarled, glaring at Kei.

“We’re not out to free anyone, Mr. Gremlin! We’re just looking around because of some weird dreams we’ve been having!” Naruto insisted, wanting to deescalate the situation.

At that moment, its eyes widened and looked at him. “You come for the Chaos Kin? You're mad. You're all mad! You’ll doom us all!!” it shrieked in a panic and thrashed against their restraint.

“The Chaos Kin? There’s one here?” Kei asked in disbelief.

“Kei, you better start explaining.” Sasuke said sternly.

“We all had strange dreams about a boy of light and shadow. About yay high, purple eye on the left, gold eye on the right. I think.” Naruto told the gremlin, using his own height to show that the boy was a bit shorter than himself.

“Bringers of death! Bringers of death, all of you!” it shrieked, thrashing about enough to break one of its arms free.

Moving quickly, Shinkoku pinned down its arm. “Easy, pal! You tell us what we wanna know, we let you go, check things out without freeing anyone, and go on our way back home!” the Kamishini boy offered.

“I believe I can explain. On the condition that you do not kill my more uncivilized compatriot.” a shockingly regal and gentlemanly voice said.

Looking over, they saw many more such gremlins, behind one that easily stood a foot taller than them, and in a more upright, human stance. On its shoulders was a cape of fine fur, its hand clutched a golden scepter with gems of the finest quality, and even a silver crown on its cragged brow. However, this sight produced an unusual effect, as the Kamishini boys bowed. Shinkoku and Seikoku both nudged Naruto and Sasuke with their elbows.

“Bow, you fools!” they whispered hoarsely, as the two remained confused.

“Why?” Naruto and Sasuke asked in disbelief.

“Because that’s a Gremlin King! I never thought I’d see one in person!” Kei whispered back harshly, causing Naruto and Sasuke to bow as well.

The king surveyed them as the injured gremlin sheepishly returned. “Now then. Why did you boys decide to trek through many hundreds of miles through dangerous mountains to come here, Children of Senju Hashirama?” the king asked them inquisitively.

“Hashirama? The First Hokage?” Naruto asked, confused.

“Yes, quite. As the founder of your village of Konoha, you may be considered children of his Will of Fire. Now then, do please explain why you five are all so far from home?” the Gremlin King requested.

“Well…” The five sighed out, beginning their long tale.

An Hour and A Half Later

After the long, long, long explanation, the five were left with a pack of trembling gremlins and their king deep in thought. He did not speak for several minutes, filling the tunnel in deafening silence, until he finally spoke.

“In all of my lifetimes of life and reign, I did not think the day would come when the storm bringer would be awoken.” the king sighed.

“So, Mr. Gremlin King…” Naruto began to say.

“Bartholomew, dear boy. First of my name.” the king answered politely.

“... Right. Mr. Bartholomew, why are you and your friends so afraid of this ‘storm bringer’ being freed? And what does it have to do with our weird dreams?” Naruto asked, still confused.

“Well, dear boy, it is quite simple. We spirits do not have the best track record with the Chaos Kin. Oh, they mean well enough, but they cause nothing but trouble. And this one especially is going to cause some trouble when he is up and moving.” Bartholomew explained simply.

“Does this have anything to do with that ‘Prophecy of the Warriors’ grandpa Seishin mentioned once?” Seikoku asked King Bartholomew.

“You lot really are the descendants of Lord Moto if you’re going about blabbing about such things so willy-nilly.” the king answered in a disapproving manner.

“Prophecy of the what?” Naruto and Sasuke asked, confused.

“We are getting out of hand with things beyond what should be spoken.” Bartholomew said sternly, forcefully steering the conversation. “This is the Day of Awakening.”

“Okay, I’ve heard this name a couple of times now. Just what is a Chaos Kin?” Sasuke asked irritably, trying to help steer the conversation in the right direction.

“If we make it out of this day alive, my boy, you will get that explanation. For now, we must awaken the lords of this mountain and seek their guidance, so that you may get down to that troublesome brat.” Bartholomew explained. “Follow me, children. And do not walk down the middle of the tunnel. That activates a ballista that will split you in twain.”

Nodding, the boys followed King Bartholomew as he showed them the way safely deeper into the mountain. “So, the Mountain of Death…? Is this where… they used to live, right…?” Kei asked as they followed the Gremlin King’s zigzagging path around the traps.

“I am starting to understand why you Kamishini have failed for so long to gain allies. What with the whole ‘cryptic speaking’ and all that. Yes, dear boy. The Seaheartians live here. For this is Seaheart.” the king asserted firmly.

“The Kingdom of Seaheart, alive and well right under our noses in the Land of Fire this whole time…” Shinoku noticed in awe.

“Under your noses? Boys, this is one of the tallest mountains in the world, and a focal point of magic across the entire planet. This mountain in places is more magic than stone. How did you not realize it?” Bartholomew asked, as if it was common knowledge.

“We’d heard the kingdom was wiped out, your majesty. We’d all thought the people of Seaheart scattered to the four winds.” Seikoku explained.

“Five.” One gremlin said behind them.

“Sorry. Sei always forgets about the Center Wind.” Kei apologized for his brother being dumb.

“The Center Wind is the most important, lads. For it yokes the others to one direction. The survivors scattered, but those were merely those that fought. The true heart of Seaheart remains in the mountain. Including its King.” the intelligent gremlin explained, much to the awe of the three Kamishini.

“... What’s Seaheart? And who’s this king?” Naruto asked, dumbfounded.

“Did you explain anything to them, young god killers?” Bartholomew asked.

“No, your majesty. We didn’t think following these dreams would lead us to finding Seaheart alive and well.” Kei explained.

The king shook his head as, with a wave of his hand, he opened a grand stone door. Dust flew as the wind rushed at them. Soon they were hit with light, as if the sun had come for them in the tunnels. Yet, when their eyes adjusted, they saw a sprawling city before them like they had never seen. Stone, metal, and wood were cut and bent into spiraling forms that did not seem possible. The streets ran with dark marble and silver, as it all grew towards a central spire at the center that reached for what looked like forever.

“This, gentlemen, is Seaheart.” the gremlin king said, spreading his arms like a circus ringleader.

“Whoooooa…!!” Naruto and Sasuke uttered in awe.

“Seaheart was the realm of a truly ancient people. One born of gods and might unmatched, save for those even older than them. Their king, the last king mind you, was named Oda Shang the Second. He gave the order to seal his people, save those volunteer defenders, in stasis to wait out the catastrophic battle that threatened them. However, they have not awoken since.” the short king explained as he led them down the main boulevard.

“My great-great-grandpa is named Uzumaki Oda.” Naruto noted, wondering if there was a connection.

“From what I know, your grandpa Oda’s dad named him after the king because he expected a lot from him. Grandpa Seishin told me.” Seikoku noted.

However, as they walked and talked, Kei noticed that the other gremlins began to hunch their backs more and twitch their eyes, looking all around. Kei tried to figure it out as well, however, the sheer concentration of mystical energy made everything blur together. Forced to use his more conventional senses, he began to pick up… voices? Echoed, scratchy, and certainly off, but he swore he heard voices among the abandoned buildings.

“King Bartholomew… who do those voices I’ve been hearing for a bit now belong to…?” Kei nervously asked the gremlin king after several minutes of trying to figure it out.

The king’s ears perked up, and his face grew quite dour. “We must hurry then. Everyone, to me!” the king ordered, and quickly the gremlins began to make a more rapid pace.

As the boys began to move with them, they heard a loud shriek, echoing into their very souls and making their blood run cold. From behind them, rising from the marbled ground, came a flowing set of robes and a pain set of arms. No waist or legs could be seen as this creature reached into its back and pulled out a pair of spectral axes of truly ancient origin, with snarling dragon faces on them. Soon more began to appear, many bearing swords, spears, and other weapons. Some even wielded great chains and anvils in their grasp.

“Keep moving, children! My men will hold them off! Keep following me! We must free the king!” Bartholomew ordered as he began pole vaulting himself along with his scepter to increase his speed.

“You heard him! Run!” Naruto said in fear, following behind the gremlin king.

As they rushed off, the boys got glimpses of the gremlins behind them. Forming a line, they pulled out weapons of their own and began to fight, their weapons arcing with their own spectral power. However, more began to come at them from the sides. Touching various parts of the terrain, Bartholomew’s touch activated kanji runes of an ancient dialect. Soon, traps began to make their presence known. Some spirits were hit by glowing nets, others sucked up by tornados of mystical energy, some even being snapped up by spectral jaws of some great beast. Reaching into the central spire, they finally managed to get a bit of space as they were forced to follow close behind the gremlin king as they navigated what felt like a labyrinth.

“We are close to the service shaft to the stasis vaults. Come quickly, and when you jump, keep your eyes closed until your feet touch the ground.” Bartholomew said as they reached a circular holed groove in the chiseled walls.

Nodding, the boys followed the gremlin king down the groove into the wall. Closing their eyes, they slid down the shaft and followed its route. They felt as if they were falling at a speed that should not be possible, forced to fight every instinct to panic. However, they soon touched down on solid ground as if they had fallen like a feather. Cautiously opening their eyes, they found themselves in a far more simply carved catacomb. The walls were lit by kanji runes, emitting a pale blue light. The air was stale, filled with the dust they kicked up by their entry, and the dust went ankle high into their sandals.

“Right. The royal stasis chamber is not too far from here. On me, children.” Bartholomew said with shocking chipperness as he walked ahead of them.

“Are you sure this king can help, your majesty?” Sasuke asked, both nervous and skeptical as they followed him.

“If he cannot help you, Sasuke, then no one can. And you made this great trek for nothing. The Chaos Kin can’t free himself from his vault. If he could, he would have done so by now.” Bartholomew answered plainly. 

“Is now a good time for you to finally explain what a Chaos Kin is? I wanna know what we’re freeing if that’s what we have to do…” Sasuke replied, looking around as they made their way.

“Oh, of course, dear boy. Where are my manners? Chaos Kin are a wayward creation of a Chaos God. And the most devilish one of them all at that.” the king said in an apologetic tone.

“... Chaos God? You mean those gods that embody everything about something that Kei mentioned once? Things like War, Fate, Wants, and Life and Death? Those Chaos Gods!?” Naruto asked nervously.

“What are you talking about, boy? Those are inherited parts of mortal beings, not Chaos. Chaos is freedom incarnate. Free will, choice, the ability to say what you are to your disapproving parents. Those sorts of things.” the king answered matter of factly.

“Sorry, your majesty. Naruto didn’t really get it when I tried to explain it.” Kei nervously replied.

“It is quite all right. You are all young. However, the Chaos Gods were not formed from a pleasant source, and the one that created them… Well, I will simply call her The Dark Queen. They rankled and rebelled under her desired vision for them, and they staged a break out. Long story short, they ran off merrily into the wilds of the void, from which few had seen them since.” Bartholomew explained.

“And… we’re gonna free something made by one of them, why, exactly…?” Sasuke asked in fear.

“Oh, I was not the one who wanted that. You all came here with that intention after a series of interconnected dreams. Really, it is a question you should be asking yourselves. Quite the conundrum, ey?” the king responded, less asking and more suggesting a plan of action to them.

Naruto gulped. “H-how do we know he won’t try to kill us after we free him?” he asked the gremlin king fearfully.

“Oda? Oh, my dear boy, he is a talker, not a fighter. They called him the Militia King for a reason.” Bartholomew answered him simply. “And here we are children.”

“N-No… I mean this ‘Chaos Kin’ kid…” Naruto replied, looking up at the door to the royal stasis chamber.

“Oh, dear boy, you are indeed mistaken. Chaos Kin are not malicious people. Despite their origins, they are charming folk, even if they are quite accidentally destructive. They mean well. Well, aside from anyone with red eyes, but you don’t have to worry about them visiting the mortal plane.” Bartholomew answered as he tapped at some runes, and soon the stone door slid open.

As the hiss of air leaking out finally subsided, they saw a truly gargantuan room before them. Rows upon rows of immense stone and glass pods lined the hall, crackling and glowing with arcane power of a sort even Kei, Shinkoku, and Seikoku could not comprehend. An eerie humming filled the room the deeper they got, as if the pods around them were alive. Peeking inside, they saw people inside the pods. Sometimes it was a single person, sometimes it was a family. Sometimes they saw something so massive in there, there was no way it could be a person. Yet, at the very end of the massive hall, Bartholomew raised a hand to stop them.

Looking ahead, before them was a pod larger than the rest. The glass was tinted black, preventing them from seeing inside. The runes nearly covered the entire pod, inlaid with gold and silver in an ornate, flowing fashion. Bartholomew inspected the pod carefully, as if looking for a specific rune to tap. However, as soon as he finally did, they all heard the shriek of spirits. Turning around, they saw three of them come through the ceiling right over them.

“Alright, guys. If this is the end, I just want to say one thing.” Seikoku said nervously. “Naruto, I hope you go to hell for dragging us all here to die.”

“Hey!” Naruto snapped indignantly.

As the specters eyed their prize before them, and the kids stared up at their impending doom, none of them noticed the pod open. With a wailing howl, the three spirits charged at them with unholy speed. To everyone's shock, they did not get far, as three blasts of arcane power shot from behind them and impacted the three banshees. Howling in all consuming pain, the blasts tore through the spirits and scattered their essences to the winds.

“Gentlemen. Please bow to the King of Seaheart.” Bartholomew proclaimed with a grand flourish of his arms.

To be Continued…

Chapter Text

Bolded Italicized is used for descriptive actions.

Italicized is used for internal thoughts/flashbacks.

Bold is for emphasis.

“Underlined Bold” is for dialogue/internal thoughts concerning otherworldly beings.

As the concave panel of the pod lifted, letting out a great hissing cloud of smoke, out came a truly massive figure. To the amazement of the boys, the figure was as tall as Seishin, stepping out with a wide sweeping step. He was clad from head to toe in ancient armor that reminded them of armor from samurai movies, though on a far more regal and comprehensive scale. Red and black plates lay over chainmail and red silks, with white and gold pauldrons accentuating the look. Slung over his left gauntlet was a great round shield with many runes of a different kind to the innumerable kinds they had seen already, with unusually a razor's edge to it. Yet, as they looked up, they were forced to take a step back. They were met with sun worn bronze skin, deep sapphire blue eyes, and tufts of spiky crimson hair sticking out from his samurai helmet. All encased in a fearsome dragon mask of red and gold.

“That’s the legendary last king of Seaheart…?” Seikoku asked in awe.

“I literally just said that child. Do keep up with the program.” Bartholomew answered with annoyance, rolling his eyes at the boys’ reaction.

“As cool as this moment is right now, we have bigger concerns here! There are more of those things out there!” Kei reminded the others.

“What do you mean, young ones?” the man before them asked, speaking in an accent that most closely resembled those used in the most ancient, traditional plays.

“With all due respect, your majesty, there are more of those angry spirits right outside this chamber.” Shinkoku replied, trying to remain calm.

“The spirits are angered?” The man asked in surprise, as he began to steady himself on somewhat uncertain feet.

“Understatement of the year. If we don’t do something, King Bartholomew’s people are dead.” Sasuke explained quickly.

The deep blue eyes scanned over them, clearing taking things in as fast as they could, before he squatted down more to their level. Staring directly into them, they gulped as if he was staring into their very souls.

“I am going to need you young ones to calm down and explain things a bit more clearly. I just got out of this pod. Now please tell me, what year is this?” The king asked, in a calm, but demanding tone.

“It’s been a thousand years since the time of the Sage of Six Paths, your kingliness.” Naruto replied awkwardly.

“I see. And of these angry spirits?” he asked, though clearly taking this in stride, as if the information had shaken him.

“We don’t know what they are! They just attacked out of nowhere when we came to wake up the Chaos Kin hidden in this mountain for the Time of Awakening! They really don’t seem to want that Chaos Kin kid to be woken up!” Seikoku explained as quickly and fluently as he could.

The man turned and sternly looked at Seikoku, causing him to shutter. “It is a Nythralian boy, not Chaos Kin. And the only spirits we have here are bound by oaths of guardianship. If the time you have said has passed, then I have an idea of what may have happened. Though I will require greater council to create an effective response on such short notice.” the king explained before standing up straight.

“Wait… what’s the difference between a Chaos Kin and a Nytha… Nytharala…? What you said. And what’s your name, your kingliness?” Naruto asked in confusion.

“We’re sorry for any disrespect, your majesty. Ignore Naruto, for he…. Yeah, he’s dumb.” Shinkoku replied simply and respectfully.

“I am not dumb. I just have a tough time paying attention.” Naruto replied in annoyance.

“With how much of a hard time you have paying attention, you might as well be.” Sasuke replied, rolling his eyes.

“What the heck, duck butt!?” Naruto snapped at his Uchiha friend.

“Stop calling me that! My hair does not look like a duck’s butt!” Sasuke snapped back.

“Boys! Enough with this prattling!” the king boomed, which immediately made them all snap to attention.

“Yes, sir!” All the boys replied nervously.

With a sigh and pinching the bridge of his nose, the king resumed. “To properly re-rail this conversation, I am King Oda Shang the Second. Secondly, while both terms describe the same race, Chaos Kin is a slur given to them by those of the mortal plane. Nythralian is the term they call themselves.” he explained after a deep sigh.

“Ohhhh! So, it’s like calling a Hyūga ‘White Eyes’?” Seikoku asked before realizing something. “Wait… does that mean we’ve been doing a racism this whole time?”

“It was not intentional on your part. Merely that that knowledge has been lost. But now that you know, it is your responsibility to use the more respectful term and teach others of this.” Oda explained simply.

“Hm, it makes no difference to my kind. Chaos Kin, Nythralian. Either way, they destroy things all the same, even if it is not on purpose.” Bartholomew replied with a dismissive grunt. With Sasuke looking at him with suspicion though choosing to stay silent.

“Before we can discuss why you boys want to reach the Nythralian in our vaults, we first must get a handle on this situation. King Bartholomew. If you could assist me in releasing the royal guard in stasis chambers 5-7, you would have my gratitude.” Oda said as he began to walk towards the exit of the chamber.

Bartholomew simply bowed a bit. “With pleasure, sir.” he replied before heading towards the exit as well.

“Come along, boys! We have work to do!” Oda called out to them.

Meanwhile: Hokage’s Office - Konohagakure

With a deep sigh, Kushina rubbed her temples as she looked before the assembled elders of the village. The Uchiha, Kamishini, and her own clan were outraged at the disappearance of the little princelings, and many others were raising questions of how it was even possible. Even with Tsunade and Hiruzen at her sides, it was clear this was going to be a long, long, long meeting.

“Alright order! Order everyone! Panicking isn’t going to get us anywhere! Believe me, I’ve tried!” Kushina yelled.

“One of my sons is missing. I believe that this is an adequate time to panic.” Fugaku replied, trying to maintain his composure.

“I agree with my husband, Kushina! This is the perfect time to panic!” Mikoto replied in a much less composed tone.

“What do we pay our shinobi for if five brats can just walk out our own front gate without anyone noticing?” Tsume asked, crossing her arms in annoyance.

“Logically speaking, we are talking about the son of a man who snuck out of the village to track down Lady Kushina when she was kidnapped and the son of the woman whose skills terrified her entire class.” Shibi replied stoically.

“Flattery will get you nowhere.” Kushina replied playfully.

“I’m hearing a lot of belly achin’, but not a lot a’ solutions being thrown about here, mons.” Reggae Lee shot out, getting various nods from his entourage.

“I think we’re asking the wrong questions here.” Shikaku piped up, a contemplative look on his face.

“Explain, Shikaku.” Kushina ordered, her gaze turning to the clan head.

“Instead of wondering how they left, we should be trying to figure out why. That might help us figure out where they went.” Shikaku pointed out.

“Shikaku-san is right. Have the boys been talking with you all about anything out of the ordinary lately? Have they been acting weirdly at all?” Hiruzen asked, looking at the three sets of parents before him.

“The triplets did tell me about some strange dreams they’ve been having about a family of strange-eyed and strange-furred wolves, a child with heterochromatic eyes, and a mysterious mountain. Does that help at all?” Miko, the daughter of Seishin, spoke up.

“Now that you mention it… Naruto did say something vaguely like that.” Kushina mused.

“My wife told me that Hinata and Enten have been having similar dreams as well. A heterochromatic eyed boy, a mysterious chamber within a mountain, and a baby sealed within some kind of barrier.” Hiashi replied.

“Sasuke told Fugaku, Itachi, and I about a dream like that. The same boy, a mysterious mountain pass with a giant, mysterious mountain within, and the same wolves that the triplets and Naruto mentioned.” Mikoto noted, noticing a pattern.

“Chōji told my wife and I something similar, too. A dream about a purple and golden-eyed boy, a massive mountain, and golem made of stone and energy guarding a mysterious barrier with a baby inside.” Chōza replied, beginning to find the whole situation strange.

This opened the floodgates. The other clan leaders admitted to something similar from their own children. Others beyond that spoke of different dreams, but of a similarly strange nature. Bizarre visions, great beasts rising, horrifying nightmares that awoken them in a great fright. It all was maddening with the sheer quantity and the nature of them. All save for Seishin, whose expression quickly turned to that of concern. Which did not go unnoticed.

“I… think I know where those boys might have gone…” Seishin said ominously.

“... Father. What. Did you do?” Miko asked him suspiciously.

“Miko. Let the man explain.” Kushina ordered.

“Keikoku… may or may not have asked me about any large, mysterious mountains in the Land of Fire. So, I told him… about the Mountain of Death…” Seishin sheepishly replied.

This caused the entire room to gasp in shock. The mere mention of that unholy place filled them with dread, as nearly everyone knew someone lost by that mountain. This had an… outsized effect upon Miko.

“YOU BRAINDEAD OLD CODGER!!! WHAT COULD’VE POSSESSED YOU TO TELL HIM ABOUT THAT PLACE!?!?!?” Miko roared, leaping to grab her father by the neck in an attempt to strangle him only to be held back by the others.

“Miko! I am still your father!” Seishin shot back in offense.

“You’re about to be my late father for this, you batty old bastard!!!!” Miko shrieked in fury, struggling against the bonds by the rest of the clan representatives.

“Honey, please calm your murderous rage long enough for him to explain himself.” Her husband said as he helped restrain her. She turned to look at the plain looking man, with his quiet aura of strength beginning to work its magic in calming her down.

Taking a deep breath, Miko sat back down and directed the foulest, most demonic glare she could at her father. “Talk. NOW.” she told him.

“Kei came to me inquiring about such a mountain, and I explained to him its true nature. Of which I should explain to you all.” Seishin explained, which did not improve his daughter's mood.

“And just what is this ‘true nature’ you told him about, my oh so dear father?” Miko growled out, white-hot flames beginning to come off her.

“Miko. Either you calm yourself down and let the man explain or I will have to ask you to leave.” Kushina sternly said, her own motherly wrath rising to the surface.

Miko took a deep breath to compose herself as the flames dissipated, multiple things in the room left either caught ablaze and needing to be patted down or having melted. Once the flames were dealt with, she turned to her father and nodded for him to continue.

“The Mountain of Death’s true origin is not as some cursed mountain that eats those who enter it. It is the home of our ancient, and senior to us, cousins. The Dragonmen of Seaheart.” Seishin explained. The importance was lost on most of the crowd, save for that of the Kamishini. Of which it had a profound effect on Miko.

“The remnants of Seaheart!? Here!?!? In the Land of Fire!?!?!?” The Kamishini woman called out in disbelief.

“No, my dear. This is not some mere remnant or colony. It is their homeland. The mountain of Seaheart.” Seishin corrected her politely.

“I should have known! No wonder no normal shinobi have ever returned from that mountain alive!!” Miko called out in sheer disbelief.

“Would you mind explaining for the rest of the class Seishin?” Kushina asked with a raised eyebrow.

“For once, I agree with Lady Kushina.” Homura replied, leaning in.

“Yes. Please explain this, Seishin.” Koharu added.

“Our peoples’ come from The Land Closest to the Gods, descended from a common people known as the Heavenly Kin. They were not only extremely blessed by the gods of heaven but even intermarried with them. Our two peoples’ ruling families are descended from that land's royal line. Seaheart from the kings, and ours from the royal guard, made up of princes who would not become king.” Seishin explained, as others began to mutter amongst themselves about this development.

“So, you’re telling me that a people more ancient and powerful than you Kamishini once lived within that mountain…?” Inoichi asked in sheer disbelief, as if unable to comprehend the concept.

“Yes. Our Dragonmen cousins devoted themselves to culture, trade, and artisanry. While we continued our path to what you see today. In those pursuits, they learned to wield the fundamentals of all the realms. What you all would call magic.” Seishin continued, which got many to balk at such an assertion.

“Magic? Like what you Kamishini wield?” Hiashi asked in disbelief.

“We have not wielded true magic in over a thousand years. Divine chakra is merely a synthesis of mystical winds and chakra. They can use the old ways.” Seishin corrected, getting an absolutely stunned look out of the Hyūga lord. A rare sight to behold.

“If these people are so powerful, then why did they disappear for over a thousand years?” Tsunade asked, getting many murmurs in the great throng of people that stuffed the Hokage’s Office.

“That we do not know. We have not had the chance to inspect the mountain while dealing with the seals on the major realm gates for the last thousand years along with anything that managed to slip through the seals.” Seishin explained.

“Seishin. What is in that mountain that could be connected to our boys' dreams that would make them want to go there? And what kind of danger are they in?” Kushina asked sternly, staring at him with the fury of one thousand lionesses.

“There is a possibility that the people of Seaheart may still dwell within the mountain. The boys may be heading there looking for answers to what these visions are telling them and their friends.” Seishin explained to the shock of those present.

“Kakashi!!” Kushina yelled out.

“Reporting for duty, Lady Kushina.” Kakashi replied, appearing behind his village leader like a magician.

Kushina nearly jumped out of her seat in shock. “Quit doing that!” Kushina snapped, placing her hand over her heart.

“With all due respect, Lady Kushina… no.” Kakashi replied simply.

“Get your team and go with the Kamishini to investigate the Mountain of Death for any signs of the boys. Immediately.” Kushina ordered. “Wait… were you here the whole time?”

“... Maybe.” Kakashi replied with a grin beneath his mask.

“Get moving on the double.” Kushina sternly ordered. “And that includes you Seishin.”

Placing a fist over his heart, Seishin bowed. “As you wish, Lady Hokage.” he replied.

“Mobilize every member of your clan that is not out on missions or another important task. This is an emergency! Their lives are on the line!” Kushina roared.

Meanwhile: Within the Mountain of Seaheart

The war of Gremlin and Spirit raged onwards. Despite the diminutive wild spirits’ best efforts, they were being pushed by the sheer numbers of the enraged guardians. However, over the din of this chaotic conflict, a great voice roared over it all.

“Double march! Battle Formation!” The powerful, gruff voice of a veteran warrior bellowed.

From the hallway came men of truly titanic proportions, many reaching a full seven feet. Clad in double layered samurai like plate, their heads were completely enclosed in fearsome Shinigami-masked helmets of darkened metal. Striding forth, each man held a colossal two-handed axe in their hand, gleaming with runes of lightning and death. Their mere presence hummed and crackled with might as the Gremlins stepped aside while the formation crashed in. Great sweeps of the axes hit with the force of a storm surge, crashing against the spirit horde, and cleaving into them. Multiples were cut down with each swath cut, stalling the ever-growing tide of spirits’ momentum.

“You lot can return to your king. We have this fight now.” The towering veteran said, in his hand wielding a massive war scythe.

“Thank you. Thank you.” Many of the Gremlins said as they rushed off in the direction they saw their king run.

“Don’t let up, men! They were once our allies, but now they are our foes!” The veteran roared as he rushed into battle with his men.

As the battle began to rage, it began attracting the bulk of the spirits' attention. This allowed Oda to begin opening other chambers of their occupants and fill them in on the situation. The boys noticed people of many distinct kinds, dresses, and even accents among them as they began to gather supplies and organize themselves. However, they were soon greeted by a man nearly as tall as Oda with similar eyes to him, wearing robes of a martial artist.

“My brother wishes to see you all in the council meeting.” the man said simply after a respectful bow.

Nodding, the boys looked up at him. “Take us to your leader.” Naruto replied firmly.

“... You’ve always wanted to say that haven’t you?” Sasuke asked in a deadpan.

“... Maaaaybe. You can’t prove anything.” Naruto replied, trying to hide the truth.

Following behind him, they saw over a dozen men and women standing around a large table with a display of the mountain before them, simmering in mystical light. While most of them were older, each wore various different clothing likely of different classes and professions. The boys even saw one in purple robes and a pointy hat with a staff. To their confusion however, they did not see any one of them that looked like a shinobi’s or any other martial profession. Yet, at their center was Oda, who put his helmet and mask on the table in front of them. Yet when they looked upon his face… it looked like Naruto’s…

“He kinda looks like Naruto…” Kei said aloud.

“No way. Naruto’s face is way more stupid than that.” Sasuke replied simply.

“The only way it could be more stupid is if it was Sasuke’s face.” Naruto chipped in.

“Say that to my face, Whiskers!” Sasuke snapped quietly at his friend.

“Sure, as long as you don’t spit breadcrumbs at me!” Naruto snapped back just as quietly.

“Guys! Shut up!” Shinkoku snapped, motioning to the council all looking at them.

The two bowed their heads in apology before wisely hushing up. Oda motioned them to come closer as the boys noticed Bartholomew sitting on a corner of the table, scepter slung over his shoulder like a stick.

“Now then, everyone. We all have these five to thank for being reawakened.” Oda said while motioning to them.

“And what reason have they awakened us my lord?” The man in the strange robes and hat asked.

“It appears the Nythralian’s Time of Awakening has come. Which means we are on the cusp of a Dark Age.” Oda explained, getting murmurs from the council as they gave orders to retainers and servants.

“Now when you say, ‘Dark Age’…?” Naruto asked nervously.

“The forces of Darkness, Death, and Destruction bringing the end of all civilization across the realms. However, the boy and nine other chosen warriors will stand at the head of an army to repel this multi-pronged threat. Or bring about the end of all we have built.” Oda explained grimly.

“Wait… ten? I thought there were only four. Did our clan not get the entire prophecy?” Seikoku asked in confusion.

“Only those who have looked into the Winds of the Heavens for centuries can pick out the finer details of the prophecy. Though the more likely explanation is that the original details of the prophecy were lost to your clan long ago.” A woman in a white and gold robes explained, her hood obscuring her face.

The boys nodded as Kei spoke up. “Before we awaken the Nythralian kid, I’d like to get to copy whatever piece of the prophecy you have down there with him. Maybe, if we find enough pieces of it, we can put the whole thing together.” the oldest of the triplets requested.

“So, are we here to eliminate one of these darknesses before it comes to power? The Nythralian? Bartholomew mentioned they destroy anything in their path.” Sasuke questioned.

“The shadow isn’t one of those darknesses, boy. That much is certain. It is the herald that will guide the forces of Order into battle. And it appears you all are to help guide it to its greater purpose.” Oda corrected Sasuke. “For now, however, we have more immediate problems than the child.”

“What kinds of problems?” Shinkoku asked in concern.

“Our absence has angered the spirits greatly, and this deharmonization is so great, that they have become a danger not just to use, but several leagues around the mountain. If they are not stopped en masse, then many more people could die. However, we are not able to reactivate things here fast enough with their sheer numbers.” One of Oda’s council members explained.

“Uh-oh… that’s not good…” Seikoku said fearfully.

“Why can’t you guy’s clan help out with this?” Sasuke asked Seikoku curiously.

“Most types of supernatural chakra aren’t good at dealing with things that you can’t touch. Only certain types of it can.” Kei explained.

“Then it leaves us with only one option.” Oda gravely said, making everyone look at him. “We will have to seal those remaining in stasis, seal off as many areas as we can, take what we can, and activate the mountain's molten core.”

The room fell gravely silent, as not a single member of the council spoke. The boys could tell written on their faces that they agreed with their king but were not happy about it. Even they realized what it meant. Molten core indicated a volcano, which would lead to the destruction of their home. At that revelation, they could not help but feel bad. Oda’s own face was written with that somber and heartbreaking decision, barely able to keep its composure.

“I will make my way to the controls myself and detonate it. It is my duty as king. Everyone else will get supplies and the people out via the minor realm gates.” Oda explained, getting more sorrowful, but understanding looks.

“My lord. The minor realm gates in our absence have fallen into disrepair. Only the one that operates in the mortal realm is working. And in its current condition it would struggle to get us out past the blast radius.” A man in work overalls and clad with a variety of tools explained.

“Get it up and running as best we can. I will not allow my people or any other to fall to the predations of a problem that we caused. Any further questions?” Oda explained, before looking around the crowd.

“We still have to get to Kumori and unseal him if he’s so important.” Naruto noted.

This created a wave of shocked faces from the Seaheartians before them.

“How do you know his name?” Oda asked curiously.

“I… didn’t. I just figured we needed to call him something and you guys keep calling him ‘the shadow,’ so I figured we could name him something based on that…” Naruto noted a bit shyly.

“Um, Naruto. How are we gonna get down there without the spirits eating us?” Seikoku asked his blonde friend nervously.

“I can assign someone to escort you down there. Do not you worry. It is the least I can do for you as thanks for freeing us from our stasis.” Oda explained, though his sorrow filled face was not leaving.

Kei then stepped forward in front of his friends. “Lord Oda. What about your people who are still in stasis? How are you going to retrieve them through a volcano erupting?” Kei asked, his concern filling his voice.

Oda’s cheeks sagged into a frown, as he let out a deep sigh. “I do not know. I fear… I fear that it may not be possible in the future. But this is the only hope we must ensure the safety of others.” Oda replied, his regret filling his voice. “But now, we must get started. Time is of the essence.”

To Be Continued...

Chapter Text

Bolded Italicized is used for descriptive actions.

Italicized is used for internal thoughts/flashbacks.

Bold is for emphasis.

“Underlined Bold” is for dialogue/internal thoughts concerning otherworldly beings.

To the shock of the boys, the men and women of Seaheart sprang into action with shocking speed. Not as physically fast as shinobi could, but it was the decisiveness of action. In minutes, teams of warriors were being organized to fight the spirits. Others were awakening folk and giving them orders. Further on were those collecting supplies to be shipped out of the mountain. Even the Gremlins were assisting, using their powers of sabotage to buy time against their spectral foes.

“What's got you boys staring slack jawed?” Oda asked from behind them.

“Nothing. It’s just… we’ve never seen non-ninja move so… efficiently…” Sasuke commented in disbelief.

“Well, time is short, but that does not mean we do not have time to get what we need. Though I doubt we will get many people awakened in time. We will have to seal them away for now.” Oda explained, a hint of sorrow leaking through his stoic mask.

“Um… After we free the kid down in the vaults, is there any way we can help…?” Naruto asked a bit nervously.

“We will worry about that if you get back with time to spare. Einhar! A moment!” Oda called out.

Swiftly the guard captain walked over, his war scythe holstered over his shoulder. He bowed his head in respect to his king before speaking.

“Yes, my Lord?” He asked in a low tone.

“Who do we have available to escort these boys down to the lowest vaults?” Oda asked curiously.

“All of the guard and awakened personnel are currently accounted for, my lord. It will have to be from the royal clan. If they can be spared, of course.” he answered respectfully.

“Very well. You are dismissed to your duties.” Oda answered with a sigh, and the captain left without another word. “Right, so how well trained are you boys?”

“We defeated a cave leopard, goblins, and a cave troll on our way here.” Kei added helpfully.

“Right, you five are going to die horribly if you are not escorted. Understood.” Oda answered matter of factly.

“Hey!” Seikoku piped up indignantly.

“Your Grandpa said these guys can do things your clan can’t. I think we should trust his words. It is his basement we are gonna go into after all.” Naruto said, putting a hand on Seikoku’s shoulder.

“Fine…” Seikoku grumbled in frustration.

“Let us see, Sato is helping mother out and likely working on securing the shrines. The last time I trusted Takato with anything, I nearly lost half of my spine. That leaves…” Oda muttered to himself as he paced about, before stopping to look at the boys. “I think I might have someone for you boys.”

“Who?” The boys asked hopefully.

“Duan! I have got a job for you, little brother!” Oda called out.

From the shadows behind Oda came a man nearly as tall as he was, yet thinner. Almost too thin, giving him a near gaunt frame. Unlike his brother, instead of armor, he wore long robes of purple, gold, and silver. Yet, as he fully walked into the pale light of the runes above, they saw a man with a similar face to Oda, yet paler and sharper. They could swear they saw his cheekbones near bursting out of his cheeks. Shifting aside his red and black speckled hair blocking one of his eyes, were eyes as near orange as Naruto’s wardrobe.

“You rang?” the man asked, startling Oda.

“Don’t do that!” Oda shrieked in frustration and fright.

“Perhaps you’re just getting deaf in your old age?” Duan asked, revealing strikingly white teeth in a small smile.

“I am the sprightly age of one hundred. That is young for a king. Last time I checked, you are ten years younger than me.” Oda huffed.

The boys then looked at Oda in shock. “You’re how old!?” Naruto asked in disbelief.

“Brother do not scare the poor boys. That is the spirits’ job.” Duan said cheekily.

“How drole. Right. Your assignment is to take these boys down to the lowest vaults, safely, and get the Nythralian.” Oda explained, which got Duan to raise an eyebrow.

“Are you sure that is wise, brother? Handing out that potential time bomb to outsiders?” Duan asked with concern in his voice.

“They have been receiving visions of the prophecy, brother. Of it specifically. And you know that prophecy does not play around with such things.” Oda explained, which caused Duan to look at them. As if observing them.

“Do your parents know you're out this far on such a dangerous quest?” Duan asked them.

“... If we say yes, will you not tell them…?” Shinkoku asked hopefully.

“That depends…” Duan answered cryptically. 

“What does that mean…?” Kei asked worriedly.

“Right. Come along children. Time is precious.” Duan said, soon walking off down the hall. “Do keep up now!”

“What does that mean!?” Naruto called after him in concern as the boys followed behind the pale royal.

As Oda watched them leave, he took a deep breath. Then he began to somberly make his own journey. To ensure that none of these spirits could escape.

Meanwhile: In the Shrine District

Einhar marched with a formation of royal guards behind him. Their weapons crackling with latent power. Around them were the many shrines in a procession down the main street. The normally serene and holy atmosphere was replaced with one of stillness and apprehension. As they approached one of the major shrines, they saw another group of Seaheartians forming. Most of the men were clad in simple scale armor, with some even wearing armor made from the hide of reptiles. Each had at their side an axe and a short sword, and, in their hands, they held a large crossbow, loading a box of bolts into it.

“Einhar. So glad you could arrive.” A calm, masculine voice said.

The helmeted head of the captain turned to see another royal, wearing robes of that of a priest or a monk. Simple wooden sandals adorned his feet as a ring sword was held by a simple sash over his waist. His head was shaved perfectly bald, as his face again looked similar to Oda’s, though with a more pronounced jawline and shimmering green eyes. Einhar stopped the formation, and they all stood at attention.

“Lord Sato. I did not expect to see you here.” He said respectfully.

“We would be farther along, but a nest of spirits has holed up in the temple to Sarutahiko Ōkami. I will require your men’s assistance in the matter.” Sato explained with a soothing, regal toned voice.

“Of course, my lord. Form up! Battleline formation!” Einhar barked out, which created a howling hiss from the shrine.

The crossbowmen stood aside as their heavily armored comrades marched forward, axes at the ready. As if on cue, the spirits began to shimmer into existence in shocking numbers, surrounding the shrine in a cloud of ancient wrath. As they did this, the crossbowmen marked runes into the bolts, knowing it would be futile otherwise. As the Seaheartians formed their lines, the spirits responded in kind. Several large statues, some of great guardian lions, some of men, soon began to glow with mystical might.

“Aim!” Sato ordered, and the crossbows were soon lifted.

Soon the stone began to creak, lurching and groaning to life. Soon with a fluidity that no stone should have, the statues began to move. With a hand gesture from Sato, the men fired. Streaking in blinding blue light, the bolts struck the stone golems, pin cushioning them. Despite the bolts sticking from them like a pin cushion and forming cracks, the golems returned the favor with a charge. Barreling in like an avalanche, the royal guards were forced to charge as well. All as the spirits began to scream in, howling for vengeance.

As the forces clashed, some of the golems were cut down by swinging axes, their lightning-backed edges cleaving through the stone. However, on other parts of the line, the golems smashed the line. Their sheer bulk sent the towering men flying, while others were crushed under foot. Their armor did little to stop the powerful blows of living stone. Spirits danced and swarmed, forcing the crossbowmen to divert their attention to thinning the horde. Einhar, with each swing, cut down swathes of spirits.

Seeing no other choice, Sato drew his blade, and tapping a rune near the hilt, it shone in a bright white light on the blade edge. In a bounding leap, he closed the gap, taking a statue of a martial artist's arm off in a single blow. He was barely able to parry the return strike from that same statue. With a ferocious jump, he leapt above the statue, before driving the sword through its head, and down its back. The resulting cut tore the statue apart, causing the magic to leak from it in a multi-colored haze.

“I hope Oda’s having a better time of it.” Sato muttered to himself, as he looked around at the mess before him.

Meanwhile: With Oda

Oda sighed as he trudged his way up. With most of the main power out, so helpfully found out from attempting every lift he could think of, he had to get to the thermal controls the old-fashioned way.

“What is the best way to get up there without a lift… Gods, I hate using stairs…” Oda grumbled to himself. “I guess I will have to go through the realm gate chamber. Which is going to be clogged with people because I ordered it to be used to get everything out quicker. Well done, Oda, you idiot…”

With a heavy sigh at making his own damn journey harder, he followed the signs towards it. The hallways began to converge into a far larger and wider one. The runes that gave light equally got wider and brighter, etched with far bolder runes than others. Around him were runners and carts rushing back and forth with everything they could move and carry. Throngs of people, entire families, rushed as best they could in their confusion and fear. It was wave after wave of human tragedy that he ordered.

“Report on collecting food supplies!?” A young, barking voice roared out to some of the runners.

“We are backlogged, sir! There are too many people!” Another voice called out.

“Status on getting the realm gate up, people! We have a traffic jam!!” the barking voice snapped out towards a different direction.

“Oh lords, Takato…” Oda sighed under his breath as he pinched the bridge of his nose.

“Hurry it up, people! We do not have much time!” the barking voice snapped out.

“The realm roads must have changed! They are not responding like normal!” one of the workers called back.

“Do not use the realm road! Punch it to one of the nearby plateaus!” Oda called out as he entered the chamber.

Everyone, be they workers or civilians, stopped and looked at him. Hundreds, no, thousands, of eyes stared at their king. The barking voice, a teen that barely stood up to Oda’s chest, looked down on him from a stack of boxes roped together. Messy black and red hair, with ocean blue eyes, stared back at him with the same familial face so many in the royal clan had. Oda then looked up at him.

“Well, Takato. At least you did not blow anything up this time. Yet.” Oda said with a sigh.

“Do not be so pessimistic, brother. How can I blow up anything like this?” the now identified Takato asked.

“Do I need to remind you of the last time you got mother a cake for her birthday?” Oda asked, raising an eyebrow.

“You set the dining hall on fire one time trying to flambé a cake and never hear the end of it…” Takato grumbled.

“You're lucky the most lasting damage was searing father’s eyebrows off.” Oda replied.

“They never quite grew back the same, did they?” Takato asked nostalgically.

“Alright. Give me a picture of what is going on, little brother.” Oda answered with a sigh, rubbing his temples at the mess around him.

“Right. The realm roads and realm gates are backed up beyond capacity causing a traffic jam, the supplies are forty-five percent evacuated while the people are a meager few hundred evacuated at the moment, and there is no end in sight. Oh, and the golems are revolting.” Takato replied, looking down at a strange device that displayed an energy board with a list of the situation at hand.

Oda let out a deep sigh at hearing this. The room was colossal inside, easily the size of a sports arena of other human kingdoms, if not bigger. Aside from the backlog of people and goods, there were various arcane circles and postings off to the side. Men and women frantically worked in those areas to get one of a series of massive archways to work. The archways were uniform, towering colossus of stone, yet strikingly sleek and elegant in their carvings. In total, eight were made in a circle, with pathways in between them that could march entire formations of people. The one before them that was working shimmered in multi-color light as Oda saw the reflection of a nearby mountain plateau in its visage.

“Any word from the colonies and outposts?” Oda asked his brother.

“Strangely no. That is the worrying part.” Takato sighed as he reviewed the situation.

“It appears a thousand years haven’t been kind to our kin then.” Oda replied mournfully.

“Your orders, brother?” Takato asked, looking up at his older brother.

“In addition to what you are doing? Try to get supplies for the creation of an outpost. Once we find a new place to settle, we will have to set up shop quickly before planning our next move.” Oda ordered simply.

“Yes sir, brother!” Takato replied with a salute before turning to the workers. “Alright, people! You heard our king! Hop to it!”

“And make sure the stasis chambers are properly sealed. We are going to be trapping this place in magma remember.” Oda explained.

Takato nodded in confirmation. “I won’t let you down, Oda.” he replied before going back to barking orders. “Move, people! We have lives to save, supplies to move, and an outpost to set up!”

“I know you wouldn’t brother.” Oda answered his brother with a nod, before continuing his journey up a stairwell.

Meanwhile: In the Heart of the Mountain

“How deep does this place go?” Sasuke asked, looking around at the ever-unchanging descending hallways.

“Below ground level? In total about fifty-six levels. Though there are only thirty levels of vaults.” Duan answered him as he led the way.

“A-And which one is this Nytha-whatever kid in again?” Naruto asked a bit nervously.

“That would be the 30th one. We call it the black vault. Due to the use of nullstone in its construction.” Duan explained.

“Nullstone? Wow, you guys didn’t take any chances, did you?” Kei asked, surprised.

“What’s nullstone?” Sasuke and Naruto asked simultaneously.

“It is a kind of stone mined from the bedrock of realms that absorbs mystical energy of all types. Aside from that, it is also magically inert. Meaning anything locked in an individual vault cannot use its mystical abilities to break out due to it being weakened.” Duan explained, though not turning back to look at them.

“Does that mean even chakra won’t work to get through it?” Naruto asked, his hand raised for his question.

“Chakra isn’t magic, Naruto. How many times do I have to tell you that?” Kei groaned.

“But you said that chakra comes from nature energy that’s been dil… dilluted…?” Naruto asked, confused.

“That’s ‘diluted,’ you dumbass.” Sasuke corrected his friend, pinching the bridge of his nose.

“Thanks, Duck Butt.” Naruto replied with a small smile as Sasuke grumbled something about ‘dumb, sassy shy blondes’.

“Nature energy is the raw power of the realm and planet itself, the lifeblood of it. It’s mystical energy in its most pure form. Chakra is so far diluted from it that it’s practically something completely different.” Kei explained in frustration, as if he had had to say this many times before.

As those three discussed this, Shinkoku kept close to Duan for safety. He accidentally, however, tripped on one of the steps, nearly falling flat on his face. To his shock, Duan caught him. So fast he swore he did not even see him move.

“Careful, little one.” Duan said as he made sure his grip was not too tight.

“Uh… thanks. Sorry.” Shinkoku replied, caught off guard as he stood back up.

As he dusted himself off a bit, his hand went over where Duan had touched. Immediately his spine got an intense shiver as it was ice cold. He stopped for a moment as he looked up at Duan, who simply continued his way leading them. This made Shinkoku stop his brothers Seikoku and Kei.

“Feel here.” Shinkoku said as Naruto and Sasuke walked past them, pointing to his chest.

The two other members of the Triplet Tornadoes placed their hands on his chest to feel. To their surprise, the spot was as cold as ice. As if the warmth of life itself had been temporarily drained from the spot with a touch.

“That’s… very weird…” Kei replied in confusion.

“Not only that, but did you see how fast he caught me?” Shinkoku asked.

“That was faster than mom and dad could move without using a divine chakra-enhanced Body Flicker to increase their speed.” Seikoku noted suspiciously.

“Any explanations, or are we just going to galk like schoolgirls?” Kei asked the two.

“I dunno… I feel like we can trust him for now. The king does, at least…” Shinkoku noted, looking at Duan’s back.

“Why do I feel like we are forgetting something Grandpa’s taught us again?” Seikoku asked as the three began to walk.

“When don’t we? We’re six.” Kei replied simply as the three kept walking.

“Don’t dawdle, you three!” Duan called them from down the stairs.

Swiftly, the three rushed to catch up. They found Duan, Naruto, and Sasuke walking through a large, half cylinder chamber. Unlike many of the other hallways and areas they have been in, it was vast. Each step they made echoed like a thunderhead down the long passage.

“This is the final step before the express route to the black vault. We use this to transport copious quantities of items into the various vaults.” Duan explained simply.

“D-Do we even wanna know what else is in there…?” Naruto asked nervously.

“Oh, the usual things really, young one. Cursed magic items, tomes of forbidden knowledge, eldritch abominations.” Duan explained in a shockingly casual tone.

“... Is it too late to turn back and act like none of this ever happened?” Sasuke asked fearfully.

“Sasuke, we can't turn back now! We trekked halfway across the Land of Fire, nearly eaten by multiple monsters, killed by spirits, befriended gremlins, connected with an ancient civilization, and are literally right outside our end goal. And now you want to turn back like a coward?” Naruto asked, flabbergasted.

“Well, excuse me for not wanting to risk dying for the sixth time on this trip, Fox Face.” Sasuke shot back.

“Well, maybe you can run home and tell big brother Itachi about how much of a coward you are then, Duck Butt! Or maybe I should call you ‘Chicken Butt’ from now on!” Naruto snapped out at him, his face turning from shock to disgust at his friend’s sudden about face.

“You wanna go, Whiskers!?” Sasuke snapped out with a glare, grabbing Naruto by the front of his shirt.

“Bawk, bawk, Mother Clucker!” Naruto shot back with a glare, grabbing Sasuke by the front of his shirt right back.

“Can you two morons not fight right now!?” Kei yelled in frustration.

“Not really, no.” The two replied in unison, looking at their friend.

“Sei, Shin. Commence idiocy correction protocols.” Kei sighed.

With that, Shinkoku and Seikoku pulled out comically large, folded paper fans and smacked the two arguing idiots on the backs of their heads. Before Duan could get the boys to quiet down, they all heard a rumbling, followed by shrieks. Turning their heads in unison, interposing between them and the way into the vault, came a line of golems back up by spirits. These golems, in particular, were nearly as tall as the chamber, with anvil-sized hands sculpted to look like ancient human warriors. The spirits fluttered and flew between and around their massive frames.

“Boys. Get behind me and stay there.” Duan sternly ordered as he walked forward to face them.

The boys did not make any attempt to argue as the royal walked forward. Cracking his neck, he stared at those before him. As if given them wordlessly one final chance to back down. A surge of screaming spirits answered that question as they rushed him.

Clenching his fingers into a claw shape, he crossed his hands in front of his face before throwing them out to his sides. In that instant, his fingernails elongated into long, bestial claws, each the length of a short blade, much to the shock of the boys. He began to glow with potent mystical energies as runes across his body lit him up like a holiday tree. As the air began to grow cold around him, Duan disappeared in a blur of motion, faster than any of the boys could track.

Soon, one of the golems was sliced to pieces, shredded like paper in a woodchipper. Then another, and another. One by one, the golems were ripped apart by claws sharper than the blade of any shinobi. All while the boys tried desperately to track Duan’s movements. While they could not see any signs of movement from him, they could hear him and see the results of his movements. The ground, walls, and ceiling exploded in shards of stone wherever Duan touched down, barely a blur of motion seen as he moved.

Soon, the spirits shrieked in agony as they too began to get cut to pieces. However, their screams grew louder as they found themselves unable to reform. Whatever energy was coming off Duan was one they could not regenerate from. Shrieking in agony as they were sliced to pieces, the spirits tried to flee only to be hacked into bits by a clawed whirlwind and dissipate into nothingness. Soon, every last golem and spirit was gone. Nothing left of their existence, but bits of stone carved up like vegetables for cooking and cold spots where the spirits once lingered.

Then in a flash, Duan stopped moving. His claws morphed back into his hands as the boys looked into glowing blood red eyes. His eyes transfixed them, sending a wave of primal fear rushing into them. All of this, however, made Kei’s eyes widen even more, as but one word was now on his lips.

“V-V… Vampire…” the Kamishini boy uttered in fear.

“What?” Sasuke asked, turning to look at Kei.

“Vampire!” Kei shouted in terror, standing firmly in front of his brothers in a fearful but protective stance.

“You always said stuff like that was a myth?” Naruto asked.

Duan’s face softened as his eyes turned to his normal orange. “No, young Naruto. They are very real. And your friend is right.” Duan answered with a deep sigh.

Naruto and Sasuke looked at him in shock. “You’re a vampire? But you seem so…” Naruto began to say.

“Nice?” Sasuke asked, finishing for his friend.

“Yeah. Aren’t vampires supposed to be brutal, blood-crazed monsters?” Naruto asked, trying not to be rude.

“It is, like everything, a choice. It is not an easy one, but it is a choice.” Duan answered him.

The Kamishini triplets still looked wary of him, but Kei took a step forward. “Vampire or not… you did save our lives. So, thank you.” Kei said, bowing a bit.

“Forgive my brother for not telling you. We all know how you Kamishini are with such matters.” Duan said, a clear look of regret on his face.

Shinkoku shook his head. “No… we get it. Sorry if we offended you.” he replied, bowing his head to be polite to the man who protected them.

“You need not worry about that. I’ve dealt with far worse in the thirty years I’ve had it. A good chunk of my runes are there to help curb the beast inside that hungers for blood. There is nothing to fear.” Duan answered, waving off his concern.

The Kamishini triplets sighed in relief. “That’s good to hear…” Seikoku said in response.

“Can I become one?” Sasuke asked.

“No.” Duan and the triplets all said simultaneously.

“Why do you want to be anyways, Sasuke?” Naruto asked in confusion.

“With power like that, I could protect my friends and finally make Father acknowledge me.” Sasuke replied with a smile.

“Vampirism is a curse boy. You would not be able to eat. You do not feel your heartbeat. You could not go out in the sun. And you would constantly wrangle with an endless hunger, a beast inside you that would want only blood. It is not worth giving up your humanity, even if it is to protect something. A wolf cannot guard sheep.” Duan explained to him sternly, speaking from experience.

“... Fair enough…” Sasuke replied, looking down in thought.

“Let's get inside the vault quickly before others show up.” Duan explained, making a hand motion to move.

With a nod, the boys rushed after him. They quickly began to descend down the last staircase. It was dark, for there were no runes in the pitch-black stone. In all their minds and hearts, there truly was no going back now…

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

Bolded Italicized is used for descriptive actions.

Italicized is used for internal thoughts/flashbacks.

Bold is for emphasis.

“Underlined Bold” is for dialogue/internal thoughts concerning otherworldly beings.

“Can anyone see anything? Because I can’t.” Naruto asked as the light was snuffed from the tunnel as they descended into the depths.

“No. I can’t see my hand in front of my own eyes.” Kei replied, waving his own hand in front of his face to see if he could see it.

“Just be careful and keep walking children. We are nearly there.” Duan said from the front of the pack.

“How can you tell? Vampire night vision?” Shinkoku asked, raising an eyebrow.

“Vampires have many abilities, and different… I guess strains of vampires… tend to develop different powers at different rates. And tend to specialize in different abilities.” Duan explained cryptically.

“I remember grandpa Seishin telling us that.” Seikoku replied with a thoughtful tone.

“No, you didn’t.” Kei chipped in with a roll of his eyes.

“Hey! I remember stuff grandpa says!” Seikoku replied with a glare in the direction of his older triplet’s voice.

“What's the name of the vampire power that does that then?” Kei asked, challenging his brother.

“Eyes of the Beast, duh!” Seikoku replied as if it was obvious.

“How has your mother not killed you three?” Sasuke groaned out in annoyance.

“Because we’re too adorable!” Seikoku replied proudly, making a cute face in the darkness.

“... I want to punch you in the face right now. I don’t know if I’d stop…” Sasuke replied in frustrated annoyance.

“Focus, guys. We're almost there!” Naruto snapped at the lot.

Duan soon stopped in front of them, causing a cascade of bumping and fumbling as the boys ran into him. Placing a hand on a black stone wall in front of him, it soon began to open. Sliding apart came two halves of stone, before a dull light finally shone through. As they all walked in, dull light runes showed them a wide hall going in both directions, seemingly forever. Yet, unlike other vaults, each door was intensely fortified with runes, and immensely thick and heavy. As if to be designed to take any blow that could be thrown at it. Combined with the ebony stone on everything and the eerie stillness that crept through the halls… It was deeply unsettling.

“Th… this place is creepy…” Naruto nervously said.

“Mild understatement, boy. The Black Vault is not a place for the faint of heart. Follow closely now. And, if you value your sanity, do not look in any of the rooms.” Duan ordered as he kept walking.

“What’s in the rooms…?” Sasuke asked, trying to hide his own nervousness as they followed him.

“Depends on the room. Imprisoned demons, eldritch abominations, cursed items by the armory load. It all depends on the room. Nothing any person should ever have to deal with.” Duan explained mournfully.

“... Nobody. Touch. Anything…” Sasuke replied, a bit fearfully.

“Hey, Kei. Did gramps say anything about these vaults?” Seikoku asked his older brother.

“Only that none of them should ever be opened unless it's absolutely necessary…” Kei replied, looking over a rune.

“Then why are we here!?” Sasuke snapped at the two.

“To figure out what our weird dreams were about and what the heck this ‘Time of Awakening’ is supposed to be. Keep up, Duck Butt.” Naruto told his friend.

“You can keep up with my foot going up your…” Sasuke grumbled before getting cut off by Duan.

“We have arrived.” Duan said as he placed his hand over a rune, which caused it to glow a pale blue.

As the heavy doors slid open, to their surprise, the only thing that was really inside it was a large cube of glowing mystical energy, a mix of golden yellow and royal purple, in the center. As they all walked in, the kids noticed many swirling and glowing markings of a vastly different origin. As if they were alien in nature and not made by man. Duan then stopped in front of the cube and ushered them over.

“And here you are. Take it at your leisure.” Duan explained, his hand motioning to it.

The five boys began looking over everything as Kei noticed something on the wall, illuminated by the light of a cube. “What’re those markings…?” he asked, going over to investigate.

“I am not certain. That is never a language I had any luck in understanding.” Duan replied, a hint of regret at his own failings coming out.

Looking over them carefully, Kei recognized something from his studies. “Wait… some of these are ancient hieroglyphics. And that right there. That’s the language of the Oni.” he said, pointing to a spot on the wall with strange kanji, older looking than any Naruto and Sasuke has ever seen and crudely carved into the wall.

“Oni? Odd for the bringers of chaos to use Oni script. Last time I checked, they were not exactly on good terms with them.” Duan explained as he began to pull from his robe pockets a scroll and an ink pen, alongside a strange scroll. “Use this Scroll of Comprehend Languages, boy. I will transcribe it for you. Have you ever used a spell scroll before?”

“Only a couple of times, but I think I can pick it up quickly. I snuck a couple of minor ones from the clan’s vaults.” Kei replied, accepting the spell scroll.

“Then go for it. Proceed when ready.” Duan said, readying himself.

Kei unfurled the scroll and read it aloud. “Lore of the Arcane: Comprehend Languages!!” he firmly said, and, with that, the writing lit up, before the scroll was consumed in arcane fire.

“I… I can read it now! I can even tell what races the languages are from! That right there, that’s the Language of the Fishmen!” Kei called out in amazement, pointing to the first part of the script that seemed to be written in a language that looked like it was carved into the stone using jets of water.

“... So, you can just do that? Why does no one else get to use these scrolls?” Sasuke asked, stunned at what he just witnessed.

“They’re one use only. Now hush up and let those two translate.” Shinkoku explained.

“‘In the age of convergence when sun, moon, and stars align...’” Kei read off carefully.

“Isn’t that where someone's butt crack is?” Seikoku asked, interrupting only to get smacked upside the back of his head by Sasuke and Shinkoku. “Ow…!”

Turning his gaze, Kei was surprised. “This is in the Language of the Majin. It says ‘A child of shadow and light shall arise, bearing a power divine...’” he read off in disbelief.

“This would indicate an exceptional individual. Even among my kind, such divine power is exceedingly rare. Let alone for the wayward starfolk.” Duan said musingly as he diligently wrote it down at superhuman speed.

Kei nodded at that. “Yeah. But that raises the question of who is this ‘child of shadow and light’ mentioned in that stanza...?” he noted in confusion.

“Hey Naruto. I think we found your long-lost cousin in mischief.” Seikoku said jokingly.

“Hey!” Naruto snapped back before being shushed by Kei.

“Next is the Language of the Giants. It says ‘Nine paths they must walk, nine truths they must know... Only through uniting nine shall their true strength grow...’” Kei read off carefully.

“Was this written by a seer or a poet? I’ve always hated that about prophecies. They never got to the damn point.” Duan grumbled as he wrote it down.

“What are these ‘nine paths’ it mentions? Could it be the Nine Races who fought defeated the God of Chaos...?” Seikoku asked, accidentally leaning against the cube with his hand placed against it.

As soon as it was touched, the cube turned a bright, vibrant godly red, changing the color in but an instant. Sasuke noticed this first and turned on his heels to face Seikoku with a stern look. “Sei! What are you doing!? I said not to touch anything!” Sasuke snapped angrily.

“Sorry! It was an accident!” Seikoku called out apologetically.

“No, that’s good! I can read it better now! Don’t touch anything more until we finish!” Kei told the others.

“What does it say?” Naruto asked curiously.

Kei looked closely at the next line of the prophecy. “It says…” Kei began to say before the sound of shifting stone interrupted him.

The floor began to rattle and shift, though disturbingly in an organic way. Blocks of stone and other pieces practically grew out of the ground, with strange alien glowing symbols. Some pieces were not even fully attached, as if levitating from some unknown force. But what they could make up as they backed away were arms, legs, and a body before a glowing rock moved forward to imitate a head. Duan instantly got in front of them defensively.

“It is the room's guardian! Get away children! I will handle this!” Duan ordered firmly as he grew out his claws.

“What about you?!” Naruto yelled back.

“Do not worry about me! Get to safety!” Duan roared, as his eyes turned full red, and his fangs grew more pronounced.

“Nobody said anything about a Golem!” Seikoku called out in a panic as the boys spread out.

Lumbering forth, the Golem began making its way towards Seikoku. Panicking, Seikoku created a small sphere of white-hot flames that he threw at the stone guardian. The sphere of flames exploded on contact with the Golem only for it to continue lumbering towards him, not even slowed down by the attack. Seeing this, Duan dashed forward as the Golem raised its stone fist to slam it down onto Seikoku. Appearing in front of the Kamishini boy, the vampiric Dragon-Man punched back as the stone fist came crashing down, barely stopping it in place.

“They sure knew how to make… one tough golem…!” Duan grunted a bit, straining against the force exerted by the rock monster.

“Get lost!” Seikoku yelled out in a panic, launching another white-hot fireball right into the stone guardian’s face, making it stumble back a bit.

“Do not draw its attention to you, boy! I will handle it! Get to safety!” Duan ordered, sternly looking at Seikoku.

Looking at him in concern, Seikoku looked up fearfully as the smoke began to clear from the Golem’s face. Though one of its eyes had been destroyed, the other glowed red with fury. His attack had barely damaged it. Instead, he only infuriated it. Looking at Duan, the boy nodded to the vampire and backed up to let him fight.

Taking a deep breath, Duan extended his claws and brought them up in front of him, prepared for battle. Dashing forward, he slashed across the Golem’s body as it tried to crush him by smashing the ground where he stood. Barely dodging by jumping back, Duan grit his teeth. ‘This thing is faster than it looks…!’ he thought. 

Jumping up onto its fist, Duan ran up its arm, cutting and slashing with his claws as he went, trying to cut it into pieces. However, wherever he cut it, the stone knitted back together using rock from the ground. Cursing, Duan leapt up and kicked it in its face as its eye slowly repaired. This its head back, making the rock monster stumble. However, that was all it accomplished.

“I’m starting to see why Oda hates fighting so much…” Duan muttered under his breath in frustration, as the golem lurched onto the attack.

Bringing its stone fist down like a giant hammer, the rock guardian tried to smash Duan like an insect. Barely jumping aside to dodge, the vampire saw the dark stone-ground crack on contact as a trench was dug into the ground from the impact. However, before he could recover, the stone arm swept across the battlefield right towards Duan while kicking up rubble as it swept across. Cursing, Duan tried to jump only to be smashed aside by the sweep of the arm as it swung like a great, flying pillar.

‘What does it take to hurt this thing!?’ Duan thought as he was sent flying, trying to keep up the assault. ‘I don’t know if I can beat this thing by myself…’

It was at that moment that Duan crashed into the wall, cracking it on impact. Crying out in pain, he tried to recover as the golem continued making its way towards Seikoku. Noticing it was targeting Seikoku, who was the one who touched the cube, Sasuke got an idea. An insane idea worthy of his blonde Uzumaki friend, but an idea, nonetheless.

“Out of the way, Kei! I need to get to the cube!” Sasuke yelled as he rushed over to the floating relic.

“I’ll try to distract that thing so you can get to the cube! Whatever you’re gonna do, do it!” Kei called out, charging black-colored lightning between his hands.

Sasuke rushed over as Kei unleashed his divine lightning, firmly getting the golem’s attention as the black colored levin bolt slammed into it. He ran up to the cube and looked at it. Yet as he did, he noticed he could start to see inside the cube. He lurched his head away from it after a moment of looking.

“There’s… there’s something inside this thing! This golem is protecting whatever’s inside the cube!” Sasuke called out.

“No shit! Now hurry up!” Kei called out, launching another lightning blast at the golem.

“I’ll help Sasuke!” Naruto yelled, rushing over to him, forced to slide under a sweeping arm of the golem to do so.

As soon as Naruto reached him, Sasuke looked at his blonde Uzumaki friend. “Naruto! We need to touch the cube to get that thing’s attention! I’ll do it first to get its eyes on me and lead it away, then you touch it!” the Uchiha boy told his friend.

“Why should you do it first!?” Naruto yelled.

“Because I’m faster than you, so I’ll take longer for it to try to kill!” Sasuke replied as if it was obvious.

“If you’re so much faster, then do it then!” Naruto shot back.

“Fine!” Sasuke shot back before touching the cube in frustration.

Touching the cube, Sasuke found that it felt strangely warm to the touch. Not harshly so, but like the warm glow of a campfire. Yet, as he touched it, the glowing lines went to a dark blackish purple. The change in color was matched by the golem, which soon turned to “look” at Sasuke. Seeing that time was of the essence, Sasuke rushed off to distract. Seeing that, Naruto looked down at the cube. If this was going to save his friends, then it better start.

Naruto then touched it, and again it changed color to that of a deep, heavenly sky blue, stronger than the pale blue of the lights. Again, this caused the Golem to change, but as it looked at him, something else happened. The cube rumbled and shook, expanding out to display a room. A room that looked like a nursery, filled with toys and other knick knacks for incredibly young children. Yet the strangest of all was an altar, made of stone cut in a very strange way, with a baby clad in a black cloth diaper on it. As soon as the room appeared, it disappeared with the cube, leaving the baby now in Naruto’s arms.

“Um…” Naruto muttered in shock at what was in his arms.

The baby was not abnormally large or small, with fair skin and two white bud-like horns on his forehead. As it began to open its eyes and let out a little yawn, Naruto noticed it had two different eyes. One was yellow, one was purple. This matched its hair, as half was white as snow, and the other black as night neatly down the middle. The baby then looked up at Naruto.

“Goo…” came out from the baby's mouth, as it cocked its head to the side, not sure what exactly was holding him.

“Um… hi…?” Naruto replied in confusion.

“... That’s it!? That’s the Nythralian!?” Sasuke called in outraged disbelief. “We almost died multiple times for a fucking baby!?”

“Hey! Language!” Naruto shot back, covering the baby's ears.

“Goo!” the baby called out indignantly while giving Sasuke a dirty look, as if it could understand the Uchiha boy.

“Did that baby just insult me!?” Sasuke yelled as he dodged the golem’s smash attempt at him.

“... Sasuke. It’s a baby.” Shinkoku pointed out.

“Gah.” the baby said with a smug little smile.

“We’re going to die! Please do something!” Naruto called out to the baby before tickling its tummy to try to get it to do something.

The baby looked up at Naruto, as if to wordlessly say that he chose what was about to happen. Right before the baby started to cry loudly. As it did, a strange, dark purple energy began to come off it. The energy expanded and glowed as it came off the baby before sparking and lashing out in all directions. The others screamed in fear as they ducked under the bolts of strange energy.

“Naruto! What did you do!?” Sasuke called out in fear as he dodged the bolts of energy.

“... I didn’t do it. The baby did.” Naruto said with equal levels of fear. “Hey little one… we cool?”

As he said this, the golem turned to look at the crying infant. Meanwhile, the infant tearfully glared up at Naruto before screaming, beginning to levitate. Then a massive bolt of energy shot from the baby in Naruto’s direction. Sliding down underneath it, Naruto ended up under the baby as the bolt of energy hit the golem. To the surprise of all present, the levin bolt of energy shattered the golem like glass, blowing it into shards of molten stone.

“Guys. We need to never make this baby cry again.” Naruto squeamishly said, as he tried desperately to calm the baby.

“Try rubbing its head… Some babies like that instead of tummy tickles…” Duan groaned out as he slowly stood up. With his back very clearly still in immense pain.

Gulping nervously, Naruto jumped up and began to gently pat the baby on the head. Though the baby screamed less loudly, and the energy bolts became less violent, it did not help much.

“It didn’t work!” Naruto called out in a panic, ducking under a bolt of energy.

“I said rub its head! Not pat!” Duan groaned in frustration.

Flinching, Naruto gently rubbed the baby’s head. To his surprise, the baby’s crying slowly began to subside as it tearfully looked up at him. The baby then began to giggle as Naruto dried its tears before going back to rubbing its head. As he did this, a strange, warm golden light filled the room as everyone began to feel their aches and pains at ease, as if the light were undoing their injuries.

“Then the rumors are true. They do really wield chaos itself.” Duan said in awe as he felt the pain practically disappear.

“Dah!” the baby called out in joy as Naruto gently rocked him.

Naruto smiled. “Hey, little guy…” he said to the baby as the little thing gently groped at his whisker marks.

“Gah ba ga bush.” it gurgled out happily.

“... I wanna hold it.” Seikoku whined.

“... You can hold it if you want. I’m not going near that thing until we know it’s safe.” Sasuke replied, eyeing the baby warily.

The baby then hiccupped, vanishing in a flash and appearing in Sasuke’s arms. Sasuke looked down at it with a deadpan look. “Me and my big mouth…” the young Uchiha grumbled.

“Duh buh.” the baby gurgled out.

“I am not a duck!” Sasuke said in annoyance.

“Nah wuh?” the baby gurgled.

“... Okay. Crying bad. Laughing good. Hiccups equal teleportation. Good to know…” Kei noted in fear before pointedly looking at Duan. “Anything else we need to know about this baby, considering that your king didn’t feel the need to tell us this stuff!?”

“We didn’t know it could do that.” Duan explained, dumbfounded as the rest of them.

“... Fair enough!” Kei replied, his eyes twitching in annoyance.

“Right then. We have the baby. Now let us decommission this vault and get out of here before the mountain explodes.” Duan explained nonchalantly. “Oh, there is one thing I do know about the baby.”

“... And that would be?” Shikoku asked, clearly a bit annoyed.

“Do not pull off the horns. Let them come off on their own. It is like baby teeth. Except these baby teeth are attached to a mystical timebomb if you pull them out.” Duan explained as he left the vault.

“... Do we even want to know what’ll happen if the horns are pulled off too early…?” Sasuke asked in annoyance and a little fear.

“Massive explosion. So do not pull them off, even if the baby looks like it is in pain because of them.” Duan explained as he worked with some runes. 

Sasuke stared down at the baby in disbelief as it smiled up at him with a big, toothless smile. “... Think fast, Naruto!” Sasuke fearfully called out, tossing the baby to Naruto and forcing him to catch it.

“Did you just throw a baby!?” The other five present screamed in horror

“I don’t know about all of you; I don’t want to be at the center of a massive explosion that’d kill us all!!” Sasuke called out in a panic, running to hide behind Duan.

“Yes, boy. And being a few feet away from it is so much better.” Duan said, looking down at Sasuke with disappointment.

“At least, with you in front of me, I have a living shield…” Sasuke grumbled.

“And what about your friends? You are going to let them die?” Duan asked.

“... Good point. Guys! Get behind here with me! Except Naruto, because the baby likes him for some reason!” Sasuke called out, realizing Duan’s point in his own way.

As the baby giggled, at what no one could tell, Duan finished his work. In the blink of an eye after the door closed behind them, the very room itself disappeared. The kids would be shocked, if they had not dealt with all the other crazy stuff that day. After that, Duan led them out of the vault in a bit of a hurry. After closing the Black Vault, they rushed as fast as their legs could carry them. Yet as they went, shockingly little stopped their progress. No spirits, no waves of people, nothing. Naruto looked down at the baby, who continued to giggle happily, as if finding moving this fast fun. Finally, they rushed out into the wider world, escaping the mountain. Stopping to catch their breath, Duan covered himself up as they felt the sun begin to beat down on them.

“Right. I know where the rendezvous site is, children. Keep close.” Duan said.

“Um… guys…? Should the mountain be smoking like that…?” Seikoku asked, pointing upwards.

Everyone looked up to where he was pointing, even the baby. From the distant top of the mountain came thick, black smoke. This made the whole lot of them nervous. Except Sasuke, who began to panic at the site of a smoking mountain, knowing exactly what that meant.

“... Naruto! Quick! Make the magic baby laugh again!” Sasuke called out in a panic.

Naruto gulped nervously before turning to address his friend. “I don’t think that's gonna help this time…” Naruto ominously replied, cold sweat starting to come down his face.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

Bolded Italicized is used for descriptive actions.

Italicized is used for internal thoughts/flashbacks.

Bold is for emphasis.

“Underlined Bold” is for dialogue/internal thoughts concerning otherworldly beings.

Boom! King Oda’s hammer came down with the force of a thunderclap upon the wayward spirit, shattering its essence to the wind with a crushing motion.

Letting out a heaving sigh, he looked at the final flight of stairs before him. The closer he got to the magma reservoir, the hotter it got. The air clung thick with the heat, and his resistance runes had long since activated. They provided only some of the light in the derelict stairway, the runes normally providing those long since destroyed by the corrosive action of the magma’s heat. Each step felt like a labor in and of itself, as multiple times he had to stop to catch his breath.

“Whoever invented stairs can bite my royal ass…” King Oda growled before finally making, at least what felt like to him, the herculean effort to reach the top.

Before him lay a raised dais of blackened volcanic stone, treated in runes to allow it to withstand the heat. The glow of the magma below provided all the light the chamber needed as multiple consoles of similar material and mystical runes lined the sides. Great adamantine chains, shining with unending luster, held the platform aloft above the pit of fiery oblivion. But at its center lay a simple stone shrine, of a great horned beast with a mixture of mammal and reptile. Whose eyes, replaced by great shining rubies, stared at him. As if judging him.

“My apologies, great Afrit. But I must do this.” King Oda muttered to himself.

“Traitor! Leaver!” Came a fiery hiss from behind him.

Oda turned to look at who made such a proclamation. Before him upon a swirling tornado of fire was a vaguely humanoid shape. Its body was made of fire and magma; pox marked with blackened stone and pits emitting flame. Vast, powerful arms ended in wicked obsidian clawed hands, as a face with no mouth and white-hot eyes stared at him.

“I know this does not mean much to you, but I am sorry. Our stasis was not by choice and lasted longer than any of us wanted. You spirits should not have been left bound here for this long…” King Oda explained, before the flaming spirit cut him off.

“Do you know how it feels to be left for a THOUSAND years!!? We have served your kind faithfully for generations! A thousand curses upon your kind for breaking your oaths!!” It roared before a great blade of fire formed from its left hand.

“It appears we have reached an impasse…” King Oda answered regretfully as he brandished his hammer and shield.

“RAAAAAARGH!!!/HRAAARGH!!!” the two roared as they charged.

With a thunderous collision that shook the room, the flaming sword clashed against the great mystic shield. Pushing back, the fiery spirit swung its blade again only to be met with the shield once more. The King of Seaheart swung his hammer for the spirit’s head only to be blocked with the flat of the blade. The blades around King Oda’s shield began spinning at high speed like a rapid buzzsaw as he swung it, slashing and slashing it at the spirit only to be blocked by a blade of solid flames. Sparks and embers flew off between the two as they clashed, neither side giving an inch as each clanging blow shook the room like a great earthquake.

Forgoing defense, the King of Seaheart threw his razor-sharp shield at the spirit. Acting quickly, the fiery spirit swung his sword and knocked the bladed shield away. However, the defensive weapon rebounded off the wall and bounced back at the fiery spirit. Growling in fury, the spirit swung his blade to knock the shield away again. Every time the spirit swatted it away, the defensive weapon would bounce and rebound off every surface.

“Death! Death! Death!!” the flaming spirit chanted viciously.

“Death! Death! Death!” came the echoing chants of lesser spirits attracted by the battle.

“Why is it that everyone else gets to call in their friends, but I am the one who must be honorable and nobly fighting all alone? Utter tripe, if you ask me…” King Oda grumbled as he backed up to cause a flaming strike to miss, as the howling hordes of spirits charged in.

Seeing his shield coming at him, King Oda smashed it with his hammer, sending it pinballing around the room. It bounced and rebound repeatedly, cutting and ripping through approaching spirits as the blade-wielding spirit defended itself to keep the weapon from cutting it down. The spirits howled and roared in pain as the rebounding magical weapon carved through them like a hot knife through butter, dispersing their ethereal forms. Eventually, catching his shield and readying it for defense, King Oda scanned the room for any spirits beside the one with its blade in hand, relieved to find them alone once again.

Charging mystical energy into his hammer, he swung it down onto his own shield as a shockwave was unleashed, the force nearly blowing back his foe. Glaring with hatred burning in its fiery eyes, the spirit charged again and swung its weapon down with a powerful two-handed strike. Raising his shield, King Oda barely blocked the blow as he struggled to keep his knees from buckling from the force. The blow traveled down through his body and cracked the ground beneath him, unleashing a great, fiery shockwave that shook the room like a massive quake.

“Hear me, King of Seaheart! Hear my thoughts…!” An otherworldly voice called out to him mentally.

“Who said that?” King Oda asked aloud as he blocked an overhead chop from the flame spirit’s sword.

“Face the statue of my shrine, King of the Dragon Men!” the voice mentally called out from behind the king.

“Have you, oh great disembodied voice, noticed I’m currently under assault by a most particularly pissed off foe!?” King Oda asked as he smashed the spirit with a powerful blow with his hammer.

“I have, young mortal! I offer thee my aid! Now gaze upon the statue in the shrine!” The voice called to him again.

After landing a powerful enough blow to get some distance between him and his fiery foe, he turned to look at the statue. At that moment, it clicked in his mind. Afrit. The Afrit was talking to him. Soon, the rubies of the statue began to glow in a fierce and fiery display. 

“Call out my name, young mortal! Call upon me and I shall aid thee!” the voice mentally beckoned to him from the statue.

“AFRIT! Hear my cry!” King Oda called out, as the dais beneath him began to shake.

Soon, glowing, crimson red and black cracks began to appear in the statue as it sent vibrations in its wake. Then a violent explosion consumed the statue, sending rock and blinding light out to fill the chamber. Oda was forced to raise his shield to protect himself from this. As the light died, he lowered his shield to see a great beast similar to the statue, wreathed in crimson and black flames, standing before him, its arms crossed over its great chest with eyes of white flame staring at him.

“L-Lord Afrit…!” The spirit uttered in fear.

“Do not defile this sacred ground with your groveling and grievances! I expect my servants to be above the petty concerns of the masses.” Afrit growled at the flame spirit, its fiery gaze turning to its lesser counterpart.

Trembling in fear, the spirit ducked its head and silenced itself. Turning, Afrit looked at the mortal king before him. “It has been far too long indeed, King of Seaheart…” the creature said to him almost sadly.

“I apologize for my absence. A malfunction with the emergency stasis systems has left us out of action for quite some time.” King Oda explained, giving the noble spirit a respectful bow of the head.

Nodding in understanding, the noble fire spirit placed a clawed hand to his chin in a thinking pose. “My presence alone shall not quell the wrath of every spirit here, child. I take it thou wish to take more… drastic measures?” it asked him.

“Afrit. Engage final denial protocols.” King Oda ordered mournfully.

For but a moment, the eyes of the Lord of the Inferno widened before it composed itself and nodded. “It shall be done, my friend. I take it you know what I shall ask in return?” it asked him, lowering its clawed hand from its chin.

“Name it.” King Oda answered without hesitation.

“Thou must take my kin, those who have not gone mad, and I with thee to whatever place thou hast decide to call home from this day forward. To raise a shrine there for a new place my servants and I can call home and protect. And, when the time is right, thou must find a host who can control my power. I sense dark times ahead where my strength shall be needed…” the great fire spirit told the king.

“Call your servants, Lord Afrit. Let me just get out a temporary vessel.” King Oda said as he reached into a sack, his hand disappearing into it.

Taking a deep breath, the Lord of the Inferno spoke. “ALL FIRE SPIRITS WITHIN SEAHEART! YE ARE ALL TO CEASE THINE RAMPAGES AND AID ITS PEOPLE WITHOUT QUESTION! WE SHALL BRING THIS MOUNTAIN DOWN UPON ANY TRAITOROUS SPIRITS WHEN ITS PEOPLE HAVE EVACUATED!! SO SAYS AFRIT, LORD OF THE INFERNO AND KING OF THE FIRE ELEMENTALS!!!” the great fire spirit bellowed out, his roar echoing through the mountain as it began to shake from the force.

As Oda reached in and pulled out an ornate vase of brass and copper, he could hear the calls coming from below. It was as if the magma below had come alive as the great horde of fire spirits began to fly above them. They all soon began to swirl around the dais, waiting for the time to follow their lord.

“Spirits of Old, of Fire and Strife! Release your hold and seal from sight!!” King Oda chanted as the various runes inlaid into the copper light up in orangish flame.

Then, without any hesitation, the massive spirit of Afrit dove into the vase, disappearing as if a spark was blown out in the wind. With great howls and hissing cries, the vast horde of flame spirits followed their lord’s mighty roar, swirling into the vase as a mighty tornado of eternal heat. Within moments, they had all disappeared, and the vase now was in Oda’s hands with warm, comfortable heat emitting from it.

“Did he…” King Oda muttered in confusion but was cut off by the feeling of a rumbling through his feet. “He could have warned me first!”

The magma began to roar and bubble as cracks and chasms began to tear into the rock around him. Immense steam and stifling air began to lift the dais, making the chains go slack. Realizing time was limited, King Oda rushed at the wall and began to run up it at breakneck speed. His feet were not sticking or adhering to the walls, merely forcing himself up with sheer raw force and speed. Careful to avoid cracks forming, he was soon met by a wall of stifling air striking his back. Looking back, the lava plume began to rise after him.

“Let’s hope this works!” King Oda yelled as his runes in his legs activated, green light emitting through his robes.

Disappearing in a flash, he made vast distances near instantly, rushing up into the cold, thin-aired heights of the peak. The fluffy white clouds below were almost serene, like an ocean before him. If there was not a volcanic eruption that was chasing him at full tilt. Throwing off his robes, he gripped his undercoat and leapt. From its back, a great kite unfolded as he began to use it to glide down with the vase in hand. All as the smoke, ash and lava roared from the top of the peak.

Bottom of the Mountain

The men and women of Seaheart watched as high in the sky came the black smoke and ash from the fiery glow of the peak. Soon the mountain began to quake and rattle, rending open from the force of the magma building up. Fissures opened to spew lava as if a soda can were shaken and unleashed. Molten rivers lit up the landscape and began to start fires as mountain valleys became hell on earth. Over it all was the immense painful howls of spirits unending being torn asunder by the immense heat.

“A sad end to a mighty city.” Bartholomew mused as his gremlins looked on in horror.

“Not like we had much of a choice really. Did we?” Takato asked, looking at his older brothers.

“I wish we did…” was all Sato could muster.

“I wonder how our ancestors will look upon us for this?” Duan muttered to himself.

“Kei… is there any way to fix Seaheart after this?” Naruto asked, as if trying to grasp at a solution.

Kei shook his head sadly. “I don’t think so, Naruto. Even after the lava cools, most of the city outside of the stasis chambers will have been destroyed beyond repair. It would take generations to fix everything…” he explained somberly.

“I guess it's a good thing we got the kid when we did. I suppose…” Sasuke said with a sigh, as he noticed the baby looking at him after he said that. “Stop looking at me.”

“Gah…” the baby simply said in Seikoku’s arms.

“What have you got against the kid, Sasuke?” Seikoku asked, bouncing the baby a bit, getting a small giggle out of it.

“Yeah. I mean, the baby likes you.” Naruto added, smiling down at the little tyke and wiggling his finger in front of it as it tried to grab his finger.

“It pulverized a golem with a blast of lightning when it cried. I don’t even wanna know what happens when it burps. And why does the baby like me!?” Sasuke replied in disbelief.

“Wouldn’t you want that on our side instead of someone else's?” Shinkoku asked.

“... You win this round, Kamishini…” the young Uchiha replied in annoyance.

“Look! Someone’s gliding down!” a man called out, pointing to the sky.

Looking up, they all saw a great kite gliding down. Eventually, however, it gave out, causing the man to fall before everyone, landing in a crouching stance. Standing up slowly, with an ornate vase in hand, was King Oda. The people of Seaheart stared at him before rushing over to their king. All of this was stopped, however, when a familiar voice cried.

“I see the boys!!!” Kakashi called out in concern.

“And they… have a baby… Why do they have a baby!?” Obito called out in disbelief.

To the shock of the Seaheartians, and the kids, dozens of shinobi, Kamishini, and Anbu practically appeared from the landscape. Nearly surrounding them, it caused panic from the survivors. Acting on instinct, the royal guard by their hundreds rushed up to interpose themselves between the shinobi and the civilians. This strange sight put the shinobi on edge as Jiraiya and Seishin joined the rest of team Minato at the forefront. King Oda made his way to the front of his guards as Naruto rushed out with his arms waving.

“STOP!!! They're not a threat! They're not a threat!!” Naruto screamed, as if making sure everyone could hear him clearly over the commotion.

“Naruto! What were you thinking!?” Obito called out to his sensei’s son in concern.

“I had to rescue the baby! Sei! Bring the kid out!” Naruto yelled back, causing the young Kamishini to rush forward.

“Eeeeee!!” the baby squealed as Seikoku ran.

“... I have several questions…” Rin uttered in response.

“Boys. Do you realize how much chaos you have caused?” Jiraiya groaned, pinching the bridge of his nose as Kei, Shinkoku and Sasuke followed behind.

“Sorry, grandpa Jiraiya. But we were all having almost the exact same weird dreams. And you always say that, in the world of shinobi, there’s no such thing as a coin… coinci…” Naruto began before trailing off in confusion.

“Coincidence, you brightly colored clown!” The other four boys yelled in unison.

“Yeah, that!” Naruto piped up as if they had not basically just called him a buffoon.

“... Kei. Is that why you asked me about the Mountain of Death?” Seishin asked, directing a stern glare at the eldest of the triplets while pointing at the baby.

“... If I say yes, I’m not gonna get the Hashi, right?” Kei asked nervously.

“You’ll get it if you lie.” Seishin simply told him.

“I didn’t know till we went to the temple, but I kind of figured that that was where it was…” Kei explained with a gulp.

Sighing, Seishin pinched the bridge of his nose. “You boys… I swear, one of these days, you’re going to drive me to drink. And I’m not going to be a pussy about it. I’m gonna be drinking the hard shit…” he uttered in frustration.

King Oda looked at all of this with curiosity before stepping forward. “Hail Pillar of the Kamishini. I am King Oda Shang the Second of Seaheart.” he said, his voice cutting above the din of the chaos around them.

Seishin’s eyes widened before he gave a respectful bow. “I am Kamishini Seishin, The Scorching Sun Pillar and the 140th Head of the Kamishini Clan. I apologize for any trouble my grandsons and their friends have caused you, Great King of the Dragon Men!” he announced to the king.

“They have not caused us any trouble. In fact, it is because of them that we have been awakened in the first place. And due to their presence, they uncovered a potential regional spirit catastrophe. Without them awakening us and allowing us to prevent them from escaping the mountain, there would have been a far greater catastrophe in the coming centuries.” King Oda explained respectfully.

“See! We did good! So, we’re not in trouble, right?” Naruto called out hopefully.

“Your mothers would disagree.” Kakashi and Obito scolded him in unison.

“Dang it…” the five boys uttered in frustration.

“Dah ih.” the baby said, trying to copy the boys.

Rin glared at the boys. “Boys…!” she growled, angered by them seemingly corrupting an innocent baby.

“... He did it!” the boys all called out, pointing at each other as the baby pointed at one of them randomly, with it happening to be Sasuke.

“I don’t care who did it, you’re all in trouble!” Rin called out.

“Seishin. Is there something you're not telling us?” Jiraiya asked, raising an eyebrow at the elderly clan leader.

“I have my theories. I just hope that I’m wrong because, if I’m not, a series of great disasters are on the horizon. And that baby will be at the center of many of them…” Seishin sighed in frustration.

“It's worse than that, my good man.” King Oda chipped in.

“... How can it be worse than that?” Jiraiya asked, sounding worried as he tried to maintain his poker face.

“I will explain. After you take me to your leader.” King Oda replied, crossing his arms expectantly.

This shocked the head shinobi on the mission, as none of this was what they had expected from this seemingly simple mission. But, seeing no other alternatives, they gave the king a nod. With that, King Oda gave the order, and the massive throng of people began to follow the shinobi towards the Hidden Leaf. As the shinobi wondered just what could possibly be worse than what was already foretold…

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

Bolded Italicized is used for descriptive actions.

Italicized is used for internal thoughts/flashbacks.

Bold is for emphasis.

“Underlined Bold” is for dialogue/internal thoughts concerning otherworldly beings.

Kushina sat at the left side, roughly compared to the door to the conference room, at the table. On either side, sitting either at the long table or clustered in like quails, was every single one of the most important people in the village. Shinobi, heads of departments, advisors, clan heads, business leaders, and somehow found a priest to pack in there as well. At her back were both Jiraiya and Tsunade. Yet the sight across from them was far stranger. A total of roughly ten surrounded this supposed king of Seaheart. Including something called a gremlin. The two sides, in dress, composure, and any other metric could not appear more different.

“I thank you greatly for agreeing to this meeting, Lady Hokage. It is an honor to meet someone so distinguished.” King Oda said, his voice was as smooth as silk, and as sure as a mighty river.

Wearing her best poker face, Kushina gave a courteous smile. “The pleasure is all mine, King Oda. We welcome you to our village. I hope that my son Naruto and his friends did not cause you too much trouble.” the Fifth Hokage replied, mild annoyance at her son’s antics peeking out into her tone.

“Quite the contrary, fair lady. For without their fate timed arrival, then it would have caused much trouble later down the line for the common good of modern man.” King Bartholomew said, sat upon a tall stool that was hastily procured for his… unique stature. 

Kushina looked at the gremlin king and nodded. “You did say that before, King Bartholomew. Would you mind explaining what you mean by that?” she requested.

“Oh but of course. Where are my manners? You see after isolation for roughly a thousand years, give or take a decade, the spirits had become more or less deranged. Spirits are like people in a way. Those bound to a place for a specific purpose build a certain rapport with those that sealed them. Without them for prolonged periods of time, well, it is no different than locking someone up in a cage and throwing away the key. They begin to lose it after a while.” The short ruler answered with surety that shocked many on the other side of the literal aisle.

Kushina nodded in understanding. “I see. That does put things in perspective a bit. But what is so important about the trip that the boys made that warrants such a meeting?”

“Aside from awakening us, it involves what they were searching for. The Nythralian.” Oda answered simply.

“You mentioned that. What are these… ‘Nythralians’ that you speak of?” Tsunade asked, speaking up.

“Minister. Go get the child.” Oda ordered, and one of the men behind him rushed off. “They are a race beyond the mortal plane with the power over chaos itself.”

“‘Power over chaos itself?’ That sounds… a bit similar to Senjutsu being used to manipulate nature energy.” Jiraiya commented, having experience with something like that.

“From what the Lord of the Kamishini explained, it is. However, on a far greater scale and with effects that can alter reality itself.” Another minister, one wearing a great grey hat, replied.

“I see. So, they can basically control a much more powerful version of nature energy…” Jiraiya said contemplatively.

“That is merely the minimum of what chaos can do, Great Sage.” Seishin explained, his eyes not shifting from those before him.

“The minimum? What else can it do?” Kushina asked, now surprised and curious.

The various Seaheartians looked a bit more nervous and tactile at that. “We don’t know, fair lady. Aside from what was described from the Black Vault, potentially anything.” Another minister replied.

“That… is more than a little concerning. That means that that child downstairs has power that could potentially eventually rival a god’s. Power that could be very destructive if he fell into the wrong hands. Are you sure you don’t have any further information?” one of the elders, Koharu, asked in more than mild worry.

“Even if it was, it is so buried in roughly 10,000 years of documents we’d never find it. Let alone the process of erosion.” a sagely minister replied to Koharu.

Homura nodded at that. “I see. Then that raises further questions. Outside of how we should handle things here with your people, what do we do with the infant?” He added, lacing his fingers in front of him with his elbows on the table.

“We must treat it as a threat, then.” Came the telltale voice of Danzō.

Everyone in the room turned to look at the source of the voice. It didn’t occur to the old man just why everyone was soon shooting daggers.

“What?” he asked, looking around at everyone.

“... First of all, Danzō, ‘it’ is a ‘he.’ Second, you know my policy when it comes to children. Or do I need to let my furry little friend downstairs out to… talk with you?” Kushina replied, glaring katana blades at the veteran shinobi.

“Oh? To bring the little fox out to play at such a critical time? That isn’t like you.” The covert lord answered dryly, sending a tinge of tension through the Konoha side.

“Danzō. You’re already on thin ice as it is. Quit while you’re behind.” Hiruzen warned his old friend with a quick glare.

“And who is the reason for that, old friend?” Danzō answered with a tinge of venom.

“Unfortunately, killing the boy would be highly inadvisable. The writings that my grandson Kei and the king’s brother uncovered in the vault have… enlightened us to some pieces we were missing of the prophecy.” Seishin informed the present Konoha representatives.

“You all still believe in that old thing to that extent?” King Oda asked with a bemused eyebrow raised.

“I mean no disrespect, Lord Oda, but the prophecies our seers have gotten have always come true.” Seishin replied sadly.

“Does that mean we have all of the pieces of it now?” Koharu asked a bit hopefully.

Every other Konoha representative above the age of forty in the room looked at her like she had been smoking something they should be worried about.

“If it were that easy, I’d put in for the lottery. Not that I would win or anything, bad luck, misfortune, and all, but that’s optimistic for such things. Prophecies are pure havers like that.” King Bartholomew chipped in, waving it off.

Koharu sighed as Homura then spoke up. “If that truly is the case, do we at least know how much of it is missing?” he asked.

“We do not. We will have to have shinobi scouting out for signs of any ancient ruins they can find. Any traces at all the rest of the prophecy could help us uncover what is to come.” Seishin replied in a small hint of frustration while muttering something about ‘damnedable riddles’ and ‘ancient peoples never making things easy.

“Prophecy was never something we put much stock in, young one. By the time you collect the pieces of the damnable thing, parts of it have been altered. It, like fate and time, are mutable in its own way. It's about altering prophecy, not understanding it.” King Oda explained.

“I see your point and raise you this one: How can we alter it if we do not understand it?” Seishin replied with equally sagely wisdom.

“The same thing I’ve told Lord Moto so many times. Use what you know as a trial marker.” King Oda explained.

“My King! I have arrived with the child!” the Minister yelled, rushing back in with the baby in tow.

“What took you?” King Oda asked in annoyance.

“He required a snack break.” The Minister replied.

“... A snack break? This is a meeting that could help decide humanity’s future going forward… and you stopped to give the infant a snack break…?” Koharu asked in sheer disbelief.

“You will not like the child if he is unhappy. For if he is unhappy, then the world is unhappy.” King Oda explained sternly, staring into Koharu’s soul.

“I don’t see what the problem is.” Homura replied in confusion.

“The last time he cried, a big, cool looking arrow of lightning shot out of him!” A familiar voice replied from behind the minister, making him jump in surprise and move aside to reveal the boys.

“... Come again?” Kushina asked simply.

“That's one horny baby.” Jiraiya chuckled to himself only to be smacked in the back of the head by Tsunade hard enough to knock him to the floor, crack it, and leave a lump on the old sage’s head.

“Jiraiya! Not in front of the children!” Tsunade snapped at him as they looked at the baby.

“Heh heh heh heh heh!” Came from the baby, bouncing and jiggling as it gave a hearty giggle.

To the surprise of all present, something unbelievable happened. The crack in the floor began to mend as Jiraiya’s lump slowly disappeared. The old sage then got up and rubbed the back of his head, extremely confused now.

“... My headache is mostly gone now. What just happened…?” Jiraiya asked in confusion.

“Baby happened.” The boys said in unison.

“Ooookaaaay then… explain, boys. How did baby happen?” Kushina replied to the boys inquisitively.

“You had this idiot. How do you not know how baby happened?” Sasuke answered with sass.

“Sasuke!” Mikoto and Fugaku called out in indignation at their younger son’s antics.

“What? He is an idiot.” Sasuke said to defend himself.

“... Okay, let me rephrase that. How did the baby do that?” Kushina replied, rubbing her temples.

“You’re asking us?” Kei asked in confusion.

“You were there. How do you not know?” Tsunade asked in disbelief.

“We don’t really know what this kid can do, Granny Tsunade. All we know is that, when he giggles, good things happen; when he cries, bad things happen; when he hiccups, he poofs away.” Naruto told her honestly.

“We don’t know what happens if he burps or farts.” Seikoku chipped in… for what it was worth.

“... What do you mean by… ‘poofs away…?” Jiraiya asked, raising an eyebrow.

“Shinkoku! Gently shake the baby!” Naruto proclaimed.

“Gently shaking the baby, sir!” Shinkoku replied with a salute before taking the baby from the minister and gently shaking him.

Soon, the baby began to hiccup. As soon as he did, he began disappearing with a flash of blue and green light, teleporting around the room. First ending up in Tsunade’s arms, then hanging from Jiraiya’s ponytail, then sitting atop Danzō’s head before ending up in Kushina’s lap as the hiccups stopped. Much to the shock of the entire Hidden Leaf side of the gathering.

“... Why was there an infant’s posterior on my head…?” Danzō asked with stunned annoyance.

“... Ah. So that’s what you meant by ‘poof…’” Kushina replied in sheer disbelief.

“Goo…” the little baby said, before laying down and snuggling into Kushina’s lap. Seemingly finding it infinitely comfier than the bony forms of the boys.

“We will… need to keep an eye on that one…” Hiashi sighed with a small smile.

“I would personally recommend that the Kamishini handle that assignment.” King Oda offered, to the shock of everyone else.

“Us? Why is that, King Oda?” Seishin asked in confusion.

“Don’t forget to tell them about the horn rule, Mr. King.” Naruto said to Oda, tugging on his robes.

“Thank you, boy. I almost forgot.” King Oda answered before patting his head.

“Must… resist… joke…!” Jiraiya grit out.

“Horn rule?” Chōza asked, pointedly ignoring Jiraiya’s comment.

“Why do I get the feeling that this is gonna be massively troublesome…?” Shikaku groaned in frustration.

“If you pull out his horns, he goes boom. As in, big boom. Well, that's what the nice vampire man said to us.” Naruto explained chipperly.

“The nice what now!?” Kushina, Mikoto, and Miko all exclaimed as Kushina handed the baby to Tsunade before the three mothers walked over to check Naruto and the boys for bite marks while Tsunade checked over the baby.

“You start nibbling, you're going in the lap. Understand?” Tsunade said to the baby sternly after finishing checking him over.

“Gah.” baby Kumori replied in understanding before turning to give Jiraiya a smug look as Tsunade pulled him back into her breasts.

“You little punk…” came quietly from the Great Toad Sage.

“Okay, Naruto’s good! No bite marks!” Kushina called out in relief.

“Sasuke’s fine too!” Mikoto sighed in relief.

“Kei, Shin, and Sei are all clear!” Miko replied, sighing in relief.

“... King Oda. Why do you have a vampire in Seaheart?” Seishin asked, rubbing his temples.

“I don’t understand the question.” Oda asked in confusion.

“The vampire race has changed much since you went into stasis. The Strigoi are not the only type of vampires to be a problem now.” Seishin explained.

“What are you talking about? We have long allowed vampires of many types to live in our city. Duan is an urban vampire, not some rural degenerated monster. So long as a vampire can keep to the laws and keep the hunger under control, they are allowed to live with us.” King Oda explained. “Before many of the other races migrated, we were and still are quite cosmopolitan. It's just there all still in stasis. Dwarves, Yōsei, Giants, Vampires, you name it.” 

“... Excuse me, what?” Danzō asked, his one visible eye widening in shock.

“The Giants of this realm died out seven hundred years ago, my king. The last known Giant was seen several hundred years ago at what is now known as Mount Koryū.” Seishin sadly informed him.

“We truly are in an era of continuing tragedy.” King Bartholomew said with a level of sorrow that no one, not even the kids, had heard from him.

“Indeed. And the Dwarves and Yōsei are either dead or in hiding. The Dragons are all but extinct. The Fishmen? Those who haven’t died out have retreated into the deepest depths of the sea or into another realm…” Seishin recounted sadly.

“So, we are virtually alone? It is only humanity that stands against the dark tide?” King Oda asked, slowly standing.

“Not necessarily, King Oda. There are pockets of the other races still out there, we’re sure of it. Not to mention that the Angels still fight strong and many Demons and Oni have since changed sides to our end of things.” Seishin explained.

“And what true damage has been done to the enemy? From the murmurings I hear from your men, the main gates are beginning to fail.” King Oda asked sternly, now clearly trying to press Seishin.

“Unfortunately, yes. We have sent forces out to assess the damages and figure out how to repair and reinforce them. We have also been working on seeking out the pockets of the other races and bringing humanity closer together, starting with trying to ally the Five Great Nations together.” Seishin explained.

At that, Oda gave a nod and sat down. With his deep blue eyes, he looked over the large group of people before him. He tapped on the table several times, as if deep in thought. All but Kushina felt a pang of dread as he sat there. For Kushina, however, she was trying to do everything she could to read him. Yet, to her surprise, he was not hiding anything. He had a small sweat, both from travel and from his own nervousness. A clawing, gnawing feeling was eating away at him from the inside, likely the weight of the many who owed him their loyalty. He had a heavy weight upon his head as he thought deeply. No one ever is so open like that…

“What terms would you have for us to be able to immigrate into your village, Lady Hokage?” King Oda asked bluntly, catching the council of Konoha off guard. While Kushina sat their firm.

“Immigrate? You wish to set up shop in our village and aid us?” Kushina asked, caught off guard.

“Can he, mom? Please?” Naruto asked hopefully, giving her the puppy eyes.

“Naruto… son… it’s… not that simple…” Kushina tried to tell her son as Tsunade and Jiraiya nodded in agreement with her.

“With all due respect to you and your charges, Lady Kushina, but our homeland is not in a state of habitability. Nor will it be for some time. Afrit may have… overcooked it a bit with the denial protocols…” King Oda explained, trying his best to ease her concerns.

“Why do you wish to settle here? Did you not pass by other settlements on your way here?” Kushina asked, her eyebrow raised.

“The reason is both for the now and the future. Currently, we only have a few thousand awakened, and that is not sufficient for long term survival in this hostile world. Secondly, if we are able to free our kin from their stasis, then that will rapidly increase the numbers we will require to provide for, something Konoha is already equipped with. And finally, us immigrating would also technically include the baby. He was in our care, after all.” Oda explained.

“Even if that is true, what can you, as refugees, bring to our village? We can’t exactly run a charity here.” Homura countered with a scoff.

This caused much muttering from both sides. Hints of offense were clearly heard from Seaheart’s ministers, while the shinobi were beginning to question as well. A strange silence, however, came from the Kamishini contingent, which equally got the speculation mill going. Finally, however, there was a break in this chaos.

Kushina raised her hand to silence both sides, then took a deep breath and nodded. “We will need a demonstration of what you and your people can bring to the table, King Oda. A public show of strength, so to speak, to convince the other villages that this coming and growing alliance is necessary if you alone can’t deal with what’s coming.” she told him, a plan beginning to form in her head.

“She’s right. Humanity in this part of the world has been divided for so long that uniting them all won’t be easy. They need to be shown what their potential allies can offer them while having the potential threat be put into perspective for them.” Tsunade explained.

“Tsunade speaks the truth. There’s a lot of bad blood amongst the nations because of the history we’ve endured ever since you went into stasis. Between the Warring Clans Era and the three Shinobi World Wars, nations trusting each other in this day and age is difficult because too much hatred has been stewed up and spread.” Jiraiya added sagely.

This got the rest of the Seaheart ministers murmuring. From their faces, they seemed bemused at best at the prospect, to dismissive at worst. Crude was uttered more than once amongst them. However, King Oda soon stood up, silencing the chatter on his side instantly. As if they knew their King had made a decision.

“A demonstration of strength is merely what you ask? That is it?” King Oda asked inquisitively, more in disbelief than his companions.

Kushina nodded. “Yes. We also need to make sure that the other nations’ shinobi leadership and lords all attend to watch. We need to put it in perspective just how much trouble humanity is in for in the future and that the only way we’ll survive is by standing together.” she explained.

“What kind of demonstration do you require exactly? Define public for me.” King Oda asked, his curiosity peaked.

“Why not an exhibition match in front of foreign diplomatic parties between the most powerful combatant of Seaheart and the most powerful combatant of our village? We could send out invitations to the other nations for their shinobi and civilian leadership to attend. We could even host it in the Chūnin Exams stadium and make a festival out of it.” Tsunade suggested.

At that again King Oda fell silent again, going into a more contemplative stance. It was as if it puzzled him at such a request. Almost as if he were expecting something else entirely. His ministers held their breaths as King Bartholomew gave a big grin, as if knowing something everyone else did not. At that Oda spoke again.

“If I perform this public demonstration of strength, you will accept my people into your village for refuge?” King Oda asked, in a clearly testing tone.

“So long as you can help us eventually secure this alliance with the other nations for whatever is coming? Yes.” Kushina replied in an unguarded tone.

Soon a big smile stretched across King Oda’s face. They had all seen a similar smile upon little Naruto before. A clever, devilish, foxish grin.

“Believe me, fair lady, diplomacy is a gift of ours. After all, everyone has their price. I, King Oda Shang the Second of Seaheart, formally and personally accept your challenge! What shall my demonstration of strength entail!?” King Oda roared, rapidly becoming far more bombastic and animated. One may even say kingly, in a strange way.

Hiruzen gave a smile. “A one-on-one exhibition match between you and one of the strongest shinobi in our village should do quite nicely, your majesty. One where both combatants can give it their very all.” He told him, a bit of mirth peeking out.

“Then I presume the greatest of your kind will stand before me in this very room then?” King Oda asked, standing to his full towering height, and now literally gazing down upon them all. With an intense fiery glare, like that of a dragon.

That was when, to everyone’s surprise, Jiraiya stood up, a great smile upon his face. “I, the Gallant Jiraiya, the Mighty Toad Sage of Mount Myōboku and one of the Hidden Leaf’s great Legendary Sannin, shall meet your challenge, King Oda!” he declared to all present.

“Then, Great Lord of the Toads, shall you face the King Closest to the Gods in honorable combat! And may our battle make the very world quake!” King Oda roared, pointing directly at Jiraiya, locking eyes. As everyone now knew, a fight like that rarely seen on this planet, was on the cusp of taking shape.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

Bolded Italicized is used for descriptive actions.

Italicized is used for internal thoughts/flashbacks.

Bold is for emphasis.

“Underlined Bold” is for dialogue/internal thoughts concerning otherworldly beings.

“Are we there yet?” Naruto groaned out from the back of Kushina.

“No, Naruto.” Kushina told her son as she walked, carrying him on her back.

“Okay… So now are we there yet?” Naruto asked, trying to be clever.

“No, kid.” Tsunade told him from Kushina’s left side.

“You know, for being super powerful ninja, you guys are really slow.” Naruto replied, rolling his eyes at the grownups.

“So, you’ve said, brat. For the fifth time on this trip.” Jiraiya sighed, rolling his eyes.

“So, why can’t we pick up the pace then?” Naruto asked.

“Because mama doesn’t wanna risk her little baby boy falling off while we go at a proper ninja pace.” Kushina told her son, looking back at him with a smile.

“I’m bored.” Naruto groaned, throwing his head back and looking at the sky.

“Why don’t you just read a book or something, kid?” Tsunade asked, raising an eyebrow.

“The only book I brought with me is Grandpa Pervy Sage’s first book. And I’ve read that one, like, six times already.” Naruto groaned.

“I’m touched you like it so much, brat.” Jiraiya replied, tearing up a bit in joy.

“Of course I do. Mama and papa named me after the main character. Plus, it’s a great book. Why didn’t it sell well again?” Naruto replied, adding a question at the end out of curiosity.

“We’ll explain when you're older.” Tsunade sighed, rolling her eyes as she cradled the little horned baby. Who thankfully was fast asleep.

“Why do you guys always say that when I ask that?” Naruto groaned in frustration.

“Cousin, didn’t you bring anything else to keep him busy?” Kushina groaned, looking at her cousin with eyes like daggers.

Rea shrugged. “I thought the book would keep him occupied. He really likes it. The only other thing I have is the keys to my house.” He replied, pulling out his house keys.

“Ooooohhhh!!” Naruto said excitedly, immediately enthralled by the keys.

“Do it.” Kushina said sternly, looking at her cousin with a glare of desperation.

Sighing, Rea began jingling the keys to keep Naruto occupied. With a heavy sigh of relief, they finally got some peace among the small group. To say Naruto was… distracting… was an understatement. And getting the baby to take a nap was its own headache.

After finally leaving the cover of the near endless forests of the Land of Fire, they finally reached the great plains of the Land of Grass. All around them were great pastures for innumerable livestock, vast fields of wheat, bountiful orchids, and fertile rice paddies. Even Naruto stopped looking at the keys for a moment to observe his new surroundings. His attention did not last long, however, and he returned to looking at the keys. Yet in the distance, they saw their destination, Kusagakure. Kushina gave a smile, as she got an idea.

“Hold on tight, Naruto.” Kushina said cheekily.

“Why, mama?” Naruto asked, confused.

“Oh, nothing. You're just going to see how fast mama can really go.” She replied cryptically.

With his confusion increasing, Naruto held on tight to his mother. Then, to the surprise of everyone, she bolted into a full sprint as Naruto screamed in joy and excitement. Meanwhile, Jiraiya and Tsunade, along with the rest of the contingent, looked on in shock.

“... That woman will never change.” Hiruzen spoke up for the first time since Naruto started asking if they were there yet.

“Goo.” Replied the baby, awoken from his nap time by the sudden jolt of Kushina’s sprint.

“And now the baby’s awake. Great…” Tsunade sighed as the rest of them began speed walking to catch up to their Kage.

“Hey, kid. Look at the keys.” Rea said, jingling the keys in front of the mysterious small child.

“Gee hee hee!” the baby giggled, clapping his pudgy little baby hands together.

As soon as the baby started giggling, flowers started blooming around them. Not to mention that Tsunade noticed something…

“Hey, my liver feels better all of a sudden. Ooh, twenty ryo on the ground too!” Tsunade said with a smile, picking up a bill of money and stuffing it down between her breasts.

The gate guards were surprised as Kushina ground to a halt, leaving a very windblown and dizzy Naruto flopping over her shoulder. She soon took him off her back and dusted him off, before shaking him a bit.

“And here we are, sweetie.” Kushina said after she fixed his hair up a bit.

“That was awesome! Do it again!” Naruto called out in joy.

“We can do it on the way back if you're good.” Kushina countered with a devilish smirk.

“Yes, mama!” Naruto replied, saluting her.

“Lady Hokage! We did not expect to see you so early.” one of the gate guards said as she stood to attention.

Kushina waved the guard off. “It’s fine. I was just making the trip a little more exciting for my son here. He’s been bored because of the slow pace we had to go at.” she explained, motioning to Naruto.

“I wasn’t bored. I was destination deprived.” Naruto corrected, trying to sound smart.

“‘Destination deprived?’ Wow, those vocabulary lessons really are paying off.” Kushina replied playfully.

“Wait… I got it right? I mean, of course they are.” Naruto said in confusion, before composing himself.

“Greetings, Lady Hokage and young lord Naruto.” A voice called out lightly, drawing the two’s attention.

Turning, they all saw a man who barely reached five feet before them. He was bald on top, revealing a sun scorched head, scarred and wrinkled from years of exposure. Wearing brightly colored robes with many intricate designs of nature, his brown eyes looked over the rapidly coalescing party before him, his bushy eyebrows only somewhat getting in the way. Naruto cocked his head to his side as he could hardly see the man's lips through an equally thick white mustache.

“I say, is that Hiruzen I see? Who let you out of the doghouse you old scoundrel?” The man asked in ecstatic shock.

Hiruzen smiled a bit. “Greetings, Lord Zassō. It’s been far too long.” he replied, greeting the man.

“Who’s Lord Lasslo?” Naruto asked in confusion.

“That’s ‘Lord Zassō,’ Naruto. He’s the leader of the Hidden Grass Village.” Kushina corrected her son.

“Can’t help but wonder if he’s got some extra ‘grass’ for sale…” Jiraiya jokingly muttered only to grunt in pain as he felt Tsunade elbow him in the ribs.

“Not another word, if you know what's good for you.” Tsunade growled.

“... I’ll be good.” Jiraiya replied, a bit afraid.

“How long will it last, my friend?” Orochimaru asked with a snicker.

“Thank you again for volunteering to host the Kage Summit old friend. You wouldn’t believe how hard it is to find someone on such short notice.” Hiruzen said, bowing his head respectfully.

“Not at all, Lord Third. It is an honor for my village and I to host the first peaceful Five Kage Summit to be held since the founding of the Hidden Village system.” Zassō replied with a smile as he bowed back.

“Shall I lead the Hokage and her entourage to the meeting hall, sir?” A tall and powerfully built shinobi asked from behind the short village leader.

“That would be very much appreciated. Thank you, Captain Renga.” Zassō replied to the man.

“Come with me, everyone.” Renga said dryly, motioning to the group to follow him.

As they walked into the village, they quickly were greeted by richly laid tiles of many shades of blue. Naruto quickly realized the blue formed a walkway, as the rest of the street was paved in dark green colored tiles. All around him he saw brightly colored buildings with tiled roofs, statues and other ornamentation covering them. Shops and stalls lined the streets, many of which selling food laden with spices. It instantly got Naruto’s stomach growling as they made a swift journey to a red, gold, and blue painted building, longer than it was tall. Great statues of gods, beasts and great shinobi heroes were arrayed like a tapestry, depicting great scenes of legend and history alike.

“Look, there's daddy!” Naruto cried out as he rushed to a statue of his father, fighting two shinobi from the Hidden Cloud.

“I remember that battle well. Namikaze nearly killed Bee in that fight. I take it you’re his and Kushina’s boy?” A gruff, strong voice asked from nearby.

“Hey come on, bro. Are you still on about that fight, yo?” Another voice, more upbeat and friendly sounding asked the first.

“Yes, Bee. I’m still not happy about losing that fight. But I do respect the kid’s father for defeating us.” the first voice replied as Naruto turned to look at the sources of the two voices.

Having to look up, he saw two dark-skinned, powerfully built men looking down at him. Both had their hair pulled back, though one was covered in a handkerchief and scarf. Yet one had a sharp beard and stared down at him with a sternness that made the boy gulp. The other, however, had a far more laid back, and even friendly demeanor to him with sunglasses obscuring his eyes. Behind them was a crowd of Hidden Cloud shinobi. 

“Yo, little man. What’s ya’ name? I’ll bet you know mine, due to my fame.” The friendly looking one with the sunglasses said.

“Not really, no. I-I’m Uzumaki Naruto, though…” Naruto said nervously, as he trembled under the gaze of the two giants.

The sunglass-wearing one gave a smile. “Not a bad rhyme, little guy. If you want some tips, come to me sometime.” the man replied, kneeling down and putting his fist out.

“Why are you failing to punch me?” Naruto asked, confused.

“Nah, man. Meet ma’ beat. Bump my fist, it’s how I greet.” the man explained.

Still a bit confused, Naruto put his fist out and pressed it against the man’s. As soon as he did, his eyes widened before he gave a small, shy smile. The man, seeing it, gave a smile of his own.

“I see now, so that’s the drill. Number Nine, you fit the bill.” the man told him with a smile.

“A. I recommend you remind your brother of etiquette while at this meeting.” came the voice of Hiruzen.

“I understand, Lord Hiruzen. Bee, keep it on the down low for now.” the man now identified as the Fourth Raikage, A the Fourth, told his little brother.

“And everyone now has to ruin my flow, yo.” Bee replied with a sigh.

“I don’t mind, Grandpa Third. Mr. Bee seems really nice.” Naruto shyly told the old man.

“Naruto. Please don’t go running off on your own like that. We aren’t in Konoha.” Hiruzen explained. 

“Sorry…” Naruto said sheepishly.

“Please don’t be so uptight, Lord Third. The kid’s got the free spirit of a bird.” Bee replied, trying to be a bit polite.

“Now is not the time, Bee.” A said firmly, clearly siding with the former Hokage.

“Right. Sorry, bro. Since it’s time for the meetin’, we gotta go.” Bee replied, backing down for the moment.

“It's okay, Mr. Bee. We can catch up after, ya’ see?” Naruto answered with a smile, getting one from Bee as well.

“... Your brother had better not corrupt my son.” Kushina whispered to A.

“For once, we are in agreement.” A whispered back.

With that, the Hidden Cloud entourage joined the Leaf’s as the great doors to the hall were swung open. It took a full six shinobi on each door to open them, as they entered a great vaulted hall, made of lacquered timber and fine stone. A massive concave table was set up at its center, with enough chairs for the important visitors. At its head was a chair for the host, with the flags of each of the villages displayed behind him.

As Kushina and A took their seats, their entourages standing behind them, the other Kage began to filter in. The first was from the Hidden Sand, Rasa led his bizarre entourage in, with a trio of children taking up the rear. Behind him was the familiar sight of Ōnoki, with a full unit of some of the largest and most imposing earth release users any of them had ever seen. One would make a comment about compensating, but those who thought that refrained. Taking up the rear of this cavalcade of titans was a fairly short man with a stitched, scarred face and short messy gray hair. He wore a striking green cloak, with a great hooked club in hand. Behind him walked the vaunted Seven Swordsmen of the Hidden Mist, with eyes peering at everyone as sharply as their blades could cut them. Seeing the looks from those seven, Naruto hid behind his mother in fear, making sure he stood close to Killer Bee in case a fight broke out.

“Who invited the insane asylum again?” Orochimaru whispered amongst his fellow Sannin.

“Show some respect, Orochimaru! He’s the Fourth Mizukage!” Tsunade whispered harshly.

“Have you heard of the purges in the Hidden Mist?” Orochimaru whispered back.

“As much as I agree with you, Orochimaru, we should avoid starting a fight. Please try to be civil.” Jiraiya whispered to his old friend

“I am…” Orochimaru hissed as his eyes locked with one of the swordsmen. 

“Now that everyone is present, I hereby call this Five Kage Summit meeting to order.” Zassō announced to the present entourages.

“Let's make this quick.” Yagura said coldly, leaning back in his chair.

“It would be best to send the children off to a different room.” Rasa said, trying to avoid giving Yagura a glare.

“Agreed. Bee, go with the kids and keep them out of trouble.” A told his brother.

“But I…” Bee tried to say, only to get cut off.

“Go with them. And keep them out of trouble. Understand?” A said again, giving his little brother a stern glare while flexing his hand for an Iron Claw.

“Alright, kids. Come along with Uncle Bee. Maybe we can look at some sights, see?” Bee answered in a far more chipper tone, swiftly getting to work rounding up the several groups of children.

“Should we take the tiny one with us too?” Naruto asked, motioning to the baby in Tsunade’s arms.

“It's okay Naruto. The baby will be fine.” Tsunade answered encouragingly.

“Okay. Be good, Kumori. You do and I’ll bring you back something.” Naruto told the baby.

“Gee!!” the baby gurgled happily, waving his little baby arms happily.

“I knew there was something we were forgetting…” Jiraiya muttered.

“I wanted to name him Yamato…” Orochimaru whispered mournfully.

“... You didn’t name the baby? Also, who are its parents?” Rasa asked in confusion.

“That’s… kind of a long story, Lord Kazekage…” Kushina told her fellow Kage.

“Well, get on with it! Get on with it!” Ōnoki roared, which then caused Kumori to get startled and start to cry. As soon as Kumori started to cry, the building began to shake.

“It’s okay, baby Kumori! Look, keys! Jingle keys!” Rea said, jingling his keys in front of the baby.

“Goooooh…” Kumori gurgled happily, stopping crying to look at the wonderful keys in front of him. As soon as he calmed down, the quaking soon stopped. All the other Kage and entourages looked at the Hokage and her entourage in utter disbelief.

“... Lady Hokage. What the hell was that? Please explain…” Rasa said, trying to remain as calm as possible.

“I will, but I will need everyone to use their best inside voices from now on.” Kushina replied firmly. “I don’t want to scare the baby again.”

“... That happened because we scared this kid?” A asked in sheer disbelief.

“Yes. I’m afraid so.” Hiruzen answered simply.

“I believe the rest of us are missing some context.” Yagura coldly said, raising an eyebrow.

With a deep breath to calm herself, Kushina began. It took a full hour to explain the visions the boys and some of their friends had, the expansive trip the boys took to Seaheart, and the baby’s supposed origins and abilities. For the other Kage, however, it was a rollercoaster of emotions. It seemed impossible, no, inconceivable that a mere baby could have such power, let alone needed to be sealed by a people with greater power than their own or even the Kamishini. Yet, as they watched the baby, through its happy and sad moods, and the many occurrences that happened during the explanation… it did not sound so farfetched.

“And that is all we currently know currently. From everything we can tell, this baby's people have been lost to time.” Kushina concluded, leaving a stunned table of her peers.

“If this kid-” A began to say only to be cut off by the baby.

“Mo Mo!” Kumori blurted out suddenly.

“... Right. Apologies. If Kumori here is really supposed to be so deeply tied to the fate of our world, then we need to keep a close eye on him. And make sure he learns to use this power properly.” A continued, looking at the kid with a mix of concern and caution.

“This is a level and type of power we are not equipped to handle. How can we teach this boy to control his powers?” Ōnoki asked, bewildered at the prospects before them.

“It seems to me that, like a Jinchūriki, his power is triggered by emotion. Teaching him to control his emotions would be a good starting point.” Rasa noted, thinking of his son at that moment.

“Attempting to teach it at this time would be dangerous and pointless. We should securely lock the boy up until it is of an age where we can. To do so before would be the height of folly.” Yagura piped up with, getting immediate glares from his peers.

“... Lord Mizukage. We are dealing with a baby who potentially has enough power to destroy an entire village in one attack if we make him cry. Upsetting him would be a far greater height of folly.” Rasa explained.

“I have learned the best way to deal with troublesome aspects is to handle it with a firm grasp, Kazekage.” Yagura replied simply.

“All in favor of locking the baby away somewhere?” Zassō called, trying to get the meeting back on track.

Only one hand was raised to that vote, predictably from the Mizukage. Upon seeing he was the only one, and the intense glares he was getting, he hastily put his hand back down. The Lord of the Grass then cleared his throat to continue the meeting.

“The motion is denied.” Zassō announced as the meeting continued.

“Perhaps we then attempt to raise the boy in a civil and polite manner.” Kushina proposed.

“That will definitely help with teaching him to use his power later. Since we’re dealing with a child whose power rivals if not far surpasses any jinchūriki’s, we need to handle this with the utmost care and caution.” Rasa explained.

“All in favor of raising the boy in a civil and polite manner?” Zassō called out.

All five hands were raised to the motion. While the other four were surprised by the quick turnaround from Yagura, they were not complaining. However, their surprise did not go unnoticed by the Fourth Mizukage.

“What? I know when I’ve lost an argument. Besides, the boy will need to have a proper upbringing and emotional control when the time comes to turn him loose on the enemies of humanity.” Yagura said curtly.

“That is refreshingly insightful from you, Mizukage.” Ōnoki replied.

“I believe it would be wisest for Konoha to raise the boy. Not only did they discover him, but any form of relocation would probably cause undesirable consequences for the host village.” A proposed, getting nods and murmurs from all present.

“Not to mention that, with a female jinchūriki, a female former jinchūriki, and a jinchūriki his own age around, they would be able to connect with him and help him eventually control his volatile powers.” Yagura commented, surprising Kushina with his words.

“How could you tell that my son is one too?” Kushina asked, narrowing her eyes suspiciously.

“Did you forget that our Tailed Beasts can sense each other within hosts? Though it is curious how the Three Tails is sensing two Nine Tails.” Yagura explained.

“Would you care to find out?” Kushina asked, with venom leaking through in her tone.

“I would rather not at the moment.” Yagura simply replied.

“I propose a motion to have Kumori raised and trained in the Hidden Leaf Village.” Kushina said to their host.

“All in favor, raise your hands.” Zassō called out.

All five hands were raised in unison, causing everyone in the Konoha camp to sigh in relief. Kumori raised his hand excitedly as well, getting some giggles from across the room.

“The motion is passed. We will also need to bring the other minor nations into a further discussion on this greater threat. For, if it is a threat to all of us, then we will need every shinobi in the region to potentially stop it.” Zassō said with concern.

“All in due time.” Kushina calmly replied.

As the Five Kage and their entourages stood up and began to mingle, Yagura slipped out to a nearby alleyway. Once in private, he turned to look at a shadowy patch deeper in the alley. As a man with a cloak, a mask, and a sickly green lizard tattoo walked out.

“You're late. Report.” Madara said with Yagura feeling his scowl behind the mask.

“The other Kage wanted to meet about a mysterious child the Leaf’s Hokage and his friends discovered within the Mountain of Death. Inside, the children discovered not only the child, but a lost civilization still alive within the mountain in some kind of state of suspended animation. Supposedly, this child is to help decide the fate of our entire world against incoming threats to humanity.” Yagura coldly and robotically explained.

“... Then it appears plans will have to change, then.” Madara growled, clenching his fist in frustration

“Do you want me to keep a close eye on the child so that he can be bent to your will…?” the Fourth Mizukage robotically asked.

“The child is a distraction. Focus on getting inside that mountain.” Madara replied dismissively, cutting him off.

“As you command, Lord Madara…” Yagura robotically told him before leaving to slip back into the meeting hall.

“Let them have the boy. Whereas they play with the scraps, I will make off with their hoard. And then true power will be at my command to enforce peace.” Madara chuckled, as the lizard tattoo scurried up his arm to his shoulder, nodding in agreement.

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

Bolded Italicized is used for descriptive actions.

Italicized is used for internal thoughts/flashbacks.

Bold is for emphasis.

“Underlined Bold” is for dialogue/internal thoughts concerning otherworldly beings.

Two great doors opened up to reveal a large room before Killer Bee and his charges. Mats were laid upon the cold stone floors and toys were strewn about in a haphazard fashion. Annoyance stretched across Killer Bee’s face at this level of sloppy haste. However, as he tried to set things up in a more proper fashion, he was nearly run over by the mass of children behind him. To the kids, it was clear that merely having toys and a place to play was enough.

“Alright, guys. What should we do?” Naruto asked, frantically looking around the room.

“I vote we have a tea party…” Hinata piped up a bit louder than usual.

“Right, you don’t get to vote, Hinata.” Sasuke rudely cut her off.

“Hey! You can’t talk to Hinata like that, Duck Butt!” Naruto snapped out.

“Yeah! Only I get to talk to Hinata like that!” Enten called up.

“Shut it whiskers, or I’m gonna quack all over your butt!” Sasuke shot back.

A redheaded boy with dark circles around his eyes clad in Hidden Sand Village attire, a bit nervous, looked at the other children. “Are they always like this…?” He shyly asked them.

“No. Usually, they’re tumbling around. This is an improvement.” Chōji answered.

“I’ll make you eat those words, Duck Boy!” Naruto roared before leaping upon Sasuke like a wild animal while the Hidden Sand Trio looked on in shock.

“... This is an improvement?” A sandy blonde-haired girl, the only girl amongst the Hidden Sand trio, asked in disbelief.

“... Never mind.” Chōji sighed.

“Huh. Thirty seconds. New record. It usually takes them a minute.” Seikoku said with a grin.

“... Maybe they should try taking longer?” Shinkoku asked his brother in disbelief.

“Nah. This is pretty fun.” the dark brown-haired boy among the Hidden Sand trio chuckled.

“Sweet New Years! Kids, don’t fight! My brother's wrath gives me a fright!” Killer Bee yelled, rushing to break the fight up.

Swiftly Killer Bee grabbed the two by the back of their shirts and forced them apart. Yet even this sudden use of force was not enough to stop them. Both boys fought against their restraints, trying to get back to grips with the other. 

“Fight, Fight, Fight!” Enten and the dark brown-haired boy chanted in unison.

“Oh, for the love of…” the sandy blonde-haired girl groaned out before walking over as Bee set them down, trying to keep the boys separated.

Walking over with fists clenched, the girl then slammed her fists into the boys’ thick skulls. A thunderous crack rippled through the massive room. The two hit the floor mats hard, landing directly on their faces. Leaving everyone stunned after such a blunt act of violence.

“A-Are t-they dead…?” Hinata nervously asked.

“Argh… that hurt…” Sasuke groaned, holding the back of his head.

“Are you two going to behave now?” the sandy blonde growled.

“Yes…” Naruto and Sasuke groaned, nursing their new lumps.

“Good. My name is Temari, by the way. The kid with the dark brown hair is my little brother Kankuro…” the now identified Temari said, introducing herself and one of the two boys.

“It’s only by a year and you know it, Temari!” Kankuro piped up indignantly.

“Did I ask?” Temari asked pointedly.

“Stupid older sisters…” Kankuro grumbled.

“And the redhead over there is Gaara, our little brother. Say hi, Gaara.” Temari continued, motioning over said redhead.

“H-Hi, Gaara…” the now indicated Gaara said nervously, hiding behind Kankuro.

“By the gods, they're multiplying…” Enten groaned.

“Not bad, little girl. Being an adult, I couldn’t give that a whirl.” Bee told Temari, giving her a thumbs up.

“Don’t give her that. Her head’s big enough as is.” Kankuro grumbled.

“What was that, Kankuro?” Temari pointedly asked.

“Nothing!” Kankuro answered rather quickly.

“Good. Now Gaara, step out from behind Kankuro and say hi.” Temari told her little brother.

A soft gulp left the boy as he stepped from behind his brother, “H-hello,” he said, holding his left arm, rubbing it nervously.

“I’m Naruto. Nice to meetcha, Gaara.” Naruto told the redheaded boy from the Hidden Sand, a small smile on his face in an attempt to try to reassure him.

Before Gaara could speak, the low creek of the doors opening shut the awkward boy up. Several Leaf shinobi walked in carrying Kumori, who immediately got extremely excited at seeing his friends. However, his strange appearance soon caught the Sand Trio’s eye as Naruto rushed over to get him.

“Hey there, Kumori. How was the meeting?” Naruto asked the baby.

“Nah! Nah!” Kumori excitedly said, trying to say Naruto’s name.

Sasuke rolled his eyes. “Looks like he had fun.” he said, shrugging his shoulders.

“Why does the baby have horns?” Kankuro bluntly asked.

“He’s what’s known as a nytha… nytharal…” Naruto started to say before stumbling over the still unfamiliar word.

“N-Nythralian, Naruto-kun…” Hinata reminded him.

“Yeah, that. Thanks, Hinata.” Naruto said before giving his shy friend a smile.

“Bring him closer, Naruto!” Enten said enthusiastically.

Naruto swiftly walked back to the group with Kumori in tow. Swiftly, Kumori became cagier upon seeing the Sand Trio and Killer Bee. This got Sasuke and the triplets nervous as Seikoku produced a bell to distract him.

“Please don’t be scared, little tyke. It’s the man himself, Killer Bee, on the mic.” Bee said to the baby after kneeling down to introduce himself.

“He doesn’t like microphones.” Shinkoku replied nervously.

“Or loud noises.” Seikoku added.

“My bad, little man. I’ll stay as quiet as I can.” Bee reassured, before gently patting Kumori on the head.

Kumori stares back at the large man with a wide-eyed stare. Then after a few claps of his hands, he finally responded.

“Ah Ah.” Kumori said chipperly.

As if he understood what the baby was saying, Bee shook his head. “Sorry, tyke, but that’s my brother. I’m Bee and none other.” he told the little guy.

“Try Bee, Kumori. Bee.” Naruto instructed.

“Beh Beh.” Kumori answered.

“Close enough. You’re a baby, so it’s still tough.” Bee said with a smile, gently patting Kumori’s head.

“It's just a letter.” Sasuke said with a shrug.

“Not quite, ya’ little camel. It’s B-E-E, like the animal.” Bee explained.

“... Why’d you call him a camel?” Kei asked, confused.

Bee just shrugged. “Closest rhyme I had at the time.” he replied simply.

“Can we play now or something?” Kankuro groaned impatiently.

“Sure! But where should we start?” Naruto piped up.

“I got an idea that won’t make you bawk. To decide, play some scissors, paper, and rock.” Bee told the kids.

“Okay, now you're just forcing it.” Temari told Bee.

“But that is a good idea.” Kankuro noted with a smile.

Kumori giggled and clapped his hands at the idea. Yet, to the surprise of everyone, Gaara began to walk up to the baby to prepare for Rock, Paper, Scissors. 

“He’s a baby, Gaara. He can’t do Rock, Paper, Scissors.” Temari said, breaking the news to the redhead.

“Oh…” Gaara said dejectedly.

“I’ll play it with you, Gaara. My name’s Naruto, by the way.” Naruto told the redhead with a smile.

A shaky smile made its way onto the boy’s face. “T-thank you. H-how do we play?” 

“Oh, that’s easy. You call out ‘Rock, Paper, Scissors’ at the same time, then put your hand out together in either a closed fist for Rock, a spread open hand for Paper, or two fingers out for Scissors.” Naruto explained before showing Gaara the hand positions. “Rock beats Scissors because it crushes Scissors, Scissors beats Paper because Scissors cut Paper, and Paper beats Rock because Paper covers Rock.”

“Rah. Pah. Ah.” Kumori said, copying Naruto’s hand motions.

Gaara didn’t say anything, instead blinking and standing still in silence.

“... Maybe we should show him how to do it. Ready, Sasuke?” Naruto replied before looking at his Uchiha friend.

“Sure. I’m always up for kicking your butt.” Sasuke replied with a small smirk.

With that, the two pulled back their hands, one cupped over the other. “Rock, Paper, Scissors, shoot!” the two said, both accidentally picking Rock. “Tie, go again!” they said before going again, this time getting Paper. “Tie, go again!” Scissors this time. “Tie, go again!” Paper.

“.. So, this is how you play.” Gaara said smiling. A loud cry of “Pah!” caused him to glance at Kumori. Shrugging his shoulders, Gaara walked over to the baby and timidly called out “R-rock, Paper, Scissors,” only for both of their hands to land on “rock.”

“Tie, go again.” Gaara said with a small smile.

Kumori gurgled as they went again. Both of them ended up using rock again. The following round, however, was drastically different. Kumori played rock while Gaara played paper. However, as Gaara opened his hand to play paper, he smacked Kumori in the nose. Slowly Kumori began to cry from that, which made many present begin to panic.

“O-oh no, don’t cry!” Gaara said frantically, trying not to cry himself.

“Where are the keys!?” Seikoku cried out, frantically running about looking for them.

“Why do you need keys?” Kankuro asked with a raised eyebrow.

The young sand boy’s answer soon came. High above them, the screws on one of the light fixtures began to give way. Soon, they could no longer hold on and the fixture plummeted down onto Kankuro’s head. Temari and Killer Bee rushed to get it off the boy as Kankuro rubbed his now very sore head.

“Oh… that's why… ow…” he groaned.

Soon, however, everyone heard Kumori sniffle before he started giggling up a storm at Kankuro’s misery. To the Sand boy’s shock, as soon as Kumori began giggling, the pain began to go away. Temari, however, turned her attention to Gaara.

“Gaara. What have we told you about hitting people?” Temari sternly asked.

“I’m sorry! I thought it was part of the game.” Gaara answered his sister.

“At least he stopped crying.” Sasuke sighed in relief.

“Guys! I found some keys!” Seikoku yelled, rushing up to them and began shaking them in front of Kumori.

“Goooo…” Kumori gurgled, enthralled by the sights and sounds.

“Oooooh…” Gaara and Naruto said in awe as they stared at the keys too.

“... Why didn’t we think of that? Would’ve really helped calm Gaara down a lot sooner.” Kankuro sighed in frustration.

“Because we have self-dignity. They clearly don’t.” Temari replied.

“Who needs self-dignity when we have a calm little brother?” Kankuro asked.

“Why do you need to keep him calm?” Hinata asked.

“Seems calm to me.” Enten chipped in, looking at the now heavily distracted Gaara.

“It’s a long story. One we really don’t wanna talk about.” Temari told the Hyūga twins.

“Hey, Sei. Stop jingling the keys long enough so we can teach Gaara how to hold the baby.” Kei ordered.

“Okay, Kei.” Seikoku told his brother, stopping the jingling.

“Awww, I… I liked the keys,” Gaara said sadly.

“Me too, Gaara… me too…” Naruto replied just as sadly.

“We can jingle the keys more for you guys later. Gaara, it’s time to learn to hold a baby.” Kei said before taking Kumori into his arms and walking over with him.

Gaara gently took the offered baby, biting his lip nervously, an unsure expression on his face. Seeing this, Kei gave him a smile. “Don’t worry, Gaara. It’s easy. Just do what I tell you to, okay?” he explained to the red-haired boy.

Gaara did not say anything, instead he just stood completely still, his eyes alight with curiosity as Kei began to explain what to do. 

“First make your arms into a cradle under Kumori.” Kei explained, gently making his arm into a cradle shape as Gaara followed his instructions. “Good, now put one hand under his head to support him.”

“... The baby needs money?” Gaara asked in confusion.

Seikoku chuckled. “No, he means support his head. Like hold it up gently.” he told the redheaded boy as Kei nodded and did the position, Gaara following his movements.

Gaara smiled softly as he held the baby. “Oh!” he cried before a look of concentration took form on his face and, as it did, small puffs of sand started to float above both of them. Temari and Kankuro looked on nervously before sighing in relief as the sand started making shapes above them as the baby looked on. First a circle, then a triangle, then a square. All as Bee and the kids from the Hidden Leaf looked on in awe.

“Whoaaaaaaa! How did Gaara do that!?” Naruto asked in awe.

“He… takes after our dad…” Kankuro nervously said.

“Your dad can wobble sand!?” Naruto yelled in shock.

“... Never heard it like that before. But yes.” Temari answered.

“And I thought Gaara wasn’t bright.” Kankuro mumbled before being bonked by Temari. “OW!”

Kumori giggled and tried to grab the sand. Soon, he managed to grab enough and put it in his mouth. However, he made a face and quickly spat it out as the now wet sand floated up to join the rest of it. “Icky!” baby Kumori said in disgust.

“Okay. Who's got the bottle?” Sasuke asked in annoyance.

“I’ll go look.” Naruto said.

“We will too.” Enten said, grabbing Hinata by her sleeve.

“R-Right.” Hinata answered with a nod.

As the trio rushed off to find Kumori’s bottle, the doors opened again. This time several Sand Shinobi walked in, before the Kazekage Rasa walked in. Next to him stood a turban wearing blonde shinobi with soft facial features. The two men were shocked to see Gaara using his sand to make shapes for Kumori.

“What is going on here?” Rasa asked concernedly.

Gaara flinched and stopped making shapes, the sand falling to the ground as he looked at Rasa. “F… father…” he nervously uttered as Kumori teared up.

“N-Nothing! Gaara was just using his sand to make shapes for the baby!” Temari told him, coming to her little brother’s defense.

“Eh. Eh.” Kumori grumbled, confused where the pretty sand shapes went.

“Lord Gaara was… making shapes? He was controlling his sand without hurting anyone…?” the soft-faced man asked in surprise.

“Hey, Gaara. You might want to start doing the shapes again before Kumori starts crying.” Sasuke said.

“R-Right…” Gaara said before starting to use his sand to make shapes again, much to Kumori’s joy as he began to giggle.

“I don’t believe it…” Rasa said in disbelief as he watched on.

Meanwhile, the soft-featured man smiled as he walked over and looked at the redheaded sand wielder. “You’re doing wonderfully, Gaara-sama.” He told the boy with pride in his voice.

Gaara looked up at the man and smiled shyly but proudly. “Th-thank you, Yashamaru…”

“Did uncle just compliment Gaara?” Kankuro whispered to Temari.

“I think he did. This’ll be good for Gaara…” Temari said with a smile.

As Gaara continued to entertain Kumori, Rasa stood there observing it. A smile began to slowly stretch across his lips seeing his son so elegantly and calmly wield the sand. It was rare to see someone be so talented with it so young. Talent that should not go to waste…

To Be Continued…

Chapter Text

“Place your best, people! Place your bets! Who’s gonna win? Sannin or King!?” A man called out from atop a box, as villagers flocked to place their bets on the upcoming fight.

In the weeks preceding the anticipated fight of Jiraiya and Oda, the village had become alive with activity. Every shop, restaurant, street vendor, and even normal locals set up booths of all kinds. Food and drink flowed, trinkets were made and sold, and merry was made in the streets as the village was caught in a frenzy. Even the shinobi were not immune to this fever, as many in their off time partook in these various new shops and ventures. However, they were not the only ones at work.

All around the village, various strange booths and stalls were set up by the Seaheartians. Some sold food, of far more ancient and exotic recipes than what people were used to. Some put on shows, using either parlor tricks or even minor magics to make a spectacle. Others set up whole mobile forges to make things on commission. While the shinobi were suspicious and stayed away from these strange newcomers, the people flocked to them in droves. Civilians never did get much excitement in their lives, something the Shinobi worked tirelessly to keep.

As this went on, Naruto led the Hyūga sisters, Sasuke, and the triplets through the main street. All around them were the largest and most impressive stalls, most of which being the Seaheartians. The air was filled with the smell of exotic spices, smoke from forges, and excitement. It gripped Naruto with the biggest grin any of his friends had seen in a long time.

“Come on, guys! We need to get to Ichiraku Ramen before the match!” Naruto yelled, trying to get his friends to move at a faster pace.

“Hold on, idiot. The ramen’s not going anywhere.” Sasuke called out.

“Yes, it is! Two days in a row they were fully out of stock before I even got there! I will not be denied for a third time!” Naruto shot back, before grabbing Hinata and Enten by the wrists and pulling them along.

“N-Naruto, relax!” Enten told her friend, a blush dusting her cheeks.

“I will relax when you two slow pokes get moving! Clock’s a ticking!” Naruto firmly answered her, practically dragging them along at the rate he was going.

“N-Naruto-kun…” Hinata stuttered out, blushing even more than her sister.

“How is it that he hasn’t figured it out yet?” Shinkoku asked.

“I have no idea…” Seikoku sighed, shaking his head.

“I have an answer, but no one wants to accept it.” Sasuke said with a know-it-all tone.

“Shut it, Duck! We need to keep up!” Kei snapped at his Uchiha friend.

“Can it, short stack.” Sasuke growled as he brought up the rear.

However, as the trailing four finally caught up, they found Naruto on his knees despondent. The girls were trying to calm him down, but it was no use. Turning to look at the fabled ramen restaurant, it was stuffed to the gills with people. With throngs waiting their turn. This caused Naruto a most… enthusiastic response.

“Why, gods!? Why have you forsaken me!?” Naruto cried to the heavens, throwing his arms into the air.

“There, there, Naruto-kun…” Hinata said, patting him gently on his shoulder sympathetically.

“There’s always tomorrow…” Enten said before Naruto cut her off.

“There will not be a tomorrow! There will not even be a today! My life is ruined!!” Naruto cried out despondently. “Now I’ll never get the special event Ramen bowl!!!”

“Don’t be so sure, Naruto!” A voice feminine called out to the blonde little boy.

Naruto looked down to where the voice was coming from. Poking out of one of the side doors was the owner’s daughter Ayame, with her eyes covered by a chef’s hat that was too big for her head. In one hand, she had a bowl of exactly the event ramen. The distinct smell of fried chicken gave that away. She then motioned with her other hand for him to come over.

Naruto immediately ran over with the speed of an arrow in flight, looking at the bowl with wide, bright-eyed joy. “You set aside some for me!?” Naruto asked in disbelieving delight.

Ayame smiled as Naruto looked it over. “You bet. One Sagely King Supreme. A large bowl of garlic fried chicken ramen with turtle soup broth.”

“Who in their right mind would eat that?” Sasuke asked dismissively.

“Silence, heathen!” Naruto shouted before bowing politely to accept the bowl.

“Kei. Ayame-chan’s here. Now’s your chance!” Seikoku whispered to his brother, elbowing him.

Kei blushed. “A-Ayame-chan’s here…? H-how’s my hair!? Do I have anything in my teeth…!?” he frantically asked, fussing over his appearance. 

“Sei, how many times do I have to tell you? He’s hopeless.” Shinkoku sighed.

“That’s because you don’t believe in him like a good brother should. Have at ‘em, slugger!” Seikoku said chipperly before pushing Kei forward.

Taking a deep breath, Kei smiled his brightest smile and walked over. “H-Hi, Ayame-chan. You look great today. New chef’s hat?” he asked the older girl, clearly nervous.

“Thank you for noticing it, Kei. Unfortunately, it doesn’t want to stay up.” She replied as she moved it up off her eyes.

“I-I like it. It compliments your eyes and hair…” the Kamishini lad nervously said, complimenting her.

“That was delicious!” Naruto yelled after wolfing down his ramen. “Hang on, let me get my wallet.”

“It’s on the house today, Naruto. Your godfather’s competing today for the glory of the village and to test the King of Seaheart.” Ayame told him with a smile before turning to Kei again. “Do you want some too, Kei? I came up with this new recipe myself.”

“You are a natural at this, Ayame-chan!” Naruto yelled chipperly as he handed back the bowl.

“I take it you want another round, Naruto?” Ayame asked with a smile.

“You bet!” Naruto replied with a smile.

“I-I’ll take one too, please…!” Kei nervously piped up.

“Of course. I can have them delivered. Don’t want to make you late for the fight.” Ayame answered with a warm smile.

“You are a saint of the kitchen gods, Ayame-chan!” Naruto told her joyfully as he and his friends headed for the stadium.

“Good thing Naruto is dense, huh sis?” Enten whispered to Hinata.

“H-He’s not that dense, Enten! Kei is just being more subtle about his crush!” Hinata quietly insisted.

“And you are too innocent for your own good.” Enten said as she patted her head.

“Enjoy the match, everyone! And Kei, please stop by and let me know what you think of the recipe afterwards!” Ayame told them as the younger children headed off.

“O-Of course!” Kei answered her as he rushed off with his friends.

“Good job, bro.” Seikoku said with a smile, giving him a punch on the shoulder.

“I did do pretty good, didn’t I…?” Kei asked with a smile.

“Yeah. You were actually able to hold a conversation with her this time without hiding behind something.” Shinkoku teasingly replied.

“Moving on from Kei’s attempt at romance, who do you all think will win?” Sasuke asked, rolling his eyes at his friend's antics.

Kei glared at Sasuke before taking a deep breath. “I have no idea. Honestly, this match could go either way.” he replied, unsure of who would win.

“There’s no way Grandpa Pervy Sage loses!” Naruto snapped, shocking the rest of them with his level of fervency.

“I dunno, Naruto. The King of Seaheart’s pretty powerful.” Seikoku replied.

“He’ll win! Nobody’s stronger than him!” Naruto firmly insisted.

“What about against Lord Third?” Sasuke asked, raising a skeptical eyebrow.

“You know the old man’s past his prime! He may still be strong, but Grandpa Pervy Sage can take him!” Naruto insisted, fully confident in his godfather/surrogate grandfather’s strength.

Meanwhile, At the Stadium: In the Home Team Tunnel

“I’m beginning to have my doubts about this. Orochimaru, have you found out anything about this guy?” Jiraiya asked as he stared out into the empty arena.

“Unfortunately, no, Jiraiya. The people of Seaheart are being surprisingly tightly lipped. All I know is that he is a master of this ‘magic’ they speak of. That and the fact that the Kamishini say that magic is even stronger than their Divine Chakra.” Orochimaru informed his old friend, a look of curiosity on his face at these facts.

“I’ve never known you to be this nervous Jiraiya. Are you feeling okay?” Tsunade asked, crossing her hands with worry.

“I’m fine, Tsunade. As a spymaster, I just don’t like going into a fight blind.” Jiraiya told her.

“I suppose that explains why the Toad Sage is a bit ‘jumpy’ today.” Orochimaru said with a knowing smile, causing a groan from Jiraiya.

“How about this for motivation, you old fool: If you win, I’ll finally take you up on that offer for a date.” Tsunade told her old friend, trying to motivate him.

This made Jiraiya’s eyes widen and he slowly turned to look at her. “Are you serious?” He asked.

“As serious as a shark attack in the Land of Water, Jiraiya. I’ve got a thousand Ryo riding on you for this match.” Tsunade told him.

“That doesn’t sound that encouraging…” Orochimaru muttered, getting a glare out of Tsunade.

Tsunade shrugged. “I have so much confidence in his skills that I’m willing to risk my bad gambling luck to make this bet. I’ll even add in flashing him the girls if he wins if it’ll help motivate him more.” she replied simply.

This got Jiraiya to smile his signature wide grin. With a prize to fight for, he stared back into the empty arena, determined to make this the fight of his life.

Meanwhile: In the Away Team Tunnel

King Oda cracked his neck as he limbered himself up for the match. Duan and Sato stood behind him. What stood out to them was the fact that their older brother had eschewed his armor, only bearing his shield and gauntlets. Instead, he wore free flowing robes of emerald-green with platinum stitching’s.

“Even in the most important fight of your life, you’re still flaunting your best robes?” Sato asked in confusion.

“Our brother dresses for success at all times. At least he will look good for a potential funeral.” Duan replied with a smile.

“I appreciate your support so much, Duan.” King Oda sarcastically replied.

“Anything for you, dearest brother.” Duan answered with a bow.

“Why aren’t you wearing your armor?” Sato asked, rolling his eyes at his vampiric brother's antics.

“These shinobi thrive on highly mobile combat. All my armor will do in this battle is slow me down and keep me from landing a blow. Dressing for speed, rather than defense, would be the better course of action. And, since we do not know enough about these shinobi in terms of their abilities to gauge the Toad Sage’s strength, compared to myself or even other shinobi, I’ll need every advantage I can get.” King Oda explained to his brothers.

“May the fortunes guide you to victory, brother.” Sato said with a bow.

“Give it your all, brother.” Duan said with a warm smile.

“Thank you. All right, here I go…” King Oda said before taking a deep breath.

“Hey, Hey, all you in Kono-ha!!!” A loud, energetic voice came from over the speakers. “Who’s ready to get this party started!!?”

The crowd roared with excitement as the voice continued. “Today, we got the exhibition of the century! Two titans ready to bash, smash, and crash their way into our hearts and minds! To start, the Hometown Hero, the Titan of Toads, the Savior of the Hot Spring Mania, Lord Jiraiya of the Sannin!!!!” the voice shot out, causing an eruption of cheers to come from the audience.

A puff of smoke appeared from the entrance of the hometown tunnel, as Jiraiya appeared, taking his customary broad stance. Fanning his arms, he began to pump up the crowd. From there he let out a grand proclamation. 

“Thanks for the introduction, Pop Lee! People of Konoha and foreigners of all ages, prepare yourselves! Before you stands the one and only Mighty Toad Sage of the Hidden Leaf! The wise and whimsical man whose great feats make the ladies swoon and silences crying infants! Stand and present yourselves before my awesomeness!” Jiraiya called out, leaping up and clapping his wooden geta together twice before landing on his feet and whipping his hair around.

The crowds cheering soon peaked into a deafening cacophony. “He’s fired up and raring to go! I haven’t seen this much fire since my ex-wife left me! And in the other corner, awoken from a thousand-year beauty nap! The Champion of the Heavens, the Lord of Dragons, the Militia King himself, King Oda Shang!!!!” Pop Lee belted out.

“How do I do this?!” King Oda whispered harshly to his brothers.

“Make a big show of it! Just leap out there, slam your shield into the ground, and land on one knee!” Duan told him.

With a nod Oda made a mighty leap, barely avoiding hitting his head on the keystone of the tunnel entrance. Turning it into a forward backflip, he then threw his shield into the ground. Then, intentionally making himself denser with iron runes in his legs, he slammed down hard into the ground, cratering it on impact while impressively landing impressively on one knee. The crowd roared with approval at the entrance, whipped into a frenzy by the titanic display.

“Lords and ladies of Konoha! It is a great honor for me to be in front of you today, and the honor of this wonderful opportunity! Regardless of the outcome here today, I will ensure that this match will be one for the ages! A true testament to our peoples, and a token of gratitude to our honored ancestors!” King Oda proclaimed.

The crowd roared with cheers, their feet stomping in a ground-shaking cacophony as the spectacle of it all lit a fire in them all. Soon the ref arrived, who Jiraiya recognized as the main referee of the Chūnin Exams Gekkō Hayate. The Jonin looked between the two contestants before looking up at the Hokage box. Inside was every single important member of the village, and the visiting Kage. Kushina, sitting holding a sleeping Kumori, gave him a nod.

He soon raised a white flag. “Begin the match!” Hayate yelled out, dropping the flag, followed by a loud gong.

“Before we begin, I want you to know something, your majesty. I hold you no ill will while participating in this match. I just want to make sure that you and your people will be more than capable of pulling your weight against the coming threats.” Jiraiya explained, a serious look on his face.

“It is refreshing to see someone with no animus in their heart. For that, I thank you. And you will not have to worry about me or my people. We have stood as the bulwark of the world. We will stand again in that role if needed.” King Oda replied, his face turning into a stony mask.

“That’s good to know. But the Five Great Nations along with the Uzumaki, Kamishini, and Seaheart alone probably won’t be enough to deal with the threats looming over the horizon. Am I mistaken?” Jiraiya replied, raising his eyebrow.

“Perhaps we should give the people what they came here for. So, can I show you and them what their ancestors have forgotten?” King Oda asked, before giving a small smirk.

“True. They say that some people can only communicate with their fists. Let’s show them that swinging your fist with no hate in your heart can allow you to understand each other and, therefore, overcome hatred. Shall we, your majesty?” Jiraiya replied, dropping into a ready stance with a smile on his face.

This got a chuckle out of the ancient king. “Nothing would please me more.” He replied, before dropping into his own stance.

Jiraiya then clasped his hands together in the Ram seal, his index and middle fingers pointed up. Soon, as he began to concentrate, a massive amount of white-colored chakra burst from him, burning like a flame from a miniature sun. The air pressure coming off his chakra created a powerful wind that whipped the trees in the ring like a hurricane. With a roar, Jiraiya began to concentrate on his chakra as the pressure coming off him shook and cracked the ground.

King Oda gently closed his eyes before letting out a deep breath. His robes began to flutter as if a breeze had hit them. Underneath the thin silks came a shimmering a myriad of runes, which began to hum with a low rumbling. Around him as the air pressure began to pick up, the people noticed that the arena began to shimmer slightly. As if something otherworldly had begun to enter the arena before them.

As the two opposing air pressures from the different energies clashed, the ground shook, rattled, and cracked between Sage and King. The ground, the trees, even the very air itself seemed to tremble. Whether in fear, anticipation, or excitement, no one could tell. Finally, the two titans charged at each other at high speed, the ground cracking beneath Jiraiya’s swift footsteps while Oda’s seemed to glide along the dirt and grass.

The two met in the middle, Oda catching Jiraiya’s punch before throwing one of his own with his other hand. Jiraiya caught the blow as the two locked horns in a test of strength, pushing back against each other. The ground shook, trembled, and cracked as the sagely and mystic bulls before the crowd pushed against each other’s strength, trying to find an opening. Separating, Oda threw a right cross that Jiraiya pushed aside before going for a haymaker only for it to be caught. Following up, Jiraiya swung his leg up to roundhouse kick Oda in the side of his head, forcing the King of Seaheart to drop Jiraiya’s hand and put his arm up while bracing it with his other hand to block the blow.

The force of the blow sent Oda tumbling aside, forcing him to roll to his feet. As soon as he did, Jiraiya attempted to hit him with a heel drop kick that Oda slid aside to dodge, the force of the kick cracking the ground beneath them. Jumping forward, Oda performed a bicycle kick that Jiraiya put his guard up to block, forcing the mighty Toad Sage back. Stopping for a moment, the two shook their tingling arms to shake off the slight numbness from the force of their opponent’s respective blows.

“As expected of a student of the toads. You wield impressive strength.” King Oda said with a smile.

“As do you, your majesty. My arm is still tingling from the force of that kick.” Jiraiya replied with a smile of his own.

Their faces then turned serious as they dashed in, getting back into the fray. As the two broke off to begin another clash, Kumori began to stir in Kushina’s arms. Sitting up in her lap with a big yawn, his eyes then looked upon the fight. Instantly, everyone in the room noticed a difference in the baby. His eyes shone as he became enthralled by the contest of strength and was far more attentive than any baby normally would be. Kushina poked his cheek, yet he bore no reaction from it. She turned her gaze back to the fight, as things began to heat up.

At that moment, Jiraiya blocked a punch from King Oda before trying to counterattack with a palm strike. King Oda blocked before going for a Fak Sau sideways hand chop to Jiraiya’s throat. Jiraiya blocked the chop before blocking a high-speed barrage of them from the King of Seaheart. Jiraiya then brought his foot up to block a kick before landing his own Fak Sau to King Oda’s carotid artery, causing him to yell out before redirecting his gaze at the Toad Sage. However, this momentary surprise left him open to a mawashi giri kick from Jiraiya that sent him flying back, skipping across the ground like a stone along the surface of a river with his body cratering the ground with each impact.

Recovering, the King of Seaheart dashed in, going for a right cross that Jiraiya managed to block. Oda then followed up with a left jab, right jab, and left hook that were all blocked and deflected before he managed to fake a right jab before landing a left hook to Jiraiya’s jaw. Dazed, Jiraiya was unprepared for Oda’s follow up palm strike to his solar plexus before Oda dropped forward. Using the momentum, he swung his leg up and hit Jiraiya with an upward roundhouse kick to the head that sent the Toad Sage skidding back.

Shaking his head, Jiraiya smirked before cracking his neck and spitting out a little bit of blood. “Not bad, your majesty. I’m impressed.” The Toad Sage commented, genuinely surprised and pleased with his opponent’s skill level.

“I concur. Though I think now we can dispense with the warmup.” King Oda answered with an accompanying nod.

Putting his hands together behind his back, Jiraiya lifted them up to stretch his arms out. “Agreed. Shall we get started with the main event?” he asked with a smile.

“That was a warmup!?” Came from a random person in the crowd.

The rest of the crowd was in disbelief. If this level of skill and strength was from a mere warm up… then what were they about to see?

Going through hand seals, Jiraiya took a deep breath before building up chakra-infused oil in his mouth. ‘Fire Release: Flame Bullet!’ He mentally called out before unleashing a large ball of fire from his mouth.

Counter to this, King Oda’s spine began to light up a bright orange, the runes activating in kind. “Lore of Fire: Dragon’s Breath!” King Oda commanded, before a great gout of fire came from his mouth.

The two bursts of flame collided with a blast of power before exploding on contact. The air pressure from the blast was like a bomb going off as the crowd could almost feel the heat from the fire. Looking on, Jiraiya and King Oda smiled as Jiraiya made a single hand seal.

“Wild Lion’s Mane Jutsu!” Jiraiya called out as his hair seemed to grow and come alive.

As Jiraiya’s hair lengthened and hardened, the end took the shape of a lion’s gaping maw. Whipping it at his foe, Jiraiya lashed out with his hair as the lion’s jaw-shaped hair tried to bite down on King Oda. Dodging, the King of Seaheart barely managed to avoid being bitten down on as the mouth-like hair slammed into the ground, crunching down on stone. Lifting up, it had a large chunk of rock from the ground in its “mouth” before the lion’s maw-like follicles bit down, crushing the stone into gravel.

‘Don’t get caught in those jaws then…’ King Oda thought, as he worked to find a way to counter it.

Jumping, he dodged another strike from the jaws of the lion-like hair. Again and again, it struck like a snake, trying to wrap itself around the King of the Dragon Men. When it got too close, he made his shield spin on the gauntlet before the hair made contact. Sparks flew off where the sharpened edge slashed against the steel-hard follicles. Pushing against it, Oda managed to force the hair back, knocking it away before dashing in. As he got in close, Jiraiya did six hand seals.

“Needle Jizō!” Jiraiya called out as his hair wrapped around himself before shaping into sharpened spikes.

The razor-sharp shield ground and slashed against the hardened, sharpened hair. Cutting, but not doing any damage. Jumping back, King Oda tried to get some distance as the hair spikes extended. 

“Needle Hell!” Jiraiya yelled out as hair needles were fired off from his hair armor.

Using his shield, King Oda deflected and blocked the needles as they fired off. Seeing the barrage increasing, he was forced to use more drastic measures of defense.

“Lore of Stone: Earth Shield!” King Oda commanded, and appearing around him came brown swirling winds.

Soon the earth before him was forced up in front of him, creating a wall of stone. The needles against it either embedded themselves or bounced off its solid surface. Despite this, bit by bit, they began punching through the stone, forcing him to dodge. As soon as he did, Jiraiya was upon him in midair with a flying roundhouse kick. Putting his arms up to block, King Oda barely blocked as the kick sent him flying into the ground, cratering it on impact.

Backflipping to get to his feet, the Militia King barely avoided an axe kick that collided with the ground where he had been, cracking and cratering it further. By the time Oda looked up, Jiraiya was swiftly going through four hand seals before stopping on the Tiger seal.

‘Fire Release: Dragon Fire Jutsu!’ He mentally called out, his cheeks puffing up before he exhaled.

As soon as Jiraiya breathed out, a massive, straight line of fire like a flamethrower erupted from his mouth like a volcano. Seeing this, the King of the Dragon Men swiftly moved to counterattack.

“Lore of Stone: Create Geolith!” King Oda commanded as swirling brown energy formed around his fist, before punching the earth.

Upon making contact, the ground inside the arena began to shake and crack. Then, before everyone's eyes, a massive chunk of earth began to levitate from the ground, forming a jagged pillage. The great pillar absorbed the plume of fire, breaking it like a wave against the shore. Oda smiled as the pillar passed, so the two men could see each other.

“I have heard much of your people’s impressive terrain mobility. Perhaps you could give me a taste of that?” King Oda asked.

Jiraiya grinned a bit and cracked his knuckles. “All right, but only because you asked. Time to take this battle to the next level!” he called out before leaping back, backflipping, and sticking to a wall.

Jiraiya then used chakra to push off the wall, taking off at King Oda faster than the king expected. Barely dodging a flying kick, the Militia King found his cheek cut from the force and speed of Jiraiya’s kick as it cratered the ground beneath them. Spinning on the ball of his foot, the great sage lashed out with a sideways kick that launched King Oda backwards. Dashing forward, the mighty Toad Sage threw a straight right punch that the King of Seaheart barely managed to bring his shield up to block, bracing himself as he skidded back. The force of the blow nearly launched him further back, but the Lord of Dragons held on as the shock traveled down through his body and threatened to break the earth beneath their feet.

“Not bad. Not bad. Let us see if you can keep up!” King Oda yelled before rushing up the Geolith.

Grinning, Jiraiya ran up the great pillar after him. The two clashed at blinding speeds, their forms little more than blurs to the audience. Soon, the two broke apart as Jiraiya went through two hand seals before planting his hands on the ground.

“Earth Release: Swamp of the Underworld!” Jiraiya called out.

Soon, the entire ground beneath their feet turned into a dark, murky swamp. Jiraiya leaped up onto the pillar to avoid getting caught in it. King Oda, however, was less lucky as he got stuck, trying to get loose.

“Quicksand. I hate quicksand…” King Oda muttered, before plotting a way out.

However, his plotting was interrupted by the sound of Jiraiya’s voice. “Toad Oil Bullet!” it called out.

Looking up, King Oda was surprised to see a large gout of oil being spat out of Jiraiya’s mouth. The oil drenched him as Jiraiya began going through a set of hand seals that the King of Seaheart recognized.

‘Fire Release: Dragon Fire Jutsu!’ Jiraiya mentally called out before launching out another flamethrower-like line of flames.

“Lore of Heavens: Wings of the Celestial Crane!” King Oda called out.

Forming swirling, azure-blue energy into his back, soon shimmer wings of blue energy burst from his back. With a simple flap, he escaped his muck-filled trap and took to the sky. The crowd stared at the two combatants in awe. When the fiery tongue of death hit the oil remaining in the swamp, it combined to create a great explosion. Fire soon engulfed the floor of the arena as Oda soon flew up to Jiraiya’s level.

“Apologies for keeping you waiting, my dear sir.” King Oda said.

Jiraiya grinned a bit. “You Seaheartians really are full of surprises. Then I guess it’s time I stop holding back and go all out!” he called out before clapping his hands together, beginning to gather a massive amount of chakra.

“If that is the case, then you will face the might of the heavens!” Oda roared before closing his eyes and channeling the azure energy into himself.

Eventually, a massive explosion of smoke erupted from Jiraiya’s position. Soon, two elderly voices croaked out in reply from within the smoke.

“Jiraiya-chan? What’d ya’ summon us into this time?” An elderly male voice croaked out.

“I’m sure the lad has his reasons, Pa. Now then, what’re we up against?” An elderly female voice called out.

“Boss, ma’am. Sorry to call you both out like this again, but I can’t afford to hold back. I’m facing the king of the ancient civilization of Seaheart who wields true magic. He and his people are being evaluated to potentially join the Hidden Leaf, and I can’t afford to hold back anymore if I’m going to truly push him to his limits.” Jiraiya’s voice explained as the smoke began to clear.

When the smoke cleared, Jiraiya’s appearance was changed. His eyes had become more toad-like and the designs of the war paint around his eyes had become more elaborate and pronounced. He had a bumpy, warted nose and had grown a short beard. Fused to his shoulders sat the forms of two toads that Hiruzen, Orochimaru, and Tsunade recognized all too well.

“It is a rare day to see Sage Mode. Jiraiya must really be under pressure then.” Orochimaru said, arms crossed.

“Jiraiya’s going that far already? How powerful is this King of Seaheart…?” Tsunade asked in disbelief.

“Never underestimate a ruler fighting for the fate of his people. For Jiraiya, this is merely a test of his own capabilities. For King Oda, this is a fight for survival. I just hope that boy doesn’t push things too much farther. Then people could get hurt.” Hiruzen said with a deep sigh.

“Just in case, it might be a good idea to have the Anbu erect a powerful barrier around the inside of the ring. When Jiraiya-sama uses honored Sage Mode, he has a tough time holding back.” Kushina added, baby Kumori still in her lap.

“Boo-Boo!” Kumori called out, waving his chubby baby arms about as he did.

Kushina smiled down at the baby. “That’s right, Kumori-tan. Boom-boom. Big boom-boom.” she said before motioning to the Anbu to make their move.

“Boo-Boo! Boo-Boo!” Kumori chanted, as if want to see the said big boom-boom.

Soon, five Anbu leapt onto a part of the arena’s walls. Each put up a set of hand seals before pouring chakra into their hands as they each pulled out a talisman. Concentrating hard, each planted a talisman down in front of them. Soon, a massive, spherical barrier formed around the inside of the arena, trapping Sage and King together until the battle was finished. For even the most uninformed in the audience, this was a clear sign that this fight was getting serious.

Jiraiya then looked at his opponent. The runes on his body had lit up to the point where they were near blinding, and the wings of azure energy glistening like a starry night. His body practically radiated a swirling energy, one that felt alien to anything Jiraiya had ever felt. 

“Your power… it feels like life magic… and yet, somehow, it is not. I did not know toad Ōkami were capable of this.” King Oda said with a very confused tone.

“This, your majesty, is honored Sage Mode. By taking in nature energy from the very world itself and mixing it evenly with my own mental and physical energies that I use to make chakra, I can enter this form and use Sage Jutsu. Something on a completely different level from the normal Ninjutsu and Taijutsu you’ve seen from me up to this point.” Jiraiya explained as a serious tone to his voice despite him smiling to reveal sharpened teeth.

“I see.” King Oda said with a nod, taking everything in.

“Though, while we’re giving due praise, I have to give you credit too. Your power feels like raw nature energy. Though, somehow, it feels more uncontrolled than the nature energy I take in to use Sage Mode.” Jiraiya added with a curious look on his face as he folded his arms over his chest.

“Lad, are ya’ sayin’ this king can control raw nature energy without needin’ to mix chakra with it!?” Shima, the female Sage Toad, asked in disbelief.

“That’s impossible, Jiraiya-chan! No mortal man can achieve such a feat!” Fukasaku, the male Sage Toad, added in agreement with his wife.

“Let me give you a lesson on magic. It is folly to think you can control it. Merely one directs it.” King Oda explained.

Jiraiya then kicked off his sandals, expanded his hands and feet to become more toad-like, and crouched. “Then that means I don’t have to hold back!” the mighty Toad Sage called out before rushing in with explosive speed.

King Oda found Jiraiya upon him faster than the audience could track as part of the pillar exploded beneath his hands and feet. Quickly, the King of Seaheart blocked a punch from Jiraiya that nearly sent him sailing back, only his ethereal wings keeping him in flight. The two then disappeared to the eyes of the crowd as they took off, zipping around the ring as they clashed fists. Everywhere they clashed, shockwaves and explosions rang out as they moved at incredibly high speeds. Not even the most seasoned jōnin in the crowd could follow their movements at this point. Outside of the Raikage, even the Kage-level members of the audience could barely follow their movements at this point.

“Wh-where did they go…!?” Naruto asked, frantically looking around the arena for the two combatants.

“They’re… so fast…!” Sasuke commented in disbelief.

“Try to follow the shockwaves! That’s probably where they are!” Kei commented, trying to keep his eyes open for the explosive blasts from their colliding blows.

“This match is so close…” Enten said in awe, doing her best to keep up with the shockwaves.

“U… unbelievable…! So, this is what a Kage-level battle looks like…” Hinata commented in sheer disbelief and shock.

Soo, the two appeared and clashed their fists in a punch. The force of the colliding fists of King and Sage unleashed such power that they launched each other into the walls of the barrier, shaking the arena. Kicking off the barrier, the two continued clashing before ending up in the air above the ring as Jiraiya went through hand seals.

‘Fire Release: Big Flame Bullet!’ He mentally called out before unleashing a far more massive, Sage Jutsu enhanced version of the Flame Bullet.

Less a bullet and more a large missile of flames, Jiraiya’s Fire Release Jutsu soared at the King of the Dragon Men. Seeing this, King Oda quickly made his move to counter. Readying his shield, he soon activated a rune on it and began to make it spin on his gauntlet. Soon the massive flame bullet impacted, and to the surprise of everyone sent it back spinning, creating a swirling drill of flame.

Putting his hand out, Jiraiya created a large, swirling ball of pure chakra. “Big Ball Rasengan!” he called out as he put the ball of pure, rotating chakra forward towards the drill of flames.

Jiraiya roared as he plowed through his own reversed jutsu, the heat of the flames licking at him and his two teachers as they went right through the fiery death drill. Acting quickly, King Oda made his move to try to counter as Jiraiya got in close. Taking a deep breath, he channeled as much heavens magic as he could into his shield. The shield soon was lit brilliantly in the bright light of its many runes, as Jiraiya finally made impact.

The two attacks collided in an explosion of power as shockwaves rang out, the two struggling for dominance as they pushed against each other. The sphere of pure chakra grinded against the shield shining with magic as the two combatants tried to overcome each other. However, to the surprise of all present, the clash resulted in a massive explosion that sent a massive shockwave ringing out as both King and Sage were sent flying back, the pillar between them being destroyed by the blast as the ring shook.

“What happened!? I cannot see anything!” Lee called out over the roar of the explosion, his vision just as obscured by the blast as everyone else’s.

“That's because there was an explosion.” Death Lee answered.

“Thank you, Uncle Death!” Lee called out as he tried to look for any signs of the two combatants.

“You're welcome.” Death Lee replied.

As the smoke began to clear, the audience saw to their surprise that the two were forced into the charred swamp below. Both of them were battered, bloodied, but both unbeaten. Despite the stinging, choking smoke, the two stood there staring at each other. However, for the shinobi in the crowd, they saw Jiraiya begin to pant deeply, indicating his stamina was waning. Comparatively, while King Oda was also panting heavily, he appeared to tentatively have an advantage.

“That was close, Jiraiya-chan! If ye’ hadn’t reinforced yer body with Sage Jutsu chakra, that could’ve been a lot messier!” Fukasaku said, worried for his student.

“Ye’ can’t keep this up much longer, lad! Ye’ need te’ finish it with this last move!” Shima warned, seeing how tired Jiraiya was getting.

“You’re right. It’s time to end this…!” Jiraiya called out before putting his hand up in a similar position to before.

Soon, a swirling ball of chakra began to appear in his hand. One that continued to grow bigger… and bigger… and bigger still. Until, finally, the rotating sphere of chakra was several times the size of Jiraiya himself.

“Ultra Big Ball Rasengan!” Jiraiya called out, preparing to launch his final attack.

‘If I do not go all out, I am done for… and then my people… focus, Oda. You must use it.’ King Oda thought as he ripped off one of the amulets he wore on his neck. “Lore of Heavens: Fury of the Tailed Comet!!”

Soon the amulet, one made of simple clay with ancient unknowing runes on it, began to glow. Rapidly it began to disintegrate as immense mystical energy flowed into Oda’s hands. Soon, a glow began to manifest in the sky. To the shock of all present, a miniature meteorite made of glowing mystical energy, radiating heat and light like the sun, was falling from the sky down towards Jiraiya. Looking up, Jiraiya pulled back his Rasengan as the meteorite fell.

“Come on!” Jiraiya called out with determination.

“Jiraiya, you fool! Dodge it!” Tsunade called out in concern.

“He can’t, you fool!” Orochimaru snapped at her.

“If he dodges it, it will hit the ground and kill them both along with collapsing the ground beneath the ring. His only option is to cancel it out.” Hiruzen explained in concern.

“Boo-Boo!” Kumori screamed excitedly.

“Yes, Kumori-chan… Very big boom-boom…” Kushina replied in worry.

As the glowing space rock fell, Jiraiya thrust his massively-sized Rasengan forward. The swirling ball of Sage Jutsu chakra collided with the falling, glowing space rock as a massive shockwave rocked the stadium. The entire arena shook like a continuous earthquake as the two combatants’ attacks struggled for dominance. Jiraiya and Oda let out twin roars as they put everything they had into this one final clash. Finally, the two attacks detonated as an explosion rocked the entire arena. The force of the explosion caused the barrier to begin to buckle before, finally, it gave out. The shockwave and air pressure left over from the blast rocked the arena as everyone was forced to take cover to avoid being blown back, the shockwave of the blast echoing throughout the village.

For what felt like an eternity after the clash, the arena fell into an unnerving silence as they waited for the debris and dust to settle. Minutes felt like hours as finally it began to give a breeze helped clear out the cloud. Upon the ground in the arena lay the combatants, both of them unmoving. The Sage Toads had somehow become unfused to Jiraiya, barely conscious before poofing away. The ref stood there, unsure of what to do. He did not have to as Medical Nin rushed in to help the two. Tsunade leapt down from the Hokage’s box, just in time to see the two lift their hands up in a thumbs up.

“Jiraiya, you careless moron!!” Tsunade yelled as she shook the daylights out of the poor bastard.

“E-Easy, Tsunade…! Y-You’re gonna kill me…!” Jiraiya stammered out as she shook him.

“I might as well put you out of your misery after the heart attack you nearly gave me, you monkey’s uncle!! You will rue the day when I ever let you get over this!” Tsunade roared as she kept shaking him before finally dropping him.

“Ow…” Jiraiya exhaustedly said upon being dropped like a sack of potatoes as Tsunade began the process to heal him.

Soon murmuring began to happen in the crowd as the Anbu panted from the barrier bursting like a bubble. The Seaheartians in the audience were especially nervous, as they did not know what a tie would mean. No one knew really, as the rumor mill began to grow like a wildfire. Inside the Hokage box, everyone looked at Kushina, who was deep in thought about what had just happened.

“So, Hokage? What do we do about this?” A asked Kushina, unsure of what to make of this result.

“I concur with Unruly A on this one, Kushina. A tie means that neither one wins nor loses.” Ōnoki pointed out, deep in thought himself.

“This is unexpected. To think that this ancient King could tie with Jiraiya of all people…” Rasa noted in disbelief.

“Regardless, we need a decision now before the crowd gets restless.” Yagura noted, seeing the rumors beginning to fly about.

“A. Hold Kumori for me, okay?” Kushina asked the Raikage. 

“Hold him? Me?” A asked in disbelief.

“Don’t tell me you’re afraid of holding a baby.” Kushina said to him sarcastically as she handed the horned baby to him.

“Wh… what do I do with this…?” A asked, in unfamiliar territory, trying to hold the baby carefully.

“Just keep him from crying.” Kushina simply said.

“Goo.” Kumori said.

Kushina then stepped forwards to address the arena. “To our contestants of this great match, you honor us with your stellar performances! Never in my life had I imagined such a clash! However, due to the agreement that was made, we are left at a quandary of how to handle such a result! Therefore, I invoke the rights vested in me as a Hokage to clear up this impasse!” She boomed, as all eyes lay upon her.

Everyone, be they from Konoha or Seaheart, sat at the edge of their seats. Yet as King Oda lay there, he shut his eyes. He could not take the suspense, the fate of his people and their survival upon a single person, and a single sentence. Finally, after a pause, Kushina continued.

“Due to the stunning performance, perseverance in the face of adversity, and honor displayed by the challenger, I have come to my conclusion. From this day forth, the people of Seaheart are honored citizens of Konoha!!” Kushina proclaimed.

The entirety of Seaheart in the stands lit up in an uproar. Chanting, stomping of feet, proclaiming ‘Long live the Hokage.’ King Oda opened his eyes in shock and looked up at her in awe. Then, to everyone’s surprise, he forced himself to stand so that he could bow respectfully to her.

“Thank you, great Hokage! May your ancestors look upon your wisdom with honor!” King Oda proclaimed after he completed his bow.

Jiraiya smiled and got to his feet before gently clapping King Oda on his shoulder in congratulations. Oda gave a small smile back as the two then shook hands.

“Everyone! Give a cheer and applause for our challenger and our new brothers and sisters of Konoha!” Kushina called out, before giving a small clap.

The suggestion hit the arena like a wildfire. Soon everyone was cheering and clapping. The sudden force of the applause caught the other Kage off guard. Yet, before their eyes, the village had appeared to accept these newcomers with glee. Though time will tell if such gleeful peace would last…

To Be Continued…